FM 3-09.60 (FM 6-60)
Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) Operations
AUGUST 2008
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION. Distribution authorized to the DOD and DOD contractors only based on included procedures and technical data. This determination was made on 29 September 2005. Other requests must be referred to the Directorate of Training and Doctrine, 1210 NW Schimmelpfennig Road 167, ATTN: ATSF-DD, Fort Sill, OK 73503-9035.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online (www.us.army.mil) and General Dennis J. Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library at (www.train.army.mil).
*FM 3-09.60 (FM 6-60) Headquarters Department of the Army Washington, DC, 12 August 2008
Field Manual No. 3-09.60 (FM 6-60)
Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) Operations Contents Page
PREFACE..............................................................................................................ix Chapter 1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................................... 1-1 Section I – Introduction.................................................................................... 1-1 MLRS Employment Concept .............................................................................. 1-1 System Components .......................................................................................... 1-1 Section II – Launcher and Subsystems.......................................................... 1-3 M270 Launcher ................................................................................................... 1-3 M270A1 Launcher .............................................................................................. 1-6 M142 High Mobility Artillery Rocket System....................................................... 1-8 Section III – MLRS Family of Munitions (MFOM) ......................................... 1-14 Launch Pod ...................................................................................................... 1-14 Missile/Launch Pod Assembly Trainer ............................................................. 1-15 Rockets ............................................................................................................. 1-15 Missiles ............................................................................................................. 1-20 Section IV – Associated Equipment ............................................................. 1-26 Ammunition Resupply Vehicle and Trailer (HEMTT/HEMAT) .......................... 1-26 HIMARS Resupply Vehicle and Resupply Trailer ............................................ 1-27 Command and Control System ........................................................................ 1-30 AFATS .............................................................................................................. 1-30 Survey Equipment ............................................................................................ 1-30 Section V – Radar ........................................................................................... 1-31
Distribution Restriction: Distribution authorized to the DOD and DOD contractors only based on included procedures and technical data. This determination was made on 29 September 2005. Other requests must be referred to the Directorate of Training and Doctrine, 1210 NW Schimmelpfennig Road 167, ATTN: ATSF-DD, Fort Sill, OK 73503-9035. Destruction Notice: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document. *This publication supersedes FM 6-60, 23 April 1996.
i
Contents
AN/TPQ-36 Radar ............................................................................................. 1-31 AN/TPQ-37 Radar ............................................................................................. 1-32 Chapter 2
THE MLRS BATTALION .................................................................................... 2-1 MLRS Battalion ................................................................................................... 2-1 Headquarters and Headquarters Battery ............................................................ 2-2 Firing Battery ....................................................................................................... 2-5 Forward Support Company ................................................................................. 2-7 Battalion Duties ................................................................................................... 2-7 Firing Battery ..................................................................................................... 2-12 Forward Support Company ............................................................................... 2-15
Chapter 3
EMPLOYMENT ................................................................................................... 3-1 Section I – Operations in War .......................................................................... 3-1 General Employment Considerations ................................................................. 3-1 TASK Organization ............................................................................................. 3-8 Target Acquisition Employment Options ........................................................... 3-10 Battalion Commander ....................................................................................... 3-11 Liaison Function Options .................................................................................. 3-12 Operations with the Marine Corps .................................................................... 3-12 Offensive Operations ........................................................................................ 3-13 Nonstandard Employment Techniques ............................................................. 3-19 Target Acquisition and Sensor System Interface.............................................. 3-23 Roles of MLRS Unit........................................................................................... 3-25 Sustainment Operations with the Marine Corps ............................................... 3-29
Chapter 4
MLRS UNIT OPERATIONS ................................................................................ 4-1 Section I – Battalion Operations...................................................................... 4-1 Battalion Command Post and Operations Center............................................... 4-1 Automated Systems ............................................................................................ 4-6 Battalion ALOC ................................................................................................. 4-10 Section II – MLRS Firing Battery Operations ............................................... 4-10 Battery Headquarters ........................................................................................ 4-10 Battery Headquarters Operations ..................................................................... 4-11 Battery Defense ................................................................................................ 4-12 Tactical Movement ............................................................................................ 4-14 Section III – Firing Platoon Operations ......................................................... 4-17 Platoon Headquarters ....................................................................................... 4-17 OPAREA ........................................................................................................... 4-17 Launcher Survey Control .................................................................................. 4-21 Launcher Response Posture ............................................................................ 4-24 Detachment of the MLRS Firing Platoon .......................................................... 4-28 Section IV – Reconnaissance, Selection, and Occupation of Position ..... 4-28 Planning ............................................................................................................ 4-28 RSOP Process .................................................................................................. 4-28 Masking Data .................................................................................................... 4-30 Section V – Contingency Operations ............................................................ 4-31 Force Projection ................................................................................................ 4-31
ii
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Contents
Deployment ...................................................................................................... 4-33 Special Operations ........................................................................................... 4-34 Chapter 5
DELIVERY OF FIRES ........................................................................................ 5-1 Section I – Introduction.................................................................................... 5-1 Organization and Structure................................................................................. 5-1 Fire Direction Centers......................................................................................... 5-2 Section II – Accurate Predicted Fire ............................................................... 5-3 Target Size and Location.................................................................................... 5-3 Launcher Location .............................................................................................. 5-4 Weapon and Ammunition Information ................................................................ 5-6 Meteorological Information ................................................................................. 5-6 Meteorological Message Checking Procedures ................................................. 5-7 Section III – Tactical and Technical Fire Direction ........................................ 5-9 Tactical Fire Direction ......................................................................................... 5-9 Technical Fire Direction .................................................................................... 5-13 Section IV – Automated Mission Processing .............................................. 5-13 Automated Tactical Fire Direction .................................................................... 5-14 Fire Mission Cycle ............................................................................................ 5-21 Automated AFOM Processing .......................................................................... 5-23 Fire Mission Execution ..................................................................................... 5-24 Fire Support Planning Function ........................................................................ 5-28 MLRS Fire Plan Processing ............................................................................. 5-30
Appendix A
AERIAL TRANSPORT OF MLRS AMMUNITION AND EQUIPMENT.............. A-1
Appendix B
ROCKET BALLISTICS ...................................................................................... B-1
Appendix C
MLRS BATTALION AND BATTERY TACTICAL STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURES .................................................................................................. C-1
Appendix D
LNO CHECKLIST .............................................................................................. D-1
Appendix E
MLRS COMMAND POSTS ................................................................................ E-1
Appendix F
HASTY SURVEY TECHNIQUE—GRAPHIC RESECTION ............................... F-1
Appendix G
M26, M26A1/A2, AND M28A1/A2 ROCKET CREST CLEARANCE TABLES G-1
Appendix H
FIRING SAFETY ................................................................................................ H-1
Appendix I
ROCKET BALLISTIC ALGORITHM SOLUTIONS............................................. I-1
Appendix J
JSTARS CGS INTEROPERABILITY PROCEDURES FOR THE MLRS BATTALION ....................................................................................................... J-1
Appendix K
ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS .................................................................... K-1
Appendix L
RAID PLANNING CHECKLISTS ....................................................................... L-1
Appendix M
ATACMS BLOCK II EMPLOYMENT ................................................................ M-1 GLOSSARY .......................................................................................... Glossary-1 REFERENCES .................................................................................. References-1 INDEX .......................................................................................................... Index-1
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
iii
Contents
Figures Figure 1-1. M270 Launcher .................................................................................................... 1-3 Figure 1-2. M142 HIMARS Launcher..................................................................................... 1-9 Figure 1-3. M142 Chassis Frame .......................................................................................... 1-9 Figure 1-4. Crew Cab ........................................................................................................... 1-10 Figure 1-5. Firing Platform ................................................................................................... 1-11 Figure 1-6. Sponsons ........................................................................................................... 1-12 Figure 1-7. Turret Assembly ................................................................................................ 1-12 Figure 1-8. Base Assembly .................................................................................................. 1-13 Figure 1-9. M142 Reload System ........................................................................................ 1-13 Figure 1-10. Launch Pod ..................................................................................................... 1-14 Figure 1-11. M26 Rocket...................................................................................................... 1-15 Figure 1-12. M77 Submunition ............................................................................................. 1-16 Figure 1-13. M30 GMLRS Rocket........................................................................................ 1-18 Figure 1-14. M31 GMLRS Rocket........................................................................................ 1-19 Figure 1-15. M39/M39A1 Missile ......................................................................................... 1-21 Figure 1-16. M74 Submunition ............................................................................................. 1-21 Figure 1-17. Block II Missile ................................................................................................. 1-23 Figure 1-18. BAT Submunition ............................................................................................. 1-24 Figure 1-19. M985 HEMTT .................................................................................................. 1-26 Figure 1-20. M989A1 HEMAT .............................................................................................. 1-26 Figure 1-21. M1084A1 Resupply Vehicle ............................................................................ 1-27 Figure 1-22. M1095 Resupply Trailer .................................................................................. 1-27 Figure 1-23. MTS Control Station ........................................................................................ 1-29 Figure 1-24. MTS Mobile Unit .............................................................................................. 1-28 Figure 1-25. MTS Mobile Unit in the RSV ............................................................................ 1-29 Figure 1-26. MTS Transceiver Mount .................................................................................. 1-29 Figure 2-1. MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Organization ............................................................... 2-1 Figure 2-2. Headquarters and Headquarters Battery ............................................................ 2-2 Figure 2-3. MLRS Firing Battery ............................................................................................ 2-6 Figure 3-1. Example: MLRS Platoon Operating Base with Internal Firing Points................ 3-28 Figure 4-1. TOC Radio and AFATDS Quantities ................................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-2. Special Formations ............................................................................................ 4-16 Figure 4-3. Operational Area ............................................................................................... 4-18 Figure 4-4. Masking ............................................................................................................. 4-31 Figure 4-5. Urban Targeting Solution................................................................................... 4-35 Figure 5-2. Computer Meteorological Message ..................................................................... 5-8 Figure 5-3. Fire Mission Execution ...................................................................................... 5-14 Figure 5-4. AFOM Platoon Air Hazard Area ........................................................................ 5-16 Figure 5-5. Default Block I and 1A Target Air Hazard Area ................................................. 5-17
iv
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Contents
Figure 5-6. Fire Mission Support Function ........................................................................... 5-18 Figure 5-7. DA Form 7232-R (Example) .............................................................................. 5-22 Figure 5.8. DA Form 7233-R (Example) ............................................................................... 5-22 Figure 5-9. Fire Planning and Scheduling ............................................................................ 5-29 Figure A-1. Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles, One Container.............................................................................................................A-4 Figure A-2. Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles, Two Containers ...........................................................................................................A-6 Figure A-3. Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles, Four Containers ...........................................................................................................A-9 Figure B-1. Bias and Precision Errors ....................................................................................B-2 Figure E-1. Vehicles at the MLRS Battalion CP, Option 1—Dual CPs ..................................E-1 Figure E-2. MLRS Battalion TOC—Side-by-Side Configuration ............................................E-3 Figure E-3. Vehicles at the MLRS Battalion Trains, Option 1—Dual CPs .............................E-4 Figure E-4. MLRS Battalion ALOC in Built-up Trucks ............................................................E-7 Figure E-5. MLRS Battalion ALOC in a General Purpose Medium Tent................................E-7 Figure E-6. MLRS Battery CP—Split HQ .............................................................................E-10 Figure E-7. MLRS Battery Operations Center in Carrier, CP ...............................................E-12 Figure E-8. MLRS Battery Trains —Split HQ .......................................................................E-13 Figure E-9. Battery LOC .......................................................................................................E-14 Figure E-10. Vehicles at the MLRS Platoon HQ ..................................................................E-14 Figure E-11. MLRS POC in C2V ..........................................................................................E-15 Figure G-1. Mil Relation Formula .......................................................................................... G-1 Figure G-2. Effective Angle of Site ........................................................................................ G-2 Figure G-3. Crest Clearance ................................................................................................. G-2 Figure I-1. M26 Low Quadrant Elevation Trajectories. Conditions: BA-ER-D, sea level standard (no wind). For illustration purposes only. ..................................... I-9 Figure I-2. M26 High Quadrant Elevation Trajectories. Conditions: BA-ER-D, sea level standard (no wind). For illustration purposes only. ................................... I-18 Figure I-3. M26A1/2 Trajectories ........................................................................................... I-30 Figure I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Trajectories ................................................ I-45 Figure I-5. M28A1/A2 RRPR Trajectories ............................................................................. I-49 Figure J-1. JSTARS MTI Capabilities ..................................................................................... J-1 Figure J-2. JSTARS SAR Capabilities ................................................................................... J-2 Figure J-3. Decentralized Mission Communications Channels for MLRS/HIMARS .............. J-5 Figure J-4. Example of Block I/IA Amended At My Command Mission MLRS/HIMARS ....... J-7 Figure K-1. Environmental Laws and Regulations .................................................................K-5 Figure M-1. AFOM Platoon Air Hazard Area ......................................................................... M-2
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
v
Contents
Figure M-2. Typical Block II Target Air Hazard Area ............................................................ M-3 Figure M-3. Missile Mission and Flight Profile ...................................................................... M-4 Figure M-4. BAT Submunition Dispense Sequence ............................................................. M-4 Figure M-5. BAT Target Attack Profile .................................................................................. M-5 Figure M-6. BAT Engagement Sequence ............................................................................. M-5 Figure M-7. Manual Calculation of Trigger Events Job Aid .................................................. M-9 Figure M-8. Block II Target Engagement Process .............................................................. M-10 Figure M-9. Block II Mission Functional Flow ..................................................................... M-13 Figure M-10. Block II On-Call Target Establishment Procedures ....................................... M-15 Figure M-11. Block II Trigger Event Establishment Procedures ......................................... M-16 Figure M-12. AFATDS Trigger Event Window .................................................................... M-18 Figure M-13. BAT Acoustic Footprint .................................................................................. M-21 Figure M-14. Block II Linear Target Segmentation—AFATDS View .................................. M-22 Figure M-15. Target Segmentation in NAI and TAI ............................................................ M-22 Figure M-16. Target Dispersal Patterns .............................................................................. M-24
Tables Table 1-1. M270A1 Launcher Characteristics ....................................................................... 1-6 Table 1-2. MFOM Characteristics ........................................................................................ 1-19 Table 1-3. ATACMS Family of Munitions Characteristics .................................................... 1-26 Table 1-4. Estimated Position Error ..................................................................................... 1-31 Table 3-1. Block I, Block IA, Block II and M48/M57 Comparison .......................................... 3-4 Table 3-2. Launcher Capabilities ........................................................................................... 3-6 Table 3-3. Range Comparison ............................................................................................... 3-6 Table 3-4. Positioning the Battalion Commander ................................................................ 3-11 Table 3-5. Comparison of MLRS Operating Base Techniques ........................................... 3-27 Table 4-1. Appliqué ................................................................................................................ 4-9 Table 4-2. Navigation ........................................................................................................... 4-23 Table 4-3. Alignment Time ................................................................................................... 4-24 Table 4-4. Response Postures ............................................................................................ 4-25 Table 4-5. GPS Initialization States ..................................................................................... 4-26 Table 4-6. MLRS Contingency Packages ............................................................................ 4-34 Table 5-1. Required Accuracies............................................................................................. 5-4 Table 5-2. System Accuracy .................................................................................................. 5-5 Table 5-3. Position Specifications .......................................................................................... 5-5 Table 5-4. Meteorological Message Areas of Validity............................................................ 5-7 Table 5-5. MLRS Risk Estimate Distances (Training Only) ................................................. 5-13 Table 5-6. Ammunition Selection Matrix .............................................................................. 5-20 Table 5-7. Fire Plan Change Reaction Times ...................................................................... 5-31 Table A-1. Transportability by Aircraft.................................................................................... A-2
vi
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Contents
Table A-2. Launch Pod Container (LPC) with Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System (G-MLRS) Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly (GMLA) Pods with Army Tactical Missile System (ATACMS) Missiles, One Container Two Containers ................A-3 Table A-3. Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles, Two Containers ...........................................................................................................A-5 Table A-4. Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles, Four Containers ...........................................................................................................A-7 Table E-1. Personnel at the MLRS Battalion CP, Option 1—Dual CPs .................................E-1 Table E-2. MLRS Battalion TOC Shifts by Duty Position .......................................................E-3 Table E-3. Personnel at MLRS Battalion Trains, Option 1—Dual CPs ..................................E-4 Table E-4. MLRS Battalion ALOC Shifts by Duty Position .....................................................E-6 Table E-5. Forward Support Company with the MLRS Battalion Table E-6. Personnel at the MLRS Battery CP Split HQ
...............................E-7
.................................................E-10
Table E-7. MLRS BOC Shifts by Duty Position ....................................................................E-11 Table E-8. Personnel at the MLRS Battery Trains ...............................................................E-13 Table E-9. MLRS Battery LOC Shifts by Duty Position ....................................................... E-13 Table E-10. Personnel at the MLRS Platoon HQ ............................................................. . E-15 Table E-11. MLRS POC Shifts by Duty Position .................................................................E-15 Table G-1. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level)..................... G-3 Table G-2. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) ................... G-7 Table G-3. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) ................. G-11 Table G-4. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) .............. G-15 Table G-5. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) .............. G-19 Table G-6. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) ......... G-23 Table G-7. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL).. ..... G-28 Table G-8. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL).. ..... G-34 Table G-9. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) .... G-40 Table G-10. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) ................................................................................................................. G-46 Table G-11. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level).. ..... G-52 Table G-12. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) .. .. G-56 Table G-13. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL). .... G-60 Table G-14. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) ................................................................................................................. G-64 Table G-15. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) ................................................................................................................. G-68 Table I-1. M26 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data ......................................... I-1 Table I-2. M26 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data....................................... I-10 Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data ................................ I-19
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
vii
Contents
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data............................... I-31 Table I-5. M28A1/A2 Rocket (Reduced Range, Practice) Ballistic Algorithm Solutions ..... ..I-46 Table K-1. Material Safety Data Sheet .................................................................................. K-3 Table K-2. Regulatory Training Requirements ...................................................................... K-6 Table K-3. Common Environmental Hazards ........................................................................ K-8 Table K-4. Environmental-related Controls ............................................................................ K-9 Table M-1. Planned Target Location to Engagement Trigger Events Distance ................... M-8 Table M-2. AFATDS Target Type/Subtypes Applicable to Block II .................................... M-14 Table M-3. Engagement of Targets with Gaps Between Subunits ..................................... M-17 Table M-4. Block II (with Basic BAT) Target Area No-Go Environmental Conditions ........ M-23
viii
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Preface This publication is designed primarily for the multiple launch rocket system (MLRS) battalion, battery, and platoon. It is also a guide for corps and division Fire Cells/Fires Elements (FC/FEs), fires brigade (FIB), Marine artillery regiments and their staffs, and fire support coordinators and their supported commanders and staffs. This publication sets forth the doctrine pertaining to the organization, equipment, command and control, operations, and tactics, techniques, and procedures for the MLRS battalion, battery, and platoon. It establishes the responsibilities and general duties of key personnel by focusing on essentials of how the MLRS unit fights. It keys the MLRS battalion, battery, and platoon leaders to those areas that must be trained to win the fight. This publication is compatible with full spectrum operations - the Army's operational concept discussed in FM 3-0 Operations.. It does not stand alone. It should be used with equipment technical manuals, soldier’s manuals, and trainer’s guides. Tables of organization and equipment (TOE) are based on the doctrinal tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) outlined in this publication. The approved TOEs detail manpower and equipment authorizations for United States Army units. However, some of the required positions outlined in chapter 2 may not be resourced as Army units organize under modification tables of organization and equipment (MTOEs). To determine manpower and equipment authorizations for a specific unit, refer to the MTOE for that unit. This publication applies to the Active Army, the Army National Guard (ARNG)/Army National Guard of the United States (ARNGUS), and the United States Army Reserve (USAR) unless otherwise stated. The proponent of this publication is the United States Army Training and Doctrine Command (TRADOC). The U.S. Army Field Artillery School is the preparing agency. Send comments and recommendations on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) to Directorate of Training and Doctrine 1210 NW Schimmelpfennig Road, Suite 250 ATTN: ATSF-DD, Fort Sill, OK 73503-9035 or email to
[email protected]. Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
ix
This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 1
System Description This chapter implements STANAG 2934, chapter 11.
The MLRS is designed to attack the enemy throughout the supported commander’s operations Area. Complementing cannon artillery and other fire support assets, MLRS has an all-weather, long-range capability, and a full suite of munitions. The MLRS battalion can be assigned or attached to a fires brigade (FIB).
SECTION I – INTRODUCTION
MLRS EMPLOYMENT CONCEPT 1-1. The capabilities of MLRS make it one of the most unique field artillery (FA) weapon systems available for both joint and combined arms operations. Its range, mobility, and lethality allow it to execute the full spectrum of fire support—providing close support to maneuver units, protecting the force with counter fire, and attacking operational targets for the division, corps, Marine air ground task force (MAGTF), or joint task force commander and in support of theater missile defense (TMD). 1-2. Regardless of the tactical mission, MLRS units are positioned and fight well forward and use their “shoot-and-scoot” capability to improve survivability. Forward positioning is critical to accomplishing unit missions. When providing support in the offense, MLRS units move to best support the maneuver forces, stopping to fire as required, and then move rapidly to continue supporting the formation. In the defense, these systems may support maneuver units by moving laterally along the forward line of own troops (FLOT). This allows MLRS units to take maximum advantage of their range to protect maneuver units from the destructive effects of the enemy's indirect fire systems. The mobility and massive firepower of the MLRS make it well-suited to augment other artillery fires supporting cavalry units engaged in operations such as screening, covering force, and movement to contact. 1-3. The 70-kilometer (km) range of the guided MLRS (GMLRS) rocket and the 300-kilometer range of the Block IA Army tactical missile system (ATACMS) provide the brigade, division, corps, MAGTF, and joint commanders with a long range strike capability. To support strike missions, MLRS units are positioned close to the FLOT, and in some cases beyond the FLOT, to engage the enemy at maximum ranges and to continue to attack the enemy throughout the depth of the battlefield. The MLRS units assigned the mission of firing ATACMS in support of a joint force commander will often operate in a brigade combat team (BCT) area of operation (AO). Intermixed with maneuver and cannon units, these MLRS units continually coordinate for positions within the BCT sector. 1-4. The MLRS plays a critical role in contingency operations because it provides a massive infusion of combat power in small, rapidly deployable force packages. MLRS units are a logical choice to provide fires for initial entry forces because of the lethality of the MLRS family of munitions (MFOM) coupled with the air deployability of the system on a variety of aircraft.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS 1-5. The MLRS consists of the following components.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-1
Chapter 1
M270 LAUNCHER 1-6. The M270 launcher is a self-propelled armored rocket and missile-firing platform with a crew of 3 (section chief, gunner, and driver). The launcher is composed of the M993 extended Bradley tracked carrier and the M269 launcher module (LM). The LM contains a built-in self-loading system that holds either 2 launch pod containers (LPCs) or 2 guided missile launch assemblies (GMLAs), but not a mix of both (each bay of the launcher must be loaded with the same type munitions of the same Department of Defense [DOD] accounting code [DODAC] or J-code). The LPC holds 6 rockets, and the GMLA holds 1 missile for an onboard firing capability of 12 rockets or 2 missiles. 1-7. Each launcher has the onboard capability to receive a fire mission, determine launcher location, compute firing data, orient on the target, and fire. The M270 carrier cab houses the man-machine interface for the fire control system (FCS). The FCS computes firing data that is applied to the LM via the stabilization reference package/position determining system (SRP/PDS) and the LM launcher drive system (LDS). The components apply position survey, vehicle heading reference, and aiming stabilization. The system uses standard Army communications systems to transmit and receive digital communications. Once laid and armed, the launcher can fire— • 12 rockets in less than 60 seconds at up to 6 aim points. • 2 missiles in less than 20 seconds at 1 or 2 aim points.
M270A1 LAUNCHER 1-8. The M270A1 Launcher is an improved version of the M270 launcher using the fire control system M270A1 (FCS). The FCS replaces maintenance intensive hardware and software and provides support for MLRS family of munitions (MFOM) using a global positioning system (GPS) for in flight trajectory correction. The launcher’s GPS supplements the vehicle’s existing inertial position-navigation system. The M270A1 FCS modification upgrades the electronic and navigation equipment, reduces operations and sustainment costs, and revises the software architecture. 1-9. The M270A1 FCS reduces fire mission and reload cycle times. This is achieved by providing a faster drive system that moves simultaneously in azimuth and elevation. The M270A1 FCS decreases the traverse time from stowed position to worst-case aim-point by approximately 85 percent. The M270A1 FCS also decreases the mechanical system contribution to reload time by 38 percent. The reduced time spent at the launch and reload points increases the survivability of the launcher crew and associated rearm personnel. Once laid and armed, the launcher can fire: • 12 rockets in less than 60 seconds at up to 12 aim-points. • 2 missiles in less than 20 seconds at 1 or 2aim-points.
LPC AND GUIDED MISSILE LAUNCH ASSEMBLIES 1-10. Each LPC holds 6 rockets, and each GMLA holds 1 missile. The pods are stenciled with the DOD identification code (DODIC). This is the same code that is displayed on the fire control panel (FCP) when ammunition status is displayed to the launcher crewmembers.
AMMUNITION RESUPPLY VEHICLES AND TRAILERS 1-11. The ammunition resupply capability for the M270/M270A1 configured MLRS units is provided by the heavy expanded mobility tactical truck (HEMTT) M985 and the heavy expanded mobility ammunition trailer (HEMAT) M989A1. Each can carry 4 rocket/missile pods for a total of 48 rockets or 8 missiles in a HEMTT and HEMAT load. M142 High Mobility Artillery Rocket System (HIMARS) configured MLRS units have the M1084A1 with material handling equipment (MHE) resupply vehicle (RSV) and M1095 resupply trailer (RST). Each can carry 2 rocket/missile pods for a total of 24 rockets or 4 missiles in a RSV and RST load.
1-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
COMMAND, CONTROL, AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 1-12. The MLRS fire direction center (FDC) has an automated command, control, (C2) and communications system to provide command and control of subordinate launchers and to facilitate communication on the battlefield. Major components of the C2 system are the FCS located in the launcher and the AFATDS located at the platoon/battery.
SECTION II – LAUNCHER AND SUBSYSTEMS
M270 LAUNCHER 1-13. The M270 launcher is a highly mobile, lightly armored, tracked carrier vehicle with an LM mounted on the vehicle bed (see figure 1-1). The launcher consists of a 3-man crew (section chief, gunner, and driver). Personal equipment is stored in the crew's equipment storage containers located in the carrier under the LM cage.
Figure 1-1. M270 Launcher
M993 CARRIER VEHICLE 1-14. The carrier vehicle is a longer version of the Bradley fighting vehicle with nearly 80 percent common components. It is 6.8 meters (22 feet, 6 inches) long, 2.6 meters (8 feet, 9 inches) high, and 2.597 meters (8 feet, 6 inches) wide. When loaded with M26 rocket LPCs, the launcher weighs approximately 24,036 kilograms (52,990 pounds). It can climb 60 percent slopes, traverse a 40 percent side slope, ford 1.1 meters (40 inches) of water, and climb 1-meter vertical walls. The launcher has a cruising range of 483 kilometers (300 miles) and can be transported by C-17 and larger cargo aircraft (see appendix A). The vehicle cab is constructed of aluminum armor plate, providing ballistic protection to the crew. It is fitted with an M13A1 gas particulate filter unit that protects the crew from chemical and biological agents and radioactive particles. It also has a vehicle cab overpressure system to protect the crew from toxic rocket and missile exhaust.
M269 LAUNCHER MODULE 1-15. The launcher module (LM) consists of 2 sections: a mechanical section and an electrical section. These sections work together to perform all firing and non-firing functions.
LM Mechanical Section 1-16. The mechanical section consists of base, turret, and cage assemblies. The base assembly provides for the physical mounting of the LM to the carrier. Both the turret and base assemblies house the electronics and hydraulics of the LDS that actually perform the rotation and elevation functions of the LM. The cage assembly performs 2 important functions. First, the structure of the cage assembly aligns, holds, and protects the launch pods. Second, 2 boom and hoist assemblies mounted in the cage assembly give the launcher crew a built-in ammunition loading and unloading capability.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-3
Chapter 1
LM Electrical Section 1-17. The electrical section consists of 3 subsystems: the primary power supply, the communications system, and the FCS. Primary Power Supply 1-18. The primary power supply is the source of power for all launcher equipment. It uses standard military lead acid batteries to provide 24 volts of power to the launcher components. It also controls the distribution of power through the use of switching relays. Communications System 1-19. The launcher communications system includes a single-channel ground and airborne radio system (SINCGARS), AN/VRC-92F, with embedded communications security (COMSEC) capability. Each crewmember has a combat vehicle crewman (CVC) helmet that is connected to an AN/VIC-1 or AN/VIC-3 intercom system.
FCS M270 Launcher 1-20. The FCS functions with the other launcher components to provide overall control of the LM. It monitors, coordinates, and controls all electronic devices used during a launch cycle. The FCS consists of the FCP, electronics unit (EU, fire control unit (FCU), boom controller (BC), short/no-voltage tester (SNVT), SRP/PDS, payload interface module (PIM), and communications processor (CMP). • Fire control panel. The FCP, located in the center of the carrier cab in front of the gunner's seat, has a data entry keyboard for manual entry operations and for message menu selection. The panel gives alphanumeric displays in simple language. Located next to the data keys are built-in test (BIT) indicator lamps for line replaceable units (LRU). These allow rapid detection and isolation of faults in the FCS. • Electronics unit. The EU contains the computer program and data processing electronics to receive, compute, and distribute fire mission parameters. The EU holds all current weapon files and operational data for the launch and ballistic computation programs in its “bubble” memory (permanent, nonvolatile). However, only those munitions programs that have been moved into the EU random access memory (RAM) can be used by the launcher FCS to compute launch and other fire mission data. The EU automatically identifies munitions type and copies necessary weapon files from bubble to RAM. If the proper software is not loaded, the crew can use the program load unit (PLU) to load required munitions data into the EU. • Fire control unit. The FCU contains the electronic circuits that change the EU outputs into control signals for other launcher components. It also takes inputs from the other components and changes them into signals the EU can use. • Boom controller. The BC permits remote control of the loading and off-loading functions and positioning of the LM for maintenance. • Short/no-voltage tester. The SNVT is a built-in test device used during loading operations. It is used to test the FCS W19 umbilical cables for stray voltage or static electricity. The test ensures that the cables are safe to connect to the loaded launch pods. • Stabilization reference package/position determining system. The SRP/PDS is composed of 2 integrated subsystems that are housed in separate compartments: the SRP and the PDS. The SRP uses an electrically driven north-seeking gyrocompass. The SRP provides heading, elevation, and launcher slope. The PDS uses 2 encoders on the vehicle final drives and orientation data from the SRP to determine position location. • Payload interface module. The PIM provides communications power and interface between the loaded launch pods and the EU. Initial input of the EU munitions programs requires use of the PLU and the PIM. If there is a PIM failure, the M270 can still execute rocket missions. • Communications processor. The CMP controls the flow of the digital coded audio tone messages sent and received by the launcher communications-FCS interface. It is designed to ensure that the
1-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
FCS does not acknowledge, nor allow itself to be disrupted by, digital messages not addressed to that launcher. It also rejects weak or garbled signals.
FCS Functions 1-21. The launcher FCS provides the link among the crew, external digital message sources, and the launcher components. It performs the following significant functions: • Computes firing data for all fire missions. • Lays the LM and sets fuzes or programs warheads, as required. • Monitors and integrates all onboard sensor data. • In conjunction with the launcher communications system, provides a digital interface between the launcher crew and the command and control elements. • Monitors the status of built-in tests. • Enables the crew to control launcher components. • Controls LM operations. 1-22. The FCS receives data input in the following ways: • Current mission data are input automatically through digital-coded, audio-tone, radio messages, or manually through the FCP keyboard. • The EU munitions programs are input from a cassette through a PLU. 1-23. The PLU is an electronic device that programs the EU memory. The unit mounts a cassette containing operational program data. The PLU is connected to the EU through the PIM interface connector W31P2 using the PLU cable assembly. The PLU requires 22 to 25 minutes to transfer an entire cassette of data. 1-24. Data communication is the most common and preferred method of input to the FCS. Through radios, the FCS can communicate digitally with the platoon, battery, or battalion AFATDS. The FCS can receive MLRS and meteorology (MET) message category formats as well as the SYS;PTM message. Secure data digital communication between the observers and a launcher FCS must be routed through an AFATDS because message formats are not compatible. The FCS allows the crew to send and receive fixed-format messages and free-text messages. 1-25. The primary means of communication is frequency modulated (FM) secure data; however, FM voice secure communication is available as a backup. In case of data communication failure or when operating voice, the crew can manually enter all data elements through the FCP keyboard. 1-26. The EU automatically monitors, integrates, and computes data from other FCS launcher electronic components. It continuously monitors the SRP/PDS data and computes launcher heading (travel direction), location, and altitude. The FCS determines the firing data when the target information is received. When the crew enters the appropriate mission command, the FCS commands the LM to lay on the required launch azimuth and elevation, and set the rocket fuze times or program the warheads. The FCS fires the rockets or missiles when commanded by the gunner through the FCP. 1-27. The FCS continuously checks its internal components and those of the LM. These checks are made throughout the mission cycle. If a malfunction is detected, the crewmembers are notified by a fault message prompt or LRU bit light on the FCP. 1-28. The FCS can currently operate in 5 different language formats: U.S.-English, United KingdomEnglish, German, French, and Italian. Note: The launcher is unable to fire the mission if a malfunction occurs in a launcher FCS; that is, in the FCP, EU, FCU, or SRP/PDS. Because no backup means exist to fire the launcher manually, the fire mission must be redirected to an operational launcher for completion.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-5
Chapter 1
M270A1 LAUNCHER 1-29. The M270A1 launcher (see table 1-1) is a combined fielding of the LMS and the FCS. The LMS drastically reduces fire mission and reload cycle times. It allows the LM to elevate and traverse simultaneously at an increased speed. The LMS provides the following operational enhancements: • Rapid response to time-sensitive targets. Reduces time from launcher lay to aimpoint by 85 percent (time reduced from 93 seconds to 16 seconds for a maximum range mission). • Increased survivability due to less time at firing points and reload points. • Increased rates of fire. 1-30. The FCS mitigates obsolescence and reduces operations and sustainment costs by changing the MLRS FCS. Incorporating the GPS and decentralizing the weapon system command function enhances operational performance of the launcher. The FCS is designed to conduct self-diagnosis of its associated components. 1-31. To more adequately support the M270A1 launcher, the M993A1 carrier has been upgraded with 9 hardware improvements plus a monitoring and sensor system (Centry) to become the M993A1. The Centry system consists of electrical sensors interacting with the carrier’s engine and transmission to provide better performance and improved troubleshooting procedures for maintainers. Table 1-1. M270A1 Launcher Characteristics Weight (air trans)
19,414 kg
42,800 lb
Width
2,972 mm
9 ft, 11 in
Length
6,942 mm
22 ft, 9 in
Height (stowed)
2,666 mm
8 ft, 9 in
Height (full elevation)
5,920 mm
19 ft, 5 in
Included in launcher weight: ½ tank of fuel VIC-3 intercom Radios and mounts, antennas and mounts, cabling
Not included in launcher weight: CVC helmets for VIC-3 Basic issue items Rocket pods, M/LPA trainers
FCS REFERENCE IETM 1055-647-13&P 1-32. The M270A1 FCS functions with the other launcher components to provide overall control of the LM. It monitors, coordinates, and controls all electronic devices used during a launch cycle. The FCS consists of the Low Cost Fire Control Panel (LCFCP) which is comprised of three major components which includes Gunners Display Unit (GDU),Tactical Processer Unit (TPU), with Mass Storage Unit (MSU) allowing the operator to interface with the FCS which includes the Improved Weapon Interface Unit (IWIU), the Boom Controller(BC), the Position Navigation Unit (PNU), the Power Switching Unit (PSU), the launcher interface unit (LIU) (with power management unit, main processor and communications processor), and the maintenance support device-field ready (MSD-FR). • Gunners Display Unit. The GDU, located in the center of the carrier cab in front of the gunner's seat, has a high-resolution display, full text keyboard, and audio/video alarms. It provides system interface to the mass storage unit that provides nonvolatile storage for system software and database information. • Power switching unit. The PSU which replaces the (EB) the Electronics Box and provides the vehicle power source interface and high current power switching and distribution. It is controlled by the LIU. • Launcher interface unit. The LIU aims and controls the LM. It provides interface for load/unload operations, and provides embedded communications processing functions. It oversees the overall operations of the FCS to include providing system power and communication (internal and external) management functions. The LIU interfaces directly with the M270A1 LMS and provides the
1-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
stabilization and control functions. In addition, the LIU provides control functions for the boom and hoist features in support of reload operations. • Improved Weapon interface unit. The IWIU contains the computer program and data processing electronics to receive, compute, and distribute fire mission parameters. It calculates the ballistic algorithm, downloads data to MFOM, performs SNVT functions, and provides ground power. • Position navigation unit. The PNU provides launcher position and navigation data. During fire missions, the PNU provides the FCS with location, attitude, and launcher rate data for use in computing ballistics and aiming the LM. The PNU contains an embedded GPS receiver to enhance its inertial performance and provide effective land navigation for the launcher. The reference package of the PNU is capable of alignment on the move, a process that takes approximately 15 minutes as long as the vehicle remains in motion. Stationary alignment time can be as long as 5 minutes or as short as 2 minutes and 30 seconds, depending on initialization data and conditions. The PDS requires manual updating only in the event that GPS is not available to the system. GPS enables effective land navigation of the launcher in the absence of SCP information. In the absence of GPS information, the PNU provides free inertial navigation or navigation with the aid of existing odometer encoder inputs. • Boom controller. The boom controller permits remote control of the loading and off-loading functions and positioning of the LM for maintenance. An emergency disable switch has been added onto the M270A1 launcher boom controller because of the decreased reaction time associated with the increased speed of the LM. The boom controller on the M270 is not interchangeable with the boom controller on the M270A1 launcher. Note: During boom controller operations, all crew members must follow all safety procedures outlined in the interactive electronic technical manual (IETM) 9-1055-646-13P. • Power distribution box (PDB). The PDB provides operational interface to the boom/hoist assemblies, travel lock actuator, and cage down limit switch. • GPS antenna. The GPS receiver interfaces with the GPS satellite constellation via the antenna mounted on top of the LM cage assembly. 1-33. The digitized cell requires an additional LRU called the tactical processing unit (TPU). The TPU is installed inside the cab of the launcher directly over the gunner’s right shoulder. In addition to the TPU, an improved Mass Storage Unit (MSU) is mounted inside the cab. The MSU uses a removable personal computer memory card international association (PCMCIA) card technology, further enhancing memory size and providing the MLRS crewmen a faster method of loading software. The digitized cell acts as an interface that will allow the MLRS crewmen access to the tactical internet (TI) and situational awareness (SA). SA is assisted by a display of symbols (icons) representing individual friendly and enemy units that appear on the map and move in near-real time as the platforms they represent move on the battlefield. This continually updated SA is a fully automatic function. SA will enhance crew survivability by keeping crewmen informed of the tactical situation. 1-34. The MSD-FR is an electronic device used to read the IETM and to program the MSU. To program the MSU, the MSD-FR must be set up as a PLU. It is connected to the FCP using a sport cable assembly. The MSD-FR mounts a compact disc (CD) containing operational program data. One MSD-FR and IETM is issued to each section and 1 PLU and software CD is issued to each platoon. The Embedded Program Load Unit (EPLU) differs from the MSD-FR PLU based version in that it is resident on a Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) CCA. When the FCS is initialized the EPLU automatically starts and is accessed from the GDU via the EPLU card placed in the MSU allowing the operator to load software into the FCS.
FCS FUNCTIONS 1-35. The launcher IFCS provides the link between the crew, external digital message sources, and the launcher components. It performs the following significant functions: • Monitors and integrates all onboard sensor data. • In conjunction with the launcher communications system, provides a digital interface between the launcher crew and the command and control elements.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-7
Chapter 1
• • • • •
Monitors the status of built-in tests. Enables the crew to control launcher components. Computes firing data for all fire missions. Lays the LM and sets fuzes or programs warheads as required. Controls LM operations.
1-36. The FCS receives data input in the following ways: • Current mission data are input automatically through digital coded audio tone radio messages or manually through the FCP keyboard. • IWIU munitions programs are input to the MSU from a CD through a MSD/FR set up as a PLU. 1-37. Data communication is the most common and preferred method of input to the FCS. Through the AN/VRC-92F and EPLRS radios and the Internet controller (INC), the FCS can communicate digitally with the platoon, battery, or battalion AFATDS. The INC is a component of the AN/VRC-92F radio. The FCS allows the crew to send and receive joint variable message format (JVMF), fixed-format, and free-text messages. 1-38. The primary means of communication is FM secure data; however, EPLRS data over the tactical Internet and FM voice secure communications are both available as backups. In case of data communication failure or when operating voice, the crew can manually enter all data elements through the GDU keyboard. 1-39. The IWIU automatically monitors, integrates, and computes data from other FCS launcher electronic components. It continuously computes launcher heading location and altitude. The FCS determines the firing data when the target information is received. When the crew enters the appropriate mission command, the FCS commands the LM to lay on the required launch azimuth and elevation, and set the rocket fuze times or program the warheads. The FCS fires the rockets or missiles when commanded by the gunner through the GDU. 1-40. The FCS continuously checks its internal components and those of the LM. These checks are made throughout the mission cycle. If a malfunction is detected, the crewmembers are notified by a fault message. Note: The launcher is unable to fire the mission when a malfunction occurs in a launcher IFCS; that is, in the GDU, PSU, LIU, IWIU, or PNU. Because no backup means exist to fire the launcher manually, the fire mission must be redirected to an operational launcher for completion.
M142 HIGH MOBILITY ARTILLERY ROCKET SYSTEM 1-41. The M142 is an air transportable, wheeled, indirect fire, rocket/missile system that is capable of firing all rockets and missiles in the current and future MFOM. This system includes the launcher, ammunition trucks and trailers, MFOM and the C2 system. 1-42. The M142 system is deployable by C-130 or larger aircraft. The C-130 aircraft has the capability to land on short stretches of roadways and assault landing zones (ALZ) that are unusable by larger aircraft. For a combat loaded C-130 aircraft, the minimum size for an ALZ is 60 x 3000 feet and the desired size is 80 x 5000 feet. 1-43. The M142 launcher consists of the same FCS as the M270A1 that provides operator interface and technical fire control for the launch of rockets and missiles, a carrier vehicle (automotive portion) capable of supporting sustained, rapid maneuver, and a LM portion that performs all the functions necessary to load, aim and fire the launcher. 1-44. The M142 (Figure 1-2) LM holds 1 LPC/GMLA. The M142 firing and reload times are comparable to the M270A1 Launcher.
1-8
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
Figure 1-2. M142 HIMARS Launcher
CARRIER VEHICLE 1-45. The M142 launcher carrier is a variant of the fielded Army Family of Medium Tactical Vehicles (FMTV) 4500mm (177 inches) wheelbase truck chassis. Major components of the vehicle are the 330 horsepower diesel engine, 7-speed automatic transmission, Central Tire Inflation System (CTIS), crew cab with operator vehicle controls, highway and tactical lighting system and signals, suspension, and flexible frame. 1-46. The FMTV cab/chassis of the M142 Launcher is designated the M1140; its unique features include: • A 2-stage rear spring system that provides stability for fire missions and reload operations. This 2stage system (Figure 1-3) is common to the tractor-trailer variant of the FMTV fleet. • A variable displacement/pressure compensating hydraulic pump. The hydraulic pump mates with a speed-increasing gearbox, which steps up the engine speed to about 5,000 RPM. The gearbox mates to the Power Take Off (PTO) shaft coming out of the transmission; the shaft rotates at about 1,750 RPM. This hydraulic pump provides the source of hydraulic power to various sub-systems. • Addition of doubler plates across the lower and upper frame rails to add stiffness for fire missions and reload operations. See Figure 1-3 • Replacement of the standard 100-Ampere alternator with a 300-Ampere alternator to provide the necessary power to the FCS and communications equipment.
Doubler Plates
Figure 1-3 M142 Chassis Frame
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-9
Chapter 1
Crew Cab 1-47. The FMTV crew cab is modified to provide protection from foreign objects and toxic gasses to the 3man crew during firing. Features of the crew cab include: •
A commander’s hatch and “grab” bar on the roof of the cab (Figure 1-4).
•
Replacement of all window glass with a transparent shatter resistant material, sufficient to protect against penetration by foreign objects during firing. Replacement of the 2 rear quarter panel window glasses and the rear window glass with metal.
•
A chemical air filtration unit to filter toxic gasses from the outside air. The air filtration unit forces outside air through an M-48 Nuclear, Biological and Chemical filter causing an overpressure condition, which also prevents gasses from entering around the doors or other small openings.
•
Alterations necessary for the FCS, communications equipment and controls, and indicators required to operate the M142 Launcher functions.
•
Louvers over the windshield and panels in the side windows for protection from the flash and debris of rocket/missile firings.
1-48. An armored crew cab designated the Increased Crew Protection (ICP) cab under development and will replace the current cab.
Grab Bar Figure 1-4. Crew Cab
Commander’s Hatch
Louvers Window Glass Replaced
Figure 1-4. Crew Cab
LAUNCHER MODULE 1-49. The LM is mounted to the chassis of the vehicle and provides the necessary structure and mechanisms for loading, launching and unloading of all the MFOM. The LM consists of: a platform assembly for aiming the LM in elevation and on which 1 LPC/GMLA is mounted; a turret assembly for aiming the LM in azimuth; a base assembly that interfaces with the carrier vehicle; a hydraulic power control system, the Reload System (RS) and sponsons containing the FCS and other electronic components; and blast panels to protect the sponsons.
1-10
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
PLATFORM ASSEMBLY 1-50. The platform assembly consists of the firing platform, 2 outboard sponsons, and reloading system. It provides the mechanical interface to the LPC/GMLA for the purpose of aiming and firing the weapons. The platform is capable of securing 1 LPC/GMLA, consisting of either 6 rockets or 1 missile. When aiming, the platform assembly can be driven in both azimuth and elevation simultaneously. Two operational speeds are provided; 1 for a tactical environment and 1 for maintenance. The maintenance speed is also used during BC reloading operations of the launcher. When operating with the BC, the platform is driven in only 1 axis at a time.
FIRING PLATFORM 1-51. The firing platform (Figure 1-5) secures the ammunition pods to the launcher and provides the mechanical alignment of the pod to the PNU. The hold down mechanism is used to secure the ammunition pods to the firing platform and is basically the same design found on the M270A1 launchers. However, the material used to manufacture the front hold down hook has been changed to stainless steel to accommodate the firing characteristics of the M142. 1-52. Two manually operated jury struts are integrated into the firing platform for the purpose of securing the LM in place at an elevation of approximately 170 mils (10 degrees). The LM is secured with the jury struts as part of the non-standard procedure of loading LPC/GMLA from the RSV or RST. 1-53. Two elevation travel locks are mounted to the bottom front of the firing platform to secure the firing platform to the turret assembly during travel.
Figure 1-5. Firing Platform
SPONSONS 1-54. The platform assembly consists of the firing platform, 2 outboard sponsons, and reloading system. It provides the mechanical interface to the LPC/GMLA for the purpose of aiming and firing the weapons. The platform is capable of securing 1 LPC/GMLA, consisting of either 6 rockets or 1 missile. When aiming, the platform assembly can be driven in both azimuth and elevation simultaneously. See figure 1-6. 1-55. The curbside sponson houses the BC, PNU, HIMARS Launcher Interface Unit (HLIU), PDB and the Hydraulic Reload Manifold. Access to these components is accomplished through compartment doors on the side and rear of the curbside sponson. In addition, the on-board GPS antenna is mounted on the top of the curbside sponson.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-11
Chapter 1
1-56. The roadside sponson houses the Improved Weapon Interface Unit (IWIU) and provides additional storage area for the crew. The IWIU is accessed through a compartment door on the rear of the roadside sponson. 1-57. Blast panels are fixed to the front surfaces of each sponson and provide protection from rocket blasts.
Figure 1-6 Sponsons
TURRET ASSEMBLY 1-58. The turret assembly (Figure 1-7) houses the elevation drive components and interfaces the platform assembly to the azimuth drive components located in the base assembly. The turret mounts to the outer race of the azimuth geared bearing and rotates the firing platform under the direction of the FCS. Mounted to the turret assembly are components of the Hydraulic Control System (HCS) consisting of the elevation manifold and the elevation cylinder. The turret assembly also houses an elevation resolver to track elevation movement of the LM in relationship to the carrier vehicle.
Figure 1-7 Turret Assembly
1-12
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
BASE ASSEMBLY 1-59. The base assembly (Figure 1-8) provides the mechanical interface between the LM and the carrier vehicle. In addition, the base houses all the azimuth drive components for the system. These components consist of the azimuth-geared bearing, azimuth drive unit, and azimuth resolver.
Figure 1-8 Base Assembly
RELOAD SYSTEM 1-60. The RS for the launcher (Figure 1-9) is incorporated into the design of the platform assembly. It consists of a boom and hoist assembly similar to that on the M270A1 launcher. The RS is located over the top of the LPC/GMLA and does not impede C-130 aircraft loading/off loading. The M142 uses a hydraulic hoist motor for its RS.
Figure 1-9 M142 Reload System
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-13
Chapter 1
SECTION III – MLRS FAMILY OF MUNITIONS (MFOM)
LAUNCH POD 1-61. Each M270/M270A1 holds either 2 LPCs or 2 GMLAs (not a mix of the 2) in the LM (see figure 110). Each M142 holds 1 LPC or GMLA. Each launch pod contains either 6 rocket tubes or 1 missile housing in a containerized shipping, storage, and launch frame. Rockets and missiles are factory assembled and tested. Rockets are stored in fiberglass containers; missiles are stored in an aluminum enclosure with fiberglass camouflage panels on the exterior. Both rockets and missiles are then mounted on the frame. Both the rocket tubes and the missile housing are connected by cable to common electrical connectors. Not only are handling, transports, and loading fixtures similar, the LPC and GMLA are also visually similar. 1-62. The launch pod is 4.04 meters (13 feet, 2 inches) long (without skids) and 1.05 meters (3 feet, 5 inches) wide. The height of the pod is 0.84 meters (2 feet, 9 inches) with skids and 0.72 meters (2 feet, 4 inches) without skids. When loaded with rockets (tactical or practice), each LPC weighs 2,270 kilograms (5,095 pounds). The GMLRS Unitary Rocket LPC is 4.01 meters (m) (158 inches) long, 1.02 m (40.1 inches) wide, and weighs 2274.8 kilograms (5015.1 lbs). 1-63. A Loaded GMLA weighs 2,095 kilograms (5,111 pounds), and an inert training GMLA weighs 1,360 kilograms (2,998 pounds).
CAUTION Do not mix the GMLA pod shoes for Block I with any other ATACMS missile Blocks IA and II M48/M57. The GMLA pod shoes for GPS guided missiles are 1 inch thicker than those for the Block I and for rockets. The added thickness of the pod shoes ensures that the improved missile guidance set (IMGS) for GPS guided missiles is not damaged during handling and shipment. The Block II pod shoes are also made of a more resilient (softer) material, which adds protection for the shock sensitive BAT submunitions. The operator must exercise care when transporting GMLAs with different pod shoe sizes to prevent unbalanced loads. 1-64. Four aluminum bulkheads provide rigidity to the frame and support for the rocket tube or missile housing. Tie-down and lifting D-rings are located on the top of the frame at the 4 corners. A lifting rod is installed and used by the launcher boom and hoist assemblies to lift the container. 1-65. Stacking pins at the top 4 corners of the frame permit stacking of the launch pods. The pods can be stacked 2 high during transport and 4 high during storage. They can be handled by forklift because they have 2 inner bulkheads that serve as support members. Each launch pod is marked for the center of gravity and proper lift areas.
Figure 1-10. Launch Pod
1-14
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
1-66. The detachable skids mounted to the bottom 4 corners of the frame must be removed from the pod before it is loaded into the LM. A quick-release pull pin allows easy removal of the skids. The GMLA also has a lifting rod cover that must be removed before being loaded into the LM. Skids should be replaced prior to downloading and unfired pods to protect the connectors.
MISSILE/LAUNCH POD ASSEMBLY TRAINER 1-67. The training missile/launch pod assembly (M/LPA) facilitates MLRS crew training. The external appearances of both versions of the M/LPA (M68 and M68A2) resemble the tactical M26 LPC. • M68 M/LPA trainer. (Compatible only with the M270 launcher.) This trainer provides the crew with the capability to operate the M270 launcher’s FCS with the family of munitions in a training environment. It is used to train crewmembers in fire mission and reload operations. Using the trainer, the crew can select any of the tactical weapon types along with a variety of simulated weapon peculiar failure modes. The trainer also provides diagnostic capability to check the electrical interface between the trainer and the FCS. • M68A2 M/LPA trainer. The M68A2 is updated to support Precision Munitions . The upgrade consists of hardware and software modifications that allow the M68A2 to function with the M270A1 and M142 launchers. The M68A2 assists in providing realistic training to the MLRS crewmen. The training tasks include fire mission execution, reaction to munitions malfunctions, and reload operations. The M68A2 represents the entire MFOM, to include ATACMS Block II and unitary.
ROCKETS 1-68. The MLRS unguided rockets are tube-launched, spin-stabilized, free flight projectiles. The rockets are assembled, checked, and packaged in a dual-purpose, launch-storage tube at the factory. This design provides for tactical loading and firing of the rocket without troop assembly or detailed inspection. Major components of the rocket assembly include 4 stabilizer fins, a propulsion section, and a warhead section (see figure 1-11). 1-69. Propulsion for the rocket is provided by a solid propellant rocket motor. An umbilical cable, passing through the aft end of the launch tube, links the FCS to an igniter in the rocket nozzle. The motor is ignited by an electrical command from the FCS. 1-70. Each rocket is packaged with the 4 fins folded and secured by wire rope retaining straps. As the rocket moves forward upon firing, lanyard devices trigger a delayed strap-cutting charge. After the rocket leaves the launch tube, the charge cuts the straps. This allows the fins to unfold and lock. The M28A1 training rockets have an additional fin release device to ensure deployment.
Figure 1-11. M26 Rocket
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-15
Chapter 1
1-71. The MLRS rocket follows a ballistic, free flight (unguided) trajectory to the target. The propulsion provided by the solid propellant rocket motor is the same for each rocket, so rocket range is a function of LM elevation. The 4 stabilizer fins at the aft end of the rocket provide in-flight stability by maintaining a constant counterclockwise spin. The initial spin is imparted to the rocket through spin rails mounted on the inner wall of the launch tube.
M26 ROCKET 1-72. This is the basic rocket for MLRS. It is used against personnel, soft and lightly armored targets normally with a target location error (TLE) of 150 meters or less. Larger TLEs may reduce effectiveness. Each rocket dispenses 644 M77 dual-purpose improved conventional munitions (DPICM) sub munitions over the target area.
M26 Warhead Function 1-73. Warhead event is initiated by an electronic time fuze (M445) that is set remotely by the FCS immediately before ignition of the rocket motor. The fuze triggers a center burster charge. This causes the warhead to rupture, the polyurethane filler to shatter, and the sub munitions to be spread over the target area.
M77 Submunition Description 1-74. The armed M77 sub munitions detonate on impact (see figure 1-12). The antimateriel capability is provided through a shaped charge with a built-in standoff. The M77 can penetrate up to 4 inches of armor. Its steel case fragments and produces antipersonnel effects within a radius of 4 meters. 1-75. The sub munitions’ dud rate increases significantly at ranges less than 10 kilometers.
Figure 1-12. M77 Submunition
M26A2 EXTENDED RANGE ROCKET 1-76. The extended range rocket (ER-MLRS) M26A2 is an evolution of the basic M26 rocket that extends the range to 45-plus kilometers. (MET data no older than 30 minutes is required to achieve maximum accuracy at 45 kilometers.) This greater range capability is achieved through a 20-percent reduction in the number of sub munitions and a modified rocket motor. It has the same accuracy as the basic M26 rocket. . The effectiveness of the M26 rocket is maintained in the ER rocket even though the sub munitions payload has been decreased. This is due to the improved center core burster.
1-16
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
M28A1/M28A2 ROCKET (TRAINING) 1-77. The M28A1 and M28A2 rockets (reduced range) are also available for live firing at Army training installations. These practice rockets have a monolithic (relatively uniform and predictable) trajectory and a reduced range (8 to 15 kilometers). The M28A1 and M28A2 are restricted to firing in surface winds of less than 30 knots. This results in a much smaller surface danger zone than the M26, thus allowing it to be fired on many cannon artillery firing ranges. The M28A1 has a blunt nosed, high-drag warhead section that contains an impact activated smoke charge. The M28A2 does not have an impact activated smoke charge. These training rockets have the same motor assembly as the M26 and automatically balance the LPC during firing similar to the M26. This automatic balancing function can be overridden using the rocket selection option in the FCS.
M30/M31 Guided MLRS Rocket 1-78. The M30/M31 GMLRS rocket provides the U.S. Army with a long range, all weather, day and night, rocket artillery system capable of defeating a variety of targets. Target types for the M30/M31 are the same as for those of the M26 and M26A2 rockets. These targets include but are not limited to artillery, multiple rocket launchers (MRLs), air and missile defense (AMD), and lightly armored maneuver units. The M30/M31 can engage targets at a range of 15 - 70 kilometers (km). The M30/M31 rocket gives the MFOM improved capability in the areas of system accuracy, range, and payload types. The much greater accuracy of the M30/M31s allows for rockets to be fired on targets that in the past would not be possible. Engaging targets nearer friendly troops, built up areas, and civilian population is now a consideration. 1-79. The M30/M31 guided rockets are packaged in and fired from an LPC with the same height, width, and length characteristics as the MLRS LPC. The guided unitary rocket is equipped with a GMLRS motor, a guidance package, and carries a warhead/payload that may attack a variety of targets to include those that require low collateral damage. Design of the rocket allows handling and maintenance within the current system. The guided unitary rocket is fired from both the M270A1 and the M142 launcher.
M30/M31 GMLRS ROCKET COMPONENTS Propulsion Section 1-80. The propulsion section of the M30/M31 is similar to that of the M26A2 but does incorporate some unique characteristics. The rocket motor has the same physical dimensions of the M26A2 rocket motor, but incorporates a spinning tailfin section (the tailfins on the M26 and M26A2 rockets are stationary). The purpose of the spinning tailfin section is to reduce the effect that the wash from the canards have on the rocket’s flight. The solid fuel used in the rocket motor of the M30/M31 is the same fuel used in the ATACMS. This is a slower burning fuel than that used in the M26 and M26A2 rockets, which provides the M30/M31 its extended range.
Embedded GPS Receiver 1-81. The embedded GPS Receiver (EGR) provides the M30/M31 rockets with very accurate navigational updates by the use of orbiting satellites. These updates (made in flight) improve the rocket in–flight and terminal accuracy, regardless of range to target. The EGR determines precise position, velocity, time of day, and range information. Although it has greater accuracy while in the GPS aided mode, the M30 is not GPS dependent and will achieve a high level of accuracy in the non-aided mode.
Warhead / Guidance Section 1-82. The M30 warhead section contains 404 PI-M77 DPICM grenades, a center core burster (CCB), and a polyurethane support. 1-83. The M30/M31 uses an internal guidance and control assembly (GCA) that makes in-flight adjustments, guiding the rocket to the target. The GCA consists of the internal measurement unit (IMU), guidance and control (G&C) computer, GPS antenna and receiver, control actuation system, canards, electrical safe/arm device (ESAD), umbilical cable, and battery. The GCA section occupies the forward
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-17
Chapter 1
portion of the rocket and provides the commands to navigate the rocket to its aim point. The IMU and GPS are tactical grade, non-developmental items (NDI). Adjustments in the flight pattern are made by the use of 4 small non-folding canards located in the ogive portion of the nose cone. The canards are controlled by electromechanical actuators in response to navigation and control commands from the GCA. The GCA also provides the electrical commands to activate the payload ESAD, initiating the CCB, and dispensing the sub munitions over the target for the M30 or the warhead fuze for the M31. The GCA components are powered by an on-board thermal battery that is activated just prior to launch. Figure 1-13 shows the components of the M30; figure 1-14 shows the components of the M31. 1-84. The M31 warhead payload is an explosive filled steel canister designed to burst into fragments of a controlled size. The canister weighs approximately 196 pounds and contains 51.5 pounds of PBXN 109 insensitive explosive and a tri-mode fuze. 1-85. The warhead is capable of 3 fuze modes; proximity, point detonating and delay. 1-86. The proximity fuze mode causes warhead detonation at approximately 7 meters above the target, the point detonating mode causes detonation upon impact, and the delay mode causes detonation as the nose cone penetrates about 1 meter into the ground, this places the explosive filled canister partially below the surface of the ground.
Figure 1-13. M30 GMLRS Rocket
1-18
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
Figure 1-14. M31 GMLRS Rocket
Table 1-2. MFOM Characteristics
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-19
Chapter 1
MISSILES 1-87. The ATACMS missiles are designed to carry a variety of sub munitions, including “smart” munitions and lethal mechanisms to provide a wide range of future capabilities. Currently, the Army has the M39 ATACMS Block I, M39A1 Block IA, M39A3 Block II, and M48/M57 missiles. Notes: When firing the ATACMS and the FIRE switch is toggled, battery squibs are activated within milliseconds. When the SAFE/ARM switch is safe, the firing sequence will be halted. As the squibs have been activated, the FCP will display a misfire. The missile cannot be used for another fire mission. Treat the missile as if it malfunctioned by downloading it and notifying the ammunition transfer point (ATP) personnel for disposition instructions. The missile can be repaired by depot level maintenance. If the tactical situation is such that the loss of an ATACMS missile to the enemy is imminent and evacuation is not feasible or possible, destroy the missile by using demolition charges in accordance with TM 9-1425-648-13&P. If the ATACMS missile becomes unserviceable due to external damage or weapon failures, contact the ATP for disposition. MLRS ammunition is not to be left unattended on the battlefield.
COMMON MISSILE ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS 1-88. All ATACMS missiles have 4 sections: the guidance and control section, propulsion section, control section, and the warhead assembly (see figure 1-15).
Propulsion Section 1-89. The solid rocket motor furnishes the energy necessary to launch the missile and sustain missile flight for a sufficient time to meet altitude and range requirements. The solid propellant motor consists of a motor case, propellant, insulation/liner, nozzle, and igniter arm/fire assembly.
Control Section 1-90. The primary functions of the control section assembly are to position the missile fins, provide the missile electrical power while in flight, and support selected pyrotechnic functions. The fins are folded when the missile is installed in the GMLA. Electro-mechanical actuators automatically unfold and lock the spring-loaded fins in flight position when the missile leaves the GMLA to control the missile during flight.
ATACMS BLOCK I 1-91. The Block I warhead is used against personnel and soft stationary targets normally with a TLE of 150 meters or less. Larger TLEs may reduce effectiveness. Each missile dispenses a cargo of approximately 950 antipersonnel/antimateriel (APAM) M74 grenades. The missile has 3 programmable dispense patterns (small, medium, and large) and has off-axis launch capability to enhance crew/launcher survivability from enemy counter fire. The M39 Block I missile (ATACMS Block I) has a minimum range of 25 kilometers and a maximum range of 165 kilometers. Note: When firing Block I, the operator will experience a 13-second delay after initiating the fire command before the missile engine ignites.
M39 Warhead Function 1-92. Warhead event is initiated by an electronic time fuze (M219A2) that is set in the same manner as the M445 electronic time fuze of the M26 rocket. The fuze detonates shaped charges mounted to the skin and bulkheads. This, in turn, severs the skin. The M74 grenades are distributed over the target area by centrifugal force and air stream currents. Arming of the M74 grenades is accomplished by the spin action induced on the individual grenade.
1-20
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
Guidance and Control Section 1-93. The Block I Guidance and Control Section (GCS) provide all navigation, guidance, autopilot, and internal communications functions for the missile while in flight and for all ground operations. The missile's inertial sensors, electronics, and software provide continuous determination of missile position, attitude, and motion.
Figure 1-15. M39/M39A1 Missile
M74 Submunition 1-94. The M74 grenade is filled with composition B explosive filler and is covered by a steel shell (see figure 1-16). Upon impact and detonation, each grenade breaks up into a large number of high-velocity steel fragments that are effective against targets such as personnel, truck tires, missile rounds, thin-skinned vehicles, and radar antennas. This submunition is not effective against armored vehicles. The M74 grenade also contains incendiary material and has an antipersonnel radius of 15 meters.
Figure 1-16. M74 Submunition
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-21
Chapter 1
ATACMS BLOCK IA 1-95. The Block IA missile is a conventional, semi-ballistic missile that employs warheads delivering either 300 APAM (M74) sub munitions against “soft” stationary targets at ranges from 70 to 300+ kilometers or a 500 lb blast fragmentation warhead to 270 + km. The ATACMS M74 payload was decreased to increase the missile’s range (weight for range trade-off) while the lethality was maintained by the integration of a GPS-aided IMGS to improve the missile’s accuracy. The Block IA is fired from the M270A1 or M142 launcher. Block IA has off-axis launch capability to enhance crew/launcher survivability. Note: If the Block IA missile is fired from a non-GPS aided launcher, the missile will only achieve Block I accuracy.
Guidance and Control Section 1-96. The guidance and control section contains the IMGS with an EGR for more accurate in-flight guidance corrections and improved accuracy. The IMGS performs all inertial navigation, guidance, mission control, and built-in-test functions. The IMGS is also the central communications control point within the missile. The IMGS contains the inertial sensor assembly, an electronics assembly, and the EGR that improves missile accuracy over extended ranges.
Inertial Sensor Assembly 1-97. The inertial sensor assembly (ISA) contains 3 ring laser gyros and 3 accelerometers with associated electronics. The ISA senses movement and acceleration within the 3 axes (pitch, roll, and yaw) of the missile. The inertial sensor computer (ISC) provides the ISA output to the IMGS.
Electronics Assembly 1-98. The electronics assembly contains 2 onboard computer systems that process all ISA and EGR data, and perform all the guidance and control functions.
Embedded GPS Receiver 1-99. The EGR provides the missile with very accurate navigational updates from orbiting GPS satellites during flight. These updates improve missile in-flight and terminal accuracy, regardless of the range to the target. The EGR has an external, two-element, beam-shifting antenna system and electronics to acquire, track, and process GPS satellite information on the ascending and descending phases of the trajectory. The beam shifting also allows the missile to pull forward or aft appropriately to enhance tracking performance in a high electromagnetic countermeasure (EMC) or jamming environment. The inertial navigation system (INS) will continue to guide the missile to dispense should the missile be jammed. The EGR determines precise position, velocity, time of day, and pseudo-range information. The launcher initializes the EGR with GPS data. If this does not occur, the improved INS guides the missile to the target area. The missile may still acquire GPS satellite data in flight. In this case, the missile's delivery accuracy improves.
Warhead Assembly 1-100. The warhead section contains approximately 300 M-74 antipersonnel, antimateriel grenades (the same sub munitions used in the Block I missile). Block IA has 3 programmable dispense patterns (small, medium, and large). The method of dispense is identical to the Block I missile (the missile spins in its descending trajectory).
ATACMS BLOCK II 1-101. The Block II missile is a conventional, semi-ballistic missile that deploys BAT sub munitions at ranges between 35 and 145 kilometers. The Block II missile contains 13 BAT sub munitions and is identified by the JTC weapon code. The missile is divided into 4 sections: guidance and control, warhead,
1-22
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
propulsion, and control. (See figure 1-17.) Propulsion and control sections are the same as the Block IA missile. The guidance and control, and warhead sections are described below.
Guidance and Control Section 1-102. Components in this section provide all navigation, guidance, autopilot, and internal communications functions for the missile during ground operations and flight. The major components are the IMGS II and the sequencer interface unit (SIU). The IMGS II consists of the EGR, the navigation and guidance computer, the ISC, and the submunition interface processor (SIP). The inertial sensors, aided by the GPS receiver, continuously update position, attitude, and motion to the IMGS II. 1-103. The IMGS II processes guidance and autopilot functions. It also provides all communications with the launcher electronics for launch control, ground support equipment for maintenance, and the control system electronics unit (CSEU) for missile fin actuator control. The SIU serves as the electronic interface between the IMGS and the BAT sub munitions. The SIU applies power to the sub munitions during the missile built-in test (BIT). It also turns on the submunition batteries and commands the munitions’ dispense.
Warhead Section 1-104. The warhead section consists of the BAT submunitions, a skin severance system, and a payload dispensing system. It contains a formed stainless steel skin with a central support structure and front and rear bulkheads. 3 aluminum extrusions connect the bulkheads and provide a central wire route. The warhead section also includes an electronic safe and arm device (ESAD).
Figure 1-17. Block II Missile
BAT Submunition 1-105. BAT is an autonomous submunition that employs passive acoustic and infrared sensors to find, attack, and destroy tanks and other armored combat vehicles (ACVs) moving in formations. The submunition is an unpowered, aerodynamically stable “glider” that is approximately 36 inches long, 5.5 inches in diameter with wings folded, and weighs 44 pounds. BAT includes the following components. (See figure 1-18.)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-23
Chapter 1
• •
• • • • •
Air vehicle. The air vehicle consists of the airframe (nose, wings, flaps, fins, mid-body, aftbody, and umbilical), deceleration and stabilization subsystem (DSS), actuator mechanism, encapsulation and dispensing protection subassembly (EDPS), and flight sensors. Central electronics unit (CEU). The CEU contains the computer processing hardware, software, and firmware that perform calculations required to accomplish mission functions. The submunition CEU software and infrared (IR) sensor software are externally programmable and uploaded before launch. Sensor. The acoustic sensor consists of the acoustic probes, preamplifiers, and electronic components to detect and locate targets. Infrared seeker. The IR seeker contains the seeker optics, dual band IR components, electronics, processor, and software to detect, acquire, and track targets. Power supply. The power supply provides enough power for the longest possible flight mission. Munitions section. The munitions section contains the warhead, safe and arm circuits, and fusing/firing components. Software. Both the CEU and IR sensor software is loaded before use. It can be updated and externally programmed.
Figure 1-18. BAT Submunition Note: The ATACMS Block II missile should not be launched in the non-GPS aided mode from the M270A1 or M142 launcher due to the decreased accuracy from only inertial guidance.
M48/M57 ATACMS Quick Reaction Unitary 1-106. The ATACMS quick reaction unitary (QRU) missile is a modified Block IA missile with a warhead that integrates the 500-pound unitary high explosive warhead used in the Navy HARPOON missile. The modifications enable the engagement of point targets while minimizing collateral damage. Note: The ATACMS QRU missile can be fired only from a GPS aided launcher. The QRU requires the successful transfer of GPS keys/data upon arming the missile. If the transfer of data fails, a failure prompt will be displayed to the operator.
1-24
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
Table 1-3. ATACMS Family of Munitions Characteristics
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-25
Chapter 1
SECTION IV – ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT This section implements STANAG 2934, chapter 11.
AMMUNITION RESUPPLY VEHICLE AND TRAILER (HEMTT/HEMAT) 1-107. The M985 HEMTT is a 10-ton, 8-wheel, or 8-wheel-drive truck with a 5,400-pound lift capacity materiel-handling crane (see figure 1-19). A secure FM radio provides voice command and control capability. The rear-mounted crane can traverse 6,400 mils to the left or right. Both the HEMTT and the HEMAT can be loaded and unloaded with the crane. The HEMAT does not have to be unhooked from the HEMTT. The truck carries 4 launch pods with a gross vehicle weight of 59,000 pounds. Its operating range is 300 miles, and it can climb a 30 percent slope. The HEMTT has a 445-horsepower diesel engine with an automatic transmission. It can be transported by C-130 aircraft in an unloaded configuration and by C5A/C-5B and C-17 aircraft in a loaded tactical configuration. (See appendix A.)
Figure 1-19. M985 HEMTT 1-108. The M989A1 HEMAT can carry 4 launch pods and has a fully loaded gross weight of 31,000 pounds (see figure 1-20). A launcher can tow the trailer in an emergency.
Figure 1-20. M989A1 HEMAT
1-26
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
HIMARS RESUPPLY VEHICLE AND RESUPPLY TRAILER Movement Tracking System 1-109. The M1084A1 with MHE RSV (Figure 1-21) is a FMTV variant capable of carrying 2 LPC/GMLA. The RSV can tow the M1095 RST (Figure 1-22) which is capable of carrying an additional 2 LPC/GMLA. With the assigned 2-man crew and the on-board MHE, the crew is capable of loading and off-loading LPC/GMLA to and from the RSV and RST. The RSV is equipped with secure radio communications capability that is compatible with the M142 launcher. Additionally, the RSV can be equipped with a MTS for controlling movement. MTS is a global satellite communications system that provides text messaging and vehicle tracking capabilities. It allows a commander to determine where his vehicles are, what their status is, and to communicate with them in near real-time. 1-110. Because the system is satellite-based, as long as the MTS satellite transceiver has an unhindered view of the satellite, it will be able to communicate with other on-line MTS systems 1-111. The MTS is made up of 2 configurations, the Control Station and the Mobile Unit.
Figure 1-21. M1084A1 Resupply Vehicle
Figure 1-22. M1095 Resupply Trailer 1-112. The Control Station provides command functionality for the MTS and is operated by the battalion ammunition management section and the battery support platoon headquarters. The control station configuration (Figure 1-23) consists of a laptop computer with a compact disc-read only memory (CDROM) drive for National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency (NGA) map loading, a satellite transceiver with 100-foot cable, a Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR) and a portable printer.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-27
Chapter 1
Figure 1-23. MTS Control Station 1-113. The Mobile Unit (Figure 1-24) is designed for permanent installation in a vehicle using an installation kit designed for that vehicle, and consists of a satellite transceiver and ruggedized computer with appropriate cabling and a PLGR. It provides text messaging and NGA theater maps for displaying MTS-equipped vehicles. Each RSV is equipped with a Mobile Unit. Figure 1-24 shows a Mobile Unit mounted in the RSV cab.
Figure 1-24. MTS Mobile Unit
1-28
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
Figure 1-25. MTS Mobile Unit in the RSV 1-114. The satellite transceiver is placed on a magnetic mount (Figure 1-26) that is permanently mounted behind the cab. The mount does not increase the height of the vehicle when the transceiver is mounted. Any mobile unit can be configured to function as a control station.
Figure 1-26. MTS Transceiver Mount
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-29
Chapter 1
COMMAND AND CONTROL SYSTEM 1-115. Tactical command and control and technical fire direction of MLRS units is provided through the C2 system. The C2 system includes the combination of the radios and computer systems involved in the C2 process. MLRS units primarily use the AFATDS functionality as internal battalion, battery, and platoon C2 devices, AFATDS as the primary devices at echelons above battalion to which the battalion reports. The AFATDS communicates digitally with the FCS, which is the onboard computer on the launcher. The FCS provides both technical firing data and launcher fire control. The AFATDS can also communicate digitally with the following systems: • Forward observer system (FOS). • Pocket size Forward Entry Device (PFED). • Firefinder radar (AN/TPQ-36 and AN/TPQ-37). • Meteorological measuring set (MMS). • Airborne target handover system (ATHS). • Joint surveillance and target attack radar system (JSTARS) common ground station. • Fire support team (FIST) digital message device (DMD). • Tactical fire direction system digital message device (TFDMD). • Tactical Airspace Integration System (TAIS).
AFATS 1-116. AFATDS is the field artillery’s fires warfighting function C2 system within the Army tactical command and control system (ATCCS). It provides decision aids and an information system for the control, coordination, and synchronization of all types of fire support means. The objective AFATDS supports all parts of the fire support system: fire support C2 operational facilities (OPFACs), personnel, target acquisition, battlefield surveillance, and weapon systems. AFATDS acts as the force field artillery C2 system . 1-117. The AFATDS functionality provides automated fire support, fire unit status, ammunition accounting, fire unit database management, fire unit selection, fire unit scheduling, ATACMS platoon and target air hazard area computation, meteorological coordination, and geometry processing in support of the MLRS mission. 1-118. AFATDS is interconnected by the area common user system (ACUS), the Army data distribution system (ADDS), and combat net radio (CNR) communications. AFATDS operates with other services using joint variable message formats (JVMF) or the United States message text formats (USMTF). The system complies with standardized message formats derived from the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) standardization agreement (STANAG) 2934 and bilateral agreements with the United Kingdom, Federal Republic of Germany, and other nations, as applicable. 1-119. AFATDS consists of hardware devices, software modules, and necessary communications equipment to provide seamless C2. The objective version provides full fire support planning, technical and tactical fire direction, and advanced automated decision aids, all of which significantly contribute to effective AFOM employment. Units that were previously fielded with AFATDS will receive a software upgrade package to install into the latest version of the hardware. Each subsequent build will increasingly automate all fire support tasks, ending with the objective system that will be fully automated.
SURVEY EQUIPMENT POSITION AZIMUTH DETERMINING SYSTEM 1-120. The survey section of the MLRS battalion is equipped with 3 position azimuth determining systems (PADS). The PADS is a self-contained surveying system that rapidly determines accurate location, azimuth, and altitude. The system, operated by 2 Soldiers, gives the MLRS battalion a highly mobile survey capability.
1-30
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
System Description
GPS 1-121. The Defense Advanced GPS Receiver (DAGR) is a highly accurate satellite signal navigation set (AN/PSN-13). The set operates as a part of GPS. Up to 5 satellites are tracked continuously and simultaneously. The AN/PSN-13 has an antenna, keyboard, backlit display, receiver, processor unit, and a battery. Note: PADS is always the preferred method of survey over the DAGR because of greater accuracy. 1-122. The AN/PSN-13 is designed for battlefield use anywhere in the world. It is sealed watertight for all-weather and day or night operations. 1-123. Capability is included for installation in ground facilities and air, sea, and land vehicles. The AN/PSN-13 is operated (stand-alone) using prime battery power and an integral antenna. It can be used with an external power source and an external antenna. 1-124. GPS receivers rely on electronic line of sight with the satellites. Dense foliage, buildings, mountains, and canyons will mask the signal. All GPS receivers automatically try to track visible satellites as low as 5 degrees above the level horizon. Each receiver has a function that displays the direction and vertical angle to the satellite. This display indicates if masking is a problem. Move to another location when 1 satellite signal is masked and another satellite is not visible. 1-125. Multipath (reflected signals) may occur if the GPS antenna is tilted away from a satellite. This may cause the reflected signal from the satellite to have more signal strength than the direct signal, causing several hundred meters of position error. 1-126. The PLGR is only useful for position control for MLRS when it provides a figure of merit (FOM) of 1. The FOM is a number from 1 to 9 located in the upper right portion of the display, which shows the total estimated position error (EPE) as shown in table 1-4. Table 1-4. Estimated Position Error FOM Value
Estimated Position Error
1
25 m
2
50 m
3
75 m
4
100 m
5
200 m
6
500 m
7
1,000 m
8
5,000 m
9
> 5,000 m
SECTION V – RADAR
AN/TPQ-36 RADAR 1-127. The AN/TPQ-36 is optimized to locate shorter range, high-angle, lower velocity indirect fire weapons, such as mortars and shorter range artillery. It can also locate longer-range artillery and rockets within its maximum range. The planning ranges used as a baseline to position the AN/TPQ-36 are 12 kilometers for artillery and mortars and 24 kilometers for rockets. The minimum range of the AN/TPQ-36 is 750 meters. These planning ranges are where the highest probability of detection lies for the systems design.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
1-31
Chapter 1
1-128. The AN/TPQ-36 version 8 electronics upgrade provides reduced emplacement and displacement times, faster access to data, increased memory, and digital map storage capability. It has a new high-speed signal processor capable of processing 20 targets per minute, providing for remote operations up to 100 meters from the antenna transceiver group and an enhanced probability of detection. These changes are accomplished with a new hard disk drive, a flat panel display/control unit, a signal data processor, and a portable laptop computer mounted in a lightweight multipurpose shelter.
AN/TPQ-37 RADAR 1-129. The AN/TPQ-37 is optimized to locate longer range, low-angle, higher velocity weapons, such as long-range artillery and rockets. However, it will also locate short-range, high-angle, lower velocity weapons (mortars and artillery) complementing the AN/TPQ-36. The planning ranges used as a baseline to position the AN/TPQ-37 are 30 kilometers for mortars and 50 kilometers for rockets. The minimum range of the system is 3 kilometers. These planning ranges are where the highest probability of detection lies for the system design.
1-32
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Chapter 2
The MLRS Battalion MLRS units are organized and equipped to provide field artillery (FA) rocket and missile fires for the supported commander and to reinforce the fires of other fires battalions. One MLRS battalion is organic to a fires brigade (FIB). Additional MLRS units may be attached or assigned to a FIB.
MLRS BATTALION 2-1. The mission of the MLRS battalion is to provide field artillery rocket and missile fires in support of the brigade combat team (BCT), division, corps, theater army, and joint or multinational forces. “The battalion may be further attached to a Marine artillery regiment, other Army or joint controlling headquarters or a multinational force.” 2-2. The MLRS/HIMARS battalion is composed of a headquarters and headquarters (HHB) battery, and 3 MLRS firing batteries with 6 launchers each. A forward support company (FSC) from the brigade support battalion is typically attached or assigned. (See figure 2-1). The battalion can operate as a single unit or it can detach batteries or platoons to perform separate tactical missions.
Figure 2-1. MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Organization
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
2-1
Chapter 2
HEADQUARTERS AND HEADQUARTERS BATTERY 2-3. The HHB provides command, control, administrative, and service support for organic and attached elements. It also procures, distributes, administers, and coordinates supply transactions for all classes of supply, and coordinates unit maintenance support not within the capabilities of the firing batteries. The HHB operates as a tactical and administrative headquarters. The headquarters element will be positioned for the most effective control of the battalion assets commensurate with the terrain, combat mission and responsiveness to the higher headquarters and supported units. The HHB is organic to the MLRS battalion and is organized and equipped to coordinate administrative, logistical, maintenance, and communications support for the battalion headquarters and 3 firing batteries (see figure 2-2). The functional elements of the HHB are discussed below. Note: In some cases, the personnel and equipment authorizations may differ from a unit’s modification table of organization and equipment (MTOE).
Figure 2-2. Headquarters and Headquarters Battery
BATTALION COMMAND SECTION 2-4. The battalion headquarters provides command, control and supervision for all tactical and administrative operations of the battalion. The section consists of the battalion commander, the executive officer (XO), and the command sergeant major (CSM). The headquarters controls and coordinates battalion activities.
HEADQUARTERS AND HEADQUARTERS BATTERY Battery Headquarters 2-5. The battery headquarters provides command, control and supervision for the battery. The HQ consists of the battery commander, first sergeant (1SG), and 1 driver.).
2-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
The MLRS Battalion
Battery Supply Section 2-6. The supply section draws and issues all classes of supply except I, V, VIII, and IX. The supply section consists of a supply sergeant and an armor. Battery supply sergeants use SAMS-E to order replenishment from the BSB. The forward support company carries the supplies forward with the next LOGPAC, or immediately, if needed. Barrier materiel may also be requested as ESPs
S-3 SECTION 2-7. The S-3 section coordinates all tactical, technical and logistical operations and planning for the battalion. The section employs the batteries to meet the needs of the supported units. It develops warning orders (WARNORDs), operations orders (OPORD)/field artillery support plans (FASP), and fragmentary orders (FRAGORDs); maintains the tactical situation maps and overlays; and coordinates tactical movements and positioning. The S-3 supervises the tactical operations center (TOC) and the operations section. The section is staffed with the operations officer and the operations sergeant; 2 master gunner/assistant operations sergeants; chief surveyor; a chemical officer; a chemical, biological, radiological, nuclear (CBRN) noncommissioned officer (NCO); senior radio operator-maintainer; 2 fire direction specialists, and 2 radio operator-maintainers.
FIRE DIRECTION CENTER (BATTALION) 2-8. The fire direction center (FDC) has tactical control over, and provides tactical fire direction to, the firing batteries. The fire direction officer (FDO) supervises the FDC. It is staffed with a chief fire direction computer, 2 fire direction computers, 4 battery display operators, and 2 fire direction specialists -.
S-2 SECTION 2-9. The S-2 section processes battlefield information and coordinates intelligence requirements within the battalion and with the supported maneuver units and military intelligence assets. The S-2 supervises the section, which includes a targeting officer, the intelligence sergeant, an intelligence analyst, and a fire direction specialist. The intelligence section— • Provides intelligence and security information. • Conducts FA-focused intelligence preparation of the battlefield (IPB). • Tracks the priority intelligence requirements (PIR) related to fire support. • Develops the PIR related to the battalion protection warfighting functions. • Manages all attached field artillery target acquisition systems and Army, joint, and national sensor system down-links under the battalion's operational control. • Coordinates with the S-3 for survey support for attached target acquisition (TA) assets. • Processes and correlates targeting data to include predicting and monitoring assigned high-payoff target (HPT) locations and passing this information to the controlling FA headquarters and the battalion FDC. • Coordinates the battalion ground and air defense plans with the batteries, and nominates zone coverage and cueing schedules for all attached radars.
SURVEY SECTION 2-10. The survey section provides survey support for the battalion and operates under the control of the S-3/operations section. This section consists of the 3 PADS team chiefs, 3 PADS vehicle drivers, and 3 FA surveyors for the M270, 1 Pads team chief and 1 Pads vehicle driver for M270A1/HIMARS and one surveyor.
LIAISON SECTION 2-11. The 2 sections provide liaison to the appropriate HQ in accordance with the U.S. command or support relationship or assigned NATO field artillery tactical task. Two teams are necessary to accommodate frequent changes in tactical mission assignment, adequately support joint and
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
2-3
Chapter 2
multinational forces, and provide liaison when supporting Marine air ground task force (MAGTF) operations or conducting theater missile defense (TMD). Each section consists of a liaison officer (LNO), liaison sergeant, and liaison specialist. The liaison teams may also augment existing fires cells (FCs) or fires elements (FEs).
S-6 SECTION 2-12. The S-6 section is responsible for the maintenance and repair of the battalion communications systems. This section attaches teams forward with firing batteries. The S-6 section consists of the S-6, a signal support systems chief, 3 forward signal support noncommissioned officers (NCOs), 1 signal information service specialist, and 1 signal support system specialist.
AUTOMATION MANAGEMENT SECTION 2-13. The automation management section is responsible for management of the battalion local area network (LAN). The section is composed of 2 LAN managers.
RETRANSMISSION TEAM 2-14. The retransmission (RETRANS) team establishes and maintains the frequency modulated (FM) retransmission station, as required. Dual retransmission capability is essential to maintaining both FM voice and data communications over extended distances. The section is composed of the team chief and 2 radio retransmission operators.
BATTALION S-1 SECTION 2-15. The battalion S-1 section provides administrative and legal support and helps the battalion commander provide for the welfare of the battalion personnel. The battalion S-1 supervises the section. The section includes a senior human resources sergeant, 3 human resources sergeants, a paralegal specialist, and 3 human resources specialists.
UNIT MINISTRY TEAM 2-16. The ministry team (UMT) facilitates and coordinates religious support for the battalion commander and is composed of the chaplain and chaplain’s assistant. UMT duties include providing worship opportunities; administering sacraments, rites, and ordinances; providing pastoral counseling; ministering to casualties; and providing spiritual fitness training to enhance soldier morale and unit cohesion. The chaplain personally delivers religious support to the battalion. The chaplain’s assistant performs religious support duties and coordination for religious programs, worship, and crisis intervention.
MEDICAL SERVICES Medical Platoon Headquarters 2-17. The platoon HQ coordinates the operations, administration, and logistics of the medical platoon. The medical platoon leader, field medical assistant, and section NCO comprise the HQ. The medical treatment section provides battalion medical support. This section includes the medical treatment team, combat medic team, and ambulance team.
Medical Treatment Team 2-18. The medical treatment team provides unit level combat health support to the battalion. The medical treatment team includes a physician assistant, a health care sergeant and 2 health care specialists.
2-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
The MLRS Battalion
Medical Evacuation Squad 2-19. The medical evacuation squad provides evacuation of casualties from the battalion aid station to the nearest supporting medical company treatment facility or evacuation point. This team consists of 1 ambulance team leader and an ambulance aide/driver.
Combat Medic Section 2-20. This section consists of 6 trauma specialists. A trauma specialist is allocated to each firing platoon to perform immediate life saving measures to casualties.
SUPPLY AND SERVICES Battalion S-4 Section 2-21. The battalion S-4 section establishes the administrative and logistics operating center (ALOC) and coordinates the overall logistical activities of the battalion. It works closely with the operations section in monitoring the resupply of ammunition and fuel. The battalion S-4 supervises the battalion S-4 section and the battalion ammunition officer (BAO), and serves as an ALOC shift leader. The section includes a property book officer, a senior maintenance supervisor, a supply sergeant, an assistant supply sergeant, a property book NCO, and 2 supply specialists. .
Ammunition Management Section 2-22. The BAO monitors the ammunition status of the battalion and manages all aspects of ammunition resupply. The section is composed of the ammunition officer, ammunition sergeant, and a vehicle driver.
FIRING BATTERY 2-23. MLRS firing batteries provide medium-range rocket and long-range missile fires in support of the brigade, division, corps, theater Army, joint or multinational forces, and MAGTFs, or in the conduct of TMD to destroy, neutralize, or suppress the enemy. The firing battery is organic to an MLRS battalion, and may be further attached to a Marine artillery regiment, multinational forces in support of multinational initiatives, or other controlling headquarters, as required. 2-24. Whether the MLRS battalion is organic, assigned, or attached to a FIB, the MLRS firing batteries are organized the same and are structured for semi-independent operations. The MLRS firing battery consists of a battery headquarters, a battery operations center (BOC), a support platoon, and 2 firing platoons (see figure 2-3).
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
2-5
Chapter 2
Figure 2-3. MLRS Firing Battery
FIRING BATTERY HEADQUARTERS 2-25. The battery headquarters (HQ) provides command and control over all elements of the battery. The HQ is composed of the commander, 1SG, and a vehicle driver. The battery commander, 1SG, and the BOC provide the necessary C2 of the battery.
BATTERY OPERATIONS CENTER 2-26. The BOC provides tactical fire direction planning and directs battery operations in coordination with the battery commander. It plans, coordinates, and executes tactical movements and positioning, maintains situational understanding for the battery. The operations officer supervises the BOC, which is staffed with a battery operations sergeant, an FDC section chief, 2 battery display operators, 4 fire direction specialists, and the CBRN NCO.
FIRING PLATOON HEADQUARTERS X2 2-27. The platoon headquarters conducts site reconnaissance and supervises launcher positioning and operations. It performs all command, control, and logistic coordination functions for the platoon. Each platoon operation center (POC) includes the platoon leader, platoon sergeant, a reconnaissance sergeant, a battery display operator, 2 fire direction specialists, and a driver. The headquarters performs tactical fire direction, when required. The firing platoon leader provides command and control for the firing platoon. Each platoon HQ typically controls 3 firing sections.
FIRING SECTION X6 2-28. The 6 firing sections are normally equally divided between the 2 platoon HQ. The firing section is responsible for tactically positioning the launcher for survivability and engaging the enemy with indirect fire. Each firing section lays, aims, loads, and fires the launcher. The section performs all technical fire control, operator maintenance, and launcher organizational maintenance. Each firing section includes a section chief, a gunner, and a launcher driver.
2-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
The MLRS Battalion
SUPPORT PLATOON Support Platoon Headquarters 2-29. The support platoon HQ supervises organizational supply and maintenance activities, to include Class V re-supply, in support of battery operations. The platoon headquarters includes a platoon leader, a platoon sergeant and a vehicle driver. The platoon leader commands and controls the support platoon. The platoon consists of 2 ammunition sections, a supply section.
Ammunition Section x2 2-30. Each ammunition section provides Class V (rocket, missile, and small arms ammunition) support to the battery. The section chief supervises the ammunition section. Each section includes an assistant section chief and 10 MLRS ammunition specialists.
Supply Section 2-31. The supply section includes the supply sergeant and an armor. The section requisitions and distributes supplies for the battery elements, distributes Class III to battery elements and provides small arms repairs.
FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY 2-32. The forward support company (FSC) is organic to the BSB and assigned to the MLRS battalion. The FSC provides field maintenance, subsistence (Class I), and supply distribution for the battalion. The FSC consists of a company headquarters, a field feeding section, a field maintenance platoon and a distribution platoon. It can operate from the battalion field trains, combat trains, or split and operate from both trains. The distribution platoon provides distribution of all classes of supply except Class VIII (medical). Class VIII is distributed by the medical platoon. It is not designed to carry an authorized stockage list (ASL), except as necessary to support issue and turn-in operations. It may carry critical LRUs and combat spares as authorized or directed. The field maintenance platoon can function consolidated or split, depending on the METT-TC. The field maintenance platoon consists of a maintenance control section, service and recovery section, base maintenance section, and 2 maintenance support teams (MSTs) to support the firing batteries.
BATTALION DUTIES 2-33. The following discussions cover the major duties of personnel in MLRS units. They are not intended to be all-inclusive but rather to highlight major functions unique to the system.
BATTALION COMMANDER 2-34. The battalion commander, aided by the battery commanders and staff, controls all the tactical, training, logistical, and administrative activities of the battalion. He directs employment of the battalion in accordance with assigned missions. He works closely with the commanders of supported and supporting units to accomplish the battalion's mission. He establishes policies to promote discipline and morale within the battalion.
COMMAND SERGEANT MAJOR 2-35. The command sergeant major (CSM) is the senior NCO in the battalion. The CSM is responsible for executing established policies and enforcing standards pertaining to performance, care, conduct, appearance, personnel management, and training of enlisted soldiers. The CSM provides advice and makes recommendations to the commander and staff on all matters pertaining to enlisted soldiers and their families.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
2-7
Chapter 2
EXECUTIVE OFFICER 2-36. The XO directs, supervises, and ensures coordination of the battalion staff and sections. The XO oversees all logistical functions and acts on behalf of the commander to direct the logistical support of the battalion. He commands the battalion in the absence of the commander.
S-1 2-37. The S-1 is the coordinating staff officer for all matters concerning human resources support (military and civilian). The S-1 provides technical direction to fires battalion units in the areas of: personnel readiness management (PRM), personnel accounting and strength reporting (PASR), personal information management (PIM), casualty operations, postal operations, essential personnel services (EPS), reception, replacement, return to duty, rest and recuperation, and redeployment (R5), HR planning, and morale, welfare, and recreation (MWR) operations. The S-1 coordinates with the battalion UMT, medical platoon and is the staff point of contact for equal opportunity, retention, inspector general, and morale support activities. The S-1 shares responsibility with the S-4 for manning sustainment cell operations and serve as a shift leader in the ALOC. The responsibilities of the S-1 also include—. •
Plan, direct and manage HR core competencies (PASR, PIM, PRM, R5, MWR, EPS, postal operations, casualty operations, and HR planning)
•
Coordinate all aspects of Health Service Support, military pay, and religious support within the battalion. (Ensure activities support tactical plans, their branches and sequels, and the commander's desired end-state.)
•
Prepare personnel estimates and annexes to plans and OPORD. With the S-4, prepare paragraph 4 of the battalion OPORD, FASP (if used), and the logistics support plan/tab. Annex I: Service Support Annex K: Provost Marshal (if required) Annex N: Contiguous Area Operations (if required) Annex U: CMO (if required) Annex V: Public Affairs
• Manage the personnel strength of the battalion and all subordinate units • Provide oversight for internal Army Records Information Management System (ARIMS) compliance. (Note: the Military Personnel File is maintained at the FIB S-1.) • Provide or coordinate forms and publications management, official mail distribution, Privacy Act and Freedom of Information Act inquiries, and manage Congressional Inquiries (CI) within the battalion and subordinate units • Establish and document battalion human relations policies and SOPs • Coordinate with the HR Ops cell of the supporting FIB or Sustainment Brigade to obtain external HR support for the battalion. • Coordinate essential personnel services as directed for all assigned or attached personnel (for example, promotions, evaluations, ID cards, awards and decorations, leave and pass, records management, retention, line-of-duty investigations, congressional inquiries, and family inquiries). • Prepare casualty reports in compliance with all local, theater, and Army policies • Ensure compliance with command responsibility for casualty correspondence (for example, letters of condolence and sympathy) • Coordinates command interests programs as directed; for example, voting assistance program, CFC, AER, community support programs.
2-8
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
The MLRS Battalion
• Coordinate legal support of certain personnel activities to include service transfers and discharges, line of duty investigations, conscientious objector processing, summary court officer appointments, and military justice • Coordinating— Finance services Enemy prisoner of war (EPW) operations. Combat health services
S-2 2-38. The S-2 is responsible for battalion intelligence and supervision of the intelligence section. The principal duties in this area include the following: • Assists the S-3 in supervision of the TOC. • Conducts artillery IPB process. • Develops enemy artillery order of battle and predicts/disseminates enemy artillery locations. • Develops enemy situation and TA portions of MLRS Bn Operations Order (OPORD) to include radar deployment order if radar sections are provided to the battalion. • Develops enemy intelligence requirements related to division MLRS battalion. • Positions, tasks, and supervises any provided TA assets in conjunction with the S-3. • Plans, coordinates, and manages any provided Army sensor support. • Performs target analysis in support of the counter fire fight. • Analyzes intelligence data received from Army Battle Command Systems (ABCS).
S-3 2-39. The S-3 is responsible for training, planning, and execution of battalion operations. He supervises the activities of the operations section and manages all aspects of the battalion TOC. The principal duties in this area include the following: • Advises the commander on FA organization for combat, MLRS battery positioning, TA asset positioning and radar zones, and FA attack guidance. • Provides survivability and movement criteria to the battalion based on mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops, time available, and civil considerations (METT-TC). • Coordinates position area and movement management with batteries and maneuver units, as required. • Develops the MLRS BN OPORD. • Prepares and publishes standing operating procedures (SOPs). • Supervises FA rehearsals. • Calculates ammunition basic load based on mission requirements and required supply rate, and manages battalion ammunition consumption.
S-4 2-40. The S-4 coordinates and manages logistical support for the battalion. He coordinates with the FSC commander for the execution of support functions, to include ensuring that requisitions for all classes of supplies have been submitted in a timely manner. He performs as a shift leader in the ALOC. The S-4’s duties include: • Advise the commander and staff on all S-4 areas, to include: Logistics C2—centralized versus decentralized logistics operations, battalion trains concept and positioning. • Ammunition estimates, distribution, and resupply operations.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
2-9
Chapter 2
• • • • • • • •
Transportation requirements and main supply route (MSR) selection and operation. Prepare logistics estimates and plans using logistics preparation of the battlefield (LPB) methodology. With the S-1, prepare paragraph 4 of the battalion OPORD, FASP (if used), and the logistics support plan/tab. Supervise, manage, and coordinate battalion supply and sustainment operations, to include ammunition and refueling. Distribution operations for all classes of supply except Class VIII (medical) within the battalion. Recommend logistics priorities and employment of S-4 assets that support the commander’s intent and mission accomplishment. With the S-1, establish and maintain the ALOC. Supervise operations of the ALOC. Ensure the S-4 section and the ALOC establish and maintain situational awareness—of the general situation, FA operations, and sustainment. Review the battalion’s essential tasks for critical logistical requirements (for example, expeditionary support packages (ESPs) of ammunition and vehicle refuel).
S-6 2-41. The S-6 is the principal staff officer for all matters concerning signal operations, automation management, network management, and information security. The principal duties in this area include the following: • Plans and coordinates battalion communications systems integration into supported maneuver unit and force FA headquarters systems. • Manages and controls use of battalion information network capabilities. • Recommends signal support priorities for battalion information operations. • Manages radio frequency allocations and assignments. • Performs communications reconnaissance and survey to assist in positioning key battalion elements. • Writes MLRS BN OPORD signal paragraph. • Supervises signal support personnel. • Establishes automation systems administration and security procedures for automation hardware and software employed by the battalion. • Serves as battalion COMSEC custodian. • Coordinates battalion LAN configuration.
OPERATIONS OFFICER 2-42. The operations officer assists in developing WARNORDs, OPORDs, and FRAGORDs; maintains the tactical situation maps and overlays; and plans and coordinates tactical movements and positioning. He develops the execution matrix. The operations officer works directly for the S-3 and is a TOC duty officer.
FIRE DIRECTION OFFICER 2-43. The battalion fire direction officer (FDO) is primarily responsible for supervising all tactical fire direction in the battalion. On the basis of guidance from the commander and S-3, the FDO decides where and how the battalion (and any reinforcing units) will fire. The principal duties in this area include − • Secure and supervise input of appropriate parameters into the AFATDS database. • Analyze requested targets for attack by field artillery in terms of desired effects, method of fire, and types of ammunition required. • Ensure complete dissemination of fire plans to subordinate elements.
2-10
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
The MLRS Battalion
• •
Conduct rehearsals of fire plans with subordinate and reinforcing firing units as well as attached acquisition assets and sensor system down links. Establish and maintain digital communications within the battalion, its attachments, and the controlling force field artillery headquarters if one is designated by the supported commander.
LIAISON OFFICER 2-44. The liaison officer (LNO) directs the liaison team and represents the MLRS battalion commander with supported units. The LNO also advises the supported commander on battalion capabilities, limitations, and disposition; recommends employment options and helps coordinate fires of the MLRS battalion with other fire support assets; and keeps the MLRS battalion commander informed on the current situation of the supported unit and on future requirements.
CHEMICAL OFFICER 2-45. The chemical officer advises the commander and staff on CBRN defense matters and serves as shift leader in the battalion TOC. The chemical officer prepares the CBRN portion of plans and orders and prepares CBRN estimates and SOPs. He is the chief CBRN trainer for the battalion.
AMMUNITION OFFICER 2-46. The BAO coordinates with the XO, S-3, S-4, and support platoon leaders in requesting ammunition, and planning and executing the ammunition distribution plan within the battalion. He supervises the ammunition management section. The BAO recommends the method of control for battalion ammunition resupply operations. The BAO may consolidate some of the resupply vehicles at battalion to provide longhaul capability and deliver ammunition to the firing batteries. The principal duties in this area include the following: • Coordinates ammunition resupply operations with higher headquarters. • Performs mission analysis to verify that ammunition handling capabilities can support operations. • Ensures ammunition accountability. • Ensures that proper ammunition basic load mix is distributed to firing batteries. • Monitors the command and administrative/logistics net for ammunition requirements. • Manages ammunition turn-in.
CHAPLAIN 2-47. The battalion chaplain advises commanders on moral and ethical matters. He develops a religious support plan, and coordinates and conducts garrison services, field services, and soldier welfare ministries. He provides counseling, as required, for all soldiers and helps maintain the moral and spiritual well being of all personnel. He operates from the battalion trains.
PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT 2-48. The physician assistant (PA) advises the commander on all health-related issues, is responsible for immediate medical services for field casualties within the battalion, and coordinates all medical support with higher headquarters in coordination with the S-3 and S-1. The PA supervises the operations of the battalion medical treatment team.
PROPERTY BOOK OFFICER 2-49. The property book officer (PBO) coordinates all supply activities in the battalion and is responsible for maintaining property accountability and the battalion property book. The PBO helps the battery supply sergeant request and receive supplies by coordinating with supporting supply activities; works closely with the operations section in monitoring the resupply of ammunition and fuel; and supervises the battalion supply section in the absence of the S-4.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
2-11
Chapter 2
HHB COMMANDER 2-50. The HHB battery commander is responsible for the training, combat readiness, morale, and welfare of the headquarters battery. The HHB commander is responsible for maintaining personnel and equipment readiness within the HHB battery. He ensures supply, maintenance, and administrative support for HHB elements. The HHB commander may conduct position area reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of position (RSOP) for the battalion HQ. He develops the defense plan for the TOC.
HHB FIRST SERGEANT 2-51. The HHB 1SG is the senior NCO in the battery, and provides leadership and guidance to the battery's enlisted personnel. He is the primary administrative and logistics coordinator for the battery. The HHB 1SG is responsible for all internal and external administrative and logistical duties.
FIRING BATTERY BATTERY COMMANDER 2-52. The firing battery commander is responsible for the training, combat readiness, morale, and welfare of the firing battery. The principal duties in this area include the following: • Directs the employment of the battery in accordance with assigned missions. • Establishes standards and provides guidance for current and future operations. • Plans and conducts reconnaissance of the unit headquarters position. • Designates general areas for each platoon. • Ensures proper terrain coordination with higher headquarters to facilitate timely position occupations by battery vehicles and personnel. • Establishes and maintains training standards for the battery.
FIRST SERGEANT 2-53. The firing battery first sergeant (1SG) is the senior NCO in the battery. The 1SG provides leadership and guidance to the battery's enlisted personnel and is the primary administrative and logistics coordinator for the battery. The 1SG is responsible for supervising internal and coordinating external administrative and logistical duties activities with the exception of rocket/missile ammunition and maintenance. The principal duties in this area include the following: • Guides and supervises internal battery support activities such as battery supply PMCS. • Directly supervises the battery clerk and combat medics. • Coordinates with the BOC and LOC (support platoon leader/sergeant) for overall battery administrative and logistics support of the firing platoons. • Ensures that the above support is timely, adequate, and efficient. • Develops and supervises the battery defense.
BATTERY OPERATIONS OFFICER 2-54. The battery operations officer is the S-3 of the firing battery. He supervises the BOC, and plans and coordinates tactical movement and positioning with the commander's guidance. The operations officer processes intelligence information and maintains situational understanding of battery operations. He coordinates logistics efforts with the support platoon leader. The principal duties in this area include the following: • Supervises C2 of battery elements. • Establishes and maintains communications with battery elements and higher headquarters. • Coordinates with controlling artillery and/or appropriate maneuver headquarters. • Coordinates position areas.
2-12
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
The MLRS Battalion
• • • • •
Supervises fire control section within the BOC. Responsible for timely transmission of fire orders to the firing platoons or launchers. Oversees selection of firing elements to fire. Monitors fire support coordination measures (FSCMs). Maintains status of battery elements. Tracks the battle and monitors situation reporting.
BATTERY OPERATIONS SERGEANT 2-55. The battery operations sergeant, is the primary assistant to the battery operations officer, who directly supervises the FDC and FDC operations and organizes the BOC for 24-hour operation, directs its setup, and controls the battery radio nets. In coordination with the operations officer, the fire control sergeant monitors all radio transmissions and ensures that all pertinent information and fire missions are quickly relayed to the proper agencies, maintains the fire direction capabilities map, supervises upkeep of FDC operations records and reports, and keeps the operations officer informed
FDC SECTION CHIEF 2-56. The FDC section chief provides technical fire direction expertise and assists in training FDC personnel, and controls the battery radio nets. In coordination with the operations officer and NCO, the fire control sergeant monitors all radio transmissions and ensures that all pertinent information and fire missions are quickly relayed to the proper agencies, maintains the fire direction capabilities map, supervises upkeep of FDC operations records and reports, and keeps the operations officer informed.
FIRING PLATOON LEADER 2-57. The firing platoon leader commands and controls the firing platoon. In a tactical environment, he develops and communicates OPORDs and ensures that his unit prepares for combat. The firing platoon leader is responsible for platoon operations including RSOPs, tactical movement, firing position occupation, survivability actions, CBRN protective measures enforcement, and situation reporting to higher and adjacent headquarters. He implements guidance and direction from the battery commander . 2-58. The platoon leader designates platoon launchers to fire selected munitions. He also designates the operational status of the launchers and determines their employment sequence based on guidance from the battery commander, BOC, and mission requirements. The platoon leader then sends this information to the BOC, which selects the launchers to fire. The principal duties in this area include – • Ensuring timely and accurate system and soldier status reporting to higher headquarters. Relays accurate and timely information pertaining to current and future operations, enemy and friendly situations, and fire missions to and from platoon elements. • Ensuring platoon ability to sustain continuous day/night operations under all conditions, including a CBRN environment. • Selecting POC site, SCPs, and platoon operational areas. • Planning and issuing platoon OPORD as required. • Training the POC. • Conducting platoon rehearsals. • Coordinating platoon combat support.
FIRING PLATOON SERGEANT 2-59. The firing platoon sergeant supervises the platoon HQ, including operations with the platoon AFATDS, and ensures that all reports submitted to the BOC are accurate and timely. In the platoon operations area (OPAREA), the firing platoon sergeant controls the ammunition vehicles and monitors ammunition resupply. He must be prepared to reconnoiter firing points, reload points, and ammunition holding areas (AHAs). The firing platoon sergeant maintains the status of launcher sections; plans and
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
2-13
Chapter 2
coordinates the defense of the platoon elements; and assists the platoon leader in command, control, and execution of the platoon mission.
RECONNAISSANCE SERGEANT 2-60. The reconnaissance sergeant is the platoon leader’s driver and assists him in the reconnaissance of the platoon area. The reconnaissance sergeant advises the platoon leader on the placement of the launchers, resupply points, and the launcher firing points. The reconnaissance sergeant also checks the mask in the firing point areas.
FIRING SECTION CHIEF 2-61. The firing section chief is responsible for all activities involving the launcher. This includes selecting the hide area and firing point in accordance with guidance given by the platoon leader/sergeant; ensuring the launcher is properly emplaced and prepared for action; measuring and reporting immediate mask to the firing platoon HQ; and observing and checking the functioning of equipment during firing, movement, and reload operations. He immediately reports errors, unusual incidents, or equipment malfunctions to the platoon HQ.
SUPPORT PLATOON LEADER 2-62. The support platoon leader commands and controls the support platoon. He is the primary logistics coordinator for the battery. The support platoon leader is responsible for coordinating battery support to include ammunition resupply, maintenance, food service, and supply efforts. The responsibilities include working closely with the firing platoon leaders, BOC, and battalion ALOC in the coordination of logistical support for the battery. The principal duties in this area include the following: • Coordinates with the controlling headquarters to determine the location and status of support activities. These activities include the supporting maintenance activity; nearest water and ration distribution point; nearest petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL) distribution point; supporting shower and laundry points; and supporting Class II and Class VII activities. • Coordinates with the firing platoon leaders for the distribution of ammunition and fuel to the firing platoons. • Establishes logistics operations center (LOC). • Supervises ammunition resupply operations with the supporting ammunition transfer point or ammunition supply point. • Monitors refueling operations. • Establishes and sets up the battery logistics release point (LRP). • Positions ammunition sections within the battery ammunition holding area. • Coordinates with the battalion ALOC for maintenance support and directs battery maintenance efforts.
SUPPORT PLATOON SERGEANT 2-63. The support platoon sergeant is the primary assistant to the support platoon leader, who selects and reconnoiters routes to and from the ammunition transfer point (ATP) and ammunition supply point (ASP), directs and commands convoy movements of ammunition vehicles, and coordinates with the battalion ammunition officer for all Class V resupply. He keeps the ammunition document register and accountability files. If an LRP is used, the support platoon sergeant helps the support platoon leader supervise it.
SUPPLY SERGEANT 2-64. The battery supply sergeant directs supply personnel in establishing supply and inventory control management functions and also maintains property under the standard property book system. He reviews
2-14
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
The MLRS Battalion
daily and monthly records of issues of operating supplies, provides technical assistance to the armorer and assists and advises the commander.
FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY COMMANDER
2-65.The FSC commander is the only school-trained and experienced logistician in the MLRS fires battalion. He knows best how to employ the FSC in support of the tactical plan. The FSC commander should be involved in the planning process to assist the S-4 in determining logistics requirements and integrating the concept of support with the tactical plan.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
2-15
This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 3
Employment MLRS units are employed to provide field artillery (FA) rocket and missile fires in support of the brigade combat team, division, corps, army, joint or multinational forces, and MAGTFs, or in the conduct of theater missile defense (TMD) to destroy, neutralize, or suppress the enemy. Successful MLRS operations start with a sound organization for combat that maximizes MLRS capabilities to support the elements of full spectrum operations - offense, defense, and stability /civil support (in the US) operations .
This section implements STANAG 2934, chapter 4.
SECTION I – OPERATIONS IN WAR
GENERAL EMPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS 3-1. The division, corps, and joint task force (JTF) commanders' areas of operation normally include all areas occupied by enemy forces that may jeopardize completion of the current mission. Often, MLRS can engage enemy forces to the full depth of those areas of operations.
SYSTEM CAPABILITIES 3-2. The flexibility of the MLRS makes it an important fire support asset to combined arms commanders at all levels. The battalion's automated C2 capabilities; the organizational structure; and the system range, firepower, and munitions all contribute to this flexibility. 3-3. The battalion C2 system can interface automatically with most other C2 systems, as well as TA and sensor systems. 3-4. The MLRS organizational structure allows assignment of tactical missions down to the firing battery and platoon levels, if required. The MLRS firing batteries are equipped to operate independently from parent battalion control. The MLRS firing platoons may execute separate standard or nonstandard tactical missions for limited periods. Augmentation of platoon assets increases this semi-independent capability. 3-5. The MLRS range, firepower, and munitions give fire support planners flexibility in supporting the commander's concept of operation.
MISSION AND ENEMY 3-6. The commander's scheme of maneuver, the enemy's capabilities, and predicted courses of action identified by the IPB are the next considerations in employing MLRS. Emerging doctrine considers is based on effects achieved, not necessarily on who provides them or their location within the area of operations.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-1
Chapter 3
FIRES IN THE UNASSIGNED AREA 3-7. Division commanders designate decisive, shaping, and sustaining operations within the AO if necessary. Designating these areas provides a tool for analyzing spatial relationships between enemy and friendly combat forces. The field artillery provides fires throughout the area of operations (AO). 3-8. The targeting methodology for planning and executing fires is decide, detect, deliver, and assess (D3A). This methodology requires that targets and their areas of engagement be planned during the decide phase. The D3A methodology and the doctrine for planning and executing fire support in shaping operations are addressed in FM 6-20-10. 3-9. Long-range fires are planned and scheduled as opposed to immediate, unscheduled fires on targets of opportunity. In the planning process, the following must be considered: • Rocket and Army Tactical Missile System (ATACMS) stockage levels and locations. Management and delivery of munitions depend heavily on fire planning decisions made early in the planning process. • TA and sensor system availability and cueing to detect and/or track targets. • C2 linkage to the MLRS firing unit, and target acquisition and sensor systems.
Fires in the Unassigned 3-10. The MLRS can support the commander's area shaping operations with rockets and ATACMS missile fires. With ranges of out to 300 kilometers, the ATACMS is well suited for attack of long-range HPTs, including those with extremely short dwell times where minimizing the time from acquisition to firing is critical. The range capability also allows engagement across the front laterally. The warhead description and capabilities of the ATACMS missile are addressed in chapter 1.
Fires in Close Combat 3-11. MLRS rocket range exceeds most cannon munitions and allows force commanders the opportunity to complement cannon fire with a lethal indirect fire capability, enhancing maneuver force protection and influencing the outcome of operations. MLRS can be used for counter fire, raids, suppression of enemy air defenses (SEAD), and engaging deeper targets than those that can be ranged by cannon artillery that impact close combat. The targets best suited for MLRS rockets in the close combat are personnel, light materiel, command posts (CPs), and artillery. The M31 guided MLRS (GMLRS) unitary warhead munitions offer a significant destructive capability while reducing the possibility of collateral damage. However, the MLRS M26/M26A2 rocket has a large "footprint" (dispersion of sub munitions in the target area), which requires detailed planning when delivered close to friendly troops. Planners should also consider the probability of dud sub munitions in the target area. The same planning factors used for 155 millimeter or Air Forcedelivered DPICM should be used for MLRS. Planners must consider the risk when firing DPICM MLRS rockets into areas that friendly units could occupy or pass through during future operations.
Fires in the Contiguous Area 3-12. The objective of fires in the contiguous area is to protect and ensure the functioning of force and capabilities to ensure freedom of action and continuity of operations. Use of MLRS fires in support of units in the contiguous area is may be limited if M31 GMLRS rounds are not available. The unguided MLRS munitions are best suited for area rather than point targets. Unguided MLRS rockets, because of the nature of these munitions (DPICM) and the large number of wheeled vehicle and "soft" friendly assets in the contiguous area may not be the fire support (FS) munitions of choice for contiguous area operations. Special circumstances may dictate, however, that MLRS be used in support of division or corps response force operations and/or tactical combat force operations. For example, the risk of friendly troops in the vicinity of MLRS targets may be acceptable in light of the overall situation. Additionally, targets may be out of range of cannon artillery, and other fire support, such as mortars and aviation, may not be available.
3-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
POSITIONING 3-13. Proper and well coordinated positioning and employment of MLRS units increase their effectiveness. The ability to accomplish its assigned essential or field artillery tasks is the primary consideration for positioning an MLRS unit. Other considerations include— • Minimum as well as maximum range. • Communications to higher, adjacent, and subordinate units. • Firing signature. • Availability of suitable terrain. • Facilitation of future operations. 3-14. When required by assigned fire support or field artillery tasks, MLRS units fight positioned forward, as close to the FLOT as possible, to maximize the system’s ability to attack at long range. Positioning launchers forward and intermixing them with other fire support systems and maneuver units in the brigade combat team (BCT) sector degrades the ability of the enemy to template MLRS operations and locations. Positioning forward, however, does increase the risk to soldiers because MLRS units have a limited ability to defend themselves against ground attack. 3-15. When positioning forward, minimum range is a consideration. Positioning forward also increases coordination requirements because, when it fires, the MLRS signature increases the vulnerability of all elements in the immediate vicinity of the launchers to enemy fires. 3-16. Shoot and scoot tactics and ATACMS off-axis capability are used to reduce the enemy's ability to acquire and engage MLRS launchers with indirect fires. 3-17. The lethality and range of MLRS make it an HPT for threat ground maneuver and special operations forces, which hunt down launchers that cannot be attacked by counter fire. 3-18. Digital communications are essential for effective MLRS operations. Communication requirements, particularly FM electronic line-of-sight, are a key consideration when selecting position areas.
PLANNING AND COORDINATION Planning 3-19. Employment of the MLRS requires thorough planning and coordination. Operations orders, fire support plans/annexes, and field artillery support plans should all include detailed tasks and instructions for MLRS units. These instructions should include types and amounts of ammunition by unit, platoon, and/or launcher posturing, and FCS configurations for specific launchers. Planners should consider the need for launcher redundancy in the allocation of targets. If resources allow, assign both primary and backup launchers to ensure timely target attack. Rehearsals 3-20. Rehearsals are an integral part of the planning process for all operations. A rehearsal should both practice and test the plan. If at all possible, the rehearsal should be conducted with the force commander's rehearsal. A combined rehearsal will improve responsiveness of fires and the synchronization of all the force commander's resources for the battle. Rocket Fires 3-21. Rockets will normally be fired at targets within the division area of operations by an attached or reinforcing MLRS battalion or a fires brigade (FIB). These units supporting the division are normally under the control of the division FC or a FIB, which may be designated by the supported commander as the force artillery HQ. See table 4-3 for information on MLRS rocket capabilities.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-3
Chapter 3
Missile Fires 3-22. The employment of ATACMS missiles will normally be retained at corps and higher levels. An attached or reinforcing MLRS battalion may, however, fire missiles that have been apportioned to the division to support its mission. Therefore, all firing elements and platforms of the MLRS battalion must be prepared for ATACMS missions. The planning tasks and functions necessary for the employment of ATACMS will be managed under centralized control, normally at echelons above division (EAD). Corps and other EAD can integrate the necessary target and intelligence information and coordinate/deconflict targets at operational depths. Execution 3-23. The key to effective employment of ATACMS is planning and coordination (prior to execution). Execution functions for fixed or non-mobile targets may also be initiated under centralized control. Responsiveness may be improved by tailoring linkages to allow shorter paths (decentralized execution) from target acquisition sources through FIB or MLRS battalion nodes to the launcher for the attack of timesensitive targets. If the force commander desires to decentralize execution for certain targets (typically high priority fleeting targets that are vulnerable to attack for very short periods of time), he will normally designate a subordinate commander (unit) as the execution authority. Targets 3-24. The target sets for ATACMS Blocks I and IA include soft, sitting, and/or emitting high priority targets. The targets include major command and control nodes, air defense weapons and radars, logistics storage facilities, helicopter operating bases, surface-to-surface missile systems, multiple rocket launchers, and major troop assembly areas. Note: Accurate reporting of platoon center locations is paramount because these locations are used to develop and coordinate Air Force restricted operations areas (ROAs). (See chapter 5.) 3-25. Block I, Block IA, Block II and M48/M57Comparison. The most important differences among Block I, Block IA, Block II M57, are range, payload, guidance, and default submunitions dispense pattern size. (See table 3-1.) Pattern size can be found in the DP field of the FM;CFF message. There are 3 dispense patterns for Blocks I and IA: small, medium, and large. Table 3-1 Block I, Block IA, Block II and M48/M57Comparison M39 Block I
M39A1 Block IA
M48/M57 QRU
25-165
70-300
70-270+
950 M74 grenades
300 M74 grenades
500 lbs unitary charge
Guidance
Inertial
GPS aided
GPS aided
Default Dispense Pattern Size
Large
Medium
N/A
Range (km) Payload
Fire Support Coordination Line 3-26. Missile fires will often be located beyond the fire support coordination line (FSCL) because of the range of the weapon and expected target types. During planning and coordination, there should be emphasis on establishing procedural controls and the need to deconflict these fires with the joint force, particularly the air component. Coordination of attacks beyond the FSCL, if established, is especially critical to commanders of air, land, and special operations forces. Forces attacking targets beyond an FSCL must inform all affected commanders in sufficient time to allow necessary reaction to avoid fratricide, both in the air and on the ground. Finally, this coordination assists in avoiding conflicting or redundant attack
3-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
operations. In exceptional circumstances, the inability to conduct this coordination will not preclude the attack of targets beyond the FSCL. Launchers 3-27. The M270 launcher can fire the Block I missile. However, because the missile depends on data from the launcher for its initial position and azimuth data, the time since the launcher's last SRP realignment and PDS update is very important. The crew must ensure that the launcher's position/azimuth data is current so the missile gets the most accurate data possible. M270A1/M142 launchers normally receive their position and azimuth data from global positioning system (GPS). Assuming GPS is functioning normally, these launchers will always have accurate data for Block I missiles. 3-28. Block IA missiles employ a GPS-augmented inertial navigation system that provides greatly improved accuracy. There will be a mix of old and new launchers in the force until the M142 launchers is fully fielded. Until then, mission planners should consider using units equipped with the M270A1 or M142 launcher in the following situations: • Consider using the M270A1or M142 launcher for missions requiring quick response and the M270 launchers for the “stay hot, shoot fast” technique (see chapter 5). This technique is typically used to posture launchers on a firing point at an aim point to attack fleeting targets. It consists of sending an “at my command (AMC)” mission to the launcher. The launcher acknowledges the mission, moves to the firing point, lays on the target grid (aim point), then reports “ready” and time of flight. If the target is detected at or near the aim point grid, the mission is executed in the normal manner using a “fire” message (or an amended mission that adjusts the grid and changes the method of control to “when ready [WR]”). This technique eliminates launcher movement from hide position and elevation time. While the M270 launcher should only remain at aim point for up to 2 hours, the M270A1 or M142 launcher can remain on an aim point indefinitely. While this technique saves reaction time, units must assess the threat, including special operations forces (SOF) and aircraft. • The MLRS uses 2 basic types of fire missions: planned (scheduled) and targets of opportunity (unscheduled). If planners anticipate many targets of opportunity suitable for MLRS fires, they should designate an MLRS unit equipped with the M270A1 or M142 launchers to attack those targets. The launcher's quicker response time may result in the ability to engage more targets. • Planners should also consider using units equipped with M270A1 or M142 launchers for fires when the unit will need to quickly change munitions (for example, rockets to ATACMS). Because the M270A1 or M142 launchers contain all required software to process and fire all rockets and missiles onboard, they are the logical choice to provide fires when frequently alternating from rockets to missiles. Additionally, the LMS allows for improved employment/reaction times for fire missions, improved survivability because of decreased displacement time, and increased operational tempo and ammunition throughput because of decreased reload time and overall mission cycle times. The increased memory and embedded GPS gives the M270A1 or M142 launcher the capability to fire GPS-enhanced munitions. 3-29. Maneuver and force FA commanders must consider the following items when planning for MLRS fire support. Fire Missions 3-30. MLRS fires typically require longer reaction times than cannon systems. Thus, the MLRS is better suited for planned missions. Both scheduled and unscheduled missions are used in the offensive and defensive phases of the battle. Configuration Time 3-31. Configuration time for the M270 launcher is dependent on the requirement to load weapon files into the launcher fire control system (FCS). If ammunition requirements for a particular operation can be anticipated, the corresponding weapon files should be loaded before fire missions begin. Then, as fire missions require transitioning from one of the anticipated munitions to another, no additional time would
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-5
Chapter 3
be required for software configuration of the FCS. If, however, different ammunition were requested that required loading a new weapon file, configuration time would increase. Note: When planners have both M270 and M270A1 or M142 launchers available, see paragraphs 3-27 and 3-28 for planning considerations.
Reaction Time 3-32. The MLRS units normally require at least 30 minutes to process and execute a fire plan. Using methods other than the non-nuclear fire plan function of AFATDS can reduce this time (for example, establish a series of time on targets [TOTs], use AMC method of control, and so forth). Launcher Response Time 3-33. The MLRS response time on any given mission may vary from 2 to 20 minutes. Munition Load 3-34. Table 3-2 indicates the types of munitions each launcher is capable of shooting: Table 3-2. Launcher Capabilities Launcher
Rockets
ATACMS
M26
M26A2 ERMLRS
M30/31 GMLRS
M270
X
X
M270A1
X
X
X
M142
X
X
X
M39 Block I
M39A1 Block IA
M48/M57 QRU
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3-35. The unit mission dictates an ammunition load and resupply necessities. Mission changes may require exchange of part or all of the unit ammunition stocks. Because of launcher response times in units equipped with the M270 launcher, a battery will normally have no more than 2 types of munitions while a platoon will normally carry only 1 type of ammunition. Munition Range 3-36. The ammunition minimum and maximum ranges must be considered in positioning elements and assigning missions. (See table 3-3.) Table 3-3. Range Comparison System
Minimum Range
Maximum Range
MLRS M26 Rocket (DPICM)
8 km*
32.5 km
MLRS M26A2 Rocket (ER) (DPICM)
13 km
45 km
MLRS M30 Rocket (Guided) (DPICM)
15 km
70 km
MLRS M31 Rocket (Guided) (HE)
15 km
70 km
ATACMS M39 Missile Block I (APAM)
25 km
165 km
ATACMS M39A1 Missile Block IA (APAM)
70 km
300 km
ATACMS M39A3 Missile Block II (BAT)
35 km
145 km
ATACMS M48/57 Missile Quick Reaction Unitary
70 km
270 km
km = kilometer
3-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
* Sub munitions dud rates increase at ranges less than 10 km. The system software will allow firing at ranges down to 5 km.
Rehearsals 3-37. Units must establish procedures for rehearsals as a part of their tactical standing operating procedures (TSOPs). As a minimum, the SOPs should identify: • Who will participate in the rehearsal. • What should be rehearsed. • What the sequence of the rehearsal will be. • What the priority of methods for rehearsals will be. Participants 3-38. The rehearsal should include significant events (such as the maneuver scheme, target acquisition employment, and obstacle emplacement). The battalion S-3, S-2, FDO, radar personnel (if applicable), and unit FDCs are all essential participants. When possible, the firing batteries and platoons, down to individual launcher level, should participate as well. The battalion benefits from the rehearsal by obtaining information for movement, schedules of fire, munitions requirements, and a more complete understanding of the operational time involved with the scheme of maneuver. 3-39. If the force commander does not conduct a rehearsal and rehearsal time is available, the S-3 and/or liaison officer (LNO) should conduct a rehearsal. The existing maneuver operations plan (OPLAN), the fire support plan, the fire support execution matrix (FSEM), the fires battalion OPORD, and the FA support plan and matrix should be used. The FSEM is ideal for use in the rehearsal because the rehearsal is normally conducted by performing and/or reciting the following: • Actions to occur. • Possible friendly initiatives. • Possible reactions to enemy initiatives. • Control measures. • Significant events that are to occur in relation to time or to phases of an operation. 3-40. Benefits derived from a rehearsal conducted by only unit personnel depend on how well the leader conducting the rehearsal understands the force commander's concept of the operation. The battalion operations section pays particular attention to displacements. The battalion FDC issues fire orders. Attached radars work situational cues with the cueing agents. Each firing unit conducts tactical and technical fire direction through launcher level. If alternative friendly courses of action hinge on enemy actions and if time permits, the alternatives should be rehearsed.
SURVIVABILITY Movement 3-41. MLRS units move or reposition on a continuing basis to mitigate attack by counter fire and facilitate engagement of enemy formations and targets. Units conduct RSOP on a continual basis to enhance unit survivability and to facilitate future operations. The necessity to conduct RSOP and select alternate and supplementary positions at a fast pace has evolved into what is termed shoot-and-scoot tactics. Shoot-andscoot tactics, combined with the wide dispersion of elements, help avoid detection and minimize vulnerability. However, shoot-and-scoot tactics require more planning and coordination because of competition for terrain. The battalion staff coordinates continually through the appropriate fire support channels for the use of terrain. Firing battery commanders and platoon leaders must, however, often continue that coordination face-to-face with maneuver unit commanders throughout all phases of the operation.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-7
Chapter 3
Mission 3-42. Although a launcher firing missiles will be a higher priority enemy target, it may be less vulnerable to counter fire than it is when firing rockets. Factors that contribute to reduced vulnerability when a launcher is shooting missiles include both shorter times from initial launch to movement away from the firing point and randomly selected off-axis firings.
Detection 3-43. The key to MLRS survival on the battlefield is the avoidance of detection. Enemy forces can detect MLRS units firing either rockets or missiles by multiple means. Air-Ground Observation 3-44. Until it fires, an MLRS launcher is normally difficult to detect by air-ground observation. During firing, however, the large signature of the launch provides easy location of the firing point by direct observation. Counterbattery Radar 3-45. At lower firing elevations (less than 300 mil), MLRS rockets are difficult to detect by counterbattery radar. At firing elevations greater than 300 mils, the rockets can be more easily acquired because of their higher trajectory. Factors that further reduce MLRS vulnerability to enemy radar acquisition include the ATACMS off-axis launch, low radar cross-section, and semiballistic-guided flight program. Sound Ranging 3-46. The vulnerability of MLRS to detection by sound ranging exceeds that of cannon artillery. Enemy sound ranging techniques are highly advanced and extremely accurate. Flash Ranging 3-47. The MLRS is readily detected by flash ranging because of the large visual signature of the launcher firing. Enemy flash ranging techniques are highly advanced and extremely accurate. Radio Direction Finding 3-48. Proper communications procedures can reduce detection by enemy radio direction finding. Terrain masking, fewer and shorter transmissions, and use of low radio power, directional antennas, and frequencyhopping capabilities can improve survivability.
TASK ORGANIZATION 3-49. The flexibility of the MLRS battalion offers significant fires capability to the combined arms commander. The battalion automated C2, 10- to 300-kilometer range of munitions, and target acquisition capabilities all contribute to this flexibility. 3-50. The MLRS organizational structure allows assignment of tactical missions down to the firing battery and platoon levels, if required. The firing batteries are equipped to operate independently from parent battalion control for limited time periods. The firing platoons may also execute separate standard or nonstandard tactical missions. 3-51. The force commander establishes the C2 of MLRS units through task organization or the assignment of a field artillery tactical task in accordance with STANAG 2934: • Establish a command or support relationship by placing the unit in a specific tactical organization. • Assign a field artillery tactical task in accordance with STANAG 2484. MLRS batteries and platoons may also be assigned tactical tasks for limited periods.
3-8
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
COMMAND AND SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS 3-52. The force commander normally establishes 1 of the following relationships with a tactical unit for each field artillery unit: • Organic. • Assigned. • Attached. • Operational control (OPCON). 3-53. One MLRS battalion is organic to the FIB. Additional MLRS battalions may be assigned, attached or placed OPCON to the FIB.
FIELD ARTILLERY TACTICAL TASK ASSIGNMENT 3-54. The MLRS battalion is capable of complying with the standard Army command and support relationships identified in FM 3-0 or with the conducting the standard STANAG 2484 NATO FA tactical tasks and responsibilities of general support, general support reinforcing, reinforcing, and direct support as well as nonstandard missions. 3-55. The MLRS battalion may be assigned any standard tactical mission consistent with the commander's fire support guidance. Assignment of a command or support relationship or a NATO FA tactical task directs the MLRS battalion commander to meet each of the directed and inherent responsibilities of the relationship or FA tactical task addressed in FM 3-0. The NATO FA tactical tasks are discussed in the following paragraphs.
GS 3-56. An MLRS unit assigned a GS mission provides FA support for the force as a whole. This is the most centralized mission for the force commander. It provides fires that are immediately responsive to his needs. The force commander's planned fires are best provided by those MLRS units with a GS mission. Assigning a GS MLRS unit a priority of fires allows the supported commander to influence specific areas of the battlefield.
GSR 3-57. The GSR mission requires the MLRS unit to furnish fires for the force as a whole as its first priority and to reinforce the fires of another FA unit as its second priority. A GSR unit remains under the tactical control of the force FA headquarters and responds on a first-priority basis to the needs of that headquarters. The GSR mission gives the force commander flexibility to meet the needs of various tactical situations. For example, the MLRS battalion with a GSR mission allows the weighting of a BCT with additional artillery. The ability to provide DS cannon battalions with additional fires results in a lethal cannon and rocket/missile mix.
Reinforcing 3-58. The reinforcing mission requires the MLRS battalion to augment the fires of another FA unit. In the reinforcing role, the MLRS battalion responds on a first-priority basis to the needs of the reinforced unit. The battalion establishes digital and voice communications with the reinforced FA headquarters and maintains communications with the force FA headquarters. The battalion must also make provisions to establish liaison with the reinforced artillery unit. Reinforcing a DS cannon battalion may require the liaison function to occur at both the reinforced FA battalion headquarters and the brigade combat team FC. The battalion should ensure that reinforced units are aware of the capabilities and limitations of the MLRS battalion to include ammunition expenditure and resupply rates.
DS 3-59. The DS mission requires the unit to provide first priority of fires to the supported unit. The DS mission is the most decentralized tactical mission. Fires and effects are planned and coordinated with the
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-9
Chapter 3
maneuver unit, and the unit commander positions the battalion where it can best support the maneuver force. Often, establishing appropriate priorities of fire by modifying the GS, reinforcing, or GSR missions will be adequate to handle those instances where MLRS must be extremely responsive in support of a specific maneuver force. When possible, MLRS units should reinforce the habitually associated DS cannon unit rather than assuming the DS mission on their own. However, MLRS units may assume a DS mission. The following factors should be carefully considered when assigning MLRS units a DS mission: • The MLRS battalion lacks the organic fire support coordination personnel normally associated with a DS FA battalion. The liaison sections organic to corps MLRS are not designed to satisfy this function. • MLRS battalions may have to shift rapidly from GS to DS mission and back. • Unguided rockets are best used against area targets and to complement cannon fires. • Unguided rockets are inherently less precise than cannon projectiles. They have a much larger circular error probable (CEP) and are, therefore, much less predictable. Inherent random inaccuracies (bias and precision errors) are discussed in appendix B. • Cannon fires are normally more responsive than MLRS fires for targets of opportunity. The M270A1 or M142 launcher, however, improves system responsiveness. Appropriate planning and coordination may substantially reduce response times as well. • The MLRS has extensive ammunition resupply considerations that may adversely impact its ability to sustain continuous fires. • The MLRS lacks some munitions normally required for a DS mission (such as illumination and smoke). Alternate sources of illumination and smoke must be coordinated, as required. • Special consideration must be given to communications and net planning. • While the DS mission decentralizes the unit fires, the mission provides the force commander an important shaping tool. • GMLRS provides improved accuracy and greater range. GMLRS also reduces the dud rate to support the DS mission more effectively.
Nonstandard Mission 3-60. If the commander's concept of fires cannot be satisfied with 1 of the standard FA tactical missions, a nonstandard tactical mission may be assigned. These missions amplify, limit, or change 1 or more of the inherent responsibilities or spell out contingencies not covered by those responsibilities. A nonstandard mission may be assigned if there is not enough artillery to cover all the contingencies or if an FA battalion, FA battery, or an MLRS platoon is required to meet the responsibilities of more than 1 tactical mission. Examples of some nonstandard missions include the following: • An MLRS firing battery answers calls for fire from an aerial observer. The AFATDS can communicate digitally with an aerial observer in an OH-58D through the helicopter ATHS, or the battery FDC can also receive voice calls for fire from aerial observers. • A FIB MLRS battalion is attached to a Marine Corps or multinational Army force artillery headquarters. However, the MLRS battalion is positioned and has its fires planned by the reinforcing FIB headquarters. • An MLRS battalion is GSR to a DS cannon battalion but is positioned by, and has its fires planned by, the reinforced FA unit headquarters. • An MLRS battalion is in a GS role with a quick fire net to the BCT reconnaissance squadron.
TARGET ACQUISITION EMPLOYMENT OPTIONS CENTRALIZED CONTROL 3-61. If the force FA headquarters designates a separate counter fire headquarters, that headquarters will control the TA radars. If not, the force FA headquarters will control the radars. Centralized control of radars optimizes coverage to support the commander's concept of the operation. The S-2, assisted by the
3-10
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
counter fire officer, will designate each radar’s general position area, a sector of search, and Firefinder zones. In addition, they will— • Establish cueing guidance. • Designate cueing agents. • Control movement of radars. • Designate to whom the radars pass targets.
DECENTRALIZED CONTROL 3-62. AN/TPQ-36 radars are normally assigned to the fires battalion/ DS FA cannon battalions. A quick fire net may be established from the TAB AN/TPQ-37s to an MLRS battalion.
COMBINED CONTROL 3-63. Any combination of centralized and decentralized operational control of radars may be used according to the tactical situation. Regardless of the control option used, logistical support for the radar must be considered and maintained during the radar’s tactical employment. Normally, radar sections may be attached to another field artillery unit for administrative and logistical support.
BATTALION COMMANDER 3-64. The duty location of the MLRS battalion commander at any given time is where he can best execute the battalion's mission. Tactical mission assignments influence the commander's positioning decisions. For example, if the battalion has a DS support relationship to the combat aviation brigade, the MLRS battalion commander might be at the side of the brigade commander in the aviation TOC. In a GS role, the battalion commander may position himself in the (corps/division) main FC, tactical command post FE, or the MLRS battalion TOC, depending on the tactical situation and intelligence feeds required. When the MLRS battalion has a GSR or reinforcing role, the battalion commander may be best situated at the unit supported by the reinforced FA battalion. In a situation where the mission, the battalion commander may position himself at the covering force/screening force TOC. (See table 3-4.) Table 3-4. Positioning the Battalion Commander Tactical Mission
Recommended BN CDR Location
GS GSR Reinforcing DS
MAIN FC, TAC FE, MLRS/HIMARS BN TOC MAIN FC, TAC FE, MLRS/HIMARS BN TOC, MVR BDE of reinforced FA BCT TOC of reinforced FA With supported unit commander
Legend BDE = brigade BN = battalion DS = direct support FA = field artillery FC = Fires Cell FE = Fires Element GS = general support
GSR = general support reinforcing HIMARS = high mobility artillery rocket system MLRS = multiple launch rocket system MVR = maneuver TAC = tactical TOC = tactical operations center BCT = brigade combat team
3-65. As the tactical missions and tactical situation of the battalion change during the course of a battle, so will the point on the battlefield where the battalion commander can best influence the action. Relocating on a fluid, dynamic, and noncontiguous 21st century battlefield may prove challenging as the battalion rapidly transitions from a GS role to DS and back to GS again.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-11
Chapter 3
LIAISON FUNCTION OPTIONS 3-66. The liaison function is required to accommodate frequent changes in tactical mission assignment. Liaison provides the MLRS battalion commander needed flexibility to meet rapidly changing and widely separated (geographically) missions. Liaison enhances the capability to provide fires across the division/corps front. 3-67. The MLRS battalion has 2 organic liaison teams to perform the liaison function. 3-68. If the MLRS battalion and reinforced unit are digitized, and both units maintain communications and situational understanding, the actual physical presence of a liaison team at the reinforced unit may not be required. If the 2 units collocate CPs or FDCs, the liaison requirement is met and no liaison is required. If a liaison team is required at the reinforced unit, it should be equipped with a high-mobility, multipurpose wheeled vehicle (HMMWV), 2 SINCGARS radio transmitters (voice and digital FM), and an AFATDS. 3-69. If an MLRS battery is required to perform the liaison function, it may be accomplished by the following options: • Maintain situational understanding and digital communications with the reinforced unit. • Collocate the BOC with the reinforced unit. • Form an ad hoc liaison element with internal assets. 3-70. Liaison responsibilities include the following: • Pass information on the tactical situation to the reinforcing unit CP. • Establish digital and voice communications as required: • Exchange orders, situation reports, and intelligence reports. • Pass fire missions. • Establish quick fire nets as required. • Pass unit locations, ammunition status, weapon strength, target lists, and fire plans. (See FM 50.)
OPERATIONS WITH THE MARINE CORPS 3-71. This section discusses operational considerations when supporting MAGTF operations.
SIZE OF FORCE 3-72. The most appropriate force alignment is no less than an MLRS battery supporting a Marine expeditionary brigade (MEB) and an MLRS battalion supporting a Marine expeditionary force (MEF). The smallest MLRS unit to deploy in support of United States Marine Corps (USMC) operations will be a battery. However, the number of launchers in the battery may be tailored to a specific mission. Subdivision below the battery level could limit the operability, flexibility, response, and sustainability of MLRS fires. MLRS units will be selected to support USMC requirements based on METT-TC considerations. 3-73. Each deployment package must be supplemented with an additional logistical package (see PARA 3173) owing to the lack of Army support available and the likelihood that the unit would be entering an immature theater. Additionally, the MLRS battery requires liaison and staff augmentation. Elements of an MLRS battalion headquarters could effectively perform the function of interfacing with a USMC controlling headquarters on operational and logistical matters.
DEPLOYMENT 3-74. The method of deployment/entry largely depends upon METT-TC considerations corresponding to the specific contingency operation. It is a function of the size of the force, time available, availability of secure airfields and port facilities, and whether an amphibious landing is to be an uncontested or benign beach or port.
3-12
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
BATTLE COMMAND 3-75. The MLRS unit should be under the command and control of the force field artillery headquarters. In the case of a MEB, this would be a Marine artillery battalion. In the case of a MAGTF of larger size, this would be the Marine artillery regimental command operations center. Although MLRS units best provide general support fires, the MAGTF commander will ultimately direct tactical mission assignment.
Communications 3-76. Army and USMC radio systems (AM and FM) are compatible. MLRS units supporting USMC units not equipped with SINCGARS will operate in a non-frequency hopping mode.
Artillery Computer Systems 3-77. There are few compatibility issues with regard to data communications.
COMSEC 3-78. Army and Marine Corps COMSEC systems are compatible. The MLRS battery, when operating separately, requires three internal communications nets and 1 for liaison. The entire MLRS battalion requires a minimum of 14 internal communications nets in order to function. The USMC is responsible for providing these communications nets in the signal operating instructions (SOI).
Target Acquisition 3-79. The USMC has both Unmanned Aircraft Systems (UAS) and organic AN/TPQ-36 radar sections for use in both intelligence gathering and acquiring targets. UAS 3-80. The USMC currently has the Pioneer system. This unmanned aircraft (UA) will penetrate into enemy airspace out to a range of 185 kilometers to conduct reconnaissance missions. It has an endurance of 4 hours of flight time. AN/TPQ-36 Weapons Locating Radar 3-81. The AN/TPQ-36 is optimized to locate high-trajectory indirect fire weapons (such as mortars to a range of 15 kilometers), but it can also locate cannon and rocket artillery to a range of 24 kilometers. AN/TPQ-37 Weapons Locating Radar 3-82. The AN/TPQ-37 is optimized to locate low-trajectory indirect fire weapons (such as cannon artillery) to a range of 30 kilometers and rocket artillery to a range of 50 kilometers. Supplementing the force FA headquarters with multiple Army AN/TPQ-37 radar sections would significantly add to the target acquisition capability of the MAGTF.
Liaison 3-83. During joint operations, liaison is normally reciprocal. This would require the controlling USMC headquarters to provide a liaison to the MLRS unit headquarters as well.
OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS 3-84. The offense will continue to be the decisive form of combat. The main purpose of the offense remains to defeat, destroy, or neutralize the enemy force. Armed with a combination of superior long-range delivery systems, lethal "brilliant" munitions, and a comprehensive command and control system, the MLRS battalion provides the commander with the capability to interdict selected HPTs or entire target sets at depths previously accessible only to piloted aircraft, cruise missiles, or special operations forces. When synchronized with the array of other assets capable of providing fire support, including fixed and rotary
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-13
Chapter 3
wing aircraft and nonlethal electronic attack assets, the MLRS battalion allows the commander to shape the AO to set the conditions for decisive offensive maneuver. Once those conditions have been established, the maneuver units will attack and dominate the enemy in the close combat, using both fires and maneuver. An MLRS unit must be prepared to support the 4 basic types of offensive operations: • Movement to contact. • Attack. • Exploitation. • Pursuit. 3-85. Detailed discussions for each type of operation and the responsibilities of the FSCOORD for each of them are located in FM 6-20.
MOVEMENT TO CONTACT 3-86. Units conduct movement to contact to gain or regain contact with the enemy. Once contact is made, the commander can further develop the situation. 3-87. A movement to contact will likely be executed as a series of tactical moves by subordinate elements as a precursor to the execution of an attack. In this circumstance, a combination of preparation fires and/or programs, series, or groups of targets may be employed to protect the force and ensure its freedom of maneuver during movement to, and occupation of, forward assembly areas and attack positions. Fire support tasks include: • Plan artillery movement to facilitate tactical movement, maintain force momentum, and provide adequate immediately responsive support (for example, units "set" and ready to fire) for executing contingencies. • Destroy enemy reconnaissance, surveillance, and target acquisition. • Anticipate/plan for hasty attack contingencies. • Plan, on order, FSCMs throughout the unit operation area • When situational understanding is less than optimum, plan "worst case" fires where enemy could significantly impact friendly operations. • Plan and execute preparation fires to ensure freedom of maneuver. • Employ smoke, as required, to screen friendly movement and/or support the deception plan. 3-88. The MLRS can provide support during both movement and follow-on operations once contact is made. With its long range and tactical mobility, MLRS is suited to augment other artillery fires to protect the force and ensure its freedom of maneuver. 3-89. The MLRS must be integrated into march columns to ensure responsive supporting fires during the initial action. By planning for delivery of immediate mass MLRS fires, the commander can help the supported unit as it seizes and retains the initiative. Fires are thus characterized by decentralized control and must be extremely responsive to compensate for the relatively small amount of maneuver power forward.
ATTACK 3-90. The purpose of the attack is to defeat, destroy, or neutralize the enemy or seize the ground it occupies. Successful attacks depend on the skillful massing of combat fires and forces, when necessary, while sustaining a tempo the enemy force cannot handle. The attack focuses on a powerful and violent assault upon the objective. The unit will likely mass all available firepower on the enemy at the beginning of the assault. This requires detailed planning, precise execution, and tremendous discipline in the fire support force at all levels. The commander's intent and time available to plan will drive the selection of available attack options—hasty attack, deliberate attack, spoiling attack, counterattack, raid, feint, demonstration, or any combination of these. Fire support tasks include— • Establish critical friendly zones over tactical assembly areas, attack positions, and command posts. • Plan and execute counter fires to ensure freedom of maneuver and protect the force.
3-14
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
• • • •
Mass effects of fires against HPTs to meet criteria established by the force commander to set conditions for crossing the line of departure. Synchronize artillery movement to facilitate tactical movement, maintain force momentum, and provide adequate, immediately responsive support for executing contingencies. Plan logistics support that facilitates tactical movement, maintains force momentum, and provides adequate, immediately responsive support for executing contingencies. Plan, on order, fire support coordination measures to facilitate execution of branches and sequels to the plan.
3-91. MLRS can best be used in support of attacks by delivering fires against reserve or reinforcing formations, delivering preparation fires, delivering counter fire, providing SEAD, massing against counterattacks, and reinforcing the DS artillery of attacking brigades. MLRS, if employed properly, is an excellent choice in support of raids or spoiling attacks.
EXPLOITATION AND PURSUIT 3-92. Exploitation and pursuit operations follow successful attacks. Exploitation occurs when the attacker extends the destruction of the defending force by maintaining continuous pressure. The ultimate objective is the disintegration of the enemy to the point where he has no alternative but surrender or die. Exploiting forces disrupt enemy C2, seize objectives in the enemy rear, cut lines of communication, and isolate and destroy enemy units. As the enemy's will to fight erodes and their formations begin to disintegrate, exploitation may develop into pursuit. The pursuit is an offensive operation against a retreating enemy force. The objective is the complete destruction of that force. Fire support tasks include— • Plan artillery movement to facilitate tactical movement and maintain force momentum. • Use firepower of air platforms to maximum extent possible to maintain momentum of the attack. • Task organize follow and support forces with sufficient artillery to deal with bypassed enemy forces. • Activate/continually update fire support coordination measures throughout the division operation area. • Synchronize fires with employment of dynamic obstacles in chokepoints to continue destruction of retreating enemy forces. • Continue neutralization of enemy fire support and air defense systems to facilitate ground and air maneuver. 3-93. Both exploitation and pursuits involve rapid movement forward. The 70+-kilometer range provided by the GMLRS, the 300-kilometer range of ATACMS, and the system enhancements provided by the M270A1 and M142 launcher system enable MLRS to support these operations efficiently. Because of the fluid nature of these attacks, MLRS use must adhere to positive clearance of fires procedures. 3-94. Some considerations in these types of offensive operations include positioning MLRS units close to the line of departure or FLOT, ensuring that MLRS units travel well forward with maneuver units, and planning for ammunition and ammunition resupply throughout the operation.
FIREFINDER RADARS 3-95. The primary role of target acquisition radars in the offense is to protect the friendly force by locating targets for engagement. In offensive operations, particular attention must be given to planning target acquisition to facilitate future operations. The TA planners must ensure a smooth transition from one phase of the operation to the next by providing continuous coverage of the zone of operation. The FSCOORD must specifically concern himself with coordinating the use of the terrain for the radar and recommending fire finder zones. 3-96. Because, in the offense, intelligence provides many enemy positions in advance and the friendly force is uncovered as it maneuvers, the first fire finder zone considered for use is the call-for-fire zone (CFFZ). Establishing a CFFZ will facilitate immediate counter fire to suppress enemy artillery disrupting
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-15
Chapter 3
the friendly scheme of maneuver. Critical friendly zones may be phased along the maneuver axis of advance and activated when entered by friendly forces. This is particularly important in those areas where friendly forces are most vulnerable (for example, river-crossing sites and areas open to easy visual observation). 3-97. Command, control, and cueing should be decentralized during offensive operations. The FA controlling headquarters should designate cueing agents that can cue the radar by calling it directly. The controlling headquarters must inform the radar section concerning who these agents are and which ones have priority. This is necessary to streamline acquisition and counter fire effort when committed maneuver forces may be particularly vulnerable to enemy indirect fire. 3-98. One additional consideration in the offense is that TA assets may move forward so far or so fast that survey may initially be unavailable in some positions. Therefore, the TA assets may have to use hasty survey techniques for control until survey is available.
DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS 3-99. The immediate purpose of defensive operations is to defeat an enemy attack. The greater intent of the defense is to force the attack to culminate, to gain the initiative for friendly forces, and to create the opportunity to shift to the offensive. The defender seeks to mass overwhelming combat power at the times and places of his choosing. It shifts that mass, as required, to support the main effort in a defensive scheme that will deny the enemy the ability to achieve its objectives. 3-100. The two primary forms of defensive operations are mobile and area defense. An effective defense consists of both active and passive components combined to deprive the enemy of the initiative. Mobile defenses orient on the destruction of the attacking force by permitting the enemy to advance into a position that exposes it to counterattack by a mobile reserve. Area defenses orient on retention of terrain by absorbing the enemy in an interlocking series of positions and destroying it largely by fires.
MOBILE DEFENSE 3-101. Mobile defense orients on the destruction of the enemy force by employing a combination of fire and maneuver, offense, defense, and delay to defeat its attack. Units strive to execute a dynamic defense, achieving a synergy from a combination of firepower and maneuver that dominate the enemy, rob it of the initiative, and negate its ability to continue offensive operations. 3-102. Maximizing the advantages conferred on the defender in owning and knowing the terrain, the unit sets the tempo of operations throughout the depth of its AO. Defending forces blind or deceive enemy critical reconnaissance elements to prevent disclosure of friendly dispositions, capabilities, and intent. The defending unit tracks the enemy throughout its attack, identifying critical enemy nodes such as C2, radars, logistics trains, and fire support systems for attack. The defender commits the minimum force possible to positional defense. 3-103. A mobile striking force is established that uses maximum combat power to strike the attacking enemy at the most vulnerable time and place—when the attacker is attempting to overcome that part of the defending force acting as the tactical anvil. At the decisive moment, the defending unit unleashes its firepower and maneuver forces to strike the attacker simultaneously throughout the depth of its forces to defeat it in detail.
AREA DEFENSE 3-104. Units conduct an area defense to deny the enemy access to designated terrain or facilities for a specified time. In an area defense, the bulk of defending forces deploy to retain ground, using a combination of defensive positions and small, mobile reserves. Commanders organize the defense around a relatively static framework provided by defensive positions, seeking to destroy enemy forces close in with interlocking direct fires and at depth with massed precision fires. Precision in selection and design of engagement areas, and control and distribution of both direct and indirect fires, are keys to a successful defense. Even while conducting an area defense, units will take the fight to the enemy and inflict levels of damage that will force it to quit the field.
3-16
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
OPERATIONS IN DEPTH 3-105. Although the shaping of the AO is important to the success of all combat operations, in the defense it is an absolute requirement if the unit is to survive and win. Operations in depth prevent the enemy from gaining momentum or reinforcing success it may experience in its attack. The unit seeks to avoid the attrition nature of sequential operations through integrated, simultaneous application of combat power throughout the depth of the AO, striving to defeat an enemy rapidly with minimum friendly casualties. The unit employs specific resources to identify and track HPTs and critical combat forces and functions. When those targets, forces, and functions are located, the unit masses fires and/or forces at the right place and time to destroy them and achieve the commander’s intent. 3-106. The design and successful application of firepower in depth allows the unit to seize the initiative, retain and exercise the spirit of the offense, and set the conditions for decisive operations. Sudden strikes by both fire and maneuver from a variety of directions, synchronized with other disruptive effects on the enemy such as jamming, smoke, and deception, will unhinge or obviate an attack even before it has begun. Successful synchronization of the battle plan and achievement of optimum effects demand the detailed integration and precise timing of both the scheme of maneuver and concept of fires.
FIRE SUPPORT 3-107. Units employ firepower at extended depths to accomplish a wide range of tactical and operational tasks. Fire supporters use ATACMS munitions to attack virtually any target set at ranges of up to 300 kilometers. In combination with air interdiction, this land force firepower capability holds every enemy capability at risk throughout the depth of the AO. Conventional operations, spearheaded by the division aviation brigade in the form of joint air attack or combined arms teams, remain a significant tool for eliminating critical enemy functions (such as enemy artillery groups or ground maneuver forces). 3-108. Lethal and non lethal fires are delivered by direct and indirect fire systems, close air support (CAS), attack helicopters, and electronic means. Collectively, judicious use of the firepower resources wielded by the unit will enable it to set the conditions for dominant maneuver and successful decisive operations. The unit employs its firepower at extended depths to accomplish a wide range of operational and tactical tasks. In defensive operations, the commander normally maintains more centralized control of all artillery assets, including MLRS, to ensure they are immediately responsive to the force commander. However, MLRS units may be attached to, or under the OPCON of covering force units. The duration of the attachment or OPCON and other instructions and restrictions should be delineated in the OPORD. 3-109. MLRS units can support defensive operations with fires by providing the following: • Counter fire and SEAD fires. • Fires on enemy C2 assets and maneuver assembly areas to disrupt command, control, and attack preparations. • Engagement of enemy forces as far forward as possible. Attack of targets with MLRS DPICM strips enemy forces of light armor and infantry support and causes mobility and firepower kills to heavy armor. • Long-range missile fires on targets arrayed in depth, unassigned area targets, uncommitted forces, and other HPTs. 3-110. A Firefinder to MLRS sensor-to-shooter link through battalion to the launcher is most effective during defensive operations. This link allows rapid detection and destruction of enemy artillery and mortars as they fire in support of their maneuver advance. 3-111. The positioning of MLRS in the security area to range more deeply is appropriate and must be carefully considered and planned. Considerations include the following: • Increases security risks to MLRS units. • Complicates communications requirements with force FA headquarters. • Makes logistical support more difficult.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-17
Chapter 3
3-112. Other considerations: • Availability of suitable firing positions and routes. • MLRS units should not be positioned on major avenues of approach. Enemy breakthroughs may jeopardize the unit or force it to displace prematurely.
FIREFINDER RADARS 3-113. The primary role of TA radars in the defense is to protect those units and installations the commander deems critical to a successful defense. TA planners must also consider how to execute a transition from defensive to offensive operations (such as counterattacks). Positioning, task organization, and on-order missions should facilitate the transition. 3-114. In the defense, the first consideration is to protect critical units or installations by using critical friendly zones (CFZs). The second consideration concerning the use of zones is determining areas in which to use CFFZs. Based on a thorough IPB and other target indicators, CFFZs should be used to monitor suspect areas from which friendly forces anticipate artillery fire that could jeopardize the mission. This facilitates effective counter fire to suppress or neutralize those targets. Artillery target intelligence zones (ATIZs) may be used in areas in which we are not sure about enemy artillery. They may also be used in areas that are out of range of friendly organic artillery but the force commander wishes to monitor closely. Censor zones may be placed around friendly artillery whose fires might cause Firefinder radars to acquire the artillery as hostile fire. For example, this could easily occur in the case of nonlinear operations.
SUPPRESSION OF ENEMY AIR DEFENSES 3-115. SEAD operations target all known or suspected enemy air defense sites that cannot be avoided and are capable of engaging friendly air assets. The FC/FE integrates SEAD fires into an overall fire plan that focuses fires according to the commander’s guidance. Synchronization of the SEAD fires with the maneuver plan is accomplished using procedural control (an H-hour sequence), positive control (initiating fires on each target as the lead aircraft passes a predetermined reference point or trigger), or a combination of the two. Regardless of the technique, the FSCOORD conducts detailed planning and close coordination with the appropriate combined arms staff members, the MLRS battalion S-3/FDO, and the higher HQ FC. 3-116. To support an aviation brigade attack package with SEAD, the aviation brigade FSCOORD (at division) or the corps FC— • Determines SEAD requirements to support the aviation brigade. • Provides target list to tactical and main tactical operations center FCs/FEs and the FIB fire control element. • Coordinates cross-cueing UAS with electronic intelligence (ELINT) and signals intelligence (SIGINT) assets focusing on air routes or corridors. • Coordinates delivery of fires for preplanned SEAD based on UA over flights and ELINT/SIGINT detection. • Uses MLRS battalion to attack targets located by Longbow Apache that they cannot kill themselves. Initiates sensor-to-shooter link to minimize response time. • Coordinates critical friendly zones on SEAD firers. • Employs fire support coordination measures to support aviation brigade engagement areas when required.
COUNTER FIRE 3-117. The planning and execution of the digitized counter fire fight is aggressive and proactive. The combination of the AFATDS, MLRS, and cannon weapon systems and a vast array of sensors that include the highly responsive and successful AN/TPQ-36 and AN/TPQ-37 radars enable an unprecedented level of proactive and reactive counter fire. The multitude of sensors that includes radars and UAS provides accurate, near real-time targeting information. This enhanced targeting and lethality of munitions, improved digital C2, and ability of platforms to service targets result in a successful counter fire fight.
3-18
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
3-118. The AFATDS provides the next generation of automated C2 for fire support and field artillery requirements. The AFATDS is designed to achieve a synergistic effect of all available fire support weapons by broadening, modernizing, and improving the supportability and survivability of fire support C2 for the tactical forces.
Proactive Counter fire 3-119. The FIB may control proactive counter fire. Considerations for conducting proactive counter fire are as follows: • Effort typically managed by the FIB S-2. • Intelligence feeds into common ground station (CGS), cross-cueing radars/UAS are critical. • All available artillery units participate. • Coordinated fire line (CFL) positioned close to facilitate quick engagements. • Digital interface between S-2 and MLRS battalion S-2/FIB LNO is critical. • No fire area (NFA) management for SOF, long-range surveillance detachment (LRSD), reconnaissance troops, and scouts is critical. • Maximize use of AFATDS to clear fires.
Reactive Counter fire 3-120. The FIB may control the reactive counter fire cell. Considerations for conducting reactive counter fire are as follows: • CFL close to facilitate quick engagements, maintaining common sensor boundary. • Firefinder control is METT-TC dependent. • Zone manager. • Brigade CFZs and CFFZs included in plan. • Ensure that mission fired report, artillery target intelligence sent to analysis and control element (ACE) forward. • NFA management for SOF, LRSD, reconnaissance troops, and scouts is critical. • Reinforcing FIB LNO team provides interface between AFATDS operations, if required. • Clear missions short of CFL, beyond the FSCL, and across brigade boundaries with TAC CP FC/FE.
NONSTANDARD EMPLOYMENT TECHNIQUES 3-121. Force commanders can employ MLRS units in numerous ways for special missions. These missions include conducting proactive counter fire strikes against enemy indirect fire systems, attacking unassigned area targets as part of a spoiling attack (raid), and moving forward with maneuver security forces to conduct SEAD missions or attack other HPTs. There are some unique considerations for planning and executing such operations. The considerations listed below are not all inclusive, but are intended as a planning aid.
MISSION 3-122. The force commander's intent for the mission must be clearly understood. Questions for the MLRS unit commander to consider during the planning process are as follows: • What is the commander's concept for fires? • How much time is available to complete the mission and conduct the planned withdrawal? • What are the proposed firing and C2 locations? What are the routes to those locations? What are the withdrawal routes? • What is the acceptable level of risk in completing the mission (has the commander established criteria for aborting the mission)?
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-19
Chapter 3
• • • • • • •
What are the target descriptions? How many and what type/size are the targets? What are the acquisition sources? Are ground maneuver units available to assist in protecting both firing units and associated radars? Was the commander's intent established in the commander's criteria? Is the controlled supply rate (CSR) sufficient to accomplish current and follow-on missions? Will a secondary launcher be required? Is there a follow-on mission?
FORCE PROTECTION 3-123. MLRS units are HPTs for the enemy. On the basis of the nature of the mission, the attack location, the enemy situation, and the acceptable level of risk, force protection requirements will vary. Questions to determine the required level of force protection are as follows: • What is the threat? • If a maneuver protection force is required, what is the size and structure of the force? How can that force best protect the MLRS unit? • What is the risk of receiving counter fire? Is there a need to have acquisition assets and additional firing units for counter fire? • What is the current and projected air defense posture? Should the protection force include dedicated air defense weapon systems? 3-124. Although the need for external force protection is normally great, MLRS units must always plan for self-defense. Planning and requesting fire support, situational awareness, appropriate positioning, and movement all contribute to self-defense. When necessary, digging-in should also be considered. The key to acquiring external force protection is to work with the force commander to reach an agreement acceptable to all. Depending on the situation, a company team size force, including air and missile defense (AMD), should be requested for the MLRS battalion. Procedures for using such a package should be included in all battalion and battery TSOPs. A combination of roving patrols throughout the position area and reaction forces may be appropriate.
COORDINATION 3-125. Coordination is essential during any operation, particularly for raids and other special missions. The following questions can be asked to determine coordination requirements: • Is there a need for, and have we established, liaison with the supported and supporting forces (force maneuver TOC, security force HQ)? • Have the routes been cleared with the appropriate headquarters? • Are there adequate communications assets and nets? What frequencies? • If the attack force must pass through the FLOT of another unit, then a passage of lines will be necessary. Has coordination for passage of lines (if required) been conducted during the planning phase?
LOGISTICS 3-126. The size of the force during special missions should be minimized. This allows the unit to accomplish objectives and continue with the follow-on mission quickly. Units should include only minimum essential logistics support as well. Consider the following logistics questions: • How much and what type of ammunition is required? • Should a MST accompany the force? If so, what should go? • How much fuel is required? Will refueling be required to complete the mission? • Will launchers require reloading? If so, how often and where will reloading be conducted?
3-20
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
COMMAND AND CONTROL 3-127. The composition and distribution of the supported force, the MLRS unit inherent responsibilities to the force field artillery headquarters, and the mission and organization of the MLRS unit will determine the command and control requirements. Consider the following questions to determine command and control requirements: • How many C2 nodes does the mission require? Will the unit operations center be sufficient? Will it require augmentation? • If a maneuver protection force is required, how is it controlled? Will it provide a liaison to the MLRS unit C2 element? • Will the MLRS unit be linked directly to the corps or division FC using a “quick-fire” net/channel? • Will a primary and alternate launcher be assigned? • What acquisition assets are available for counter fire (for example, AN/TPQ-36 and AN/TPQ37)? • Are electronic warfare (EW) assets (jammers) going to be committed to the effort to mask the electronic signature?
RAID 3-128. A raid is an operation, usually small scale, involving a swift penetration of hostile territory to secure information, confuse the enemy, or to destroy installations. It ends with a planned withdrawal upon completion of the assigned mission (FM 1-02). Artillery raids use artillery fires as the primary target attack mechanism. Raid missions support mission objectives by sending firing elements forward to engage enemy HPTs that are currently beyond the maximum range of the MLRS weapon system. 3-129. As with any military operation, all leaders must consider METT-TC when planning and executing MLRS raids. Additionally, the controlling headquarters should make a risk assessment to determine the value of the raid, assuming it is a success, versus the risk to such an important fire support asset.
Unit Selection 3-130. The battalion TOC typically receives the raid mission from higher headquarters. If the firing element is not specified, the battalion commander determines which unit/firing element will conduct the raid mission on the basis of— • Weapon system availability (desired effects on target). • Ammunition availability (number and type of rounds). • Location of firing element (proximity to firing points). • Tactical situation. • Other mission requirements. • Fire plan(s). • Are C-130 or C-17 aircraft available for insertion of the launchers? If so M142 launchers should be selected
Behind FLOT Briefing 3-131. Some raids are conducted behind the FLOT and, therefore, require only minimal external assistance. For example, a maneuver security force may not be necessary. For missions such as these, the battalion commander or S-3 includes the following when briefing the raid mission-firing element: • Situation. Friendly, enemy, attachments, and detachments. • Mission. Who, what, when, where, and why to include the size of the element to conduct raid, method of control, and target and firing point (FP) grids. • Execution:
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-21
Chapter 3
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Route to OPAREA. Start point (SP)/CP/release point (RP) locations. Firing point OPAREA. Rally point after mission. Target grids. Firing window or TOT. Number/type rounds per target. Number of launchers authorized. Call signs and frequencies. FSCMs. Abort authority. Abort code word. Emergency destruction criteria. Fire support assets available.
Cross-FLOT Briefing 3-132. If the raid will be conducted cross-FLOT, the commander of the maneuver security force (force protection package) should be present during the mission briefing. In addition to those items listed above, a cross-FLOT briefing should include: • Link-up point with maneuver element guides. • Force protection (air and missile defense [AMD], EW, FS assets, and security). • Passage lane/passage point. • Procedures/signals for passage of lines. • Maneuver call signs and frequencies. • Force commander name and rank. • Service support: • Maintenance support/contact team requirements. • Survey support available. • Reload requirements. • Amount of ammunition to be brought forward. • Refuel support. • Command and signal: • RETRANS location and frequency. • Command and control (FDC vehicle, OE-254).
Execution 3-133. Consider the following for execution of the raid: • Firing units will carry forward only the number of vehicles necessary to accomplish the mission as designated by battalion. (Depending on the importance of the target, a primary and alternate launcher will be assigned and laid on the target in case of technical/mechanical difficulties.) Launchers will move forward with the mission in the buffer and a hard copy of the mission in case manual fire mission processing is required. • Firing unit(s) will arrive at the link-up point. • The officer in charge (OIC)/non commissioned officer in charge (NCOIC) of the raid party will brief the maneuver unit commander or representative at link-up point or via FM communications, as directed.
3-22
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
• • •
• • • • •
Once the briefing is conducted, the leader of the raid unit or a maneuver escort will bring the firing elements to the link-up points. Security force will move forward and clear the route to the FP. If possible, report link-up, movement/checkpoints, and position to the battalion TOC or the BOC. If necessary, a vehicle will be brought forward with the raid element to act as a relay between the raid element and the controlling raid headquarters. Communications will be maintained between the supported unit headquarters, the battalion TOC, and the raid OIC. The raid OIC must be prepared to accept target updates prior to the designated time. Once the maneuver security force has cleared the route and OPAREA, the firing element will be called forward to the firing points. The mission(s) are fired. Firing elements will then withdraw to a previously designated rally point. If a follow-on mission is required, the launcher(s) will proceed to a predetermined ammunition reload site(s), reload, and fire the follow-on mission(s). When rounds are complete, the firing element will withdraw to the rally point. Battalion will provide abort criteria.
3-134. The checklists in appendix M may help in preparing for a raid.
TARGET ACQUISITION AND SENSOR SYSTEM INTERFACE 3-135. The MLRS C2 system interfaces directly with most digital communications systems; therefore, it is easily linked to any TA or sensor systems equipped with digital communications. This linkage allows faster response for attack of detected targets. Five of the most likely sources of target information are the Firefinder radar, the OH-58D helicopter, the UAS, and the JSTARS or Guardrail SIGINT systems.
FIREFINDER RADAR 3-136. The MLRS AFATDS at all levels can interface directly with the Firefinder. This link gives the force FA commander an extremely fast, responsive, and effective counter fire capability. MLRS-Firefinder operations can orient on the force commander's battlefield priorities while still providing counter fire to the force as a whole. Use of zone management and common sensor boundaries, based on specific commander's guidance, is essential for providing targeting zone and report criteria for the radar section and engagement and effects criteria for the MLRS unit. (See FM 3-09.12 for more detailed information.)
SENSOR-TO-SHOOTER OPERATIONS 3-137. The introduction of the complete suite of MLRS and ATACMS munitions provides the MLRS battalion (those equipped with the M270A1 or M142 launchers) with the capability to deliver lethal fires out to 300 kilometers. When combined with the suite of JSTARS and UAS sensors, the aviation brigade and the Firefinder radar, the battalion offers a dynamic tool in its conduct of near real-time sensor-toshooter operations. 3-138. The fleeting nature of some enemy systems requires sensor-to-shooter links. The information links must be established between sensors and shooters to enable the timely execution of missions, especially time-critical missions. 3-139. Planners for MLRS battalion sensor-to-shooter operations should consider total system capabilities and errors associated with finding, processing, and attacking the target with MLRS munitions. Such considerations include— • Target type and vulnerability. • Target location error. • Target posture. • Target dwell time. • Attack system responsiveness.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-23
Chapter 3
• •
Munitions effects. CEP.
3-140. Sensor-to-shooter engagements should be integrated with other combat activities. The decision to conduct dedicated sensor-to-shooter operations with MLRS battalion assets should be weighed against requirements for support of the force as a whole. Once the decision is made to incorporate MLRS assets into sensor-to-shooter operations, planners have 4 options ranging from centralized to decentralized control and execution. See FM 6-20-40 and FM 6-20-50 for a detailed discussion of sensor-to-shooter operations. • Option 1. The sensor provides input directly to a launcher. (This is not possible with the M270; FCS can only communicate with the AFATDS.) The launcher receives what is, in effect, a fire order from an agency/device designed to input spot reports and/or requests for fire. • Option 2. The sensor bypasses normal reporting channels and communicates with a C2 organization, such as the MLRS BOC, to which it would not send data under normal circumstances. • Option 3. The sensor enters the fire support system at an echelon higher than in option 2, such as the FIB TOC. • Option 4. The sensor bypasses normal reporting channels and communicates with a C2 organization to which it would not send data under normal circumstances. The information enters the fire support system at the echelon tasked to provide the quick-fire channel, such as the battalion TOC.
Firefinder Sensor-to-Shooter Operations 3-141. Limitations. Direct Firefinder-MLRS interface places the following limitations on Firefinder and MLRS usage: • The Fire finder’s minimal ability to discriminate between mortars and artillery prevents full use of the commander's engagement criteria. • Firefinder digital non-secure communications are highly susceptible to EW. • The direct link of Firefinder and MLRS prevents complete target analysis for artillery intelligence evaluation and counter fire assignment. • Firefinder can generate more targets than 1 MLRS battery can handle with its 6 launchers. Even a moderate, but constant, stream of Firefinder targets will place an enormous strain on the MLRS resupply system. • Firefinder can generate more target information than the MLRS battalion TOC can process. To be responsive and engage legitimate targets, the TOC must be augmented with targeting personnel. 3-142. The best situations for optimum use of direct Firefinder interface are— • Reduction of time from acquisition to firing is paramount (fleeting targets). • Enough MLRS assets are available to handle the high volume of counter fire targets generated and/or enough ammunition is available to support the fire mission load. • Enough additional MLRS and other FA assets are available to engage all targets generated by other sources. • Enemy EW capability is low. • The force FA commander determines that only MLRS is necessary in the engagement of counter fire targets. • Counter fire is determined to be the most critical requirement.
OH-58D(I) Helicopter Kiowa Warrior 3-143. The OH-58D(I) Kiowa Warrior fills the armed reconnaissance role for attack helicopter and air cavalry units. The OH-58D performs reconnaissance, security, C2, target acquisition/designation, and
3-24
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
defensive air combat missions. The Kiowa Warrior adds armed reconnaissance, light attack, and multipurpose light helicopter capabilities to the basic OH-58D. 3-144. A highly accurate navigation system permits precise target location that can be handed off to other engagement systems via the ATHS. The laser designator can provide autonomous designation for the laser Hellfire or remote designation for other laser-guided precision munitions. 3-145. The AFATDS at platoon, battery, or battalion can communicate digitally with observers in an OH58D through the helicopter's ATHS. This link gives near real-time target acquisition.
UAS 3-146. The Army and Marine Corps currently use a variety of unmanned aircraft systems. There is no organic data communications interface between these UAs (and their C2 system) and the MLRS unit AFATDS. However, data communications can be established if the UAS company is supplemented with the Marine digital message system (AN/PSC-2A) or augmented with 1 of the 2 liaison sections from the corps MLRS battalion headquarters with their organic AFATDS.
COMMON GROUND STATION (CGS) 3-147. MLRS battalions may be provided with a CGS to reduce sensor-to-shooter times during decentralized execution of delivery. The CGS receives target information directly from the JSTARS airborne platform, UA, and broadcast nets. These systems provide near real-time information on target location, description, speed, and direction of travel. 3-148. The CGS is a highly mobile self-supporting system. Its primary mission is targeting, battle management, surveillance, and data processing. The CGS provides the link with MLRS, which gives the corps and division commanders immediate responsive attack capability against unassigned area targets, located by the E-8C radar system, UA, and broadcast intelligence. 3-149. Targeting information received at the CGS is unfiltered raw data. Targeting or intelligence analysts have not processed it for deception and target importance. Extensive commander's guidance is necessary for the battalion to engage HPTs effectively using data from the CGS. For a more detailed discussion, refer to appendix J.
CIVIL SUPPORT 3-150. MLRS Units may be given a mission of Civil Support Operations in the U.S. See FM 3-28.1 Multi-Service Tactics, techniques, and Procedures for Civil Support (CS) Operations for this non-standard mission.
STABILITY OPERATION 3-151. Stability operations will not always be peaceful actions. Determined opponents may resort to fighting or other aggressive acts in an attempt to defeat our purposes and promote theirs. 3-152. The stability operations environment is complex and requires disciplined, versatile Army forces to respond to different situations, including transitioning rapidly from stability operations to wartime operations.
ROLES OF MLRS UNIT 3-153. The primary function for MLRS in stability operations is in the resolution of conflict phase. MLRS units may also participate in a noncombat support role as a show of force/resolve or in a direct action role by attacking HPTs.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-25
Chapter 3
NONCOMBAT ROLES 3-154. In a noncombat support role, the MLRS unit may use its organic communication capability to support the supported commander’s command and control structure. The unit's resupply vehicles offer unique logistical support capabilities. 3-155. As a show of force/resolve, the presence of the MLRS system in support of peace enforcement or peacekeeping missions demonstrates the nation's commitment to the mission.
COMBAT ROLES 3-156. Supporting peacekeeping or peace enforcement operations in a direct action role, the MLRS system can engage HPTs at extended range. When working with the Firefinder radar system, MLRS can effectively neutralize mortar and artillery firing positions in accordance with rules of engagement (ROE) established by the joint task force. 3-157. The Army conducts attacks and raids to create situations that permit seizing and maintaining political and military initiative. Normally, the United States executes attacks and raids to achieve specific objectives other than gaining or holding terrain. Attacks by conventional ground, air, or special operations forces, acting independently or in concert, are used to damage or destroy high value targets (HVTs) or to demonstrate U.S. capability and resolve to achieve a favorable result. The following are tactics, techniques, and procedures specific to stability operations.
Minimize Movement 3-158. During stability operations, the greatest threat to the force will usually be from small groups and terrorists conducting raids and ambushes. Occupation of a defensible firing position affords the MLRS unit greater survivability than does standard MLRS tactics of hide, shoot, and move.
Collocate with Other Units 3-159. Occupying positions in conjunction with other task force units provides the MLRS unit with an increased degree of protection against enemy small unit attacks. Coordination is the key to success.
Harden Positions 3-160. Using engineer assets to harden the MLRS position will improve survivability. Weather and terrain will dictate whether the unit builds berms or digs in. In either case, the key to success is prior planning and coordination with the supporting engineer unit.
Direct Link with Firefinder Radar 3-161. When supporting the task force with countermortar/counterbattery fires, a direct link may be established between the MLRS unit and the Firefinder radar to improve reaction time. A positive method of clearing fires must be established and enforced.
Command and Control 3-162. Command and control is another major concern during support and sustainment operations; friendly forces must engage only hostile forces. Killing noncombatants can turn survivors into enemies instead of neutrals or friends. Tight control, based on ROE, is the norm. MLRS responsiveness is often degraded because a time lag is inevitable after a provocation while a determination is made if the ROE warrant a fire mission. The ROE must clearly specify when the use of fire support is appropriate and justified. Clearance of fires is infinitely more complicated when operating in urban areas.
Precision Guided-Munitions 3-163. The MLRS can deliver fires that employ guided munitions such as GMLRS or ATACMS. Unguided munitions are suitable for area fires but may not be the best choice to attack a point target. For
3-26
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
example, the MLRS unguided M26 rocket may not be the best weapon to attack mortars. In certain circumstances, the collateral damage of MLRS may be too great. Dud submunitions present an additional concern about using MLRS in this situation. Dud DPICM and APAM bomblets are a threat to personnel, whether Soldiers or civilians. The low collateral damage from the M31 Guided MLRS Unitary makes it an excellent munitions’ for urban environments.
Operations/Firebase 3-164. MLRS platoons may choose to occupy some type of operations base or firebase, just as most other units do in support and sustainment operations. Depending on the situation, platoons may share operating firebases with other units or occupy one by themselves. Another major consideration for unit leaders in deciding the type and location of operating base to establish is the positioning of firing points. Firing points may be inside or outside the firebase. (When selecting firing points inside the firebase, the commander must consider launcher danger areas when firing.) Consider the following when determining whether to occupy an operating base with another unit: • Location. As in every situation, the potential locations of targets should determine where the platoons should emplace. Therefore, the required location of the launchers may impact the decision to collocate or not (for example, are other units in the immediate vicinity of where the platoons are required to position?). • Coordination. Alarms, warnings, and protective positions must be coordinated with all parties on the base, especially when launchers are intended to fire from inside the base, and engineer support to adequately protect soldiers and equipment is not available. Firing points outside the operating base make coordination of these activities with another unit easier. • Defense. A base established by a larger unit provides a platoon greater defensive strength and logistical support. However, an operating base with a large number of units faces a tremendous challenge in maintaining a viable perimeter as individual units leave and reenter the perimeter for patrolling, resupply, or other duties. However, if a platoon occupies an operating firebase by itself, it has little self-defensive capability. 3-165. If the unit decides to collocate with others, it may consider occupying bases established by a maneuver battalion, a brigade headquarters and headquarters company (HHC), or the brigade support area, predominantly consisting of a forward support battalion. Table 3-5 summarizes the advantages and disadvantages of each position option. Table 3- 5. Comparison of MLRS Operating Base Techniques Type of Base
Advantages
Disadvantages
Maneuver Unit
Good perimeter defense. Consolidated life and equipment support possible. Deepest fires. Better perimeter defense than an MLRS platoon alone. Consolidated life and equipment support possible. Ease of command and control. Better perimeter defense than MLRS platoon alone. Ease of logistical support.
Difficulty adjusting the perimeter when units leave. Firing points outside a protected area.
Brigade Headquarters
BSA
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Firing points outside a protected area.
Firing points outside a protected area. Longer distance to likely targets, depending on the BSA location.
3-27
Chapter 3
Table 3- 5. Comparison of MLRS Operating Base Techniques Type of Base
Advantages
Disadvantages
MLRS Platoon/ Battery
Firing points in a protected area. No perimeter adjustments required. Less coordination with adjacent units in the same operating base.
Limited perimeter defense. Longer travel time/distance to additional logistical support.
Firing Points Inside 3-166. When determining whether to locate firing points inside or outside the operating firebase, consider— • Firing from inside the perimeter provides the best security for the launchers, especially when engineer support is available. Figure 3-1 portrays a platoon-operating base with internal firing points. • Burms protect vehicles, equipment, ammunition, and launchers not on firing points. • Launchers can be in single or consolidated hide positions. 3-167. Fighting positions protect the perimeter. Burms inside the perimeter act as backstops for the back blast. The three burms forming a "Y" in figure 3-1 facilitate 6,400-mil firing. The "Y" has three firing points, 1 in each corner. The launcher occupies the firing point that best allows target attack.
Figure 3-1. Example: MLRS Platoon Operating Base with Internal Firing Points 3-168. Just as in other OPAREAs, the launcher remains in a hide position (burmed for protection) until it receives a fire mission. It then occupies a firing point (burmed to deflect back blast) long enough to fire. After the fire mission, the launcher moves to a hide position.
3-28
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Employment
Note: The “stay hot, shoot fast” technique discussed in chapter 6 may also be applicable in support and sustainment operations when platoons are using operating bases (such as the one described above) and extremely responsive fires are required for fleeting targets. 3-169. Firing from inside an operating firebase requires engineer support to ensure that the flame and smoke and the flying dirt, rocks, and blast panels do not injure people or damage equipment. Even with the firing point burms, for individual safety, soldiers inside the base must occupy launchers or fighting positions during fire missions. A warning device or signal to alert soldiers of a fire mission is a must. Soldiers within 50 meters of the launcher should mask, even if in a protected position, for protection from smoke inhalation. Firing Points Outside 3-170. This option for firing points eliminates the impact of rocket back blasts inside the operating base. However, security of the launcher becomes a major issue. A launcher cannot defend itself. It has no defensive armament, and the three-man crew is fully employed operating the system. Additional personnel (such as military police [MP], infantrymen in personnel carriers, or an ad hoc group of MLRS personnel riding in other vehicles) must accompany a launcher if it is to have any protection. Just as in an operating base, these security elements must protect themselves from rocket back blasts. Positioning to the side of the launcher outside the danger area is the easiest solution. 3-171. The BOC, POC, and fire mission requester must remember that the response time for a fire mission also increases if the firing point is outside the operating base. The travel time to the firing point makes successfully engaging a fleeting target less likely. The controlling BOC or POC must determine the travel times and ensure that its higher HQ understands this additional factor. 3-172. Care is also necessary to ensure that such a fire mission does not become an ambush opportunity for the threat. If a pattern develops for provocations resulting in MLRS firings, and the firing points are marked so an enemy can predict a route, an enemy could easily set a trap. It does not take a great deal of enemy firepower to destroy a HMMWV and a launcher.
SUSTAINMENT OPERATIONS WITH THE MARINE CORPS 3-173. There are some fundamental differences between the Services in their approach to logistics. The MEF has a force service support group (FSSG) of 8 battalions that are task organized based on their missions. The MEF normally conducts operations within 50 miles of its support base, which is generally established around a major seaport or airhead. The FSSG is resourced to support all classes of supply and deploys within 60 days of sustainability. The FSSG supports the ground combat element (GCE) via a smaller mobile sustainment, sustainment operations, or support element that provides direct support and remains close to the GCE.
RESPONSIBILITIES ARMY 3-174. Corps MLRS battalions are supplemented with attached MSTs for intermediate DS (third echelon) vehicle, fire control, and communications maintenance. 3-175. MLRS units normally deploy with a 15-day package of supplies. They receive a supplemental PLL/ASL stockage that equates to the support package of the Marine air ground task force (MAGTF) prior to, or during, deployment. 3-176. MLRS units have organic ammunition resupply vehicles. They retain responsibility for ammunition resupply from the supporting CSSE forward to the firing units. Excessive distances (80+ kilometers) between the firing units and the CSSE adversely impact on operations by reducing the resupply rate. This ultimately results in a logistically driven reduction in the rate at which an MLRS unit can engage targets.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
3-29
Chapter 3
Marine Corps 3-177. The USMC provides classes of supply I, II, III, IV, VI, VII (common only), and VIII. Additionally, they requisition and position MLRS ammunition (both rockets and missiles) at the FSSG, and provide all small arms Class V at the forward ASP. Similarly, the MAGTF processes Class IX requests from the MLRS unit and its attached MSTs for replenishment of PLL/ASL. The MAGTF provides overflow DS maintenance, some GS maintenance support, and responsibilities for retrograde of all depot level repairable to the appropriate depot level agency (see figure 7-4). 3-178. The supply system is a Department of Defense (DOD) system and should not have a significant impact. The challenge is the incompatibility of the Army unit level logistics system (ULLS) and the USMC asset tracking for logistics and supply system (ATLASS). There will be a need for Army MLRS units to manually enter PLL/ASL replenishment part requisition statuses into the ULLS, based on manual feedback from the supporting force support element (FSE). Similarly, Army MLRS units will need to submit manual requisitions using USMC forms to the supporting FSE so they can enter the requisition into ATLASS. An MLRS logistics liaison at the FSSE can facilitate the process.
3-30
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Chapter 4
MLRS Unit Operations This chapter addresses MLRS unit operations. This includes organization of the battalion staff for tactical operations as well as firing battery operations. Instructions covering features of combat operations, which lend themselves to definite or standardized procedures without loss of effectiveness, should be covered by TSOP. A guide and checklist for preparing an MLRS battalion TSOP is at appendix C.
SECTION I – BATTALION OPERATIONS
BATTALION COMMAND POST AND OPERATIONS CENTER 4-1. The MLRS battalion staff is organized for tactical operations by establishing the battalion CP and the ALOC. The battalion CP provides command and control for the battalion elements.
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS 4-2. The MLRS is an extremely unique and flexible system. Therefore, the MLRS battalion commander must consider several options when organizing the staff and command post(s) for tactical operations. In addition to the factors of METT-TC, the commander must consider survivability, dispersion, support requirements, past experience, and TSOPs. The commander can devise almost any option to accomplish the unit mission.
Option 1—Dual CPs 4-3. The HHB is divided into a battalion CP and a battalion trains. At the battalion CP, the operations, intelligence, and fire direction sections act as the TOC and provide C2 for the battalion elements and the primary communication link to the controlling force field artillery (FA) headquarters. Signal personnel may stay with the TOC. The TOC also monitors and, if necessary, coordinates for logistical support for the forward elements of the battalion. 4-4. At the battalion trains, the ALOC coordinates and controls support operations. The battalion XO supervises the ALOC. The HHB HQ, trains, and the ALOC are all located in 1 area. The ALOC can be subdivided, if necessary, into the unit maintenance collection point (UMCP) and the BSOC. The UMCP can be located 1 to 2 kilometers from the ALOC to diminish and isolate the noise and light discipline problems associated with extensive maintenance operations. The BSOC may be located in a supported maneuver BSA, the FIB BSA, or other convenient location. The BSOC is predominately made up of S-1 personnel, with a small contingent from the S-4. This configuration provides liaison for optimum logistics and replacement personnel support with the supported unit. See chapter 7 for more on logistical support information. 4-5. This type of organization emphasizes a reduced signature of the battalion HQ and increased responsiveness of the battalion sustainment operations. The POL resupply, maintenance, medical treatment, ammunition resupply, and other support operations are handled by the ALOC and/or trains personnel. Signal personnel may stay with the TOC.
Option 2—Consolidated CPs 4-6. The entire HHB, both TOC and ALOC with trains, is located in 1 position area. This option derives the greatest measure of local defense from organic elements and simplifies TOC and ALOC coordination,
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-1
Chapter 4
operations, and procedures. However, if battalion ammunition resupply operations and maintenance operations are centralized at battalion level, the size and operational signature of the combined TOC, ALOC, and trains may facilitate the enemy locating, targeting, and attacking the CP. It can also create logistics and communications problems with support areas in the contiguous area as the unit moves forward and the lines of communication are stretched.
Option 3—Mixed CPs 4-7. The HHB is split into a battalion CP and a battalion trains as with option 1. The commander moves some of the trains support elements to the battalion CP location and places them under the control of the TOC. He leaves the rest under the control of the ALOC to operate from the trains area. The primary objective is to move critical support as far forward as possible, within operational and/or situational constraints, and to provide greater security for the battalion CP.
BATTALION TACTICAL OPERATIONS CENTER 4-8. Within the battalion CP, the operations, fire direction, and intelligence sections make up the TOC. The TOC must also coordinate battalion survey requirements and establish liaison as required by the mission. The battalion CP is positioned on the battlefield to facilitate communications between higher headquarters elements, subordinate units, and adjacent unit CPs. An MLRS battalion TOC is configured with three command and control vehicle (C2V) platforms (operations, FDC, and intelligence). Radio and AFATDS quantities per section are illustrated in figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1. TOC Radio and AFATDS Quantities
OPERATIONS RESPONSIBILITIES 4-9. Operations responsibilities include the following: • Issue plans and orders. • Coordinate survey operations.
4-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
• • • • • • • • • •
Establish liaison, as required. Plan and coordinate all unit movements. Coordinate positioning with controlling FA headquarters or maneuver FC. Record all significant events on DA Form 1594 (Duty Officer’s Log). Maintain operational overlays. Maintain a situation map. Monitor and project ammunition status and/or requirements. Establish communications on appropriate nets.. Exercise staff supervision of unit CBRN operations. Ensure operations security (OPSEC).
INTELLIGENCE RESPONSIBILITIES 4-10. Intelligence responsibilities include the following: • Enemy situation awareness. • Terrain analysis. • Intelligence information processing and coordination. • Weather updates. • Management of target-related information. • Map control. • Physical security. • Counter fire targeting.
SURVEY RESPONSIBILITIES 4-11. The chief of party is the primary advisor for survey operations within the battalion. He is primarily concerned with providing survey control to the firing batteries, while also attempting to satisfy the needs of target acquisition assets, the supported maneuver unit, and other combat support units in the area. Specific duties include— • Coordinate and supervise battalion survey operations. • Develop the survey plan with guidance from the S-3. • Coordinate directly with battery commanders concerning survey requirements. • Perform general reconnaissance and observation as required by the S-3. Note: The survey PADS teams must also assist the S-3 and S-2 in acquiring combat information as they perform their normal mission. They are particularly useful in gathering information about the terrain.
LIAISON RESPONSIBILITIES 4-12. One of the 7 inherent responsibilities of an artillery battalion assigned a reinforcing or a GSR tactical mission is to provide liaison to the unit being reinforced. MLRS fires battalions 2 liaison teams as described in chapter 1. 4-13. Liaison is the contact or intercommunication maintained between elements to ensure mutual understanding and unity of purpose and action. It is the most commonly employed technique for establishing and maintaining close, continuous physical communication between units. 4-14. Liaison activities augment the commander's ability to synchronize and focus combat power. Liaison activities include establishing and maintaining physical contact and communications. Liaison activities ensure the following:
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-3
Chapter 4
• • •
Mutual cooperation and understanding between commanders and staffs. Coordination on tactical matters to achieve mutual purpose, support, and action. Exact and precise understanding of implied or inferred coordination measures to achieve synchronized results.
4-15. Overall, liaison becomes another tool to help commanders overcome friction, gain assurance that supporting and supported commanders understand implicit coordination, and achieve synchronized results. Effective liaison enhances the commander's confidence in planning and mission execution. 4-16. Supporting FA commanders may have insufficient liaison teams to meet all requirements. In such cases, they must prioritize and provide liaison teams for the most critical requirements. To meet requirements beyond organic capabilities, commanders have several options, to include forming teams “out of hide.” However, the number of vehicles, radios, and digital communication devices available limits this option. As long as the functional requirements are met to the satisfaction of the commanders involved, exchange of liaison officers (LNOs) is not absolutely required. If the 2 units choose to collocate CPs or FDCs, the liaison requirement has been met and no liaison officer is required. If both units are automated and digital communications are adequate, a liaison officer may not be necessary. If no means are available to establish full-time liaison, periodic coordination between units may have to suffice. 4-17. When an MLRS battalion is assigned a GS or GSR support relationship or a GS or GSR tactical mission, it can be positioned in a BCT’s area of operations (AO). The MLRS battalion commander may consider sending 1 of his liaison teams to the brigade combat team (BCT) FC. This team can help the battalion commander track the maneuver situation and keep the force commander informed of the location and status of a sizable friendly force in his area but not under his control. When supporting a MAGTF, the Marine controlling FA headquarters will provide reciprocal liaison to the MLRS unit. 4-18. Because the liaison officer/sergeant represents the commander, the liaison officer/sergeant must be able to— • Understand how the commander thinks. • Interpret the commander's messages. • Convey the commander's vision, mission, and concept of operations and guidance. • Represent the commander's position. 4-19. The liaison officer's professional capabilities and personal characteristics must encourage confidence and cooperation with the commander and staff of the receiving unit. The liaison officer must— • Be thoroughly knowledgeable of the unit mission and its tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP); organization; capabilities; and communications equipment. • Be familiar with the doctrine and staff procedures of the receiving unit headquarters. • Be familiar with the requirements for, and the purpose of, liaison; the liaison system and its corresponding reports, reporting documents, and records; and the training of the liaison team. • Observe the established channels of command and staff functions. 4-20. Artillery CPs that dispatch liaison teams are called sending units. Gaining units are called receiving units.
Sending Units 4-21. Sending units are responsible for ensuring that liaison personnel are competent, thoroughly trained, and— • Remain up to date on current and future operations, are thoroughly briefed, and understand what information to pass to the receiving unit. • Remain current with sending unit operations. • Have the appropriate credentials for authenticating the liaison team to the receiving unit commander. This is especially critical if the team is provided to an allied force. • Have appropriate security clearances and courier orders.
4-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
• • • • •
Have reliable transportation, communications, automation, and COMSEC equipment with appropriate codes. The sending unit must plan to replace equipment and COMSEC material, if necessary. Provide TSOPs to receiving units that outline liaison team missions, functions, procedures, and duties. Inform the receiving unit of the contents of reports sent to the sending unit. Have weapons and ammunition for personal protection. Arrive at the receiving unit at the appointed place and time.
Receiving Units 4-22. The receiving unit is responsible for— • Notifying the sending unit of the time, place, and point of contact for the liaison team. • Briefing the arriving liaison team on the status of current operations. • Providing the sending unit operational details, including movement and logistic information, that impact on sending unit operations. • Ensuring that liaison teams have access to the commander and key staff officers and have the ability to communicate information critical to the sending unit. • Providing communications and COMSEC equipment when the liaison team operates in the receiving unit radio nets and telephone system. • Providing the following administrative support: A copy of the receiving unit TSOP. Workspace, electrical power for automation equipment, and maintenance support, to include fuels and lubricants. Life support facilities, rations, maps, small arms ammunition, and Class II and Class IV supplies. Medical support and physical security.
Liaison Duties During the Tour 4-23. During the liaison tour, the liaison officer or team— • • • • • • • • • •
•
Arrives at the designated location at the designated time. Promotes cooperation between the sending headquarters and the receiving headquarters. Accomplishes its mission without becoming actively involved with the receiving unit staff procedures or actions. Is proactive in obtaining information. Facilitates comprehension of the sending unit commander's intent. Helps the sending unit commander assess current and future operations. Remains informed of the unit current situation and makes that information available to the receiving unit commander and staff. Expeditiously informs the sending unit of upcoming missions, tasks, and orders of the receiving unit. Passes information on the tactical situation to the sending battalion CP. Ensures that both units establish radio nets for— Exchanging orders, situation reports, and intelligence reports. Passing fire missions. Quick-fire nets, as required. Passes unit locations, ammunition status, weapon strength, target lists, and fire plans between the 2 units. Informs the receiving unit commander of the content of the reports it transmits to the sending unit.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-5
Chapter 4
• • • •
Keeps a record of reports, listing everyone met (including the person's name, rank, duty position, and contact information) as well as primary operators and their contact information. Attempts to resolve issues proactively. Notifies the sending unit promptly if unable to accomplish the liaison mission. Reports departure to the receiving unit commander after mission complete. (See appendix D.)
AUTOMATED SYSTEMS BATTALION 4-24. The MLRS battalion automated command and control systems consist of the fire control system (FCS) at the launcher and the AFATDS at platoon, battery, and battalion. 4-25. The FCS provides a link between the crew, launcher external digital traffic, and the launcher components. The FCS monitors, coordinates, and controls all electronic devices used by the launcher during the launch cycle. The FCS computes fire data for fire missions and communicates digitally with the AFATDS. 4-26. The AFATDS performs tactical fire direction processing at platoon, battery, and battalion level. The AFTADS receives, processes, and transmits fire unit, ammunition, and target data. It maintains databases that include fire units, munitions, and tactical fire plans. 4-27. AFATDS is the fire support C2 system within the ABCS. It provides decision aids and an information system for the control, coordination, and synchronization of all types of FS means. It acts as the force field artillery C2 system. 4-28. AFATDS is located at FA command posts from platoon to FIB to echelons above division. It is employed in varying configurations at different operational facilities. AFATDS is interconnected by the ACUS, the ADDS, or CNR communications. AFATDS operates with other services using the variable message format (VMF), joint tactical data link or, to a lesser degree, the USMTF messages. The system also complies with standardized message formats derived from North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) Standardization Agreement (STANAG) 5620 and bilateral agreements with the United Kingdom, Germany, and other nations, as applicable.
COMMANDER’S GUIDANCE 4-29. The key to exploiting AFATDS capabilities is integrating the commander’s fire support guidance into the AFATDS database. Targeting guidance tells AFATDS which targets to process or deny. AFATDS automatically filters and screens mission requests and recommends denying those missions that do not meet the established commander’s guidance. It prioritizes multiple missions to ensure that the most important missions are processed first. It also checks incoming fire missions against fire support coordinating measures and unit zones of responsibility. If violations occur, AFATDS notifies the operator and electronically requests clearance from the unit that established the control measure. AFATDS then determines how to attack the target, applying guidance by system preference (FA preference, FA attack methods, mortar, naval gunfire, or air attack). 4-30. The system preference table allows the operator to tell AFATDS the weapon the commander deems most appropriate for each target type. The weapon systems are ranked from 1 to 4 in priority for consideration.
AFATDS FILTERING FUNCTION 4-31. Filters tell AFATDS which targets not to attack. One filter is target decay time; this defines how long, after a target type is acquired, it is still suitable for engagement. This filter highlights for the commander those targets with short dwell times and prevents firing on targets that may have moved. Other filters include—
4-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
•
• •
Target duplication filter. This filter allows fire supporters to specify the distance (in meters) that separates targets or similar targets to determine if they are duplicates. This prevents different sensors or observers from firing separate missions on the same target. If 2 missions violate target duplication, AFATDS will process the first mission and recommend denial on the second. Target build-up area filter. This filter allows the commander to specify the number of targets within an area that must be identified before engagement. It is particularly useful for counter fire elements that want to focus on developing a template for enemy area before attacking it. Target exclusion filter (part of the target management matrix [TMM]). This filter allows the commander to specify targets he does not want fire support to consider for attack.
4-32. AFATDS target selection standards (TSS) contains the same information normally used in a TSS matrix, including the TLE for potential sensors. This filter, generally used for intelligence reports, specifies a report age to prevent firing on targets that are too old.
AFATDS SCREENING FUNCTION 4-33. After a target clears the filters, AFATDS screens the mission to assign a mission value. This focuses fires by ensuring that the most important targets are engaged first. In AFATDS, this screening guidance includes mission prioritization, the high-value target list (HVTL), and the TMM.
AFATDS MISSION PRIORITIZATION 4-34. AFATDS prioritizes missions by assigning each a “mission value” of 0 to 100 based on 4 weighted criteria to determine the overall mission value. The 4 criteria are— • On-call precedence allows the commander to decide that targets from the fire plan (stored in the on-call target list) have a higher priority than a target of opportunity. (A commander may not want targets of opportunity to disrupt the execution of preplanned, rehearsed targets in specific target areas of interest [TAIs] or engagement areas.) • Priority of fires enables the commander to establish a preference among a pool of potential sensors/observers. • If a target falls within a TAI, AFATDS will increase its mission value. • AFATDS can weight targets based on their relative importance to the supported commander's mission. The target type value is identified in the HVTL and the TMM. 4-35. A commander can define the desired effects in the HVTL for each target category by specifying effects or any percentage of destruction from 0 percent to 100 percent. He can also assign a weighted value from 0 to 100 to each target category. 4-36. The HVTL is a starting point for the development of the HPTL and is a component of the TMM. HPTs are HVTs that must be attacked to achieve success during friendly operations. The HPTL in the TMM applies additional guidance to weight the target types. 4-37. The TMM used in AFATDS provides the same information normally seen on an attack guidance matrix (AGM). It separates HPT types from non-HPT types. A commander can define the effects for each HPT type or any percentage of destruction up to 100 percent. He can also weight the value of each HPT type from 0 to 100. This is a second target value (for HPTs only) that AFATDS uses to compute an overall mission value. 4-38. As a result of mission prioritization, each target is assigned a mission value. Cutoff values set the minimum thresholds that targets must attain to be considered for attack by certain fire support assets. The commander assigns these to tell AFATDS which weapon systems to consider (and not to consider) as attack options for certain targets. 4-39. In the TMM, the commander can specify which target types require target damage assessment (TDA) or should not be fired upon but handed off to the IEW officer for exploitation. The commander can specify when targets will be engaged as “acquired,” “immediate,” or “planned.” The commander can also exclude target types in the TMM display from consideration for attack by fire support assets.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-7
Chapter 4
ATTACK ANALYSIS 4-40. The next step AFATDS takes is to determine how to attack the targets. The commander can assign a preferred system (for example, FA, mortars, naval gunfire) to each target type. He can also build a series of tables in AFATDS to further define preferences (shell/fuze combination, for example) for each system against specific target types.
FIRE MISSION PROCESSING 4-41. Another powerful capability AFATDS offers is the ability to eliminate the traditional mission delays associated with processing fire missions through multiple layers of fire support coordination. Not every mission needs to stop at every fire support node in the mission thread (digital route). By tailoring AFATDS intervention points (IPs), the commander can specify which missions stop for review (human intervention) at intermediate fire support nodes (battalion/task force and brigade fires cells [FCs]) and which automatically process through the fire support system to a firing unit for rapid response. The following are examples of fire mission processing: • All fire missions for “armor, medium” or “missile, heavy” targets process rapidly without human intervention, a decision based on the type of target. • Control IPs of fire missions, based on the mission value and every request for fire against a target type with a value of less than 50 stop for human review. • Specify IPs by types of missions such as screening, adjust fire or illumination missions before they are processed. • All fire missions AFATDS-assigned to the mortar platoon are processed automatically without human intervention. 4-42. The commander may want only fire missions that violate the filtering or screening guidance to have an IP. This adds a human review of an AFATDS decision before a mission is denied or coordination is requested. If the commander does not want a computer denying a supported commander's request for fire, he can establish an IP in AFATDS to review all missions the system recommends be denied. 4-43. Designing IPs in AFATDS offers tremendous flexibility. Tailoring IPs may be an alternative to quick-fire channels and has the potential of offering near real-time sensor-to-shooter capabilities. These IPs (filters) can be designed based on the following: • Specific target type. • Assigned mission value. • Mission type. • Attack option (mortars, FA, air, naval gunfire). • Target duplication, exclusion, IEW routing, build up targets, or coordination required. 4-44. AFATDS is capable of receiving targets from a variety of sources. By filtering and screening potential targets for engagement, AFATDS automates many of the functions currently performed manually by the FAIO and other staff members. 4-45. The following paragraphs summarize the ATCCS devices that the MLRS battalion may interface with and/or operate.
MANEUVER CONTROL SYSTEM 4-46. The maneuver control system (MCS) provides Army tactical commanders and their staffs (corps through battalion) automated, online, near real-time systems for planning, coordinating, and controlling tactical operations. It is the maneuver component of ABCS. It receives, processes, and displays the increasing volume and variety of tactical command and control information available. MCS has a wide array of capabilities that allow for more efficient battle planning and execution. MCS capabilities range from modifying unit task organization to creating complex map overlays. MLRS elements at brigade and battalion/squadron level will interface with MCS through their AFATDS.
4-8
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
FORCE XXI BATTLE COMMAND BRIGADE AND BELOW (FBCB2) 4-47. FBCB2 interfaces with the ABCS and is located at the brigade level and below. It provides mounted/dismounted tactical combat and service support units the ability to gain situational understanding of the battlefield. FBCB2 provides accurate and real-time information about friendly, enemy, neutral, and noncombatant locations—a common relevant picture of the battlefield scaled to specific level of interest and special needs. 4-48. For the purposes of FBCB2, situational awareness is a state of understanding and knowledge gained through a graphical common operating picture of the battlefield consisting of the enemy situation, friendly situation, and logistics. The common operating picture that FBCB2 provides presents a new way to visualize the battlefield. This digital visualization provides a picture with dimensions that mitigate surprise and uncertainty. FBCB2 does this by providing soldiers with a common ability to see where they are, see where other soldiers are, see over the “next hill,” see the enemy, and know what each of them is doing. This situational awareness contributes to mobility and force synchronization, and reduces the possibility of fratricide. This automated portrayal of the common operating picture becomes more critical as darkness, weather, and obscurants reduce visibility; when operating with night vision devices; or when operating in terrain where visibility is reduced (for example, heavily forested terrain, urban terrain, or rolling terrain). 4-49. Every vehicle in the FBCB2-equipped team has a computer that displays a digital image of the map. Symbols (icons) representing individual friendly and enemy vehicles or units appear on the map and move in near real-time as the platforms they represent move on the battlefield. This continually updated situational understanding is a fully automatic function. 4-50. The Army intends to incorporate FBCB2 functionality to a platform in 2 separate ways: • FBCB2 hardware (computer, radios, GPS receiver, mounting equipment) and software are added to an existing platform. Any platform can have FBCB2 functionality through this mechanism. This type of installation is termed stand-alone FBCB2 or an appliqué (see table 4-1). • Embedded battle command (EBC) software embedded to operate on a computer that is already in a platform. EBC will be inserted into AFATDS and M270A1/M142 launchers to facilitate situational understanding on the future battlefield. Table 4-1. Appliqué Situational Awareness
•Own position •Position of friendly units and platforms •Position of enemy units and platforms •Warnings of dangerous conditions in the operational environment •Supporting data (such as terrain/elevation) •Supplemental data (such as unit status/readiness, connectivity)
12 August 2008
Battle Command Execution
Battle Command Support
•Overlays •Messages (joint VMF) –Spot/SALUTE –Call for fire –Strike warning –SITREP –Overlay message –Field order –CBRN 1
•Five-paragraph OPLAN •Logistics reports •Personnel reports •Roll-up reports •EPW/ detainee reports •Video image processing •Frame grabber/file transfer •COA
Communications Interface/ Processing
•Connectivity with other net members •Unit task organization •Maintenance/ embedded training •Simulation interfaces
Network management/ administrative functions
Command and Control
FM 3-09.60
4-9
Chapter 4
Table 4-1. Appliqué Situational Awareness
Battle Command Execution
Legend COA = course of action EPW = enemy prisoner of war msg = message CBRN = nuclear, biological, and chemical
Battle Command Support
Communications Interface/ Processing
OPLAN = operations plan SALUTE = size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment SITREP = situation report VMF = variable message format
BATTALION ALOC 4-51. The ALOC monitors and coordinates all tactical logistics functions affecting the MLRS battalion and its subordinate or attached units. The battalion XO supervises the functions with the forward support company commander, S-1, S-4, BAO, and select members of the special staff directly coordinating and controlling the service support activities.
SECTION II – MLRS FIRING BATTERY OPERATIONS
BATTERY HEADQUARTERS 4-52. The MLRS firing battery is the basic unit of employment of the MLRS. This section addresses battery employment and operations. Instructions covering features of combat operations that lend themselves to definite or standardized procedures without loss of effectiveness should be covered by TSOP. (For a guide and checklist for preparing an MLRS battery TSOP, see appendix C.)
BOC 4-53. The battery HQ provides command, control, and coordinates logistical support to the battery. The command element and the BOC provide the command and control. The forward support company or other headquarters has the assets to enable the battery to function independently of any battalion control for limited time periods. 4-54. The BOC operates in the FDC tent extension. The BOC provides C2 for the battery and the primary communications links with battalion headquarters elements. The BOC personnel maintain situation maps and overlays. They also maintain SCPs, ammunition, maintenance, and similar status charts, and posts other operational information. The battery and battalion command (voice) net radios can be remoted as necessary.
Operations 4-55. The MLRS BOC is the C2 center of the battery. The BOC directs all battery operations in coordination with the battery commander. It directly controls the FDC and CBRN operations. It monitors ammunition and launcher status, requests survey support, and directs battery internal and external logistics and support operations. The BOC passes movement orders and other information to the subordinate platoon headquarters.
Fire Direction Center 4-56. The MLRS firing battery FDC operates as a sub-element of the BOC. It controls all battery level tactical fire direction.
4-10
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
Logistics Operations Center 4-57. The battery LOC is the primary C2 center for administration-logistical operations, maintenance, and battery defense. LOC staff coordinates external support and direct internal administration-logistical operations to include resupply. These tasks are accomplished in accordance with priorities set by the BOC. The support platoon leader/sergeant and/or 1SG directly supervise LOC operations.
Logistics Release Point 4-58. The battery logistics release point (LRP) is established normally by the battery 1SG to push routine supplies forward and to facilitate other routine administration. Firing platoon sergeants normally meet the 1SG at the LRP on a daily basis or in accordance with the unit SOP.
BATTERY HEADQUARTERS OPERATIONS CONFIGURATION OPTIONS 4-59. The MLRS battery commander must consider the factors of METT-TC in addition to survivability, dispersion, communications, support requirements, past experience, and TSOPs when determining which configuration to use. There are basically 2 options for employment of the battery headquarters—dual and consolidated.
Consolidated CPs 4-60. Food service, supply, and maintenance sections may be consolidated with the BOC at the battery headquarters. This option facilitates local defense and simplifies BOC and LOC coordination and communications. When consolidated, wire communications should be established between the LOC and the BOC. The BOC is the focal point for support requests, planning, and coordination.
Dual CPs 4-61. The battery establishes a battery trains with a LOC serving as a logistics command post. The LOC activities are still directed by the BOC. The commander decides which assets to deploy with the LOC, and which to leave with the BOC.
CONSIDERATIONS 4-62. Commanders should consider the following when organizing their command posts.
Terrain 4-63. The BOC requires elevated terrain for good communications. The logistics elements (ammunition, maintenance, food service, and supply) require a good road network and firm ground. If these 2 needs cannot be met at the same location, the commander may choose to separate the elements (for example, place the BOC on a hill and the trains in a nearby town).
Enemy 4-64. The commander may choose to split operations because of enemy counter fire or air attack capability. A consolidated BOC's large signature may jeopardize the entire headquarters. However, split CPs are more vulnerable to ground attack.
Communications 4-65. Distance between the LOC and BOC increases C2 and defense challenges and requires the LOC to monitor the battery command or other designated frequency. Radios that can monitor the net are scarce and restrict the use of certain vehicles. When the LOC is located near the BOC (within 200 meters), wire line
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-11
Chapter 4
communications can be used between the 2 operations centers. This reduces C2 problems and the electronic signature.
BATTERY HEADQUARTERS POSITIONING CONSIDERATIONS Battery Operations Center 4-66. Locate the BOC on elevated terrain for better communications. It should be in the center of the headquarters position for maximum protection against ground attack.
Food Service 4-67. The forward support company food service serving area should be located on firm, accessible ground; have good drainage; and be upwind from the field latrine.
Supply 4-68. The supply section requires firm terrain as well. The supply vehicle (not including the POL vehicles) is placed to cover a portion of the headquarters perimeter. The supply and POL vehicles are placed for easy access to and from the position.
Ammunition Holding Area 4-69. The ammunition holding area (AHA) should be adjacent, or as near as possible, to the main supply route (MSR). It should be large enough to hold all of the battery resupply vehicles, allow for a minimum turning radius to allow for safe maneuver of all unit resupply vehicles, and provide enough overhead clearance to allow for boom operations. It should be easily located, in darkness or daylight, by the support platoon personnel. Placed close to the MSR, the AHA controls the main access route into the battery area.
BATTERY DEFENSE THREAT CAPABILITIES 4-70. MLRS is an HPT for enemy ground forces as well as indirect fires.
Detection 4-71. The threat detects friendly forces by first studying friendly force doctrine and then processing SIGINT, imagery intelligence (IMINT), and human intelligence (HUMINT). 4-72. Signals Intelligence. Using signal intercept and radio direction-finding (RDF) equipment, the enemy collects various FM and AM radio transmissions. Tactical FM radios operating on low power can be picked up by enemy RDF units at distances in excess of 10 kilometers. High-power signals can be detected at distances up to 40 kilometers. However, directional antennas and reduced radio usage will improve survivability. Radars can detect firing weapons to a 200-meter accuracy. Seismic and sound ranging can produce targets within 150 meters although their accuracy is diminished by other battle noise. 4-73. Imagery Intelligence. This effort consists of photographic imagery, thermal detection, radar location, and laser imagery. Unless assigned as a special mission, IMINT processing requires 6 to 8 hours. Target location error from IMINT is 200 meters. 4-74. Human Intelligence. Long-range and reconnaissance patrols, spies, partisans, and enemy prisoners of war (EPWs) are all HUMINT collectors. Although HUMINT relies primarily on visual observation, the peculiar equipment, predicted activities, bumper marking, spoils of war, and rubbish left behind add to the accuracy of the targeting effort.
4-12
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
Attack 4-75. MLRS units are vulnerable to threat counter fire, air attack, ground forces, and electronic warfare. The MLRS unit’s greatest protection is its ability to disperse, hide, fire, and then move out quickly: shoot and scoot.
HEADQUARTERS POSITION DEFENSE 4-76. The primary method to enhance survivability for an MLRS firing battery is concealment to avoid detection (passive defense). The battery headquarters should use natural and manmade camouflage, noise and light discipline, and terrain to reduce the risk of detection from the ground or air. 4-77. The second method to enhance survivability is to establish a strong defensive position with a plan to displace as soon as possible. The battery headquarters should position machine guns, antitank weapons, and grenade launchers to orient on likely enemy avenues of approach. LPs and OPs should be positioned to provide sufficient early warning to the battery. 4-78. The BOC must stay attuned to the current tactical situation and ensure that information is disseminated to all battery elements. Especially important is information pertaining to enemy locations and disposition, friendly units in or near platoon OPAREAs, the CBRN threat, the locations of friendly and enemy minefields, threat detection activities, and the likelihood of threat ground forces such as patrols operating in the area.
Defense Against Air Attack 4-79. Concealment is also the best defense against air attack. However, if the unit is detected and attacked, the key to survival is dispersion while engaging attacking aircraft with a large volume of fire. Fortunately, MLRS units are naturally dispersed, therefore providing enemy aircraft an elusive target. Normally, the MLRS unit will fall within the supported unit's air defense umbrella and may have air defense assets attached. This does not preclude returning fire with all available direct fire weapons.
Defense Against Armored or Mechanized Force 4-80. The best defense against an armored or mechanized ground attack is for the MLRS platoon to move to a position from which it can continue the mission (alternate OPAREA) without a direct confrontation with the enemy.
Defense Against Dismounted Attack 4-81. Dismounted enemy elements will attack using: • SOF using indirect fire. • Ambushes. • Guerrilla-type attacks (normally not exceeding platoon size and often conducted at night or in adverse weather). • A diversionary attack and then a main attack. • Dismounted infantry. 4-82. The best defense against a dismounted ground attack is to displace to an alternate position. In some situations, where the counter fire threat is minimal, launchers may operate from mutually supporting hide areas (HAs). These HAs may allow launchers to observe each other and provide early warning of dismounted ground attack.
Equipment and Materiel Destruction Procedures 4-83. The battery commander must ensure that the unit’s TSOPs include procedures for the destruction of unit equipment and materiel. The battery commander designates personnel to perform the destruction and ensures that adequate emergency destruction (ED) material is available. See TM 9-1425-648-13&P and FM 3-34.214 for guidance in preparing unit TSOPs.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-13
Chapter 4
TACTICAL MOVEMENT 4-84. The MLRS battery movement options resemble those of other FA units. The BOC directs and controls the displacement of subordinate platoons. The battery commander is usually directed to displace by battery, battery echelon, or platoon. Some considerations in selecting an option for displacement follow: • Maneuver unit scheme of movement. • Continuous fire support (fire plans/targets). • Overall tactical situation. • Immediate and future requirements of the supported unit. • Characteristics of the terrain to be traversed. • Distance of march. • Time available. • Enemy capabilities. • Command and control capabilities.
MOVEMENT OPTIONS AND CONSIDERATIONS Move by Platoon 4-85. This is the most common and preferred method of displacement for MLRS batteries. One firing platoon at a time is displaced, either as a complete platoon or by individual vehicle infiltration.
Move by Battery Echelon 4-86. In this method, 1 or 2 of the major elements of the battery are moved in 2 or more groups. For example, 1 firing platoon and the battery HQ may move as a group. Then the second firing platoon, the support platoon, and the rest of the battery are moved.
Move by Battery 4-87. Distance, mission, route priorities, or the overall tactical situation may dictate a battery-level move.
Jump Battery Operations Center 4-88. If the entire battery is not moving at once, the BOC must ensure that battery C2 and fire direction processing continue while it moves. The preferred method for ensuring continuity is to pass control to 1 of the firing platoons. The platoon AFATDS enters the appropriate digital nets with the battalion AFATDS and the FIB AFATDS, and the supported maneuver HQ AFATDS. Once this link is established, the platoon assumes the role of the BOC and battery FDC (see chapter 8).
TACTICAL MARCHES 4-89. A tactical march is the movement of a unit or elements of a unit under actual or simulated combat conditions. There are several methods for moving an element in a tactical configuration. Each method has specific advantages and disadvantages. The battery commander decides which method or combination is best.
Open Column 4-90. The open column is used for daylight movements when there is an adequate road network that is not overcrowded, when enemy detection is not likely, when time is an important factor, or when the travel distance is great. A vehicle interval in an open column is generally 100 meters. • The advantages of the open column are as follows: Speed (the fastest method of march). Reduced driver fatigue.
4-14
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
Improved vision on dusty roads. Ease in passing individual vehicles. Ease in dispersing vehicles as a passive defense measure against an air attack. Less chance of the entire unit being ambushed. Less vulnerability to indirect fire. The disadvantages of the open column are as follows: Greater column length requires more road space and more time to close on the OPAREA. Other traffic often becomes interspersed in the column. Communication within the column is complicated.
•
Close Column 4-91. In close column movement, the vehicle interval is less than 100 meters. Close column is used to maintain maximum command and control during periods of limited visibility or when moving through built-up or congested areas. • The advantages of the close column are as follows: Simplicity of command and control. Less time to close on the OPAREA. Reduced column length. Concentration of defensive firepower. • The disadvantages of the close column are as follows: The column is vulnerable to enemy observation and attack. The strength and nature of the column are quickly apparent to enemy observers. Convoy speed is reduced. Driver fatigue is increased.
Infiltration 4-92. When the battery moves by infiltration, vehicles are dispatched individually or in small groups without reference to a march table. Though this technique is time consuming and the vehicles are difficult to control, it is used when the enemy has good target acquisition means and quick reaction capabilities. • The advantages of infiltration are as follows: Vehicles are less vulnerable to hostile observation. Opportunities for cover are increased. Defense against air and artillery attack is enhanced. The enemy is deceived as to the size of the unit. • The disadvantages of infiltration are as follows: It is time-consuming. It is difficult to command and control. Vulnerability of small elements is increased.
Terrain March 4-93. The terrain march is an off-road movement to reduce vulnerability and avoid traffic. A unit using this type of movement should travel close to tree lines, along gullies, and close to hill masses. When enemy observation or interdiction by artillery fire or air attack is likely, a terrain march should be conducted. A unit may move safely on a road for some distance and change to a terrain march at a point where enemy observation becomes likely or vehicle congestion makes an inviting target. 4-94. Consider the following factors when deciding to use the terrain march: • Displacement time may be increased. • Ground reconnaissance is required.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-15
Chapter 4
• • •
Soil conditions and other natural obstacles may complicate this type of movement. Wheel or track marks to the new position may be left. Extensive coordination is required to avoid traveling through other unit areas.
4-95. When employing the terrain march, MLRS units may move in open column, in close column, or by infiltration.
Special Formations 4-96. On the basis of the theater of operations and the tactical situation, the battery commander may choose to move his platoons in a special formation (such as a wedge or multiple wedges). This is most appropriate in a desert environment where there are few obstacles to movement, visibility exceeds several kilometers, movement is over extended distances, and/or there is a need to provide rocket fires while moving. Commanders should consider placement of vehicles to protect C2 elements and make most efficient use of available weapon systems for defense (see figure 4-2). Note: The width and depth of the formations in figure 4-2 are a function of METT-TC and command and control considerations.
Figure 4-2. Special Formations
4-16
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
SECTION III – FIRING PLATOON OPERATIONS
PLATOON HEADQUARTERS 4-97. The MLRS firing platoon generally conducts operations under battery control, occupies a separate area of operations, and conducts its own RSOP. The MLRS firing platoon can be considered analogous to a cannon firing battery for fire support, positioning, and logistics considerations. Tactically, the platoon leader must do all of those tasks usually associated with the cannon battery commander. The leaders of the firing platoon must be innovative and creative in their approach to operations. The unique tactics of an MLRS firing platoon place great responsibility on personnel to meet their missions. Instructions covering features of combat operations, which lend themselves to definite or standardized procedures without loss of effectiveness, should be covered by TSOP. A battery TSOP normally guides preparation of MLRS platoon TSOPs. (For a guide and checklist for preparing an MLRS battery TSOP, see appendix C.)
COMMAND AND CONTROL 4-98. The platoon leader and platoon sergeant are responsible for the command and control of platoon operations and for advising the battery commander and/or BOC on their launcher and ammunition status. The battery commander and/or BOC directs the platoon leader and sergeant concerning the specific number of operational launchers that are posturing for specific munitions and ready to fire status. The platoon leader and platoon sergeant are responsible for coordinating all logistical support with the LOC. The POC personnel monitor all traffic between the BOC and the launchers by using the platoon AFATDS. Loss of the platoon FDC would severely hinder platoon command and control. The POC personnel maintain a DA Form 1594 and a DA Form 7232-R (MLRS FDC Fire Mission Log). A reproducible copy of DA Form 7232-R is located at the back of this manual. An example of DA Form 7232-R is shown in chapter 6. Fire mission logs should be maintained for 1 year as a record of live-fire missions conducted.
PLATOON OPERATIONS CENTER 4-99. The POC is located in an M1068 with an AFATDS. The POC is manned by MLRS fire direction personnel and is supervised by the platoon leader or the platoon sergeant. The reconnaissance sergeant may also work in the POC when he is in the platoon HQ position. The platoon leader or platoon sergeant should locate the POC on elevated terrain for communications and should center it in the platoon HQ position for maximum protection against ground attack and ease of platoon internal wire communications.
SUPPORT 4-100. The POC is the hub of platoon support activities. Any attached MSTs stay with the platoon HQ and are deployed in accordance with unit TSOP. Launchers in an inoperational (INOP) status normally move to the platoon HQ area to reduce the security, command, control, and resupply burdens.
OPAREA 4-101. An MLRS platoon position area should normally be large enough to allow a 3-by-3-kilometer OPAREA (see figure 4-3). Exact size of the OPAREA is a function of METT-TC and a result of risk assessment. The tactical situation and competition for terrain may require that platoons modify the size of the OPAREA. However, smaller areas severely restrict the platoon leader's employment options, the length of time the platoon can occupy, and the survivability of the platoon. The launcher signature, noise, smoke, and fire make each firing position easily identifiable from great distances, especially in open terrain. After use by MLRS launchers, the firing point (FP) may be subjected to intense enemy counter fire; therefore, firing points are considered highly dangerous. Except for cases of tactical necessity, launchers should use a firing point only once. 4-102. The MLRS platoon does not require sole use of the terrain within its position area. With proper coordination, maneuver units can pass through the OPAREA without disrupting operations. Other units may use parts of the platoon OPAREA. However, commanders may resist sharing space with MLRS
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-17
Chapter 4
because of the danger from potential counter fire. This is particularly true of less mobile units. Coordination of terrain must, therefore, be thorough and continuous. 4-103. Units in the general vicinity should be aware of launchers in the area and avoid them—see and avoid. If a unit encounters a launcher in position, it should avoid locating nearby. The danger area around the launcher, due to blast and flying debris during a launch, is 300 meters to the front and 400 meters to the rear of the launcher. The supported force commander, rather than attempting to specify each individual position and/or area, may specify no-go areas for MLRS. MLRS units would then be expected to plan their positions around the no-go terrain. Regardless of the method or the extent of planning, battery commanders and platoon leaders/sergeants must coordinate face-to-face with commanders in close proximity of their planned position areas. 4-104. There are 6 types of positions within the OPAREA; each type may have several locations. The platoon leader or platoon sergeant must identify all OPAREA position types, except hide areas, by grid during a reconnaissance.
Figure 4-3. Operational Area
FIRING POINTS 4-105. Each platoon OPAREA should have at least 9 FPs, three for each launcher. Each launcher section chief is responsible for final selection and verification of the firing points. The following are considerations when selecting a firing point: • The platoon leader is responsible for selecting firing areas. The section chief then selects the FP locations (the launchers should not fire from terrain with slopes greater than 89 mils). • There should be no immediate mask in the probable direction of fire. • Hide areas (HAs) should normally be located within 100 meters of the FP; however, longer distances are acceptable if response times can be kept short. • The FP may be on a “reverse slope” of a terrain feature. Although masks should still be considered, reverse slopes break line-of-sight with the FLOT and may reduce the threat of attack by enemy direct fire systems during firing operations.
4-18
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
• • • •
The FP may be located on a road. The road should lead directly to the reload point (RL) or the next FP to reduce ground signature, response time, and time required to move. Communications must be established with the BOC and the POC. The FP should be 500 meters from other FP (800 meters preferred) and 800 meters from other positions or elements, except HAs. For attack of time-sensitive targets with missiles using M270, the launcher may be placed AMC for extended periods of time (up to 2 hours), when using the M270A1 or the M142 the time period is indefinite. FPs for these missions should also serve the purpose of a HA and provide concealment. These FPs should be selected to enhance survivability while the launcher is laid on target awaiting the command to fire.
4-106. • • •
The following are additional FP considerations for M270/M270A1 launchers: The launcher should be able to park within 150 meters of the firing point grid recorded in the launcher's database and within 100 mils of the commanded heading. The launcher's slope must not exceed 266 mils for rocket missions (89 mils or less is recommended) and 89 mils for missile missions. The FCS continuously displays launcher slope to assist the driver in parking the vehicle. Once the vehicle is stopped, the driver should move the vehicle back and forth slightly or pivot the vehicle in place slightly to allow the tracks to settle into place. This reduces the chance of the vehicle moving during firing.
4-107. The following are additional FP considerations for M142 launchers: • The wheeled M142 travels faster on improved roads but can be slowed or denied access by rough terrain and wet or soft soil that would not impede the M270/M270A1. • Excessive dry vegetation on the FP can ignite causing damage to exposed wiring and air lines on the under carriage. • Initial parking at proper heading is critical to meet timelines. Re-parking the M142 is more time consuming than pivot steering the M270/M270A1. • FP slope tolerances are critical— 89 mils with no tolerances / buffer for rockets up to 266 mils.
HIDE AREA 4-108. The launcher section chief selects the HA—an area in which to hide the launcher while awaiting a fire mission. The hide area should be covered and concealed, and close to the designated FP (normally not less than 20 meter and not more than 100 meters away). A launcher in the HA must be able to communicate with the BOC. The HA may be on a road leading to the FP to reduce the ground signature and to speed response time. 4-109. Hide area operations may degrade or disrupt the M270A1/M142 launcher GPS performance due to line of site obstruction. This is especially the case when the hide position is under dense foliage or a structure (such as a barn or bridge). However, degraded GPS performance is not as critical to the mission as the launcher’s ability to survive in a hostile environment. The launcher should be able to acquire good GPS information within 2 minutes of leaving the hide location. Travel time from hide to the firing point (often 2 to 5 minutes) is adequate for the launcher receiver to be operationally “hot” before launcher lay. The launcher crew can decrease the firing time by tracking at least 1 satellite in the hide area. When possible, use the DAGR to check hide areas and firing points for good satellite acquisition.
RELOAD POINT 4-110. The RL is where the launchers upload launch pods and the HEMTT-HEMATs/ RSV-RST offload. This is the most vulnerable point for each element. Each platoon OPAREA should have at least 2 RLs. Select RL points based on the following conditions: • Cover and concealment for a HEMTT-HEMAT and launcher in the position at the same time. • Maneuver room for the 100-foot (30.48-meter) turning radius of the 55-foot-long (16.76-meter) HEMTT-HEMAT and boom operations.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-19
Chapter 4
• • • •
Located at least 800 meters from FPs and at least 500 meters from any other element. Firm ground or pavement for supporting vehicles and launch pods. Covered and concealed route from AHA to RL. Trafficability.
4-111. The RL must have sufficient maneuver room for the M270/M270A1 launcher. The 55 foot (16.76 meter) long HEMTT-HEMAT requires a 100 foot (30.48 meter) turning radius. The HIMARS RSV-RST has a turning radius of 30 meters. . 4-112. The following are additional RL considerations for the M142 launcher: • Slope is critical in RL selection. The M142 cannot violate the 89mil slope limit during reload. • The RL must allow the M142 to download and upload without re-parking. • The RL should enable the M142 to drive forward into position, reload and drive forward to exit the RL (a drive through RL is preferable to an RL that require the launcher to back up).
SCP 4-113. The SCP is where the launchers update the PDS or PNU. At least 2 SCPs should be established in the OPAREA. These should be collocated with the RLs to reduce travel time of the launchers. The same considerations, except in the area of Class V resupply, apply for SCPs as for RLs.
PLATOON HEADQUARTERS 4-114. Platoon HQ is where the command post, the platoon leader's HMMWV, the platoon sergeant's HMMWV, and, if attached, the MST vehicles are positioned. Normally, INOP launchers (being serviced, crew resting, and so forth) are also positioned in the platoon HQ. Each platoon OPAREA should have a primary platoon HQ location and an alternate location, if possible. The platoon HQ location is based on the following: • Optimum communications with the BOC and launchers. • Cover and concealment. • Communications mask between the position and the enemy. • Defensibility with the AHA. • Trafficability.
AHA 4-115. The ammunition section positions its vehicles in the AHA while awaiting transload or delivery of ammunition. It can be collocated with the platoon HQ if the ground threat is greater than the air attack or counter fire threat. Otherwise, the AHA should be located 100 to 300 meters from the platoon HQ and astride the main entrance route into the platoon HQ for entry control. The AHA is not an issue point for the firing sections. The AHA selection considerations are as follows: • Cover and concealment. • Trafficability. • Vehicle maneuver room for turning around and boom operations. See paragraph 4-111. • Proximity to the MSR. • Defensibility with platoon headquarters. • Arc blast area in the event of sympathetic detonation, either through mishandling or enemy action, of the munitions stored there. See chapter 7 for more information.
4-20
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
LAUNCHER SURVEY CONTROL M270 LAUNCHER Survey Control Points 4-116. Although cover and concealment are factors in SCP selection, utility should be the primary consideration. The SCP must be readily accessible so the driver can stop the launcher with the rear edge of the left drive sprocket aligned next to the SCP marker. The area and SCP marker must allow the driver to position the launcher without ground guidance or excessive maneuvering. The SCPs should be collocated with a reload point, if possible. This allows rapid return of the launcher to operational status.
PDS Calibration Referenced in TM 9-1425-648-13&P 4-117. Calibration of the PDS (at least every 30 days, or after replacement of stabilization reference package/position determining system (SRP/PDS), change in operating conditions, or after track or suspension maintenance) corrects for errors caused by differences in track tension or by wear of sprockets and track components. It accounts for the characteristics of each specific launcher. The crew calibrates the launcher PDS, in accordance with the technical manual. The launcher, under specific operating conditions, requires 2 SCPs, 4 to 6 kilometers apart with a straight route of travel between them, located to at least fifth-order accuracy. One point is used to initialize the PDS for location. The launcher is driven to the second SCP at about 40 kilometers per hour, and the first set of calibration corrections is determined. The launcher is then driven back to the starting SCP, where a second set of calibration data is computed. If both sets of calibration data are within tolerance, the system is functional and an averaged set of data is used. 4-118. Calibration is not normally conducted in the platoon OPAREA. The battery operations officer plans the calibration course(s) for the battery as part of his survey plan. Calibrations are normally centrally located behind the firing platoons. A valid calibration can be conducted with any weapon loaded when the appropriate cables (W19 and/or W20) are connected to the pod. Note: Umbilical cables MUST be connected to the launch pod containers (LPC) while performing calibration.
PDS Update Referenced in TM 9-1425-648-13&P 4-119. Errors that are a function of time and total distance from 11 to 28 minutes for the Army tactical missile system (ATACMS)are corrected by means of PDS updates. The PDS allows an error of up to 0.4 percent of the distance traveled. Crews should update launchers every 6 to 8 kilometers of travel.
SRP Alignment TM 9-1425-648-13&P 4-120. Errors that are a function of time are corrected through the use of periodic SRP realignments. Realignments are required every 11 to 60 minutes of launcher movement, depending on the munitions type and whether or not the SRP is compensated (see SRP/PDS). If the launcher is moved with the SRP turned off or not stabilized, the position location capability is lost. The system must then be updated at an SCP and the SRP realigned before the launcher can respond to any fire mission requests. Initial alignment of the system takes about 8 minutes. However, allowing the SRP to stabilize 2 ½ additional minutes after “SRP READY” is displayed will increase the time before realignment from 15 minutes to 60 minutes for rocket munitions and from 11 to 28 minutes for the Army tactical missile system (ATACMS).
M142/M270A1 LAUNCHERS Survey Control Points (TM 9-1055-1646-13&P)/(TM 9-1055-647-13&P) 4-121. SCPs are required for M142/M270A1 operations. The exact number depends on the unit SOP because launchers often use SCPs located at reload points. The M142/M270A1 does not require calibration.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-21
Chapter 4
If battalion survey assets (PADS) are insufficient to perform the survey requirements expeditiously, an M142/M270A1 launcher can be used to establish SCPs at the entrance to each position area and at the reload point. Establishing and using SCPs allow firing platoons to operate for extended periods (in the inertial mode) if GPS is lost.
M142/M270A1 Navigation 4-122. Vehicle navigation data (easting, northing, altitude, and heading) is determined by the PNU. The PNU will then determine navigation data in the GPS aided mode, the preferred navigation mode. When GPS data is not available, the PNU determines navigation data in the non-aided mode. The PNU gyros continuously measure the angular relationship between the vehicle and true north to determine vehicle heading, which is displayed as the grid azimuth toward which the front of the vehicle is pointed. At the same time, the accelerometers measure the acceleration (motion) of the vehicle in three axes (roll, pitch, and yaw), which is used to determine vehicle easting, northing, and altitude. Data from the vehicle odometer encoders is also used by the PNU in determining location data. The NAV indicator in region 2 of the GDU will appear as a solid box when the launcher is GPS-Aided for navigation. The NAV indicator will appear as broken lines when the launcher is not GPS-Aided for navigation. Note: Unlike the M270 launcher, the M270A1/M142 is still operational when 1 encoder fails. 4-123. Each time the vehicle stops for at least 2 seconds, the PNU starts a zero velocity update (ZUPT), which removes accumulated errors. The ZUPT takes 40 seconds to complete. If GPS data is available, the PNU will use it along with the gyro and accelerometer data. 4-124. System start-up will always bring the PNU to the non-aided mode of navigation. Once in the nonaided mode, GPS keys may be entered, which begins the warm or cold start of the GPS receiver in the PNU. The warm/cold start will result in the PNU automatically switching to the GPS aided mode of navigation. As GPS data is lost and reacquired, the PNU will automatically switch between the GPS aided and non-aided modes of navigation. 4-125. When navigating in the GPS aided mode, the location and altitude remain accurate within 10 meters, regardless of distance traveled between latitudes 80 degrees south and 84 degrees north. The ZUPT is performed automatically and no operator prompts are posted. System parameter updates are not required while navigating in this mode. If GPS data is lost and cannot be reacquired within 30 seconds, the PNU switches to the non-aided navigation mode.
M142/M270A1 Non-aided Navigation Mode 4-126. When navigating in the non-aided mode, accuracy is affected by the passage of time, the availability of survey, distance traveled, and operator response to prompts that are posted on the FCP. In the non-aided mode, a ZUPT is required at least every 9 minutes and 30 seconds. A “CNTDN ZUPT TIMER” is posted on the FCP. When the ZUPT countdown timer reaches zero, the advisory “ZUPT REQUIRED” is displayed along with the prompt “STOP LAUNCHER.” A pulsed alarm also sounds as a reminder to stop the launcher. 4-127. When the vehicle has stopped for 2 seconds, “ZUPT IN PROGRESS” is displayed with a 40second countdown clock. ZUPT requires no operator action other than stopping the launcher. “ZUPT COMPLETE” is displayed when the ZUPT is completed. Once the vehicle moves, the ZUPT countdown timer is displayed. The ZUPT countdown timer only runs when the vehicle is in motion. If the 40-second ZUPT is interrupted, the original ZUPT countdown timer is displayed with whatever time remained prior to stopping. 4-128. When navigating in the non-aided mode, the PNU also requires a system parameter update every 12 kilometers of distance traveled. The prompt “UPDATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS” is posted on the FCP at 12 kilometers distance traveled (DT). An alarm also sounds. 4-129. If ZUPT is performed at 9-minute, 30-second intervals but SCPs are not available for system parameter updates, location and altitude remain accurate within 10 meters for a DT of approximately 40
4-22
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
kilometers. For DT greater than 40 kilometers, the accuracy is 0.04 percent of the DT. If ZUPT is not performed, location and altitude remain accurate within 10 meters for a DT of 6.7 kilometers. For DT greater than 6.7 kilometers, the accuracy is 0.15 percent of the DT. DT is measured from the location at which the PNU entered the non-aided mode or from the location of the last system parameter update. Table 4-2 provides a consolidated list of navigation accuracies and ZUPT times. Table 4-3 lists the alignment times associated with each launcher position.
Operational Considerations 4-130. Hide area operations may degrade or disrupt GPS performance due to line-of-site (LOS) obstruction. (See paragraph 4-108, Hide Area.) If a launcher fails to obtain (or maintain) a GPS signal while in its selected hide area, it should be moved to a more suitable hide location, depending on the tactical situation. Table 4-2. Navigation Manual Position Updates
Mode
GPS Status
ZUPTS
Aided
GPS keys loaded. 4 or 5 satellites. Encoder input. PNU gyros and accelerometers. No GPS keys. Less than 4 satellites. INOP status. GPS channel malfunction.
Yes. Automatic. Not displayed.
Not required.
Within 10 m.
Yes. Displayed. Operator stops launcher. Every 9 min 30 seconds. 40-second duration.
Yes. Prompted–12 km.
Within 10 m if ZUPTs. Every 9 min 30 seconds. Updates every 12 km.
Non-aided
Legend GPS = global positioning system INOP = inoperational km = kilometer m = meter
Accuracy
min = minute PNU = position navigation unit ZUPT = zero velocity update
CAUTION If launchers with GPS guidance are available, launchers without GPS guidance should not fire ATACMS Block 1A or Block II. The launcher passes the GPS data to the missile before firing, which enables the missile to acquire GPS satellites after launch, thus significantly improving the missile's accuracy. Launchers without GPS guidance should fire only rockets and ATACMS Block 1 until GPS is restored. However, if a Block 1A/II missile(s) must be fired from a non-GPS aided launcher the missile will be inertially guided and will achieve only ATACMS Block 1 accuracy. This will result in a corresponding decrease in effectiveness, especially at extended ranges.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-23
Chapter 4
Table 4-3. Alignment Time Status
Approximate Time
Stationary stored position Stored position data Mobile GPS keys must be loaded
5 minutes 2 minutes 15 minutes
LAUNCHER RESPONSE POSTURE 4-131. A launcher response posture dictates its readiness to respond to fire missions. The commander determines how his unit launchers will be posturing. 4-132. The commander normally directs the platoons to have a specific number of launchers in hot operational (OPER) status. The number is based on guidance from the controlling FA headquarters, METT-TC, total launchers available, ammunition available, crew available, and fatigue. The platoon gives the BOC information on crew and launcher status and decides which launchers to posture, as directed. The platoons usually rotate their launchers through hot status, changing individual launchers and maintaining the total number of required hot launchers. Commanders may designate the response posture of entire platoons. 5-1. The 2 methods of posturing, tactical and technical (see table 4-4), are discussed below.
TACTICAL POSTURING 4-133. Through several generations of software for the FCS and AFATDS, the terms hot, cool, and cold have come to indicate launcher action response posture.
Hot 4-134. Hot status indicates the launcher is fully capable of firing. Usually, the status is based on the launcher's electrical and mechanical systems, not on its location or ammunition load. A launcher may be hot and, therefore, mechanically capable of firing. However, it may not be on or near an FP or perhaps it may not have any, or enough, or the right type of ammunition aboard.
Cool 4-135. Cool status indicates that a launcher is capable of firing but only after the SRP is aligned. Note: Cool status applies to M270 only. 4-136. Cool status indicates the launcher SRP/PDS has been turned off but that all other systems are on and fully functional. To reduce long-term wear on the components, the crew enters the FCS auxiliary menu, selects self-propelled loader launcher (SPLL) COOL (SPLL COOL), and turns the SRP/PDS off. About 8 minutes are required to align the SRP and return it to operational capacity when it is turned on again. 4-137. The FDC is notified of SPLL COOL status when the crew sends a launcher list (LCHR LST) message, indicating that the launcher is INOP–SPLL COOL. The FDC will not select an INOP launcher to fire.
Cold 4-138. Cold status indicates the launcher is not mission capable (NMC) for maintenance reasons or that 1 or more essential systems are shut down. This status is typically entered for maintenance, preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS), or crew rest. If a cold launcher is mission-capable, it may take 30 minutes or more for it to respond.
4-24
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
4-139. Unlike the M270 launcher with three posturing modes, the M142/M270A1 launchers have only 2 posturing modes: hot and cold. The M270A1 and M142 have an improved navigational unit, the PNU. The PNU is always in a state of operation as long as the FCS is powered up, therefore eliminating the cool posturing option. Table 4-4. Response Postures Posture Tactical
Technical
Location
Response Time
FP
Immediate
FP HA Moving from RL to FP/HA Moving from FP to RL HA Platoon HQ
2 minutes 3 to 6 minutes
OPER HOT
MOBL
COOL
SPLL COOL OPER
N/A
INOP
N/A
6 to 8 minutes 15 to 35 minutes 12 to 20 minutes 20 to 30 minutes 30 minutes or more
COLD
Legend CFF = call for fire FP = firing point HA = hide area INOP = inoperational MOBL = mobile
N/A
Remarks
Oriented: awaiting FIRE command or amended CFF at extended aim ONC Munitions loaded No munitions loaded M270 only M270 only PMCS, rest, or refueling Unscheduled maintenance or otherwise out of action
ONC = on call OPER = operational PMCS = preventive maintenance checks and services RL = reload point SPLL = self-propelled loader launcher
TECHNICAL POSTURING 4-140. The launcher crew makes 1 or more entries into the FCS to notify the BOC of the launcher status and location. These LCHR LST messages are entered as launcher OPER or INOP. Additional explanatory entries and the launcher's current location and altitude are entered.
OPER 4-141. Upon entering OPER into the LCHR LST message, the crew must choose a numeric code to further identify the launcher status. For OPER messages, these are location codes. When LCHR LST is sent, the AFATDS displays the launcher status (OPER or INOP), current ammunition loaded and quantity, the number of priority and standard missions, code location (for example, FP) and the last met that it received. Unit TSOP may assign code messages; however, only the code number will appear on the AFATDS. For example, OPER 06 might indicate that the launcher is fire mission-capable but is displacing with the platoon to a new OPAREA.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-25
Chapter 4
INOP 4-142. The crew usually sends an INOP LCHR LST message to the BOC when the launcher is NMC. Instead of indicating locations like OPER codes do, INOP codes indicate reasons for the launcher being INOP. The codes may be assigned messages under unit SOP. The messages are displayed on the AFATDS weapons data when LCHR LST is transmitted. For example, INOP 07 might mean that the launcher is INOP if the crew is conducting PMCS or refueling.
Launcher List 4-143. After entering the OPER or INOP codes, the crew must verify and enter the launcher's grid coordinates and altitude for transmission to the AFATDS. The LCHR LST is transmitted after the location fields are edited. LCHR LST messages can also be used to send additional information. If a fire mission is stored in the FCS, the crew edits and transmits the fire mission target number. If no fire mission is stored, the target number is sent blank. The number and type of rockets onboard also can be sent. This updates the AFATDS on the launcher ammunition load. If the launcher module (LM) has been laid for a fire mission, the crew can transmit the azimuth of fire, quadrant elevation (QE), and fuze time. If the LM is not laid, these data are all zeros.
Fire Direction System Posturing 4-144. The FCS Weapon Status window in AFATDS shows launchers as OP, PART, MOBL, COOL, or INOP. The MOBL, COOL, or INOP launchers are not considered by the AFATDS when selecting a launcher to fire. The AFATDS continuously displays each launcher status and the code location and/or reason for the status in Weapons data. This provides easy reference for the BOC personnel in determining the battery's overall and individual launcher status and location. The AFATDS can transmit a command message to a launcher, directing the crew to bring the launcher to a hot (OPER) status. This message automatically turns on the SRP/PDS to begin the process. See table 4-5.
M142/M270A1 LAUNCHER INITIALIZATION STATES 4-145. Upon initialization of the M270A1/M142 fire control system that includes entering GPS keys, the GPS receiver in the PNU initializes from 1 of 2 states—warm or cold, also referred to as warm start and cold start. The initialization state is dependent on the quantity and quality of the navigation data available for use during initialization. Previous navigation data, if available, is stored on the MSU and used during GPS receiver initialization. Navigation data includes receiver location, time, almanac, and ephemeris. GPS receiver initialization is not possible without keys and usable signals from at least 4 satellites. Table 4-5. GPS Initialization States DATA PARAMETER
STARTUP CATEGORY COLD
WARM
HOT
Position Error
100 km
11 km
200 m
Velocity Error
75 m/sec
5 m/sec
2 m/sec
Time Error
1 year
1 min
< 10 μs
Almanac Age
none
< 3 months
N/A
Ephemeris Age
none
None
4 hours
Time to Fix
17 min
60 sec
20 sec
Success Probability
90%
90%
95%
4-26
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
Table 4-5. GPS Initialization States DATA PARAMETER
STARTUP CATEGORY COLD
Legend km = kilometer m = meter min = minute
WARM
HOT
m/sec = meter per second sec = second μs = microsecond
Warm Start 4-146. A warm start is possible if the following criteria are met: • FCS is initialized with time (Zulu) that is within 5 minutes of synchronization with the GPS. • FCS is initialized with a location that is accurate within 5 kilometers. • Almanac and ephemeris data are stored on the MSU. 4-147. The GPS receiver will use this data to search for satellite signals. If 4 or more usable satellite signals are acquired and can be tracked, the GPS receiver will initialize and the PNU will become GPS aided in approximately 2 minutes. GPS aided is the desired navigational mode of the M270A1/M142.
Cold Start 4-148. If time, almanac, and ephemeris criteria are not met for a warm start, the GPS receiver will initialize from a cold start state. This may take as long as 17 minutes to complete. Launcher location that is accurate within 5 kilometers is also required for a cold start initialization. Initializing the PNU at an SCP in the non-aided mode and conducting the GPS receiver cold start while moving may reduce the time required for cold start. The GPS receiver becomes GPS aided as a result of the cold start initialization and the navigation data recorded on the MSU, which makes future warm starts possible.
Reacquisition 4-149. If satellite signal is lost and reacquired in less than 20 seconds a warm/cold start is not required. If reacquisition does not occur within 20 seconds, a warm start is required and will take approximately 2 minutes. Note: If the location stored on the MSU prior to movement varies by more than 5km from the location determined by the PNU when it becomes GPS aided, the gunner will receive the following prompt on the GDU: “POSITIONING VIOLATION RECYCLE AND UPDATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS.” The Gunner must power down the system and restart with a location grid within 5km of the current launcher location. The FCS will not allow fire mission processing until this is accomplished. Ideally, the launcher should remain in at least a warm start condition while in the hide area. This allows the launcher to reestablish satellite track quickly while moving to the firing point. This maximizes the opportunity to fire the missile in a GPS aided mode.
Weapon GPS Receiver Initialization Data 4-150. Initialization data is transferred from the PNU to the GPS receiver embedded in the ATACMS missile, immediately after “launcher lay.” The accuracy of time, location, and ephemeris data makes rapid initialization of the missile GPS receiver possible. This data transfer and initialization of the missile GPS receiver is referred to as hot start. This initialization can be completed in approximately 20 seconds.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-27
Chapter 4
DETACHMENT OF THE MLRS FIRING PLATOON 4-151. The MLRS firing platoon can provide fires without its parent MLRS battery or battalion. Logistical support of the detached platoon is, however, a significant challenge. For a short time, a cannon battalion could provide limited support while the platoon's assigned ammunition section provides shorthaul Class V resupply. Detailed support must be planned and specific resources allocated to support the platoon before this type of mission is executed.
SECTION IV – RECONNAISSANCE, SELECTION, AND OCCUPATION OF POSITION
PLANNING 4-152. Frequent moves are common to MLRS operations. Survival on the modern battlefield necessitates such tactics. The battery commander must anticipate movement and plan in advance for displacement. He must keep the controlling headquarters advised of all factors that will impact on the movement of a platoon, the headquarters, or the battery as a whole. 4-153. Because MLRS units are dispersed, firing platoons conduct their own RSOP. The battery commander and the first sergeant conduct the reconnaissance and selection for only the battery HQ positions. 4-154. Platoon OPAREA reconnaissance is the responsibility of the platoon leader and the primary duty of the reconnaissance sergeant. The platoon reconnaissance party may also include the platoon sergeant in the platoon leader's absence and/or the ammunition section chief (or his representative) to advise on AHA positioning.
RSOP PROCESS 4-155. The keys to successful RSOP are discipline, teamwork, and rehearsal. A mission analysis is conducted to determine what the unit is required to do and how long it has to do it. The factors of METT-TC are considered and troop-leading procedures (TLPs) are initiated. TLPs provide a mental framework to ensure complete preparation, dissemination, and execution of the battery mission. The process provides a checklist for the commander from receipt of the mission to execution. The steps may occur out of order or simultaneously after receipt of the mission: • Receive the mission. Upon receipt of a warning order, FA FASP or OPORD, the commander must analyze the mission to identify fire support tasks. He examines each task to determine specific ammunition, logistics, and unit preparation requirements. He should identify the precombat checks (PCCs) that the sections must accomplish in priority. A battery SOP should have PCCs that support routine tasks. These checklists streamline mission preparation. Finally, the commander needs to set a time line for all critical events from issuing the warning order to execution. • Issue the warning order. The commander takes his battery mission, fire support tasks, PCC priorities, and time line and issues a warning order to maximize battery preparation time. Even incomplete information can allow the sections to accomplish most of their required preparations. A modified five-paragraph order works well. • Make a tentative plan. The commander must gather information to make his plan by focusing on battery level METT-TC and IPB, if available. The commander is concerned with positioning, movement, logistic support, rehearsals, and defense as he makes his plan. • Initiate movement. If the mission requires repositioning, the commander should start his battery movement as early as possible to make best use of available time. • Conduct reconnaissance. Depending on METT-TC, the reconnaissance may be a simple map reconnaissance. Ideally, it will consist of ground reconnaissance, establishing and verifying survey control, fully preparing the position to receive the battery, and developing the battery
4-28
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
•
•
•
defense. Coordination for survey, engineer support, route security, adjacent unit coordination, and fire support can also be accomplished. Complete the plan. The commander must organize the information into a coherent order to issue to his sections. The level of detail will vary but must, at a minimum, convey the essential information to accomplish the critical fire support tasks. Prepare a terrain sketch or map board to use to issue the order. Rehearse to ensure a focused and clear delivery. Issue the order. Key players must be present for the brief. Headquarters and BOC personnel should attend so they understand their role. Be concise but specific in the sub-unit missions to each section. Once complete, use back-brief techniques to make sure your orders and priorities are understood. Have key leaders back brief you after they have had time to analyze and implement their part of the plan. State the specific items you will check or have another leader check. Update your time line and rehearsal schedule. Supervise. This is the most important step. Leaders must conduct precombat inspections (PCIs) and spot-check the plan to ensure that standards are met. In the defense especially, leaders must ensure that weapon range cards, fighting positions, observation posts, and knowledge are to standard. Use subordinate leaders to assist, but the commander must conduct the priority PCIs.
4-156. The time available will dictate the method of reconnaissance employed. The reconnaissance party is selected by the battery commander/1SG based on the mission and unit TSOP. Ammunition personnel are often included in reconnaissance parties to offer advice on vehicle placement and provide additional defensive firepower. 4-157. METT-TC and unit TSOP will dictate the size and composition of the advance party. Personnel on the advance party prepare the selected position for occupation by the main body and conduct a security sweep. Battery headquarters personnel conduct advance party operations. Firing platoons prepare their positions during reconnaissance operations. 4-158. After the advance or reconnaissance party, with its jump BOC or forward platoon HQ, has emplaced and is ready to transfer C2, the main body moves and occupies the new position. For a complete discussion of RSOP procedures, refer to FM 3-09.21.
Platoon OPAREA Considerations 4-159. One of the advantages of MLRS is that the system requires very little, if any, position preparation. The MLRS firing platoon uses no advance party. The position preparation that does occur is either completed during the reconnaissance or does not impact on operations and is completed after occupation. 4-160. The firing platoon has considerations beyond those discussed under the battery headquarters section: • Communications with the BOC. • Open areas for firing points. • Dispersion requirements of platoon position types; for example, FPs, HAs, RLs, SCPs, platoon HQ, and AHA. • Maximum cover and concealment for the platoon. • Trafficability within the OPAREA and location of the MSR. • Availability of a road network to reduce ground signature. • Traffic patterns for reload and other operations. • No major terrain or manmade features interfering with OPAREA operations. • Establish easily identifiable displacement routes from the OPAREA. Occupation 4-161. When the platoon sergeant arrives with the main body of the platoon, the platoon leader must ensure that all launchers reload, update SRP/PDS (as required), receive OPAREA data, and are thoroughly briefed on the OPAREA. The platoon sergeant should ensure that all combat, command and control, and support vehicles are positioned in accordance with the platoon leader's guidance.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-29
Chapter 4
Security 4-162. Because of the limited number of personnel, lack of crew-served weapons, and large size of the platoon area, defense against a ground attack is limited. The platoon is a high-priority target for enemy ground maneuver and special operations forces. Because the platoon is often positioned as close as possible to the FLOT in the BCT sector, security must be a high priority to avoid exposing the launchers and nearby friendly units to enemy ground or indirect fire attack. The keys to survivability are the avoidance of detection and passive defense. The platoon sergeant is in charge of the platoon area security and performs the following tasks: • Coordinates with DS cannon and maneuver units within the OPAREA for direct fire support and early warning of imminent attack. • Uses mines and trip flares, if available (which requires extensive coordination). • Gives a rendezvous grid to each launcher for use in case of hasty or emergency displacement. • Places all crew served weapons on the most likely avenues of approach to the platoon HQ (usually with LP and/or OP at the entry control point in the AHA). • Has launcher chiefs dismount 1 man in the HA to provide local security, except during a fire mission.
MASKING DATA 4-163. Masks are terrain features that have enough altitude to interfere with the trajectory of the rocket or missile. There are 2 categories of masks: immediate and downrange. Immediate masks are within 2,000 meters of a launcher firing point and are measured and input to the FCS by individual section chiefs. Downrange masks are beyond 2,000 meters and are measured and input to the AFATDS by the platoon leader and/or battery operations officer, in accordance with unit operating procedures. Downrange masks are measured and applied in 2 ways: crest clearance tables and automated downrange mask checks.
CREST CLEARANCE TABLES 4-164. The tables at appendix G allow leaders to establish a minimum planning range beyond a crest for launchers in a specific firing area to ensure that rockets will clear the crest and that warhead events will not occur until the crest is cleared. This is most significant when deployed in mountainous regions. The planning range derived from the tables can be used to establish the size of the area beyond a crest that cannot be attacked from a particular firing point or OPAREA with rocket munitions.
AUTOMATED DOWNRANGE MASK CHECKS 4-165. Downrange masks can be entered in the AFATDS as three-dimensional boxes around the terrain feature. They are then used by the AFATDS during tactical fire direction to determine whether the target can be ranged from the launcher firing point (or platoon center) without striking a major terrain feature. The operations officer and/or platoon leader conducts a terrain profile analysis of the area and identifies terrain features that may interfere with the trajectory. He measures each of the terrain features in terms of altitude, width, and grid coordinates (see figure 4-4). He then ensures entry of this data into the AFATDS. 4-166. A consideration in using this method is that the three-dimensional box will normally be much larger than an existing terrain feature. This means that, although a terrain feature may not physically interfere with the trajectory, the described downrange mask may cause the AFATDS to detect a violation. Leaders can reduce this effect by selecting the smallest acceptable value for downrange mask width.
4-30
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
Figure 4-4. Masking
SECTION V – CONTINGENCY OPERATIONS
FORCE PROJECTION 4-167. MLRS units must be capable of deploying anywhere in the world with little or no notice to provide long-range artillery fires for contingency forces. The following discussion is not intended to be all-inclusive but rather to highlight considerations when planning for contingency operations and deployment. 4-168. Force projection usually begins as a contingency operation—a rapid response to a crisis. Alert may come without notice, bringing with it a tremendous stress on soldiers and systems, accompanied by pressure from various external sources. In any event, rapid yet measured response is critical. 4-169. The following are considerations when preparing a force projection package.
DEPLOYMENT READINESS 4-170. Deployment readiness requires much leader time, focus, and energy. It also takes a great deal of soldier time to train for deployment, maintain deployment administrative and logistical sustainability, and continually follow up. A key to success is each unit’s deployment SOP. The SOP should be a thorough document designed to prepare the unit for deployment. SOPs should provide a “cookbook” approach to deployment procedures. The SOP ensures continuity as leaders change and prevents a rather complex process from being misunderstood. Consider including each of the following items when preparing the SOP: • Concept of deployment. • Required preparation procedures. • Deployment assistance. • Notification-hour sequence. • Checklists. • Report formats.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-31
Chapter 4
Training for Deployment 4-171. Demanding and relevant training for deployment is important. It includes the tactical training necessary to cover contingencies in addition to rehearsing actual deployment procedures often. Soldiers should review tie-down procedures for transporting the unit via land, sea, or air. Practice includes all units rehearsing their parts in the alert sequence. When alerted to deploy, MLRS units must build on home station training by focusing on missions and conditions they expect to encounter in a particular contingency. Leaders must conduct mission essential individual and collective training during deployment and after arriving in the theater of operations.
Administrative and Logistical Readiness 4-172. In addition to tactical and deployment task proficiency, administrative and logistical sustainability to execute deployment require constant command emphasis. Primary factors include personnel, medical, and equipment readiness. Units must establish, maintain, and report prioritized lists of the following information: • Personnel and equipment shortages. • Non-mission capable, combat-essential equipment. • PLL zero balances. 4-173. Battalions must also verify that soldiers have completed weapon qualification, required individual and collective training such as CBRN common skills training, and that they have completed 100 percent soldier readiness processing for overseas movement, which may include the following: • Personnel deployability. Updated DD Form 93. VA Form 8286. Wills and powers of attorney. Properly sealed identification card. Identification tags. Privately owned vehicle disposition instructions. Approved family care plan (if required). • Medical/dental deployability. Immunizations. Human immunodeficiency virus test. Physical exam. Panoramic x-ray. Dental category 1 or 2. 4-174. Relatively minor discrepancies in personnel deployability criteria may be exacerbated in the face of deployment. Family care plans must be initiated and continuously reviewed. Family situations often change, and a care packet that is not properly maintained may contain outdated information. 4-175. Finally, the unit must establish and update unit movement plans, rear detachment plans (for example, disposition of personal property and privately owned vehicles), recall plans, and alert rosters. Recall plans should be practiced often and revised as necessary.
INTELLIGENCE 4-176. Early deploying units usually face a maze of complex information requirements—some relating to the enemy, others to local laws, availability of facilities, and similar considerations. Force projection operations need accurate and responsive tactical intelligence. To satisfy their intelligence requirements, MLRS commanders must determine the available sources and establish connectivity with appropriate agencies.
4-32
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
FORCE TAILORING 4-177. Force tailoring is the process of determining the right mix of units and the sequence in which they are to deploy. MLRS commanders must be ready to deploy subordinate elements of their unit to support a particular force projection package.
JOINT OPERATIONS 4-178. Joint operations occur when multiple Service and functional components combine efforts under a JTF. The synchronization of air, land, sea, space, and special operations forces is critical to effectiveness and ultimate mission accomplishment. MLRS units may support any of a number of components during joint operations. One of the most likely is MLRS support of a Marine air ground task force (MAGTF). The exact size and composition of the MLRS unit to support MAGTF operations will be a function of METTTC. Normally, an MLRS battery or battalion will support a MEF or MEF Forward (MEF [Fwd]) based on METT-TC.
COMBINED OPERATIONS 4-179. Combined operations occur when 2 or more nations combine their efforts in a military operation. Force projection operations will almost always involve operations with other nations. MLRS commanders and soldiers should be sensitive to cultural differences that may impact their operations.
DEPLOYMENT 4-180. MLRS units are capable of deploying by air, land, or sea as part of an all Army force or as part of a combined arms force. Time lines for deployment will always be driven by METT-TC. Generally, this time line will be developed based on reverse planning at higher headquarters. Factors that affect reverse planning include, but are not limited to, aircraft availability; type, size, and amount of equipment; and personnel and equipment attached. Movement officers have to be experts, and automated unit equipment lists must be tracked meticulously.
METHODS Air 4-181. The MLRS M270 and M270A1 systems can be deployed by C17 and larger type aircraft. A M142 can be deployed by C130 and larger type aircraft. MLRS commanders must ensure that their soldiers are familiar with aircraft loading procedures as well as with Air Force rules and regulations regarding transport of equipment. Units must maintain current strategic load plans for all types of aircraft. The air load planning system enables computation of the required number and type of aircraft to carry the specified equipment and troops to be airlifted. Table 4-6 identifies the aircraft required to lift a representative battery and battalion.
Sea 4-182. MLRS units must also be prepared to deploy their equipment by sea. This is especially true for follow-on forces. MLRS commanders should ensure that their units are familiar with all facets of sealift operations.
Land 4-183. Units must often move their equipment to a seaport by rail or heavy equipment transport (HET), and then load the equipment onto ships. MLRS commanders must be familiar with specific vehicular requirements for transport and ensure that their soldiers are trained on proper loading techniques.
DEPLOYMENT PACKAGES 4-184. Because contingency forces are tailored to meet specific mission requirements, it is possible that only parts of an MLRS unit will deploy as part of a force projection package. These packages assume that a
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-33
Chapter 4
slice of C2 up to the battalion level will accompany each package. (The liaison vehicle is often used.) This allows for more rapid integration of follow-on elements of the battalion by having the structure in place. It also facilitates activities such as operational and logistics liaison with support from the battalion. Table 4-6 gives examples of possible MLRS packages that could support contingency operations. These tables are general in nature and do not include detailed ancillary personnel and equipment requirements. These tables do, however, include approximate numbers of direct support maintenance equipment and personnel. Table 4-6. MLRS Contingency Packages MLRS Battery Package Major Items of Equipment
MLRS Battalion Package Qty
Major Items of Equipment
Qty
Launcher
6
Launcher
18
M1068, CP
5
M1068, CP
13
M88A1 recovery vehicle
1
M88A1 recovery vehicle
4
M985 HEMTT
12
M985 HEMTT
36
HMMWVs
14
HMMWVs
26
M978 fuel tanker Cargo trucks
2
M978 fuel tanker
10
Cargo trucks
Personnel
MLRS Unit MST
7 26
Personnel
126
MLRS Unit
40
MST
Air Frames
424 73
Air Frames
C5A
5
C5A
17
C17
9
C17
17
SPECIAL OPERATIONS OPERATIONS IN MOUNTAINOUS TERRAIN 4-185. More ammunition may be required to support the force in mountainous terrain because of reduced munitions effects. 4-186. Additionally, mountainous regions may affect MLRS employment because of the low trajectory of MLRS rocket munitions. Leaders should use the crest clearance tables in planning platoon OPAREAs (see appendix G). 4-187. C2 is degraded in mountainous regions because of decreased effectiveness of FM radio communications. Movement control is more difficult on winding mountain roads, as is occupation and displacement. Terrain marches may be impractical or impossible. 4-188. Logistics resupply is more difficult because of the limited number of roads and slower convoy speeds. Survey may not be as accurate, and terrain masks may limit target acquisition. Cross-country restrictions force the enemy to use roads and trails, which will enhance interdiction fires. Ambushes are likely in this type of terrain.
OPERATIONS IN JUNGLE TERRAIN 4-189. MLRS is not normally appropriate for jungle operations. Jungle terrain is more suited to light cannon artillery. The MLRS generally requires open firing areas and freedom of movement to maximize both its effectiveness and survivability. Jungle operations also present problems because of the high humidity and dense vegetation. Humidity may reduce electronic equipment and launcher LRU operability. Dense vegetation degrades M77 munitions effects. In a thick canopy, DPICM is not effective.
4-34
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
4-190. Communication is degraded because of high humidity, vegetation density, and electronic line-ofsight restrictions. Antennas may have to be elevated to overcome line-of-sight restrictions. 4-191. Immediate masks are prevalent in jungle terrain. Selection of platoon OPAREAs and launcherfiring points is hampered by soft terrain and thick vegetation. Terrain marches may be restricted. 4-192. Logistics resupply is hampered by reduced mobility, and survey control is more difficult to establish. Target acquisition accuracy is degraded because of heavy foliage. Launchers should be positioned closer together to provide for better security.
NORTHERN REGION OPERATIONS 4-193. Northern operations are characterized by frozen earth, snow-covered terrain, intense sunlight, and prolonged darkness. Rocket and missile smoke trails last longer in cold weather, thus making launchers more readily identifiable to enemy TA assets. 4-194. Radio communications can be unreliable in extreme cold, and equipment may become inoperative. 4-195. Frozen, snow-covered terrain may limit the number of available positions for platoon OPAREAs. Mobility is slowed for headquarters elements, as wheeled vehicles and trailers generally are not suited for operations in northern areas. In extreme cold, metal tends to become brittle and parts breakage increases. Convoys must travel in a close column during whiteout conditions and prolonged darkness. 4-196. Reduced mobility and difficulty in determining grid locations hamper logistics resupply. Snowstorms and intense cold can adversely affect target acquisition equipment.
MILITARY OPERATIONS ON URBAN TERRAIN 4-197. The massive growth of urban areas and manmade changes to the landscape significantly affect the conduct of future battles. Commanders at all levels must be aware of the unique advantages and disadvantages associated with operations conducted in and around cities, towns, villages, and similar builtup areas. Special techniques may be used in attacking the defilade areas between buildings. Increasing the target altitude used in the AFATDS and FCS will allow the submunitions to achieve a more vertical fall prior to detonation and thus clear buildings and other obstructions (see figure 4-5). Commanders must, however, consider the precision error and large submunitions dispersion patterns when applying this method of attack due to the high probability of extensive collateral damage. Low-level winds at the target area will add to the precision error. At longer ranges, large altitude adjustments may yield a “NO SOLUTION ERROR” in the launcher FCS. 4-198. C2 of a firing platoon operating in an urban area is demanding. Decentralization to the maximum feasible extent may be required. The reduced ability to communicate necessitates more detailed orders and TSOPs. The height and density of structures reduce the planning ranges for all organic radio equipment. Imaginative positioning of antennas for the platoon HQ, such as intermingling them with existing civilian antennas or in treetops, may increase transmission range and enhance survivability. Existing civilian communication networks may be used to supplement the organic capability of the unit.
Figure 4-5. Urban Targeting Solution
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-35
Chapter 4
4-199. MLRS units should not position launchers in built-up areas. Buildings can serve as concealment for hide areas, but the low trajectory of the system necessitates open areas for firing. Any urban area used for hide or CP positions should— • Be free of civilians. • Be away from the center of the built-up area. • Have several routes of escape. • Be off the main high-speed avenues. • Afford as much cover and concealment as possible. 4-200. The use of existing structures (such as barns, auto repair shops, and warehouses) as hide areas or CP locations maximizes protection and minimizes the camouflage effort. 4-201. More time must be allotted for reconnaissance. Depending on the density of buildings in the area, the reconnaissance party may have to use infantry techniques for house-to-house fighting to clear and check the buildings.
DESERT OPERATIONS 4-202. Deserts are arid, barren regions that cannot support any quantity of life because of lack of fresh water. They are characterized by temperature extremes (136 degrees Fahrenheit (F) in Libya or Mexico to bitter cold in the Gobi Desert) with fluctuations exceeding 70 degrees F. Fire support considerations vary according to the type of desert; however, considerations common to all include munitions effects due to the temperature extremes and a lack of identifiable terrain features. The three types of deserts are discussed below.
Mountain 4-203. The desert is characterized by barren, rocky ranges separated by flat basins that may be studded by deep gullies created during flash floods.
Rocky Plateau 4-204. The desert has slight relief with extended flat areas and good visibility. It is characterized by steepwalled, eroded valleys (wadis). These are extremely attractive for concealment and limited cover but are subject to flash flooding.
Sandy or Dune 4-205. The desert has extensive flat areas covered with dunes subject to wind erosion. The dune size, the texture of sand, and the leeward gradient may diminish haul capacity or prohibit movement entirely. 4-206. Map reading is difficult and resections are impossible, unless a number of prominent points are available. Position data from PADS, the launcher FCS, and the DAGR are critical. 4-207. Lack of vegetation makes camouflage difficult. In all cases, the MLRS unit is visible to the ground observer. From about 400 meters in the air, the camouflaged command posts appear bigger than the surrounding dunes or mounds of sand and vegetation. Moving directly from position to position using special formations is not only feasible but often preferable. 4-208. High temperature and ever-present sand cause failures in mechanical and electronic equipment. Fuel and air filters must be cleaned after each operation, sometimes twice per day. Optics become opaque unless protected. Static electricity caused by hot winds interferes with refueling operations, radio traffic, and launcher reload operations. Turning radii of tracked vehicles is limited because of the buildup of sand between the idler wheel and the track. 4-209. See FM 90-3 for additional information on desert operations.
AMPHIBIOUS ASSAULT 4-210. Inherent in the concept of an amphibious assault is the projection of a fighting force into an area on shore that is assumed to be heavily defended. The force must build in combat power from zero strength to a
4-36
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Unit Operations
point where it is effective and credible. To provide adequate support, an MLRS unit must be prepared to fire immediately upon landing. 4-211. Although MLRS units are not intended to fulfill amphibious assault requirements, they may be required to conduct transit from ship-to-shore via landing craft. The force or MAGTF commander must consider the limitations of MLRS unit equipment with respect to each of the landing craft capabilities because MLRS unit equipment is not currently “through-surf” capable.
Landing Craft, Air Cushion (LCAC) 4-212. This preferable method of ship-to-shore transit for the MLRS unit allows the launchers to disembark on dry land, affording maximum protection to MLRS system electronic components.
Landing Craft, Mechanized (LCM-8) 4-213. The commander must consider that use of the LCM-8 will likely expose the launcher to partial immersion, potentially damaging components with salt water. However, these craft can be used for all ancillary-wheeled vehicles. 4-214. Positioning coordination with the supported maneuver force is critical on beachheads. Units must remain flexible to change the predetermined positions as the situation develops on the beachhead. 4-215. Units must plan to embark and debark with all available MTOE equipment. Vehicles must be prepared for fording. Wheeled vehicle tires may be partially deflated for improved performance on beach sand. Salt water and sand increase the need for preventive maintenance. Unit basic loads must be transported forward with the unit. An adequate ship-to-shore resupply of ammunition must be part of the plan and coordinated by the controlling FA headquarters S-4.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
4-37
This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 5
Delivery of Fires The delivery of field artillery fires depends on locating an appropriate target, analyzing that target to determine the proper method of attack (tactical fire direction), converting the call for fire into firing data (technical fire direction), and delivering the required ordnance on the target to meet the needs of the supported commander. The versatility of the MLRS automated systems allows smooth, rapid, and accurate fire planning, target processing, and engagement. This chapter addresses those functions of the battalion that are directly associated with the delivery of fires.
SECTION I – INTRODUCTION
ORGANIZATION AND STRUCTURE ORGANIZATION 5-1. Organizations supported by MLRS units normally include brigade, division, corps, and EAC and/or JTF. A number of fire support planning and execution agencies support the targeting process for, and request fires from, MLRS units. These agencies include, but are not limited to, the following: • National/joint Service target acquisition sensors and processing facilities. • Division and corps FSCs. • Brigade and battalion FSCs. • Intelligence collection, analysis, and dissemination nodes of the all-source analysis system/analysis control element.
STRUCTURE 5-2. Command and control requirements for MLRS units are centered on a fire support structure that supports the concept of operation. This structure includes acquisition, C2, and fire control systems from the sensor system through the delivery system.
Rockets 5-3. Rockets will normally be fired at targets within the division area of operations (AO) by an attached or reinforcing MLRS battalion or an attached fires brigade (FIB). These units supporting the division are normally under the control of an attached FIB with input from the division FSC.
Missile 5-4. The employment of Army tactical missile system (ATACMS) missiles will normally be retained at division and higher levels. However, the FIB MLRS battalion may fire missiles that have been apportioned to the FIB to support its mission or that have been directed to be fired by the FIB in support of a division mission. Therefore, all firing elements and platforms of the MLRS battalion must be prepared for ATACMS missions. 5-5. The key to effective employment of ATACMS is planning and coordination (prior to execution). The planning tasks and functions necessary for the employment of ATACMS will be managed under centralized control normally at division or echelons above division (EAD). Execution functions for fixed or
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-1
Chapter 5
non-mobile targets may also be initiated under centralized control. Responsiveness may be improved by tailoring linkages to allow shorter paths (decentralized execution) from target acquisition sources through FIB or MLRS battalion nodes to the launcher for the attack of fleeting targets. If the force commander desires to decentralize execution for certain targets (typically high priority fleeting targets that are vulnerable to attack for very short periods of time), a subordinate commander (unit) will normally be designated as the execution authority.
PROCESSING BY ECHELON 5-6. It is essential that requests for fires be entered as expeditiously as possible into the FS system. This is done manually or in a semiautomatic mode using a variety of systems. The AFATDS performs corps/division FSC, fires brigade, MLRS battalion, battery, and platoon functions. All fire planning and FDC personnel work with different functions of the system appropriate to the assigned echelon: • Corps/division FC (AFATDS). Functions as the primary fire planning and execution system for AFOM missions. Determines target values and priorities. Determines commander's criteria for effects/effects processing. Conducts weapon-to-target pairing. Determines units to fire based on coordinated airspace. Acts as the primary fire planning agency for ATACMS. Considers target values and priorities. Considers commander's criteria for effects. Checks for FSCM violations. • FIB computer (AFATDS). Performs fire planning function. Checks for FSCM violations. Performs tactical fire direction and status reporting. Sets ammunition expenditure and supply limits. Relays fire mission message to MLRS battalion FDC. • Battalion computer (AFATDS). Distributes fire missions based on specified fire units. Checks for FSCM violations. Performs tactical fire direction and status reporting. Assists batteries in coordination of positions. Distributes and disseminates fire plans (target lists) to batteries. • Battery computer (AFATDS). Performs tactical fire direction and status reporting. Checks for FSCM violations. Checks for mask violations. Assigns missions to launchers based on current status. Distributes fire plans. Maintains launcher status.
FIRE DIRECTION CENTERS BATTALION 5-7. The battalion FDC tactically controls the fires of the battalion with the AFATDS. The battalion FDC is the net control station (NCS) for the operations/fire (OPS/F) and fire direction (FD) nets and the primary link with the supported commander’s FSC (or force field artillery (FA) headquarters if 1 is designated) for all delivery of fires by the MLRS battalion.
5-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
5-8. Selection of targets for the MLRS battalion is the responsibility of the controlling FA headquarters or FSC Fire plans are sent to a battalion as target lists with specific implementing instructions (for example, H-hour and times relative to H-hour in a series). The battalion selects platoons to execute the fire missions then transmits the targets or the complete plans to the battery for execution. Targets that fall in the category of unscheduled fires are distributed on the basis of battery or platoon status (range to target, number of missions in progress, launcher availability, and ammunition type and status).
BATTERY 5-9. The MLRS battery is concerned solely with the delivery of fires. The AFATDS enables the battery to command and control all battery assets and, if necessary, assume control of battalion functions. The battery engages targets in 1 of 2 modes—scheduled or unscheduled fires. These modes determine the way the AFATDS processes missions. 5-10. The battery AFATDS usually performs the fire direction tasks automatically. Battery FDC functions include the following: • Target analysis and selection of type and number of rockets and/or missiles to fire based upon established guidance. • Downrange mask checks. • Fire support coordination measures and air corridor checks. • Selection of launcher to respond. • Transmission of fire orders. • Recording the missions.
PLATOON 5-11. The AFATDS enables the platoon to command and control all platoon assets and, if necessary, assume control of battery functions. When fire mission data is received or manually entered, the fire control system (FCS) automatically processes and acts on the information. Once executed, the actual firing of the munitions is initiated with inputs from the FCS operator. The method of fire control determines when the FCS permits these actions. (See section III.)
SECTION II – ACCURATE PREDICTED FIRE 5-12. Providing lethal, responsive fires in support of maneuver is dependent on the ability to achieve accurate first-round fire for effects on targets precisely when needed. To achieve responsive fires, MLRS units must conduct thorough and effective fire planning, and maximize the capabilities and the versatility of automated systems (AFATDS, FCS) used for tactical and technical fire control. 5-13. To achieve accurate first-round effects on a target, MLRS units must compensate for nonstandard conditions as completely as time and the tactical situation permit. There are 5 requirements for achieving accurate first-round effects: accurate target location and size, firing unit location, weapon and ammunition information, meteorological information, and computational procedures. If these requirements are met, the firing unit will be able to deliver accurate fires. If the requirements for accurate predicted fire cannot be met completely, accuracy will be degraded accordingly.
TARGET SIZE AND LOCATION 5-14. Establishing the range from the launcher to the target requires accurate and timely detection, identification, and location of targets. Determining their size and disposition on the ground is also necessary so accurate firing data can be computed. Determining the appropriate time and type of attack requires consideration of the target size (radius or other dimensions) and the direction and speed of movement. Target location is determined by using various TA assets.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-3
Chapter 5
LAUNCHER LOCATION 5-15. Accurate range and direction from the launcher to the target requires accurate launcher location. Each launcher is capable of determining its location to the appropriate accuracy. Additionally, as back up, the battalion survey section may use the PADS to provide accurate survey information for launchers as required.
SURVEY SUPPORT 5-16. Each M270-equipped MLRS battalion has 3 survey sections equipped with PADS. (The M270A1/M142-equipped battalions will have 1PADS. The PADS provides survey control for the current and planned platoon OPAREAs. Each M270 launcher section is equipped with a GPS device (AN/PSN11), and both M142 and M270A1 launchers have onboard GPS and DAGR (AnPSN-13) capability. 5-17. Each battalion PADS may be allocated to and controlled by a BOC. The BOC then directs the PADS section to link up with platoon leaders requiring survey support. The locations of all SCPs are maintained on the BOC situation map or charts for future use. On completion of the survey mission, a PADS chief reports to the battalion TOC for further instructions. 5-18. M270 launcher crews use SCPs to initialize, update, and calibrate the launcher PDS. Although launchers do not require directional control, there must be horizontal and vertical position control in each of the platoon OPAREAs. There may also be a requirement for establishing SCPs for conducting PDS calibration for M270 launchers. The survey section establishes these SCPs with the PADS by using 10-minute Z-VEL (zero-velocity) corrections.
REQUIRED ACCURACIES 5-19. There are different required accuracies for firing associated with SCPs for MLRS. Although the SCP accuracy requirements may seem restrictive, they are based on the accuracy of the launcher SRP/PDS and the assumption that the launcher will move no more than 6 to 8 kilometers between SCPs before conducting an update. The SCP accuracy requirements ensure that, after the launcher moves 6 to 8 kilometers, the SRP/PDS will retain accuracy within the prescribed MLRS firing point requirement. STANAG 2934 defines the MLRS SCP accuracy requirement as 8 meters CEP for position and 3.6 meters probable error (PE) in altitude (see table5-1). Table 5-1. Required Accuracies MLRS SCPs
CEP (Position)
PE (Altitude)
8 meters
3.6 meters
SCP = survey control point STANAG 2934 and The Army Positioning and Navigation Master Plan, 9 September 1990.
SYSTEM ACCURACY 5-20. The primary systems for establishing position control for launchers (PADS and DAGR) have different system accuracies (see table 5-2).
5-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
Table 5-2. System Accuracy System
CEP (Position)
PE (Altitude)
PADS-1
7 meters
3 meters
DAGR
10 meters
10 meters
DAGR = Defense advanced global position system receiver PADS = position and azimuth determining system 1 Updated using 10 min Z-VEL corrections. Figure of merit (FOM) of 1. 5-21. On the basis of both the system accuracies of PADS and DAGR and the required accuracies established for SCPs and FPs, PADS is currently the only means to establish position control at SCPs. The DAGR can be used to establish position control if the data is entered during an update at the FP from which the launcher will fire. Note: The M270A1 and M142 launchers, in the GPS aided mode, can establish their own SCPs.
PRIMARY METHOD OF SURVEY—STARTING DATA 5-22. The accuracy of the data produced by PADS is directly related to the accuracy of its starting data. MLRS units require fifth-order survey. When possible, starting data for the battery PADS should be at least of fourth-order accuracy (see table 5-3). These data can be obtained from higher headquarters, trig lists, or other artillery units operating in the same area as the MLRS unit. 5-23. When surveyed starting data are not available, use the alternate methods described below. Survey control is provided to the platoons by the battalion survey. Ideally, the SCPs are located on readily identifiable and accessible terrain, such as road junctions. The launcher personnel must be able to locate each point and stop the launcher at the SCPs without excessive maneuvering. Within platoon OPAREAs, SCPs for launcher updates are normally established at the reload points. The POC personnel give SCP coordinates and altitude to each launcher section and the PADS survey section. They also leave these data on a tag at a marker to identify the SCP.
Table 5-3. Position Specifications 4th Order
5th Order
Accuracy (units of error to similar units of survey)
1:3,000
1:1,000
Easting/northing coordinates computed to:
0.01 meter
0.1 meter
Height computed to:
0.1 meter
0.1 meter
ALTERNATE METHODS OF SURVEY 5-24. If there is no survey control in a unit equipped with the M270 launcher, the platoon leader must establish alternate methods of survey: • Use the DAGR (AN/PSN-13) to establish survey. • Use adjacent unit SCPs or their survey assets to extend survey control into the OPAREA. • Use SCPs outside the OPAREA. Depending on the number of SCPs and their distance from the firing points, this method may severely limit platoon operations; launchers should be updated after 6 to 8 kilometers of travel.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-5
Chapter 5
•
• •
Use the launcher SRP/PDS to establish SCPs in the OPAREA by transferring survey from other SCPs and known points. This method may create some accuracy loss (accuracy depends on the distance traveled by the launcher). However, it is as accurate as hasty survey techniques up to an 8-kilometer transfer distance, and it is faster. Use a hasty survey (a graphic resection) to establish SCPs. The steps for establishing survey control through graphic resection are described in appendix F. Use map spotting. Well-trained map readers using graphic training aid (GTA) can often establish an SCP to the same accuracy as by using hasty survey techniques. Map spotting should be used only as a last resort.
M270 LAUNCHER SURVEY CONTROL POINTS 5-25. Although cover and concealment are factors in SCP selection, utility should be the primary consideration. The SCP must be readily accessible so the driver can stop the launcher with the rear edge of the left drive sprocket aligned next to the SCP marker. The area and SCP marker must be such that the driver can position the launcher without ground guidance or excessive maneuvering. The SCPs should be collocated with a reload point, if possible. This allows rapid return of the launcher to operational status.
M270A1/M142 LAUNCHERS SURVEY CONTROL POINTS 5-26. SCPs are required for M270A1/M142 operations. The exact number depends on the unit SOP; launchers often use SCPs located at reload points, and each unit has its own ammunition resupply method. Each fully operational M270A1/M142 launcher can establish its own SCP for future use. For example, an M270A1/M142 launcher that has lost its global positioning system (GPS) capability can still fire missions as long as the launcher PNU is initialized on an SCP and updated as required.
WEAPON AND AMMUNITION INFORMATION 5-27. A thorough understanding and consideration of performance characteristics for the launcher and the variety of munitions types is imperative. The ballistic algorithm embedded in the launcher FCS accounts for specific ammunition information (weight, ambient temperature, and ammunition type).
METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION 5-28. The effects of weather on the rocket/missile in flight must be considered, and firing data must compensate for those effects. Use of current meteorological information in the FCS allows the firing solution to compensate for current weather conditions. 5-29. The launcher FCS uses all lines of the current computer meteorological message to compute firing data. Rockets are particularly sensitive to low-level winds. 5-30. Meteorological messages are usually received in a digital secure mode from the controlling headquarters AFATDS and/or MMS. They are routed through the battalion or battery and sent to the FCS. The battery sends meteorological messages to all launchers and platoons simultaneously. 5-31. The platoon AFATDS can store the message and retransmit it to a launcher if necessary. Both the platoon and the launcher FCS can be manually loaded with meteorological data through keyboard entry, if required. 5-32. The interfaces directly with the MMS. Current meteorological information can be obtained by communicating directly with the MMS on the meteorology section net.
METEOROLOGICAL MESSAGE SPACE CONSIDERATIONS 5-33. The accuracy of a meteorological message may decrease as the distance from the meteorological sounding site increases. Local topography has a pronounced effect on the distance that meteorological data can be reasonably extended. In mountainous terrain, distinct variations of wind occur over short distances. This effect extends to much greater heights than the mountaintops. Large bodies of water will affect both
5-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
the time and space considerations of the meteorological message due to the land and sea breezes and the effect of humidity on density (increases in humidity decrease air density). Meteorological messages for artillery are considered valid up to 20 kilometers from the balloon release point over gently rolling terrain. The validity distance decreases proportionally with the roughness of the terrain.
METEOROLOGICAL MESSAGE TIME CONSIDERATIONS 5-34. Time may decrease the accuracy of a meteorological message because of the changing nature of weather. There are no specific rules for determining the usable time, because that determination depends on the characteristics of the atmosphere, periods of transition, meteorology section movement, personnel, supplies and equipment, and the altitude of the meteorological message required by the firing unit. When the weather pattern is variable, the usable time is variable. If a frontal passage is forecast for the area, the meteorology team will take a new sounding after the passage of the front. When the weather pattern is stable, and is forecast to remain so, time between messages may be extended up to several hours or longer, depending on the time of day and existing weather conditions. Periods of transition account for a portion of the time consideration. General guidance in preparing flight schedules for soundings follows. • During and just after sunrise, temperature changes occur as the atmosphere becomes heated. Temperatures are more stable throughout the afternoon. Therefore, soundings are performed more often (every 2 hours) in the morning and less often (every 4 hours) in the afternoon. • As sunset approaches, the air cools rapidly. During this time, changing temperatures are monitored closely. Flight schedules may have to be adjusted (to 1 every 2 hours) as the atmosphere cools. The cooling air stabilizes about 2 hours after sunset. At this time, flights normally return to a schedule of once every 4 hours. • During night and early morning hours, the atmosphere reaches maximum cooling and becomes stabilized. During this time, soundings could be taken at intervals that exceed 2 hours, and 4-hour intervals between flights are common. • Regardless of the above, the tactical situation and the immediate needs of the unit are the main considerations that determine sounding schedules.
CRITERIA FOR USE OF METEOROLOGICAL DATA 5-35. The order of preference of various sources of met data (see table 5-4) for use by MLRS units is: • Current MET message from a station within 20 kilometers of the launch point and less than 2 hours old. • Current meteorology (MET) message from the nearest station more than 20 kilometers from the launch point. • Met messages more than 2 hours old but from a station within 20 kilometers of the launch points. A met message that is 4 hours old may be used except when day/night transitions or frontal passages are occurring. Table 5-4. Meteorological Message Areas of Validity Type Terrain
Area of Validity
Level Mountainous Coastal
20-km radius 10-km radius 15-km radius
km = kilometer
METEOROLOGICAL MESSAGE CHECKING PROCEDURES 5-36. When the FDC receives a meteorological message, it should be checked to ensure that it is valid. Any peculiarities noted in the message should be questioned. If the timeliness or validity of a meteorological message is doubted, the message should be questioned and referred to the artillery meteorology section, whose personnel are qualified to explain message variations or to correct message transmission errors. (See figure 5-2 for an example of a computer meteorological message.) Verbal
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-7
Chapter 5
transmission of meteorological messages may cause copying errors, particularly if the message is copied down on something other than the standard (ballistic or computer) meteorological form. Note: Meteorological measuring and forecasting capability is improving rapidly. Block III Profiler will soon replace the balloon on the battlefield with microwave and satellite technology. Accurate meteorological data will then be available continuously upon request.
MESSAGE HEADING 5-37. Check the ballistic or computer meteorological message heading as follows: • Check message type, octant, and location entries for correctness. • Check date-time entries to ensure that data are current. If the meteorological message is more than 4 hours old, consult with the meteorology section to determine message validity (datetime entries are expressed in Greenwich Mean Time). • Map-spot the altitude of the MMS by using the latitude and longitude from the location block in the header of the meteorological message. (See FM 3-25.26 for additional information on how to plot a latitude and longitude. An error of 50 meters or more will affect air temperature and density and/or pressure corrections applied to firing data.)
MESSAGE BODY 5-38. Check the ballistic meteorological message body as follows: • Ballistic wind direction should trend in a fairly uniform manner. Question drastic changes (1,000 mils or greater) or sudden reverses of wind direction from line to line, particularly if wind speeds are more than 10 knots. Note: Direction changes greater than 1,000 mils are common when wind speeds are 10 knots or less. • •
Question severe increases or decreases (10 knots or greater) in wind speed from line to line. Ballistic temperatures and densities normally show an inverse relationship; that is, as temperature increases, density should decrease. Check for drastic changes (2 percent or more) in density or temperature. Ballistic temperature and density should change smoothly between zones.
Figure 5-2. Computer Meteorological Message
5-8
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
5-39. Consecutive messages should show a trend that relates to the actual weather conditions, unless weather conditions have changed during sunrise or sunset transition periods or because of a frontal passage, rain, snow, or a rapid increase or decrease in cloud cover. 5-40. Check for errors in the computer meteorological message as follows: • Question drastic wind direction changes (1,000 mils or greater) or sudden reverses of wind direction from line to line, particularly if wind speeds are more than 10 knots. Note: Direction changes greater than 1,000 mils are common when wind speeds are 10 knots or less. • • • •
Question severe increases or decreases (10 knots or greater) in wind speed from line to line. Question a severe increase or decrease (over 20 degrees) in temperature from line to line. Check for differences in identification line pressure and surface pressure. Both should match. Check for increases in pressure. Pressure should decrease smoothly from line to line. Pressure will never increase with height.
5-41. Atmospheric pressures always decrease consistently from line to line. Pressure will never increase with height. Transposed figures are the most common errors in pressure values. If errors in pressure are determined, the meteorology section must verify the corrected values.
COMPUTATIONAL PROCEDURES 5-42. The computation of firing data must be accurate. Current automated computational techniques and systems yield accurate and timely firing data. Individual and collective training reduces the probability of procedural or data input error.
SECTION III – TACTICAL AND TECHNICAL FIRE DIRECTION
TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION 5-43. Tactical fire direction is the process that results in a decision on whether and how a target will be attacked. Specifically, it answers the following questions: • Location of the target. Is it safe to fire? Is it within range? Are there intervening crests? Can the target be attacked? • Nature of the target. How large is it? What is its degree of protection? • Timeliness of target information. Is it a fleeting target? • Ammunition available. What do the units have on hand to fire? • Firing units available. Who is in range and ready to fire? • Commander's guidance and/or TSOP. What do we want to do to the target? • Request for fire. What did the requestor ask for? Can the battalion give it to him? Should the battalion give it to him? • Munitions effects. Given the ammunition available, nature of the target, and commander's guidance, how should the target be attacked? • Tactical situation. When should the battalion fire? Are special instructions required?
TARGET ANALYSIS 5-44. Target analysis is the examination of a potential target to determine the most suitable weapon, firing unit, ammunition, and method for attacking the target.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-9
Chapter 5
5-45. The amount of time devoted to target analysis and the thoroughness of the analysis depend on the following: • Amount of target information. • Availability of weapons and munitions to attack the target. • Urgency of the engagement. • Precedence of attack. 5-46. An FDO selects a particular precedence of attack after considering the following: • Target characteristics. Targets vary considerably in composition, degree of protection, shape, mobility, and recoverability. • Target location. The proximity of the target to friendly troops, probability of collateral damage, and the accuracy of the target location must be considered. • Terrain. The terrain in the target area has a direct effect on the vulnerability of the target. Certain terrain provides complete protection from some angles of approach but not from others. Thus, it influences the unit and munitions to be employed. The type of vegetation in the target area should be considered in the selection of ammunition. • Weather. Weather is of little consequence in evaluating a target to be attacked with some munitions. However, precipitation and wind are of particular importance, for example, in evaluating a target to be attacked with DPICM or APAM. • Commander's criteria. All phases of target analysis are conducted within constraints established by the commander. In determining the precedence for attacking a target, primary consideration should be given to the commander's target priorities. On the basis of ammunition constraints, a commander will also specify the type of effects desired against specific target sets. The three target effects categories are suppression, neutralization, and destruction.
MOST SUITABLE AMMUNITION AND WEAPONS 5-47. When an FDO decides to attack a target, selection of a weapon-ammunition combination that can achieve the desired effect must incur a minimum expenditure of available ammunition.
Ammunition 5-48. The following are considerations in determining the most suitable ammunition: • Type and quantity available. The nature of the target, its surroundings, and the desired effects dictate the type and amount of ammunition to be used. • Troop safety. The FDO must ensure that fires do not endanger friendly troops, equipment, and facilities. • Residual effects. Residual effects from special ammunition may influence whether a friendly unit can occupy an area. Conditions may be hazardous for supported troops occupying an area immediately after an attack with certain munitions. • Effectiveness. The FDO must ensure that maximum effectiveness is attained from every mission fired. To match the optimum ammunition type to a target, the FDO must know what damage the ammunition can produce and the damage required to defeat a target.
Weapons 5-49. The following are considerations in determining the most suitable weapons: • System response time. An FDO must ascertain the urgency of each fire mission and be aware of the status of each launcher. • Predicted fire capability. The FDO must know the current survey and meteorological status of all firing units under his control.
5-10
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
METHOD OF ATTACK 5-50. The FDO must select a method of attack that ensures target area coverage and desired target effects: • Aiming points. Normally, the size of the area to be attacked depends on the size of the target or the size of the area in which the target is known or suspected to be located. • Density and duration of fires. Intense fires of short duration generally produce the best effects on a target.
METHOD OF CONTROL 5-51. The battery AFATDS uses the following methods of control: • Fire when ready (FWR). • At my command (AMC). • On call (ONC). Must be changed to another method before execution. • Time on target (TOT). Uses a time for effects on target. • Timed when ready (TWR). • Timed time on target (TTT).
Fire When Ready 5-52. The FWR method of control allows the operator to arm and fire the weapons at his own discretion once the rocket launcher is aimed. The rocket launcher is considered aimed when the launcher is within +/3 mils of the commanded aimpoint and the rate of rocket launcher movement is less than 20 mils a second.
At My Command 5-53. The AMC method of control provides the battery FDC with the decision of when to fire the munitions. The AMC allows for the automatic execution of the fire mission up to achieving aimpoint. Once aim-point is reached, the FCS transmits a ready to fire message to FDC and awaits reception of the fire command before continuing. At the appropriate time, FDC transmits an amended call for fire (CFF) containing the fire command. Upon reception of the amended CFF, the FCS prompts the operator to ARM WEAPONS and then FIRE WEAPONS. The fire command may be overridden by placing the arm/safe switch to the ARM position once the ready to fire message has been transmitted.
On Call 5-54. The ONC method of control initially places the FM into inactive target list, this must be amended before sent to the LCHR. The LCHR may also manually enter in an ONC into the LCFCP. The ONC fire mission begins execution when the launcher receives an amended CFF changing this method of control. The fire mission then begins execution under the amended method of control. The FCS operator can manually execute the ONC mission by pressing the EXECUTE function key in the fire mission option screen. If manually executed, the ONC method of control executes the same as an AMC.
Time on Target 5-55. The TOT method of control is used to deliver munitions onto a target at a specific time. The launcher has 2 countdown clocks to inform the operator when to park and press the launcher lay (LCHR LAY) function key, and when to activate the arm and fire switches. The 2 clocks are based on a single TOT time of day entry. The first clock (CNTDN = NO LATER THAN FOR LCHR LAY) notifies the operator of the latest time the launcher should be parked, and the LCHR LAY key is pressed. This time is equal to the TOT time of day entry minus the current system time, any weapon processing time, nominal launcher module (LM) movement time, the estimated flight time of the munitions, and 20 additional seconds. The countdown clock is updated every second until the LCHR LAY function key is pressed. If the clock reaches 0, it remains at 0 until the LCHR LAY key is pressed. Once the LCHR LAY key is pressed, a second clock (CNTDN = NO EARLIER THAN FOR FIRING) is displayed that notifies the operator when to activate the fire switch. The time displayed on the second countdown clock is calculated by subtracting
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-11
Chapter 5
the current system time and actual flight time of the rockets from the TOT time. When the fire switch is activated at a countdown clock time of zero seconds, the munitions will arrive on the target at the TOT time.
Timed When Ready 5-56. The TWR is a controlled FWR mission that has a no-later-than (NLT) time that the launcher should be parked and the LCHR LAY function key pressed. Also, a NET and NLT firing clock is provided to inform the operator when the FCS allows the arming and firing of the munitions. The operator is allowed to fire the munitions when the launcher is aimed and the current time of day is between the 2 time-of-day entries.
Timed Time on Target 5-57. The TTT is a modified TOT method of control. The time the weapons are to arrive on target for a TTT is within a window determined by the 2 time-of-day entries that were entered into the FCS.
PREDICTING WEAPON EFFECTS 5-58. One of the most important steps in performing a target analysis is determining the number and type of rounds required to produce the desired effects on a target. (Refer to the joint munitions effectiveness manuals for surface-to-surface weapons [JMEM/SS/JWES].)
MLRS RISK ESTIMATE DISTANCES 5-59. In close air support, artillery, mortars, and naval gunfire support fires, the term “danger close” is included in the method of engagement segment of a call for fire to indicate that friendly forces are within close proximity of the target. The close proximity distance is determined by the weapon and ammunition fired. The term “danger close” is used when there are friendly troops or positions within a prescribed distance of the target. This is simply a warning, not a restriction, to both the force commander and the FDC to take proper precautions. 5-60. Risk estimate distances allow commanders and FSCOORDs to estimate risk in terms of the probability of friendly causalities that may result from employing weapons against the enemy. Risk estimate distances are defined as the distance, in meters, from the intended point of impact at which a specific degree of vulnerability will not be exceeded. Actual classified risk estimate distances are determined by using the classified joint munitions effectiveness manual surface-to-surface weapons effectiveness systems (JWES) CD (FM 101-63-1-CD). 5-61. Table 5-5 provides unclassified risk estimate data for the currently fielded MLRS munitions. These distances will be used for training only. The data are based on an assumed location error, posture of the friendly troops concerned, and quantity of munitions fired. The range from the MLRS launcher to the target and the munitions type characterize the information presented. Commanders at all levels must determine the risk they are willing to accept for a particular mission or phase of a battle. This risk is specifically defined as the probability of incapacitation (PI) of a soldier. The 1/100 PI value can be interpreted as being less than, or equal to, 1 chance in 1 hundred. Note: Do not fire DPICM rockets when friendly forces are located beyond the target along the launcher-target line, as rocket debris will extend beyond the target area.
5-12
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
Table 5-5. MLRS Risk Estimate Distances (Training Only) Risk-Estimate Distance (Meters) System
Description
M26 M26A2 M39 ATACMS M39A1 M48 MLRS
1/100 PI
1/1,000 PI
1/10,000 PI
1/3 2/3 Max 1/3 2/3 Max 1/3 2/3 Max Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range
450 550 2,000 1,000 500
700 900 2,000 1,000 500
1,250 1,550 2,000 1,000 500
550 650 2,000 1,000 500
900 1,150 2,000 1,000 500
1,700 2,050 2,000 1,000 500
650 750 2,000 1,000 500
1,100 1,350 2,000 1,000 500
2,100 2,550 2,000 1,000 500
TECHNICAL FIRE DIRECTION 5-62. Technical fire direction is the process of converting weapon and ammunition characteristics, weapon and target locations, and meteorological information to firing data.
SECTION IV – AUTOMATED MISSION PROCESSING 5-63. MLRS battalions can expect to receive orders to fire from many varied sources. The automated AFATDS, FCS, and devices provide the backbone for processing orders to fire for the MLRS battalion. The battalion uses the AFATDS in mission processing. Fire mission source is not particularly important to the overall conduct of the fire mission execution process for automated processing of missions. It does have some significance to the tactical conduct of the mission in terms of estimates of normal expected TLE for ammunition selection and effects calculation. The following criteria are important to the outcome of the automated processes: • Target type. • Point of entry into the munition and fire unit selection process (node/system). • Linkage to the shooter. • Method of control. • Whether a munition has been specified. 5-64. The AFATDS perform tactical fire direction based on the MLRS platoon centers reported by the battery. Generally, the battery is the highest echelon tracking individual launcher status. 5-65. At a minimum, the battery maintains the following launcher conditions and states: • Activity. • Single busy (1 fire mission assigned and active). • Double busy (2 missions assigned and active). • Priority busy (1 or 2 highest priority missions). • Not busy. • Not moving. • Launcher operational status (OPER/INOP). • Reason. • Duration. • Location information. • Ammunition status and availability. 5-66. Launcher status reports are consolidated into platoon aggregates and reported to the battalion and subsequently the FIB and/or corps, as appropriate, according to a predetermined timetable. Because the FIB and/or corps AFATDS generally has the least current information concerning launcher status, it is possible
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-13
Chapter 5
that missions may be assigned to platoons that cannot comply. This should be reported as soon as possible because airspace coordination may require adjustment if alternative units are selected to fire the missions. Airspace coordination is normally conducted at the corps or JTF level. 5-67. Once the FDO determines the exact unit to fire, the mission(s) is transmitted to the designated battery. The battery then transmits the mission(s) to the designated launcher(s), when the time to fire becomes 30 minutes or less. The launcher(s) will receive the missions, compute the technical solution, and fire the mission(s) using the method of control specified in the mission. 5-68. Fire mission processing at MLRS battalion and battery FDCs treats all munitions in the same manner. At a minimum, an ammunition and fire unit message must be received and executed so the software can recognize the munition J-code in the CFF message. If effects processing is desired, entry of carrier delivery errors and effects data are required; otherwise, only volleys missions will be processed. When the fire mission is received at the battalion, the FDC will perform the tactical processing and (if applicable) effects processing. It will then format another call for fire for transmission to the battery. The battalion FDC will select the platoon to fire, if it has not been selected; otherwise, it will validate the AFATDS selection. 5-69. At the battery level, the FDC will perform the tactical functions appropriate to the battery echelon, select the launcher or launchers to fire, and generate a separate call for fire to each selected launcher. 5-70. Technical fire direction occurs at the launcher. The appropriate weapon application software and ballistics data must be resident on the launcher to fire a specific munition successfully. (See appendix I for ballistic algorithm tables.)
AUTOMATED TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION 5-71. The FDC computer executes fire missions by establishing and updating relevant information. This function is graphically depicted in figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3. Fire Mission Execution
5-14
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
TARGET ANALYSIS 5-72. Upon receipt of a fire mission message, the computer screens the target to determine the requirements for target analysis. The computer analyzes the target using the following information to determine its placement in the commander's criteria and to specify priority or non-priority handling: • Type/subtype/element. • Location. • Strength. • Behavior. • Permanence and age.
WEAPON (MUNITIONS/SUB MUNITIONS) SELECTION 5-73. Targets/missions received from a higher echelon computer that specify a weapon to be employed are evaluated. Although subordinate FDCs have the capability to change the weapon type, authorization to modify missions directed by a higher echelon computer must be coordinated. If the FDC is authorized to change the weapon directed, it must be done manually. 5-74. If ATACMS or Guided Unitary is selected, the AFATDS that performs the initial fire mission processing creates platoon airspace hazard (PAH) and target airspace hazard (TAH) geometries.
Platoon Air Hazard Message 5-75. When the AFATDS processes an AFOM fire mission or guided mission, it generates a PAH message. The message describes the aircraft danger area around the launcher selected to fire as the PAH. The area is defined by 2 grids on the ground and a width giving the PAH 4 grids on the ground (depicted in figure 5-4 by the points 1, 2, 3, and 4) and an altitude (depicted in figure 5-4 as ZALT). This area is used to warn all flight operations and to gain clearance to fly through the airspace. If more than 1 LCHR is required to fire the mission, separate messages are displayed for each LCHR. 5-76. The platoon air hazard message is munition specific. It is generated only for those LCHR the computer has listed as having the munition. If a unit to fire in effect (UFFE) was specified in the fire mission message, that UFFE is used. If a UFFE was not specified, the computer provides the best solution based on available information. The operator can enter the XDIST value and an effective date-time group (DTG) indicating when the platoon air hazard area is valid. 5-77. The PAH may be passed to other organizations as a restricted operations zone (ROZ) also known as a restricted operations area. A ROZ is a volume of space that the Air Force often uses to restrict airspace. The same 4 points (1, 2, 3, and 4 in figure 5-4) and altitude define the ROZ. The term restricted operations zone is being replaced by restricted operations area but the former term may still be encountered.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-15
Chapter 5
Figure 5-4. AFOM Platoon Air Hazard Area
5-16
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
Target Air Hazard Message 5-78. The TAH message describes the TAH area where the missile will dispense the submunitions. Like the platoon air hazard message, it is used to warn all flight operations and to gain airspace clearance. The platoon air hazard message is generated when an AFOM fire mission is processed. The Block I and 1A target air hazard message defines 4 points on the ground around the target. The size of the hazard depends on the range to the target. The ZALT defines the height of the airspace hazard based on the target center and munitions’ burst point. Figure 5-5 depicts the default Block I and 1A target air hazard airspace (ZALT 1,500 meters or less). The computer alerts the operator when the target air hazard airspace is other than the default (when ZALT exceeds 1,500 meters). The operator entries are limited to defining the effective DTG of the message.
Figure 5-5. Default Block I and 1A Target Air Hazard Area 5-79. Upon receipt of the Mission Fired Report MFR from the fire unit, the AFATDS will generate a mission fired report (MFR) and forward it through the mission chain. An MFR or DENY message will purge the PAH and TAH geometries.
BATTLEFIELD GEOMETRY VALIDATION 5-80. The FDC computer validates that the fire mission does not violate any FSCM or downrange mask restrictions. FSCM violations will be presented to the operator in the form of a warning message, but the
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-17
Chapter 5
computer can continue to process the fire mission. Downrange mask violations will be presented in the form of an error message and will prevent the operator from continuing the mission. 5-81. The fire mission support function establishes or updates the map modification, geometry, ammunition effects, and meteorological databases to enhance tactical fire control. This function is depicted in figure 5-6.
Figure 5-6. Fire Mission Support Function 5-82. Coordinate conversion includes the following: • Zone-to-zone transformation. • Zone-to-zone across grid zones. • Spheroid conversion. • Datum conversion. • Geodetic/ Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM). 5-83. Battlefield geometry maintenance— • Overwrites duplicate geometry features. • Reports overlap of SPRT;ZNE messages.
FIRE UNIT SELECTION 5-84. Fire unit selection in the FDC computer is based on the following: • Availability—no more than the allowable number of fire missions at each launcher. • Appropriate munitions onboard or at next reload point. • Within range of selected munitions. • No exclusions. • Able to meet all time restrictions.
5-18
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
METHOD OF ATTACK/EFFECTS ANALYSIS Volleys-Type Target 5-85. If the target is designated as a volleys type, all rockets are normally aimed at the center of the target, unless the size or shape is large and specified. If the number of rockets to be fired at the 1 aim-point is entered in the volleys field of the message, that number of rockets is fired at the target center. If there is no entry, a default value of 6 rockets is used.
Effects-Type Target 5-86. If the target is designated as an effects-type target, the AFATDS may generate multiple aim-points. The computer performs effects calculations and determines the expected effects for each target selected for engagement on the basis of weapon performance, capability characteristics, and target degree of protection. Other processes involved with effects-type targets include: • The target type is checked to be sure it is a legal effects type. If it is not, a warning message is displayed. • The target dimensions are checked to verify that they are within the size limits for MLRS processing. If they are not, the computer stops processing and the mission is rejected and redisplayed for transmission back to the higher headquarters. • The computer designates 1 to 6 aim-points for an effects target. The number of aim-points for an effects-type target and the number of rockets to be fired at each aim-point depend on the following: • Desired effects (for effects-type target only). • Dimensions of the target. • Range to target from the launcher. • Lethal area of submunitions in relation to target type. • Disposition of enemy personnel in the target area. • The computer rejects the fire mission request when the percentage of effects requested cannot be achieved and/or the solution indicates more than the maximum number of rounds to fire (for an effects-type target only). • The number of aim-points (aim-point easting and northing offset from target center) and number of rockets required for each aim-point are temporarily stored for use by the fire unit selection routing.
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manuals 5-87. Effectiveness tables published in JMEM/SS provide guidance for determining the expected fraction of casualties to personnel targets or damage to materiel targets. JMEMs for surface-to-surface weapons are published as field manuals. The basic data for these manuals were obtained from test firings, actual combat performance, and mathematical modeling. Using JMEMs to determine attack data requires considerable time. Because of time constraints, use of JMEMs at battalion and battery FDC levels for engaging targets of opportunity is not recommended. The effects data included in these manuals incorporate reliability, delivery accuracy, and munitions lethality against a representative spectrum of targets. The computational assumptions, defeat criteria, and instructions for use are included in each manual. Note: There is no assurance that the expected fraction of damage or casualties will be provided by any number of volleys in a given situation. Although not precisely within the mathematical definition, the method of averaging data used for the tables will result in less damage being realized for approximately 50 percent of the rounds and, conversely, greater damage for the other 50 percent of the rounds.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-19
Chapter 5
COMMANDER'S CRITERIA 5-88. The key to exploiting automated processing is incorporating the commander's guidance into the computer's database. The commander influences tactical fire control solutions by establishing the commander's intent, which is used to develop the commander's criteria for engaging targets. These criteria guide the selection of units to fire, munitions, and volume of fire for each mission. The AFATDS, based on a portion of the commander's criteria, selects targets for MLRS engagement. It helps in the fire planning, collation of intelligence, and tactical fire control (TFC) for MLRS. The commander's criteria should be entered into AFATDS before the fighting begins. When they have been entered, the computer will automatically execute the criteria without delaying fire mission processing. 5-89. Commander's criteria are established and updated as the situation changes. They may be overridden manually when a situation warrants. As circumstances and SOP dictate, the battalion operations officer, battery operations officer, and/or fire direction personnel can override the commander's modifications on a mission-to-mission basis. A specific request for fire overrides the commander's criteria. Extreme care must be used in modifying the execution of the commander's criteria, because their effect on the AFATDS solutions influences the outcome of the battle. The parameters involved in establishing the commander's criteria are discussed below. 5-90. The supported force commander's concept for fires is used to develop engagement criteria. When given an R mission, the MLRS unit will use the criteria of the reinforced unit supported maneuver force. When assigned a GSR or GS mission, the MLRS unit will use the criteria of the force headquarters. 5-91. Commanders can override the attack criteria for each target type and can specify an SVF for an effects target. However, they cannot specify desired effects for a volleys target. For a volleys target, the SVF works with the volleys size factor to generate the computer recommendation for the total number of volleys to fire on the target.
Munition Selection Matrix 5-92. Table 5-6 gives the fire planner a matrix for determining the best MLRS munition with which to defeat a target. For a complete listing see TB-11-7025-354-10-3 Table 5-6. Ammunition Selection Matrix Range (km)
Target Types
Payload (Submunitions)
Projectiles Per Pod
M26 Rocket
Personnel, light armor, soft vehicles (stationary)
10-32.5
644 M77
6
M26A2 Extended Range Rocket
Personnel, light armor, soft vehicles (stationary)
13-45
518 M77
6
M30 GMLRS
Personnel, and/or light materiel (stationary)
15-70
404 M77
6
M31 Guided Unitary
Personnel, and/or light materiel (stationary)
15-70
1
6
M39 ATACMS Block I
Personnel, and/or light materiel (stationary)
25-165
950 M74
M39A1 ATACMS Block IA
Personnel, and/or light materiel (stationary)
70-300
300 M74
1
M39A3 ATACMS Block II
C2 nodes, log sites, SRBMs, ACV assembly areas (stationary) or SRBMs, MRLs, SP artillery, ACV formations (moving)
35-145
13 BAT
1
M48/M57 ATACMS
Personnel, and/or light
70-270+_
1
1
5-20
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
Table 5-6. Ammunition Selection Matrix Range (km)
Target Types
Quick Reaction Unitary
Payload (Submunitions)
Projectiles Per Pod
materiel
Legend ACV = armored combat vehicle C2 = command and control MRL = multiple rocket launcher
SP = self-propelled SRBM = short range ballistic missile
MLRS Size 5-93. If the AFATDS AFU file contains MLRS fire units, the computer considers those units first to engage a target when the target radius exceeds the size entered in the MLRS size (MLRSIZ) modification.
FIRE MISSION INTERVENTION POINTS 5-94. Another powerful capability AFATDS offers is the ability to eliminate the traditional mission delays associated with processing fire missions through multiple layers of fire support coordination. Not every mission needs to stop at every fire support node in the mission thread (digital route). See paragraph 4-41 for the operational implications of this capability.
FIRE MISSION CYCLE 5-95. The BOC processes fire missions for the MLRS firing battery. Mission assignments are based on the following information: • Grid locations of FPs. • Requested FP and RL employment sequence. • Number and type of rockets or missiles currently onboard each launcher and on HEMTTHEMATs or RSV-RST in the platoon OPAREA. • Downrange mask. • Launcher status and locations. • FSCMs. 5-96. This information is all part of the FDC database for the battery. The AFATDS then selects the launcher to respond, the number and type of munitions to fire, the number and dispersion of aimpoints, and the method of fire. The fire mission is then passed directly to the launcher or using the platoon, the POC monitors the fire missions. If the launcher cannot communicate digitally with the BOC, the platoon can be used to relay fire missions. At a minimum, both the BOC and POC record the mission by using DA Form 7232-R (see example, figure 5-7) and plot the target on the firing capabilities map. The completed DA Form 7232-R should be retained for 1 year.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-21
Chapter 5
Figure 5-7. DA Form 7232-R (Example) 5-97. Upon receipt of a fire mission, the launcher FCS conducts a consistency check of the fire mission data to ensure that the launcher can fire the mission, that it has the correct munitions loaded, and that the target is in range. If the launcher can fire, a WILL COMPLY (WILCO) message is generated to be sent to the battery FDC. 5-98. The section chief should have previously inspected the FP for any immediate mask (within 2,000 meters). If one is apparent, the mask is measured with the M2 compass to determine if it should be entered in the FCS. The mask should be entered if it measures 100 mils or greater. If the launcher cannot fire over the mask, it must be repositioned. 5-99. If an immediate mask is not a problem, the launcher moves to the designated FP and orients on the selected parking heading. The crew lays the LM, arms the system, fires the mission(s), stows the LM, and moves as directed. The launcher crew records the mission data by using DA Form 7233-R (MLRS Launcher Fire Mission Log) as shown in the example, figure 5-8. A reproducible copy of DA Form 7233-R is located at the back of this manual and is available on-line from the Army Publishing Directorate. The completed form should also be retained for 1 year.
Figure 5.8. DA Form 7233-R (Example)
5-22
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
Notes: For missile missions, the section chief records the serial number of the missile on 1 row of DA Form 7233-R and the firing data for that missile on the next available row. The section chief can pre-record this information, allowing for entry of firing data on the next available lines when reloading. If a munition malfunctions, the section chief must record the date, time, prompts displayed, and, as necessary, a narrative explaining the events surrounding the munition malfunction. The section chief can use as many lines as needed on either the front of the form or the back of the form to record the necessary information. A launch pod container with an unserviceable munition should be marked in accordance with the unit tactical SOP and the procedures in the launcher technical manual.
AUTOMATED AFOM PROCESSING AFATDS 5-100. AFATDS provides decision aids and an information system for control, coordination, and synchronization. It is located at FA command posts from platoon to fires brigade and is employed in varying configurations at different OPFACs.
COMMANDER’S CRITERIA 5-101. Integrating the commander’s guidance into the AFATDS database is the key to exploiting AFATDS capabilities for ATACMS. Targeting guidance tells AFATDS which targets to process or deny. AFATDS automatically filters and screens mission requests and recommends denying those missions that do not meet the established commander’s guidance. It prioritizes multiple missions to ensure that the most important missions are processed first. It also checks incoming fire missions against fire support coordinating measures and unit zones of responsibility. If violations occur, AFATDS notifies the operator and electronically requests clearance from the unit that established the control measure. AFATDS then determines how to attack the target, applying guidance by system preference (FA preference, FA attack methods, mortar, naval gunfire, or air attack).
AFATDS FILTERING FUNCTION 5-102. Filters tell AFATDS what targets not to attack. One filter is target decay time, which defines how long a target type is suitable for engagement after it is acquired. This highlights for the commander those targets with short dwell times and prevents firing on targets that may have moved. 5-103. The target duplication filter allows fire supporters to specify the distance (in meters) that separates targets or similar targets to determine whether they are duplicates. This prevents different sensors or observers from firing separate missions on the same target. If 2 missions violate target duplication, AFATDS processes the first mission and recommends denial on the second. 5-104. The target build-up area filter allows the commander to specify the number of targets, within an area, that must be identified before engagement. This is particularly useful for counter fire elements that want to focus on developing a template for enemy area before attacking it. 5-105. The target exclusion filter (part of the TMM) allows the commander to specify targets he does not want fire support to consider for attack. 5-106. AFATDS TSS contains the same information normally used in a TSS matrix, including specifying the TLE for potential sensors. This filter, generally used for intelligence reports, specifies a report age to prevent firing on targets that are too old.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-23
Chapter 5
AFATDS SCREENING FUNCTION 5-107. After a target clears the filters, AFATDS screens the mission to assign a mission value. This focuses fires by ensuring that the most important targets are engaged first. In AFATDS, this screening guidance includes mission prioritization, the HVTL, and the TMM.
AFATDS MISSION PRIORITIZATION 5-108. AFATDS prioritizes missions by assigning each a “mission value” of 0 to 100 based on 4 weighted criteria to determine the overall mission value. The 4 criteria are— • On-call precedence allows the commander to decide that targets from the fire plan (stored in the on-call target list) have a higher priority than a target of opportunity. (A commander may not want targets of opportunity to disrupt the execution of preplanned, rehearsed targets in specific TAIs or engagement areas.) • Priority of fires enables the commander to establish a preference among a pool of potential sensors/observers. • If a target falls within a TAI, AFATDS will increase its mission value. • AFATDS can weight targets based on their relative importance to the force commander's mission. The target type value is identified in the HVTL and the TMM. 5-109. A commander can define the desired effects in the HVTL for each target category by specifying effects or any percentage of destruction from 0 percent to 100 percent. He also can assign a weighted value from 0 to 100 to each target category. 5-110. The HVTL is a starting point for the development of the HPTL and is a component of the TMM. HPTs are HVTs that friendly forces must attack to achieve success during friendly operations. The HPTL in the TMM applies additional guidance to weight the target types. 5-111. The TMM used in AFATDS provides the same information normally seen on an AGM. It separates HPT types from non-HPT types. A commander can define the effects for each HPT type or any percentage of destruction up to 100 percent. He can also weight the value of each HPT type from 0 to 100. This is a second target value (for HPTs only) that AFATDS uses to compute an overall mission value. 5-112. As a result of mission prioritization, each target is assigned a mission value. Cutoff values set the minimum thresholds that targets must attain to be considered for attack by certain fire support assets. The commander assigns these to tell AFATDS which weapon systems to consider (and not to consider) as attack options for certain targets. 5-113. In the TMM, the commander can specify which target types require TDA or should not be fired on but rather handed off to the IEW officer for exploitation. The commander can specify when targets will be engaged as “acquired,” “immediate,” or “planned.” The commander also can exclude target types in the TMM display from consideration for attack by fire support assets.
FIRE MISSION EXECUTION INITIATING AFOM FIRE MISSIONS 5-114. AFOM fire missions can be initiated by any agency capable of requesting fire. Agencies supported by digital communications systems may not be able to request the AFOM automatically. However, they can compose and send a plain text message requesting fires. Fire mission source is important for estimated TLE (when TLE is not reported), munition selection, and effects calculation. Automated processing depends on: • Target type. • Point of entry into the fire unit selection process (node/system). • Shooter linkage or communications.
5-24
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
• •
Method of control. Specified munition (if any).
5-115. Once an AFOM variant has been selected (usually at the corps/division FC), a fire mission message format (for example, fire mission; CFF) is generated. It contains a minimum of a weapon type (or J-code) and a designated unit to fire in effect. It is then transmitted to the selected battalion FDC for execution. The battalion FDC transmits the fire mission to a battery FDC where launchers are selected from the designated platoons.
AUTOMATIC PROCESSING 5-116. To ensure the fastest possible reaction, the subordinate echelon FDC computers should be set up to perform automatic processing of missions. This procedure streamlines the mission processing during nonroutine operations or when responsiveness to time critical targets is required. When the FDC computer is set up to automatically process missions, it performs all necessary processing to ensure receipt of a valid message. If the message passes the consistency checks and the UFFE is available, the FDC computer relays the message to the next subordinate echelon. The battery FDC computer— • Performs consistency checks based on commander’s guidance/operator inputs. • Validates the selected UFFE (no effects processing will be performed). • Assigns launcher(s) to fire from within the designated UFFE. • Prepares call for fire message for transmission to launcher(s).
INTERVENTION POINTS 5-117. AFATDS allows the mission to be processed automatically or lets operators view and make decisions on every fire mission they receive. It also permits a mix; certain types of missions will be processed automatically while the operator handles only specified types of missions. The intervention point window provides the operator the target number, mission value, mission precedence, and a list of filter guidance and whether they passed or not. All attack assets capable and available to shoot the mission with the required munitions are also listed. 5-118. The operator can set up intervention rules that allow given target conditions to cause an intervention point to be generated when the mission is processed. However, AFOM missions are always presented at an intervention point, regardless of operator criteria. The operator can accept, reject, or change the mission. 5-119. AFATDS presents all attack options for the operator to review. Non-capable attack options will have a reason stated. This provides the operator enough information to understand the problem and, perhaps, fix it.
PLANNED MISSIONS 5-120. The AFOM is most effective when used on planned targets. Attack of planned targets permits refinement of target locations (or predicted locations for moving targets) to required (or better) accuracy and description and for posturing missiles and launchers. Planned fires typically use the following methods of control: AMC, TOT, ONC, TWR, FWR, and TTT. 5-121. Planned fires may be scheduled missions that are executed according to a predetermined time schedule or sequence of events or on call. Scheduled missions are planned and sent to the lowest command and control echelon for execution at the appropriate time. This allows mission execution on receipt of the engagement trigger event or scheduled time to fire. AFOM missions are scheduled in the same manner as rocket missions. On-call missions are like scheduled missions because they are sent to the lowest command and control echelon, but the time of execution is unknown. 5-122. AMC missions are planned missions for which the time of execution depends on the occurrence of a trigger event or confirmation of target location or activity. The FDC can use these missions when the commander desires rapid attack of a target, or when attack is keyed to other significant events on the battlefield. When the launcher receives this type of AMC mission, it moves to a firing point (if in hide
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-25
Chapter 5
position) and elevates to aim-point. The launcher reports “READY” to the controlling FDC and awaits the command to fire.
UNPLANNED MISSIONS 5-123. The AFOM may also be fired against targets of opportunity. All available communications means are used in mission processing. Prior coordination among the various agencies may reduce the processing time associated with targets of opportunity. For selected targets or areas of interest, more direct links may be established between higher and lower agencies to reduce processing time. Those nodes left out of the process will be provided information and status as the mission progresses.
AFATDS MISSION PROCESSING FOR AFOM 5-124. When a fire mission is initiated, AFATDS assigns it a target number (if this has not already occurred) and calculates its mission value. AFATDS then goes through a series of “filter” checks (for example, duplication, TSS) to see if it qualifies as a fire mission. If it passes these filters, a set of munitions that could be used to shoot the mission will be generated from the guidance as well as from the munitions requested in the call for fire. AFATDS generates a list of units that are both capable and available, based on the OPFAC unit organization (from both command and supported HQs that the operator entered in the current database) as well as observer specified and guidance specified entries. AFATDS then matches munitions with available units to see which units can actually shoot the mission given the munition requirements. This set is ordered (sorted) such that the best choice units are listed first. AFATDS will always present the number 1 recommended solution to the operator for AFOM missions. 5-125. When a mission is in progress, it is said to be active. While active, a target appears yellow on the AFATDS screen and is located on the active target list. A number of messages can be initiated while a target is on the list. However, the AFATDS operator should not interrupt subsequent messages the fire mission initiator sends, except in extreme circumstances. The operator can trace status or missions on the active target list. This permits the operator to quickly gain a record of the mission history as well as its current status at other OPFACs. 5-126. When a mission is completed and an end of mission (EOM) or MFR is received, the target is processed to the inactive target list. The inactive target list can be purged to rid the system of all old missions.
TECHNIQUES TO REDUCE MISSION TIMELINES Automatic Processing 5-127. The commander should always direct automatic processing at intermediate nodes to attack AFOM targets. Automatic processing allows the mission to pass through echelons without operator activity. However, the battalion must ensure that the following information is kept updated: whether the designated firing platoon is available, within range of the target, and loaded with the right munitions. The battery FDC has the additional burden of keeping the firing point database current. This is the primary cause of automatic processing failure.
Stay Hot, Shoot Fast 5-128. The commander should strongly consider establishing a quick fire channel or mandating decentralized execution for time-sensitive targets. This reduces the mission execution response time. Extremely time-sensitive targets designated for attack may necessitate a technique often called "stay hot, shoot fast(SHSF)." 5-129. Most units will describe when to use the stay hot, shoot fast technique and the procedures for this technique in their TSOP. The following is an example. AFATDS operator sets up the User Preferences for Mission Processing in the (SHSF) tab. Tolerance Zone 1 is for no adjustment when mission is received, Tolerance Zone 2 is when SHSF mission comes in and adjustments are sent to the launcher for amended grid. Minimum Distance is for minimum distance between an ATI target location and ATI impact predicts
5-26
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
location. The launcher is placed on a firing point and laid, LM elevated, on a target grid of an expected enemy target. The method of control at the AFATDS is a Warning Order but sent to the launcher as an AMC. The launcher will complete the mission sequence up to the point of achieving aim-point and then report ready status. When an enemy target is acquired firing from the expected grid, the BOC uses its AFATDS to send a fire order to the launcher(s) to engage the preplanned target(s). On receipt of an amended fire mission changing the method of control to FWR (or TOT), the launcher completes the mission as directed when the target falls in tolerances zone 1. Often, the preplanned or expected target location differs slightly from the actual target location. If this occurs, instead of firing the preplanned target grid, the fire mission is shifted, or amended, to the new target grid acquired by friendly force systems. The launcher accepts amended missions up to 200 mils on either side of the direction of fire to the preplanned target for a total shift fan of 400 mils. 5-130. The BOC can plot the amendment fan, or shift zone, on its operations map for all launchers laid on a potential or preplanned target. This is done by plotting the launcher location and target location, drawing the azimuth to the target, and then plotting azimuths 200 mils left and right of the azimuth to the target. When the minimum and maximum ranges are added to this fan, the result is a shift zone where the launcher can engage targets using amended mission procedures. 5-131. When an acquisition source sends the target location to the BOC, fire direction personnel determine which launcher or launchers can engage the target and send an amended CFF to the unit(s) to fire. 5-132. There are distinct challenges to an MLRS unit using stay hot, shoot fast tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP). First, the BOC must closely monitor the status of launchers and the database associated with them. The stay hot, shoot fast procedures require the precise location and status of each launcher to work properly. Any error that goes undetected until the fire mission is processed simply adds more time to correct the error and execute the mission when we can least afford the time to do so. 5-133. Secondly, stay hot, shoot fast requires clear digital communications from the BOC to launcher. First time acknowledgement of messages is crucial. Non-acknowledgements add more time to the processing. Thirdly, the launcher and fire direction crews must be well-rehearsed. 5-134. The launcher must park on, or as close to, the park heading as possible. Any mils sacrificed by not parking on the parking heading may take mils away from the shift fan and cause the launcher to reject the mission. 5-135. Last, by selecting well-concealed FPs nestled in hillside cuts, valleys, or streambeds, units can minimize vulnerability to observation. Additionally, after each fire mission, the launcher should scoot to another FP and lay on the next preplanned target if required.
SENSOR-TO-SHOOTER CONFIGURATIONS 5-136. Various sensor-to-shooter configurations are available to support the commander's needs, depending on the missions to be accomplished and level of control required: • Sensor->Corps FC->Bde->Bn->Btry->Launcher (Centralized Control) • Sensor->Corps FC->Bn->Btry->Launcher (Centralized Control) • Sensor->Bde->Bn->Btry->Launcher (Decentralized Execution) • Sensor->Corps FC->Btry->Launcher (Centralized Control) (preferred method for all AFOM missions) • Sensor->Corps FC->Plt->Launcher (Centralized Execution) (preferred method for all AFOM missions) • Sensor->Bn->Btry->Launcher (Decentralized Execution). 5-137. In all cases, the commander must decide whether less control or fewer intervening processors is worth the added responsiveness. (See FM 6-20-40 [to be replaced by FM 3-09.42] for a complete discussion of sensor-to-shooter operations.)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-27
Chapter 5
LOADABLE MUNITION MODULE 5-138. The AFOM weapon-specific loadable munition module (LMM) software incorporates AFOM selection, effects processing, and airspace coordination. The LMM software is unique to each AFOM. 5-139. The LMM software processing complies with the established attack guidance (commander’s criteria) in its database, and the message priority. The operating mode (fully automatic or manual) determines the amount of processing required. In the automatic processing mode, the FS computer checks message validity, the unit to fire, and ammunition availability. If it finds no exceptions, it enters the data and forwards the message to the next subordinate echelon. If it finds exceptions, it reassigns the mission if an alternate is available.
AFOM MISSION PROCESSING SUMMARY 5-140. The battalion and battery FDCs process AFOM missions the same way they do other missions (except for effects processing and airspace message generation). The FDC computer software has no default for the number of AFOM missiles to be fired on an aim-point. When the fire mission is received at battalion, the FDC performs the tactical processing and formats the call for fire for transmission to the battery. The battalion FDC uses the designated fire unit or selects the platoon to fire if it has not been selected. Otherwise, it validates the FC selection. 5-141. At the battery level, the FDC performs the tactical functions appropriate to the battery echelon, selects the launcher or launchers to fire, and generates a separate fire mission message format to each selected launcher. Basic fire mission processing at the launcher requires no special activities.
FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING FUNCTION 5-142. AFATDS provides the functional processes for Fire Support (FS) and Field Artillery (FA) planning to support a maneuver course of action (MCOA). Plans for military operations often involve multiple phases in which changes in friendly unit command and control relationships and activities will occur in response to anticipated events. Fire support planning provides capabilities to describe and review, from a FS point of view, the support of the MCOA(s). MCOA(s) received for the maneuver operation will normally consist of the force commander’s plan for conducting the operation. This information may include the objectives, timing, type and quantity of assets to be used. Targets, guidance, geometries, and any special instructions unique to the operation. Maneuver information is entered into AFATDS for development into a FS plan. Up to three (3) separate plans may be compared at one time.
5-28
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
Figure 5-9. Fire Planning and Scheduling 5-143. In AFATDS a Fire Support (FS) Plan will always consist of one or more phases. Planned units, friendly, enemy situations, plan text, map mod, map setup, and guidance are established and maintained for each phase of a plan.
FIRE PLANS AND SCHEDULES 5-144. Fire plans and schedules of fires are processed on receipt. When the timetable for execution is known and within scope, allocations of available ammunition and fire units are made for the fire plan or scheduled targets. FDCs should know that this does not prevent execution of other missions using the allocated ammunition. If execution of all targets is not possible, an exception report will be prepared and presented for operator action and adjudication.
RESOURCE SCHEDULING 5-145. Resource scheduling is the process of pre-allocating fire unit and ammunition resources to expected mission loads in advance of execution time. This should occur as soon as projections can be made of friendly and enemy courses of action and expected resource demands by time period so battalion and battery level posturing and ammunition loading can be accomplished. Development of alternate courses of action and supporting plans typically occurs between 72 and 96 hours in advance of the intended operation. Consequently, this function provides scheduling of resources no earlier than 96 hours prior to execution. 5-146. Expected mission loads exceeding anticipated available resources are reported to the operator for exception resolution. At a minimum, the operator must report exceptions relating to— z Ammunition type. z Ammunition quantity. z Fire unit sufficiency (for example, “are there enough launchers?”) by specifying the time period for which resources are unavailable or insufficient (for example, “2/A/3/9 FA down for maintenance 0600-0700,” or “there are insufficient launchers available to cover target #AA0001 properly during time period X”). 5-147. The fire planner then accounts for resources that are unavailable for whatever reason. Fire missions included in this analysis are TOT, TWR, TTT and TTF (entered at LCHR only), or other scheduled targets.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-29
Chapter 5
AMC and WR mission firing times are undefined and consequently will not influence the analysis except by their impact on current resources.
AMMUNITION POSITIONING PLANNING 5-148. Ammunition positioning is closely related to the AFU functions and resource posturing. When performed properly, it involves the use of fire plans and schedules, resource scheduling, and contingency planning outputs combined with expected usage rates.
MLRS FIRE PLAN PROCESSING 5-149. On-call schedules for MLRS support should be requested no less than 30 minutes before desired fire support. This rule is based on the reaction time required by the MLRS FCS and the average fire mission cycle of 20 to 30 minutes. Receiving the fire mission, reloading, and moving to the firing point or hide area are included in the average fire mission cycle. 5-150. Depending on the time between missions in a single fire plan, launchers can fire, reload, and fire again. (A launcher may require 20 to 45 minutes to reload and be ready for another mission.) Depending on the number of rockets required for each mission, launchers could fire 1 mission, move to another FP, and fire again. In the case of a rapid fire plan and large fire volumes, no single launcher should be given more than 1 target per fire plan, for a maximum of 6 targets per battery. When the situation warrants, batteries can be given up to twelve targets per launcher. (This factor is based on the launcher capability to store twelve missions. Any number of targets over 72 would require processing by the Battery AFATDS during the execution portion of the fire plan.) Note: Firing multiple missions from a single launcher during a rapid schedule may require launchers to remain on the same FP for an extended time. During this exposure, launchers become extremely vulnerable to counter fire. 5-151. The total number of rockets in the plan should not exceed 72 (6 launchers x 12 rockets each). The number of rockets per target depends on target size and type. Schedules of fire must be coordinated with the operations officer so he can manage launcher posture and/or response time. The fire planner must have an accurate picture of launcher status. Because of maintenance, personnel, and other factors, a rule of thumb is to plan fires for no more than 6 launchers at 1 time. If a surge condition arises, the unit can be tasked to provide a higher number. If all available launchers fire on a schedule, temporary loss of an FS asset (20 to 45 minutes) can be expected while the launchers move to reload points, reload, and return to firing points. 5-152. In anticipation of future operations, the FC can transmit posture information directing the munitions to be available within a specified time frame. This posture information can be stored in the database at battalion, battery, and platoon.
REACTING TO FIRE PLAN CHANGES 5-153. The fire plan function, for all AFATDS-based systems, does not lend itself to change. If last minute changes are anticipated to planned targets, the FDC has several options based on anticipated reaction time to changes (see table 5-7).
RESOURCE LIMITATIONS 5-154. If the number of targets is excessive or the available launchers are limited, units can take advantage of the multiple fire mission sequence capability. The multiple fire mission sequence allows the launcher to fire 2 or more missions without stowing the launcher. If a battery, for example, received 8 targets to engage, it may commit less than 8 launchers. Initiating the multiple fire mission sequence requires the assignment of 2 targets to the same firing point identifier. When this occurs, the FCS recognizes it as a multiple fire mission. If the method of fire control is FWR, the launcher will automatically lay on and fire the second target without a second SAFE, ARM, or FIRE command. If
5-30
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Delivery of Fires
another method of fire control is specified for the second target, the FCS will lay on the second target, then prompt the crew to SAFE the rockets. The FCS will then prompt the crew to ARM and FIRE, in accordance with the specified method of control. Table 5-7. Fire Plan Change Reaction Times Anticipated Reaction Time
Method
30 minutes
Use the fire plan function and assign H-hour.
20-30 minutes
Use the fire plan function. Do not assign H-hour. Once the actual H-hour is identified, enter it and process.
10-20 minutes
Transmit each of the targets as AMC missions to the launchers. This requires them to move to the firing point and lay on the target. Once the TOT time is known, transmit an amended CFF.
5-10 minutes
Transmit each of the targets as AMC missions to the launchers. "Back-off" the highest time of flight and coordinate trigger points with the aviation unit (through the appropriate FC). When the aviators cross the trigger point, the FC sends the fire message.
Legend AMC = at my command CFF = call for fire FC = fires cell
TOT = time on target
MLRS Fires Battalion Sustainment Operations 5-155. The MLRS fires battalion must provide responsive, effective, and sustainable fires in a variety of operating environments across the full spectrum of operations. In its most comprehensive sense, fires battalion sustainment deals with the sustainment functions described in FM 4.0—supply and field services, transportation support, maintenance, health service support, human resource support, financial management operations, legal support, and religious support. The battalion is significantly assisted in these responsibilities by the brigade support battalion (BSB). The BSB is the core sustainment organization for the fires brigade (FIB). The BSB is organic to the FIB, and consists of functional and multifunctional companies assigned to provide support to the FIB. The BSB has forward support companies that are traditionally assigned, attached or under the OPCON of individual FIB battalions. The forward support company provides each FIB subordinate battalion commander with dedicated logistics assets organized specifically to meet his battalion’s requirements. The forward support company commander receives technical logistics oversight from the BSB commander. Because of their criticality and proximity to combat operations, medical platoons remain organic to FIB subordinate battalions. 5-156. The lead sustainment planner in the fires battalion is usually is the S-4, assisted by the S-1, the battalion surgeon, and forward support company commander. Representatives from these and other sections form a sustainment planning cell at the fires battalion main CP to ensure sustainment plans are fully integrated into all operations planning. The SOP should be the basis for sustainment operations with planning conducted to determine specific requirements and to prepare for contingencies. Battalion and battery orders should address only specific support matters for the operation and any deviations from SOP. 5-157. In MLRS fires battalions, sustainment assets are assigned to the forward support company, except for the medical platoon, which is assigned to the HHB. The focal point for sustainment support is at the battalion combat trains command post (CTCP). The CTCP, under the supervision of the battalion S-4, anticipates, requests, coordinates, and supervises execution of sustainment either by HHB or forward support company assets.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
5-31
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix A
Aerial Transport of MLRS Ammunition and Equipment AERIAL AMMUNITION RESUPPLY A-1. Ammunition resupply of MLRS units is a critical operation. Use of the CH-47D helicopter is 1 technique or capability available to support resupply of the 5,095-pound (2,311 kilograms) launch pod containers (LPC) or the 5,111-pound (2,318 kilogram) guided missile launch assemblies (GMLA). This appendix supplements the discussion of Class V operations in chapter 6. A-2. The CH-47D has a load-carrying capacity of 25,000 pounds (11,340 kilograms). Loads can be carried internally or externally by using tables of organization and equipment (TOE) equipment, except for required external load slings.
INTERNAL LOAD A-3. The CH-47D can carry up to 4 LPCs or GMLAs internally for a total of 24 rockets or 4 missiles. Atmospheric or weather conditions in the area will dictate the load-carrying capacity of the CH-47D.
Equipment A-4. The LPCs or GMLAs can be loaded using the following equipment: • CH-47D onboard winch. • 4 (1,000-pound [454-kilogram]) conveyor rollers, NSN 3910-0-903-1303. • Twelve sheets of ¾-inch (19-millimeter) plywood.
Concept A-5.
The LPCs or GMLAs can be loaded 2 at a time stacked on top of each other. They should be prepositioned (using the HEMTT crane) on top of conveyor rollers and 1 sheet of plywood. The onboard winch can be used to pull the load into the aircraft. Plywood shoring should be placed in the deck of the aircraft for the conveyor rollers to travel. The identical procedures are used to load the second 2 pods. All LPCs or GMLAs are tied down with standard 10,000-pound (4,536 kilograms) cargo straps.
Off-Loading A-6.
Four soldiers can push the load down the ramp and use the onboard winch to help brake the load.
Loading Considerations A-7.
The following should be considered: • On- or off-loading requires about 30 minutes. • A level landing zone is required to ensure that the plywood shoring remains level. • The winch should be hooked onto the aft end of the load to facilitate loading the second LPCs or GMLAs.
EXTERNAL LOAD A-8.
Current procedures permit up to 4 LPCs or GMLAs to be carried externally. Four 25,000-pound (11,340-kilogram) capacity slings are required. The front 2 are 10 feet (3 meters) long and the 2 in the
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
A-1
Appendix A
rear are 12 feet (4 meters) long. Although GMLAs may be carried externally, caution must be exercised because of the “no-drop tolerance restrictions.” Table A-1. Transportability by Aircraft Aircraft System/Missile
M270 Launcher M270A1 Launcher M142 Launcher Rocket Pod GMLA
C-130 0 0 1 4 pods 4 pods
C-17 2 2 3 16 pods 16 pods
C-5 3 3 4 22 pods 22 pods
A-9. The following manuals provide sling load rigging procedures for the certified MLRS loads in various configurations: • FM 10-450-3, Multiservice Helicopter Sling Load: Basic Operations and Equipment. • FM 10-450-4, Multiservice Helicopter Sling Load: Single-Point Load Rigging Procedures. • FM 10-450-5, Multiservice Helicopter Sling Load: Dual-Point Load Rigging Procedures.
A-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Aerial Transport of MLRS Ammunition and Equipment
Rigging Procedures for LPC or GMLA A-10. Applicability. The following items in Table A-2 are certified for all helicopters with suitable lift capacity by the US Army Soldier Systems Center: Table A-2. Launch Pod Container (LPC) with Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System (G-MLRS) Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly (GMLA) Pods with Army Tactical Missile System (ATACMS) Missiles, One Container Two Containers NOMENCLATURE MAX SLING SET LINK COUNT RECOMMENDED WEIGHT FRONT/REAR AIRSPEED (POUNDS) (KNOTS) 5,095 10K 3/3 90 Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets (with Six Rockets) Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles
5,111
10K
3/3
90
1. Materials. The following materials are required to rig • Hookup. The hookup team stands on top of the this load: pod. The static wand person discharges the static electricity with the static wand. The hookup person • Sling set (10,000-pound capacity). places the apex fitting onto the aircraft cargo hook. • Tape, adhesive, pressure-sensitive, 2- inch wide The hookup team then moves clear of the load but roll. remains close to the load as the helicopter removes • Cord, nylon, Type III, 550-pound breaking slack from the sling legs. When successful hookup strength. is assured, the hookup team quickly exits the area • Webbing, cotton, 1/4-inch, 80- pound breaking underneath the helicopter to the designated strength. rendezvous point. 2. Personnel. Two persons can prepare and rig this load in • Derigging. Derigging is the reverse of the 15 minutes. preparation and rigging procedures in steps 3. Procedures. The following procedures apply to this d (1) and d (2) load: • Preparation. Prepare the pod for travel in accordance with standard procedures. • Rigging. Rig the load according to the steps in figure (A-1) NOTE: The firing end is considered to be the front of the load.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
A-3
Appendix A
RIGGING STEPS for ONE LPC 1. Position apex fitting on top of the pod. Route outer sling 3. Loop the chain end of sling leg 3 through the left legs 1 and 2 to the front of the pod and inner sling legs 3 and rear lift provision. Place the correct link from Table A-3 4 to the rear. Sling legs 1 and 3 must be on the left side of the in the grab hook. Repeat with sling leg 4 on the right load. rear lift provision. 2. Loop the chain end of sling leg 1 through the left front lift provision. Place the correct link from Table A-3 in the grab hook. Repeat with sling leg 2 on the right front lift provision.
4. Cluster and tie or tape (breakaway technique) all sling legs together on top of the container to prevent entanglement during hookup and lift-off.
Figure A-1. Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles, One Container.
A-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Aerial Transport of MLRS Ammunition and Equipment
Rigging Procedures for Two Stacked LPC or GMLA Applicability. The following items in Table A-3 are certified for all helicopters with suitable lift capacity by the US Army Soldier Systems Center:
Table A-3. Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles, Two Containers NOMENCLATURE MAX SLING SET LINK COUNT RECOMMENDED WEIGHT FRONT/REAR AIRSPEED (POUNDS) (KNOTS) Launch Pod Container with Multiple 10,190 25K 3/3 90 Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets (with Six Rockets) Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles
10,222
1. Materials. The following materials are required to rig this load: • Sling set (25,000-pound capacity). • Tape, adhesive, pressure-sensitive, 2-inch wide roll. • Cord, nylon, Type III, 550-pound breaking strength. • Webbing, cotton, 1/4-inch, 80-pound breaking strength. • Felt sheet, cattle hair, Type IV, 1/2-inch or suitable substitute. • Tie-down strap, cargo, CGU-1/B (as required). 2. Personnel. Four persons can prepare and rig this load in 30 minutes. 3. Procedures. The following procedures apply to this load: • Prepare the pods for travel in accordance with standard procedures. • Stack the pods one on top of the other, with both pods facing the same direction. CAUTION Do not mix the LPCs and the GMLAs in the same load.
12 August 2008
25K
3/3
90
• Lash the stack of pods together using the CGU1/B tie-down straps. Two of the straps should run through both sets of lifting provisions on each end of the pods, to keep them aligned during flight. Evenly space the remaining two straps between the lifting provisions, running them around the pods.
Warning: DO NOT ROUTE THE STRAPS OVER THE ROCKET TUBES. Pad all straps in the area where they contact the edges of the pods. •
Rigging. Rig the load according to the steps in (Figure A-2)
NOTE: The firing end is considered the front of the load. • Hookup. The hookup team stands on top of the pods. The static wand person discharges the static electricity with the static wand. The hookup person places the apex fitting onto the aircraft cargo hook. The hookup team then moves clear of the load but remains close to the load as the helicopter removes slack from the sling legs. When successful hookup is assured, the hookup team quickly exits the area underneath the helicopter to the designated rendezvous point. • Derigging. Derigging is the reverse of the Preparation and rigging procedures in steps d (1) and d (2).
FM 3-09.60
A-5
Appendix A
RIGGING STEPS for TWO LPCs 1. Position apex fitting on top of the pods. Route 3. Loop the chain end of sling leg 3 through the left rear lift outer sling legs 1 and 2 to the front of the pods and provision on the top pod and through the rear lift provision on inner sling legs 3 and 4 to the rear. Sling legs 1 and the bottom pod. Thread it back through the rear lift provision on the top pod. Place the correct link from Table A-4 in the 3 must be on the left side of the load. grab hook. Repeat with sling leg 4 on the right rear lift 2. Loop the chain end of sling leg 1 through the left provision. front lift provision on the top pod and through the front lift provision on the bottom pod. Thread it 4. Cluster and tie or tape (breakaway technique) all sling legs back through the front lift provision on the top pod. together on top of the pod to prevent entanglement during Place the correct link from Table A-4 in the grab hookup and lift-off. hook. Repeat with sling leg 2 on the right front lift provision. Figure A-2 Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles, Two Containers.
A-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Aerial Transport of MLRS Ammunition and Equipment
Rigging Procedures for Four LPC or GMLA A-11. Applicability. The following items in (Table A-4) are certified for the helicopter(s) listed in the following table by the US Army Soldier Systems Center: Table A-4. Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles, Four Containers NOMENCLATURE MAX SLING SET LINK COUNT RECOMMENDE WEIGHT FRONT/REAR D (POUNDS) AIRSPEED (KNOTS) Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch 20,380 25K 3/3 90 Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets (with Six Rockets) Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with 20,444 25K 3/3 90 Army Tactical Missile System Missiles
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
A-7
Appendix A
1. Materials. The following materials are required to rig this load: • Sling set (25,000-pound capacity) (2 each). • Tape, adhesive, pressure-sensitive, 2-inch wide roll. • Cord, nylon, Type III, 550-pound breaking strength. • Webbing, cotton, 1/4-inch, 80-pound breaking strength. • Strap, cargo, tie down, CGU-1/B (16 each). • Lumber, 2 X 4 X 65-inches (4 each). • Nails, eight penny (as required). • Felt sheet, cattle hair, Type IV, 1/2-inch or suitable padding. • Crane or forklift (15,000-pound capacity or larger). 2. Personnel. Four persons can prepare and rig this load in 30 minutes. 3. Procedures. The following procedures apply to this load: • Preparation. Prepare the load using the following steps: • Prepare the pods for travel in accordance with standard procedures. • Prepare two pieces of dunnage to protect the pods by nailing two pieces of 2 X 4 X 65-inch lumber together, wide side to wide side. • Make two stacks of pods. Use the crane or forklift to stack one stack of pods on top of the other with the projectiles facing the same direction. Label the stacks #1 and #2 . CAUTION Do not mix the LPCs and the GMLAs in the same load. •
Lash stack #1 together using four tie down straps. Route a tie down strap through both sets of lifting provisions on each end of the pods. Evenly space two tie down straps between the lifting provisions
A-8
evenly space two tiedown straps between the lifting provisions.
Warning: Routing the straps around the pods. DO NOT ROUTE THE STRAPS OVER THE ROCKET TUBES. Pad the straps where they contact the edges of the EALP • Lash stack #2 using the above procedures for stack #1. • Position the two pieces of dunnage near the lifting provisions on each end of the pods. Secure the dunnage to the pods with Type III nylon cord. • Position stack #1 against stack #2 using the crane or forklift. Ensure the dunnage is between the loads. • Lash the top two pods together on each end. Connect two tie down straps together to form each lashing. • Lash the bottom two pods together on each end. Connect two tie down straps together to form each lashing. • Pad the straps where they contact the edges of the pods • Rigging. Rig the load according to the steps in Figure A-4. NOTE: The firing end is considered the front of the load. • Hookup. Two hookup teams stand on top of container. The static discharge person discharges the static electricity. The forward hookup person places apex fitting 1 onto the forward cargo hook. The aft hookup person places apex fitting 2 onto the aft cargo hook. The hookup teams then
carefully dismount the container and remain close to the load as the helicopter removes slack from the sling legs. When successful hookup is assured, the hookup teams quickly exit the area underneath the helicopter to the designated rendezvous point. • Derigging. Derigging is the reverse of the preparation and rigging procedures in steps d (1) and d (2).
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Aerial Transport of MLRS Ammunition and Equipment
RIGGING STEPS for Four LPCs 1. Position sling set number 1 on top of the forward 5. Loop the chain end of outer sling legs 1 and 2 through their respective top rear lift provisions end of the pods. of the top pods, through the rear lifting provision 2. Loop the chain end of outer sling legs 1 and 2 on the bottom pods, and back through the rear through their respective top front lift provisions of the top lift provision on the top pods. Place the top pods, through the front lifting provision on the correct link from Table A-4 in the grab hook. bottom pods, and back through the front top lift provision on the top pods. Place the correct link from 6. Loop the chain end of inner sling legs 3 and 4 through their respective top rear lift provisions Table A-4 in the grab hook. of the top pods, through the rear lifting provision 3. Loop the chain end of inner sling legs 3 and 4 on the bottom pods, and back through the rear through their respective top front lift provisions of the top lift provision on the top pods. Place the top , through the front lifting provision on the bottom correct link from Table A-4 in the grab hook. pods, and back through the front top lift provision on Secure the excess chain with tape or Type III the top pods. Place the correct link from Table A-4 in nylon cord. the grab hook. Secure the excess chain with tape or 7. Raise the apex fittings above the container. Type III nylon cord. Cluster tape (breakaway technique) the sling 4. Position sling set number 2 on top of the aft end of legs in each sling set together to prevent entanglement during hookup and lift-off. the pods. Figure A-3. Launch Pod Container with Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System Rockets / Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods with Army Tactical Missile System Missiles, Four Containers
TRANSPORTATION OF MLRS EQUIPMENT ON UNITED STATES AIR FORCE AIRCRAFT A-12. MLRS units deploying by airlift assets must coordinate with their commanding headquarters (refer to FM 55-1 and FM 4-01.30). Rigging procedures unique to MLRS equipment are contained in the respective
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
A-9
Appendix A
technical manuals for that piece of equipment. The unit movement officer and the aircraft loadmaster direct all other procedures pertinent to air movement.
CORPS A-13. The tactical commander obtains airlift support from the Air Force using the airlift request system established in the area of operations. Within the Corps, three elements participate in this system. They are the Corps G-3 and the G-4 (who use the CTO) and the movement control center (MCC). An Air Force liaison officer assists the CTO. A-14. The Corps G-3 provides the missions and the priority of support. The G-3 coordinates with the Corps G-4 to provide for logistics requirements. The G-3 then allocates the airframes to the COSCOM where the MCC enters them in the movement program.
DIVISION A-16. A division obtains Air Force airlift support by entering the airlift request system. Within the division, the three key elements involved in this system are the division G-3, division G-4, and the division transportation officer (DTO). An Air Force liaison officer collocates with and assists the DTO. A-17. Airlift support requests pass between the requesting unit and the DTO. Requests require coordination with the G-3 and G-4 to ensure the validation of the requirement. The method of delivery is then coordinated with the receiving unit by the MCC.
A-10
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Appendix B
Rocket Ballistics REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCURATE PREDICTED FIRE B-1. See chapter 6 for a complete discussion of the 5 general requirements for achieving accurate and predicted fire.
ROCKET ERROR SOURCES BIAS ERRORS B-2. Bias errors affect all rockets of a mission. They are “occasion to occasion” errors. Example—errors in measurement of wind speed or direction, errors in measurement of air density. • Boost Wind. This is the unpredictable error between the measured wind velocity and the wind velocity that the rocket encountered during the initial launch stage. The MLRS family of munitions (MFOM) rockets are extremely sensitive to the low-level winds due to the relatively low velocity of the rocket as it leaves the launch tube. The resulting effect produces a path heading error in the first few seconds of flight. • Coast Wind. This is the unpredictable error between the measured wind velocity and the wind velocity that the rocket encountered during the majority of its flight (upper-level winds). Note: Standard tactical meteorological system reports a measurement that is up to 4 hours old and was taken a number of kilometers away from the rocket flight path. This spatial and temporal difference is the major contributor to the random bias error associated with both boost and coast winds. • • •
• • • •
Impulse. This is the difference between the average total impulse of the rocket motors in the pod and that of the nominal motor. Manufacturing tolerances and system design control this error. Drag. This is the difference between the average aerodynamic drag of the rockets in the pod compared to the perfect nominal rocket. Manufacturing tolerances and system design also control this error. Ambient Temperature. This is the unpredictable difference between the measured temperature of the atmosphere and the actual temperature experienced by the rocket. Temperature is a variable used to compute air densities that in turn is used to compute drag. Pressure. This is the unpredictable difference between the measured pressure of the atmosphere and the actual pressure experienced by the rocket. Pressure is also a variable used to compute air density and ultimately drag. Position Determining System (PDS). There are errors created by the onboard position determining system. The majority of range errors are due to the inaccurate determination of launcher altitude. This error is independent of rocket design or manufacture. Submunition. These errors are primarily due to unknown and unaccounted for winds in the target area. Rocket/Stabilization Reference Package (SRP) Misalignment. This error is due to a misalignment of the launch pod and/or rockets and the SRP. This error is controlled by system design, manufacturing tolerances, and launcher maintenance procedures.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
B-1
Appendix B
PRECISION ERRORS B-3. Precision errors are caused by variations between rockets. Example—variations in launch weight and rocket motor total impulse (see figure B-1). • Mal-Launch. Mal-launch is the apparently random “kick” given to the rocket while it is exiting the launch tube. It is created through a complex and not well-understood interaction of the rocket with the launch pod, the sabots, launcher, and exhaust gases. Mal-launch rates are usually derived indirectly and quoted as an angular rate at tube exit and are not predictable. • Drag. Drag variability is the random rocket-to-rocket variability of the drag characteristics. • Impulse. Impulse variability is the random rocket-to-rocket variability of the rocket motor. • Submunition. This factor is caused primarily by the height of burst (HOB) precision variability. Varying HOBs will allow a variable amount of wind drift to affect the submunition secondary trajectory. • Mass Unbalance. Mass unbalance is the unbalanced condition of the rocket as it leaves the launch tube. An unbalanced condition will create a mal-launch condition. • Thrust Malalignment. This is the condition where the motor thrust is not aligned with the rocket center. The effect of this has been minimized by the use of rocket rotation. Note: ATACMS does not use MET for its initial position ballistic solution. The launcher requires standard MET. ATACMS can be launched in sustained winds less than 18 m/sec = 35 knots = 40 mph and gusts less than 23 m/sec = 45 knots = 50 mph. When employing ER MLRS, MET data no older than 30 minutes is required to achieve maximum accuracy out to 45 kilometers.
Figure B-1. Bias and Precision Errors
B-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Appendix C
MLRS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standing Operating Procedures This appendix is designed as a guide and checklist for preparing a field artillery TSOP for the MLRS battalion and MLRS battery. This appendix is not intended to be all-inclusive regarding the information required by an individual unit TSOP. These TSOP outlines are recommended for use by all MLRS battalions and MLRS batteries to standardize TSOPs within the MLRS community. MLRS platoon operations are usually covered within the MLRS battalion or battery TSOP. Therefore, a separate MLRS platoon TSOP will not be addressed.
SECTION I – TRAINING STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURES (TSOP) FORMAT C-1. The TSOP is a set of instructions covering those features of operations that lend themselves to a definite or standardized procedure to increase effectiveness. The TSOP is an order from the commander that tells his staff and subordinates how he intends to run his unit. Procedures outlined in the unit TSOP apply unless the commander orders otherwise. C-2. This appendix provides an outline for use in developing a TSOP. A sample format is provided for use by all MLRS battalions and MLRS batteries. Standardized formats are very helpful to newly assigned personnel who must quickly find the answers to operations questions. When TSOPs are exchanged with other units during coordination or liaison, they help both units understand the operating procedures of the other. C-3. The basic format of a TSOP is the implementing memorandum with attached annexes and appendixes (as shown in the following examples). A table of contents to provide a quick reference to information contained in the TSOP may also be inserted. C-4. Normally, TSOPs are unclassified to facilitate distribution to all levels that need to have the information. However, selected portions of the TSOP may be classified and should be identified as such in the table of contents (and properly secured). (Normally, each annex would start on a separate page. However, for presentation here, a line between each annex shows page breaks.)
NOTE: The following Appendixes are Unique to BN TSOP • • • •
APPENDIX 2 LIAISON APPENDIX 7 HHB OPERATIONS APPENDIX 11 CIVIL OPERATION APPENDIX 13 FROWARD SUPPORT COMPANY OPERATION
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
C-1
Appendix C
Example Implementing Memorandum (Battalion and Battery)
Department of the Army Location Unit OFFICE SYMBOL
Date
MEMORANDUM FOR SEE DISTRIBUTION SUBJECT: Tactical Standing Operating Procedures 1. REFERENCES. This paragraph should contain all references that support the TSOP. A primary reference is the TSOP of the unit's higher headquarters with which it must operate. In cases where a unit has contingency missions with more than 1 higher headquarters, its TSOP should be written for the primary mission and annotations should be made within the text as appropriate where procedures differ. 2. APPLICABILITY/SCOPE. The purpose of this paragraph is to outline the applicability and/or scope of the TSOP. The paragraph below is 1 example. This TSOP covers only wartime operations after deployment. This TSOP does not and will not repeat doctrine, tactics, or techniques that are provided in FMs, TMs, and mission training plans (MTPs). It applies to all organic, assigned, attached, and OPCON units. It also applies to all supporting units operating in or occupying areas within the battalion or battery area of operation. All TSOP provisions apply except as modified by operations orders and plans. No provision will replace good judgment and common sense. 3. PURPOSE. The purpose of this paragraph is to describe the purpose of the TSOP. The paragraph below is 1 example. This TSOP prescribes guidance for the conduct of sustained tactical operations. Specifically, it standardizes those routine and/or recurring operational procedures and responsibilities of individuals and/or organic and supporting elements. 4. GUIDANCE TO SUBORDINATE UNITS. As appropriate. 5. PROPONENCY. Overall proponency is usually the battalion S-3 or the operations officer at the battery level. The proponent for each annex and appendix may be listed in this paragraph if applicable. 6. CHANGES. The purpose of this paragraph is to outline procedures for making changes to the TSOP. Consider the following topics for inclusion in this paragraph: • Who is responsible for writing and coordinating changes? Normally the proponent of each annex and/or appendix is responsible for writing changes to his respective annex and/or appendix. • Who approves changes? Normally the commander approves changes to the TSOP, but the procedure for approval and dissemination must be specified. • How changes are to be posted. A posted changes page should precede the TSOP. SIGNATURE BLOCK RANK, FA Commanding DISTRIBUTION: Distribution is usually made in accordance with a unit distribution scheme, such as "DISTRIBUTION A.” Whether distribution is made in accordance with a unit distribution scheme or listed by element and number of copies, the following should be considered: • What elements need copies within the battalion or battery? • How many copies are needed by each element? • Distribution of changes. • Liaison officer team distribution during operations. • Distribution to external elements.
C-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standing Operating Procedures
SECTION II – BATTALION TSOP Example Table of Contents (Battalion TSOP) ANNEX A. OPERATIONS Appendix 1 - Battalion Command Post 2 – Liaison 3 - Movement and Positioning 4 - Command and Control 5 - Fire Direction 6 - Survey and Meteorological Support 7 - HHB Operations 8 - Firing Battery Operations 9 - Firing Platoon Operations 10 - Launcher Operations 11 - Civil Military Operations 12 - Emergency Destruction ANNEX B. INTELLIGENCE ANNEX C. AIR DEFENSE ANNEX D. CBRN Appendix 1 - CBRN Operations 2 - CBRN Decontamination 3 – Mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP) 4 - CBRN Threat Warning and Alarm System ANNEX E. SIGNAL Appendix 1 - Radio Communications 2 - MSE Communications 3 - Communications Security 4 – Resynchronization ANNEX F. SUSTAINMENT Appendix 1 - Battalion Trains 2 - Administrative/Logistics Operation Center 3 - Personnel Administration 4 - Supply Operations 5 - Ammunition Management and Resupply Operations 6 – Services 7 - Unit Ministry Operation 8 - Maintenance Operations 9 - Refueling Operation 10 – Reconstitution 11 - Medical Support Operations ANNEX G. SAFETY Appendix 1 – Risk Analysis ANNEX H. REPORTS Appendix 1 - Personnel and Administration Reports 2 - Intelligence and Security Reports 3 - Operations Reports 4 - Logistical Reports 5 - CBRN Reports 6 - Communications and Electronics Operations
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
C-3
Appendix C
ANNEX A (OPERATIONS) TO B N, FA (MLRS) TSOP C-5. The purpose of this annex is to prescribe operations within the battalion. Consider the appendixes below for inclusion in this annex.
APPENDIX 1—BATTALION COMMAND POST C-6. This appendix shows the physical setup of the battalion CP and establishes internal CP operating procedures. Consider the following topics for inclusion in this appendix: • CP manning. • Shift organization and sleep plan. • Shift changeover time and procedures. • Overall CP lay down with vehicles. • TOC internal setup. • CP communications (internal and external). • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Priorities of work. • Access control. • Security. • Load plans.
APPENDIX 2—LIAISON C-7. This appendix outlines the duties and responsibilities for liaison personnel. Consider the following topics: • Organization. • Transportation. • Communications. • Checklist for liaison team. • Liaison functions. • Liaison responsibilities to supported unit. • Liaison responsibilities to parent unit. • Prioritization and formation of ad hoc teams, as required. • Load plans.
APPENDIX 3—MOVEMENT AND POSITIONING C-8. This appendix prescribes movement and positioning requirements, procedures, and techniques used within the battalion. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Movement orders. • Movement techniques and METT-TC. • Positioning in the offense. • Positioning in the defense. • Displacement options. • Convoy procedures. • Command and control during movement.
C-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standing Operating Procedures
APPENDIX 4—COMMAND AND CONTROL C-9. This appendix outlines how the battalion will be commanded and controlled. Consider the following topics: • Responsibilities for command and control. • Orders process. • Orders distribution. • Orders format. • Succession of command. • Transfer of CP operations. • Alternate CP. • Jump CP operations. • Assignment of rocket or missile missions to batteries.
APPENDIX 5—FIRE DIRECTION C-10. This appendix standardizes tactical fire direction procedures and information. Consider the following topics: • Personnel responsibilities. • Initialization. • Equipment maintenance. • Communications procedures. • Degraded mode operations procedures. • Battalion fire direction procedures. • Platoon and battery fire direction procedures. • Massed fire procedures. • Subscriber tables.
APPENDIX 6—SURVEY AND METEOROLOGICAL SUPPORT C-11. This appendix prescribes survey operations and identifies responsibilities and procedures for receiving and disseminating met messages. Consider the following topics: • Personnel responsibilities. • Survey priorities (for example, PADS, DAGR, and hasty survey). • Radio communications and requests for survey. • SCP locations and markings. • GPS procedures. • Datum coordination and control. • Extension of survey. • Alternate met procedures in case of electronic failure. • Met message dissemination times. • Coordination of met requirements.
APPENDIX 7—HHB OPERATIONS C-12. This appendix prescribes operating procedures for the HHB. Consider the following topics: • Tactical organization. • Personnel and section responsibilities. • RSOP.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
C-5
Appendix C
• • •
Advance party configuration, equipment, and procedures. HHB rearm, refuel, and refit operations. Load plans.
APPENDIX 8—FIRING BATTERY OPERATIONS C-13. This appendix prescribes operating procedures for firing batteries. Consider the following topics: • Battery deployment configurations. • Battery OPAREA. • Battery CP lay down with vehicles. • BOC and LOC internal setups. • BOC and LOC manning. • BOC and LOC shift organizations and sleep plan. • Shift changeover time and briefing procedures. • Communications (internal and external). • Specific duties and responsibilities. • RSOP. • Advance party configuration, equipment, and procedures. • Security. • Load plans. • Rearm, refuel, and refit operations.
APPENDIX 9—FIRING PLATOON OPERATIONS C-14. This appendix prescribes operating procedures for firing platoons. Consider the following topics: • Platoon deployment configurations. • Platoon OPAREA. • POC internal setup. • Sleep plan. • Communications (internal and external). • Fire direction (hot, cool, cold status, ammo status). • Positioning (firing points, ammo supply points, SCPs, and rendezvous points). • Specific duties and responsibilities. • RSOP. • Advance party configuration, equipment, and procedures. • Security. • Load plans.
APPENDIX 10—LAUNCHER OPERATIONS C-15. This appendix prescribes operating procedures for launchers. Consider the following topics: • Fire direction (status, response time, and start-up data). • Positioning (site selection, masking, and survey). • Movement. • Security. • Specific duties and responsibilities.
C-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standing Operating Procedures
APPENDIX 11—CIVIL MILITARY OPERATIONS C-16. This appendix prescribes operating procedures for civil military operations. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Communications and coordination with local and/or host nation officials. • Refugee control. • Local and/or host nation support.
APPENDIX 12—EMERGENCY DESTRUCTION C-17. This appendix prescribes procedures within the battalion. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities (for example, chain of command/authority to order emergency destruction). • Priorities. • Methods. • Verification and reporting.
APPENDIX 13—FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY OPERATIONS C-18. This appendix prescribes procedures within the battalion. Consider the following topics: • Company deployment configurations. • Company OPAREA. • Company CP lay down with vehicles. • BOC and LOC internal setups. • BOC and LOC manning. • BOC and LOC shift organizations and sleep plan. • Shift changeover time and briefing procedures. • Communications (internal and external). • Specific duties and responsibilities. • RSOP. • Advance party configuration, equipment, and procedures. • Security. • Load plans. • Rearm, refuel, and refit operations.
ANNEX B (INTELLIGENCE) TO_BN, FA (MLRS) TSOP C-19. This annex prescribes intelligence operations within the battalion. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Control and destruction of classified documents. • EPW procedures. • Returnees. • Security. • Weather. • Mapping, charting, and geodesy. • Tactical jamming procedures. • Essential elements of information (EEI).
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
C-7
Appendix C
• •
IPB. Interface with MI and USAF sensing platforms.
ANNEX C (AIR DEFENSE) TO_BN, FA (MLRS) TSOP C-20. This annex prescribes air defense operations within the battalion. Consider the following topics: • AMD procedures (active and passive). • AMD warning and weapons control status. • Hostile aircraft criteria. • Rules of engagement. • Attached AD elements (C2 of and support for).
ANNEX D (CBRN ) TO_BN_FA (MLRS) TSOP C-21. This annex provides CBRN defense information and prescribes CBRN operations within the battalion.
APPENDIX 1—CBRN OPERATIONS C-22. This appendix prescribes CBRN readiness and defense operations. Consider the following topics: • Individual skills. • CBRN teams and/or control parties. • Warning devices. • Collective skills. • Radiation exposure guidance. • Unmasking procedures. • Threat assessment. • Hazard overlay.
APPENDIX 2—CBRN DECONTAMINATION C-23. This appendix establishes CBRN procedures. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Decontamination procedures and levels of decontamination. • Requests for decontamination support from batteries, platoons, and higher headquarters.
APPENDIX 3—MOPP C-24. This appendix provides easily accessible information and standardizes wear of protective clothing and use of equipment. Consider the following topics: • MOPP levels and dissemination of MOPP. • Standardized wear of MOPP gear (for example, name labels, and so forth). • Requisition and issue of protective clothing and equipment. • Location and contents of individual protective clothing and equipment bags.
APPENDIX 4—CBRN THREAT WARNING AND ALARM SYSTEM C-25. This appendix provides easily accessible information and establishes CBRN threat warning and alarm procedures and priority means of dissemination within the battalion.
C-8
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standing Operating Procedures
ANNEX E (SIGNAL) TO BN _FA (MLRS) TSOP C-26. This annex prescribes signal operations within the battalion. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities (staff, batteries, and platoons). • Communications integration with higher, lower, supported, and adjacent units. • Signal equipment maintenance.
APPENDIX 1—COMMUNICATIONS C-27. This appendix provides communications information and prescribes communications procedures. Consider the following topics: • External radio net diagrams. • Internal radio net diagrams. • Priority of nets. • Specific operating and setup procedures (for example, net control, use of antennas, and so forth).
APPENDIX 2—MSE COMMUNICATIONS C-28. This appendix provides MSE communications information and prescribes MSE communications procedures. Consider the following topics: • Affiliation codes and procedures. • Disaffiliation procedures. • RAU positioning and coverage. • J-1077 positioning and access. • Subscriber information.
APPENDIX 3—COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY C-29. This appendix establishes communications security procedures. Consider the following topics: • COMSEC changeover times and procedures. • Distribution of COMSEC material. • Loss and recovery of COMSEC material. • SOI procedures. • MSRT variable control. • Remote keying procedures. • MSRT compromise and recovery procedures. • GPS.
APPENDIX 4—RESYNCHRONIZATION C-30. This appendix prescribes procedures to resynchronize serialization of digital systems to correct serialization without voice transmission.
ANNEX F (SUSTAINMENT) TO BN, FA (MLRS) TSOP C-31. This annex prescribes sustainment operations within the battalion
APPENDIX 1—BATTALION TRAINS C-32. This appendix shows the physical setup of the battalion trains and establishes internal operating procedures. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Trains area layout (vehicles and sections).
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
C-9
Appendix C
• • •
Internal communications. Security. Movement and positioning.
APPENDIX 2—ALOC C-33. This appendix shows the physical setup of the ALOC and establishes internal ALOC operating procedures. Consider the following topics: • Specific ALOC functions. • ALOC manning. • Shift organization and sleep plan. • Shift changeover time and briefing procedures. • ALOC internal setup. • C2. • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Priorities of work. • Load plans.
APPENDIX 3—PERSONNEL OPERATIONS C-34. This appendix prescribes personnel operations within the battalion to support the soldier and batteries. Consider the following topics: • Maintenance of unit strength (all levels within the battalion). • Personnel replacement operations. • Personnel accounting and strength reporting. • Personnel database management. • Casualty management. • Postal operations. • EPW and civilian internee (CI) operations. • Morale, welfare, and recreation (MWR). • Other personnel functions (orders, evaluation reports, promotions, personnel actions, personnel assignment and utilization, and awards). • Logistics package (LOGPAC) input.
APPENDIX 4—SUPPLY OPERATIONS C-35. This appendix prescribes procedures to request, receive, store, and issue supplies. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Management of supplies. • Requisition, flow, and supply distribution (prioritize when applicable). • All classes of supply (controlled and non-controlled). • Water operations, requirements, and points. • Map supply. • Publications and blank forms. • Tabs for preplanned LOGPACs. • Specific categories of supply (for example, CBRN, communications, and small arms).
C-10
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standing Operating Procedures
APPENDIX 5—AMMUNITIONS MANAGEMENT AND RESUPPLY OPERATIONS C-36. This appendix prescribes ammunition management and resupply procedures. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Requests. • Resupply procedures used within the battalion. • Standardization of markings for unserviceable munitions.
APPENDIX 6—SERVICES C-37. This appendix describes logistics support services within the battalion. Consider the following topics: • Laundry. • Clothing exchange. • Showers. • CTA-50 exchange. • Graves registration.
APPENDIX 7—UNIT MINISTRY OPERATIONS C-38. This appendix prescribes unit ministry operating procedures. Consider the following topics: • Communications. • Priority of coverage. • Coordination of religious services. • Chaplain support activities. • Mass burial. • Civil actions. • Supplies and logistic support. • Accommodation of religious practices. • Lay minister functions.
APPENDIX 8—MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS C-39. This appendix prescribes maintenance operations. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Maintenance priorities. • Recovery and evacuation priorities. • Cannibalization and controlled substitution. • BDAR. • Weapons system replacement order (WSRO). • Contact teams. • Equipment density listing. • Repairable and returnable components and assemblies. • Operational readiness float (ORF). • Equipment evacuation. • COMSEC maintenance.
APPENDIX 9—REFUELING OPERATIONS C-40. This appendix prescribes refueling operations within the battalion. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Fuel request procedures and priorities.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
C-11
Appendix C
• • • • •
Refuel-on-the-move. Day procedures and template. Night procedures and template. Security. Safety.
APPENDIX 10—RECONSTITUTION C-41. This appendix prescribes procedures to reconstitute the battalion when it falls below an unacceptable level of combat readiness. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Requirement to reconstitute (mass casualties, mass destruction of equipment, and the destruction or loss of effectiveness). • Method of reconstitution (reorganization and regeneration).
APPENDIX 11—MEDICAL SUPPORT OPERATIONS C-42. This appendix prescribes medical support operations. Consider the following topics: • Specific duties and responsibilities. • Locations and deployment configurations of medical assets—CP and/or trains. • Assignment of medics. • Communications. • Field sanitation. • Combat lifesaver training. • Evacuation and reporting procedures. • Priority of evacuation. • Collection and accountability of individual equipment and effects. • Treatment and prevention of disease. • Mental health, dental, and other essential services.
ANNEX G (SAFETY) TO BN, _FA (MLRS) TSOP C-43. This annex prescribes combat safety requirements and provides risk assessment procedures within the battalion.
APPENDIX 1—SAFETY INFORMATION AND REPORTING C-44. This appendix prescribes how command safety information will be distributed and the requirements and means for rendering accident and incident reports.
APPENDIX 2—FIRING SAFETY C-45. This appendix prescribes combat firing safety requirements.
ANNEX H (REPORTS) TO BN, _FA (MLRS TSOP) C-46. This annex provides a single consolidated section within the TSOP to prescribe report requirements within the battalion. Normally, reports are segregated by staff functional area. Reports should be tailored to specific requirements of higher headquarters and the commander's need for input into his decision-making process. Avoid requiring information that is duplicated in other reports or that is of minimal value. To the greatest extent possible, coordinate report transmission and effective times to reduce workloads and to synchronize staff actions. The means for submitting each report and the priority of each means must be
C-12
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standing Operating Procedures
addressed. Many reports are submitted as required and should be so indicated. Consider the reports below within this annex.
APPENDIX 1—PERSONNEL AND ADMINISTRATION REPORTS C-47. Consider the following: • Personnel status report. • Casualty feeder report. • Medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) request.
APPENDIX 2—INTELLIGENCE AND SECURITY REPORTS C-48. Consider the following: • Weather report. • SALUTE report. • Sensitive items report.
APPENDIX 3—OPERATIONS REPORTS C-49. Consider the following: • SITREP. • Launcher status report. • Voice or manual fire mission. • Recon order. • Movement order. • Closing report. • Request to displace. • Ammunition assets report.
APPENDIX 4—LOGISTICAL REPORTS C-50. Consider the following: • Logistics status (LOGSTAT) report. • Equipment status report. • Combat loss report. • Logistical spot report. • Emergency resupply request (ammunition and fuel).
APPENDIX 5—CBRN REPORTS C-51. Consider the following: • CBRN 1 report. • CBRN 2 report. • CBRN 3 report. • CBRN 4 report. • CBRN 5 report. • CBRN 6 report. • Chemical downwind message. • Effective downwind message. • Request for decontamination support. • Radiation status report.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
C-13
Appendix C
APPENDIX 6—COMMUNICATIONS AND ELECTRONICS OPERATIONS REPORTS C-52. Consider the meaconing, interference, jamming, and intrusion (MIJI) operations feeder report.
C-14
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Appendix D
LNO Checklist PREPARATION FOR OPERATIONS EQUIPMENT • • • • • • •
• • • •
Personal field gear and equipment. Night vision goggles. GPS receiver. Camouflage screening system. Hex tent/stove/cots/water cans. Fire control system (for example, AFATDS). Communications Systems: Radios/COMSEC devices. OE254 antenna (2 each). AN/GRA-39 remote. TA-312 telephone. DR-8 (w/WD-1A/TT). TA-1035/U with MX-10891/G field wire. Maps and overlay material. Field table with chairs. Office supplies and materials to include: Pens/pencils/markers. Notepads and tablet. Rubbing alcohol/paper towels. DA Form 1594 (Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officer’s Log)/fire mission logs.
INFORMATION • • • • • • • • • •
TSOP/SOI/OPLAN/OPORD of sending unit. TSOP/SOI/OPLAN/OPORD of receiving unit. Location and route to receiving CP. Intelligence update. Current plans, orders, maps, overlays, and targeting information to include concept of operation, concept of fires, and commander's intent. Unit locations/readiness and strength. Land management coordinating agency (force headquarters FC/FE). Logistical considerations and supporting agencies. Current status of receiving unit's mission. References: field and technical manuals.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
D-1
Appendix D
LIAISON CHECKLIST BEFORE DEPARTING THE SENDING UNIT: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Do you understand what the commander wants the receiving commander to know? Did you arrange for a briefing from operations, intelligence, and other staff elements concerning current and future operations? Did you verify the receipt of, and do you understand, the tasks your staff has given you? Did you obtain the correct maps, traces, and overlays (including maneuver, engineer, and fire support overlays)? Did you arrange for transport, communications and cryptographic equipment, codes, and signal instructions, and for their protection and security? Did you arrange for replacement of these items, as necessary? Did you arrange for the departure of the liaison party? Did you complete route-reconnaissance and time-management plans so you will arrive at the designated location on time? Do you and your party know how you are to destroy the information you are carrying in an emergency, in transit, and at the receiving unit? Do you have SOI? (Do you know the challenge and password?) Did you inform your headquarters of when you will leave, what route you will take, when you are to arrive, POC for linkup with receiving unit and, when known, the estimated time and route of your return? Did you pick up all correspondence designated for the receiving headquarters? Did you conduct a radio check? (Do you have appropriate COMSEC equipment?) Do you know the impending moves of your headquarters and of the receiving headquarters? Did you bring automation or computers to support your operation? Did you pack adequate supplies of Class I and III for use in transit?
DURING THE LIAISON TOUR: • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
D-2
Establish and maintain communication(s) with sending unit. Notify your own headquarters of your arrival. Deliver all correspondence designated for the receiving headquarters. Visit staff elements, brief them on the situation of your unit, and collect information (such as maps, traces, and overlays) from them. Annotate on all overlays the security classification, title, map scale, grid intersection points, DTG information, DTG received, and from whom received. Participate in receiving unit's orders process, briefings, and rehearsals. Assist in development of: FS execution matrix. FS plan. Advise on sending unit capabilities, requirements, limitations, and employment. Visit and coordinate routinely with all receiving unit staff elements. Send sending unit routine updates regarding mission, unit locations, future operations, and commander's intent. Organize sleep plan for 24-hour operations. Ensure that receiving unit S-3 is aware of your location at all times. Accomplish mission without interfering with the receiving unit’s operations. Facilitate information exchange.
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
LNO Checklist
• •
Pick up all correspondence for your headquarters before leaving. Inform the receiving headquarters of when you will depart, what route you will take, and when you expect to arrive at the sending unit.
AFTER RETURNING TO THE SENDING UNIT: • • •
Did you deliver all correspondence? Did you brief the appropriate staff elements? Did you prepare the necessary reports?
EXAMPLE OUTLINE OF A LIAISON OFFICER'S HANDBOOK/TSOP 1. Table of contents, with the sending unit proponency statement. 2. Purpose statement. 3. Introduction statement. 4. Definitions. 5. Scope statement. 6. Responsibilities and guidelines for conduct. 7. Actions before departing from the sending unit. 8. Actions on arriving at the receiving unit. 9. Actions during liaison operations at the receiving unit. 10. Actions before departing from the receiving unit. 11. Actions on arrival at the sending unit. 12. Sample questions. 13. Information requirements. 14. Required reports (from higher and sending units' TSOP). 15. Packing list (administrative supplies and unit TSOP, field uniform, equipment). • Credentials. •
Forms. (DA Forms 1594 and Other blank forms)
•
References.
•
Computers for information and data exchange. Removable storage drives for transport and transfer of electronic files.
•
Signal operating instructions extract.
•
Security code encryption device.
•
Communications equipment, including remote equipment.
•
Phone book.
•
List of commanders and staff officers.
•
Telephone calling (credit) card.
•
Movement table.
•
Administrative equipment (pens, paper, scissors, tape, hole punch, and so on).
•
Map and chart equipment (pens, pins, protractor, straight edge, scale, distance counter, acetate, unit markers, and so on).
16. References. 17. Sending unit's command modification tables of organization and equipment (MTOE), unit status report (if appropriate because of the classification of the report).
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
D-3
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix E
MLRS Command Posts This appendix provides examples of CPs for the MLRS battalion, battery, and platoon. It is a guide for the MLRS battalion commander and his staff, the MLRS battery commander and battery HQ and support personnel, and the MLRS platoon leader and platoon HQ personnel. The battalion CPs in this appendix are for an MLRS battalion deployed under option 1—dual command posts. The battery CPs in this appendix are for an MLRS battery deployed with a split HQ. Each unit must adapt these CPs to its own particular mission and deployment option and to the personnel and equipment authorized in their modification tables of organization and equipment (MTOE).
SECTION I—MLRS BATTALION COMMAND POST
Figure E-1. Vehicles at the MLRS Battalion CP, Option 1—Dual CPs Note: The battalion commander’s vehicle and the S-6 vehicle will often be away from the CP area. Table E-1. Personnel at the MLRS Battalion CP, Option 1—Dual CPs Section/Element Position
Rank
MOS
Number
Shift A/B
Battalion HQ Command Section
Commander
O5
13A00
1
Command Sergeant Major
E9
00Z50
1
Vehicle Driver
E3
13P10
1
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
E-1
Appendix E
Table E-1. Personnel at the MLRS Battalion CP, Option 1—Dual CPs Section/Element Position
Rank
MOS
Number
Shift A/B
S-3Section
S-3
O4
13A00
1
Operations Officer
O3
13A00
1
A
Chemical Officer
O2
74B00
1
A
Operations Sergeant
E9
13Z50
1
B
Master Gnr/Asst Ops Sergeant
E7
13M40
1
A
Chief Surveyor
E6
13S30
1
CBRN NCO
E6
74B30
1
B
Senior Radio Opr- Maintainer
E5
25C20
1
A
Fire Direction Specialist
E4
13P10
2
A,B
Radio Opr-Maintainer
E4
25C10
1
B
Radio Opr-Maintainer
E3
25C10
1
A
13A00
1
A
13P40
1
B
13P30
2
A/B
13P20
4
A/B
25C20
1
A
13P10
2
A/B
25C10
1
B
25C10
1
A
B
Fire Direction Center (Bn)
Fire Direction Officer
O3
Chief Fire Direction Computer
E7
Fire Direction Computer
E6
Battery Display Operator
E5
Senior Radio Opr-Maintainer
E5
Fire Direction Specialist
E4
Radio Opr-Maintainer
E4
Radio Opr-Maintainer
E3 S-2 Section
S-2
O3
13A00
1
Targeting Officer
W2
131A0
1
Intelligence Sergeant
E8
13Z50
1
A
Intelligence Analyst
E5
35F20
1
B
Fire Direction Spc/Vehicle Driver
E4
13P10
1
B
Survey Section
E-2
PADs Team Chief
E5
13S20
1
A
PADs Team Chief
E5
13S20
2
A,B
PADs Vehicle Driver
E4
13S10
1
A
PADs Vehicle Driver
E4
13S10
2
A,B
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Command Posts
Table E-1. Personnel at the MLRS Battalion CP, Option 1—Dual CPs Section/Element Position
FA Surveyor
Rank
MOS
Number
Shift A/B
E3
13S10
1
A
Table E-2. MLRS Battalion TOC Shifts by Duty Position Duty Position
Shift A
Shift B
Duty Officer
Operations Officer
S-2
Duty NCO
Intelligence Sergeant
Operations Sergeant
Fire Direction
Fire Direction Officer
Chief Fire Direction Computer
Computer Operator
Battery Display Operator
Battery Display Operator
CBRN Operations
Chemical Officer
CBRN NCO
Figure E-2. MLRS Battalion TOC—Side-by-Side Configuration
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
E-3
Appendix E
SECTION II—MLRS BATTALION TRAINS
Figure E-3. Vehicles at the MLRS Battalion Trains, Option 1—Dual CPs Note: Commanders must consider the defense of the TOC and the ALOC if operating in a split HQ configuration.
Table E-3. Personnel at MLRS Battalion Trains, Option 1—Dual CPs Section/Element Position
Rank
MOS
Number
Shift A/B
Battalion HQ Command Section
E-4
Executive Officer
O4
13A00
1
Vehicle Driver
E3
13P10
1
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Command Posts
HHB HQ Battery HQ
Commander
O3
13A00
1
First Sergeant
E8
13Z5M
1
Supply Sergeant
E6
92Y30
1
Armor
E4
92Y10
1
Vehicle Driver
E3
13P10
1
S-1 Section
S-1
O3
42B00
1
B
Senior Human Resources Sergeant
E7
42A40
1
A
Human Resources Sergeant
E6
42A30
1
B
Human Resources Sergeant
E5
42A20
2
A,B
Paralegal Specialist
E4
27D10
1
A
Human Resources Specialist
E4
42A10
1
Human Resources Specialist
E3
42A10
1
Human Resources Specialist
E3
42A10
1
Unit Ministry Team
Chaplain
O3
56A00
1
Chaplain Assistant
E4
56M10
1
Medical Platoon HQ
Platoon Leader
O3
65D00
1
Section NCO
E6
68W30
1
Medical Treatment Team
Physician Assistant
O3
65D00
1
Health Care Sergeant
E6
68W3O
1
Health Care Specialist
E4
68W1O
1
Health Care Specialist
E3
68W1O
1
68W10
6
Combat Medic Section
Combat Medic
E4 Ambulance Team
Emergency Care Sergeant
E5
68W2O
1
Ambulance Aide/Driver
E3
68W1O
1
S-4 Section
S-4
O3
13A00
1
A
PAT/PBO
W2
920A0
1
B
Sr Maint Supervisor
E8
63Z5O
1
A
Supply NCO
E7
92Y4O
1
A
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
E-5
Appendix E
Supply Sergeant
E6
92Y3O
1
B
Asst Supply Sergeant
E5
92Y2O
1
A
Property Book NCO
E5
92Y2O
1
A
Property Book NCO
E5
92Y2O
1
B
Supply Specialist
E4
92Y1O
2
A, B
Supply Specialist
E3
92Y1O
1
A
Ammunition Management Section
Ammunition Officer
O2
13A00
Ammunition NCO
E7
13M4O
Vehicle Driver
E3
13P1O
S-6 Section
S-6
O3
25A00
1
A
Signal Support System Chief
E8
25U50
1
B
Fwd Signal Support NCO
E6
25U30
3
Signal Information Service Specialist
E4
25U10
1
A
Signal Support System Maint
E4
25U10
1
B
Signal Support System Specialist
E3
25U10
1
A
Automation Management Section
LAN Manager
E4
25B10
1
A
LAN Manager
E3
25B10
1
B
Retransmission Team
Team Chief
E5
25U20
1
Radio Retransmission Operator
E4
25U10
1
Radio Retransmission Operator
E3
25U10
1
Table E-4. MLRS Battalion ALOC Shifts by Duty Position Duty Position
Shift A
Shift B
Duty officer
S-4
S-1
Duty NCO
Senior Human Resources Sergeant
Battalion supply NCO
Maintenance Representative
Battalion Maintenance Officer
Unit Maint Technician
Supply Representative
Supply Sergeant Property
PAT/PBO
Personnel/Administration
Human Resources SGT
Human Resources SSG
E-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Command Posts
Figure E-4. MLRS Battalion ALOC in Built-up Trucks Note: In some units, built-up cargo trucks for the ALOC are not possible because of vehicle haul requirements. See figure E-5 for the ALOC in a tent.
Figure E-5. MLRS Battalion ALOC in a General Purpose Medium Tent Note: The objective L-series Tables of organization and equipment (TOE) does not have AN/GRA-39 remote radios. The primary communication means is MSE.
Table E-5. Forward Support Company with the MLRS Battalion Section/Element Position
Rank
MOS
Number
Shift A/B
*
Company Headquarters
Commander
O3
90A00
1
Executive Officer
O2
88A00
1
First Sergeant
E8
63Z5M
1
Supply Sergeant
E6
92Y3O
1
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
E-7
Appendix E
CBRN Specialist Armorer Supply Specialist
E4
74D1O
1
E4
92Y1O
1
E4
92Y1O
1
Field Feeding Section Rank
MOS
Number
Sr Food Opns Sergeant
Section/Element Position
E7
92G4O
1
Sr First Cook
E6
92G3O
1
Cook
E5
92G2O
2
Cook
E5
92G2O
5
Cook
E4
92G1O
3
Shift A/B
Distribution Platoon Headquarters
Platoon Leader
O2
92A00
1
Platoon Sergeant
E7
92A4O
1
Mat Con/Acctg Sp
E4
92A1O
1
General Supply Section
Section Sergeant
E6
88M3O
1
Heavy Vehicle Driver
E4
88M1O
1
Vehicle Driver
E4
88M1O
4
Vehicle Driver
E4
88M1O
4
Class Iii Distribution Section
Petrl Hvy Veh Opr
E5
92F2O
1
Petrl Hvy Veh Opr
E4
92F1O
3
Petrl Lt Veh Opr
E4
92F1O
2
Petrl Lt Veh Opr
E4
92F1O
4
Class V Section
Squad Leader
E6
88M3O
1
Heavy Vehicle Driver
E6
88M3O
6
Heavy Vehicle Driver
E5
88M2O
19
Heavy Vehicle Driver
E4
88M1O
26
Vehicle Driver
E4
88M1O
2
Vehicle Driver
E3
88M1O
2
Heavy Vehicle Driver
E3
88M1O
14
E6
92F3O
1
E4
92W1O
1
Water Section
Section Chief Water Trmt Sp
Class III/V Squad
Squad Leader
E6
88M3O
1
Heavy Vehicle Driver
E6
88M3O
2
Heavy Vehicle Driver
E5
88M2O
7
E-8
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Command Posts
Table E-5. Forward Support Company with the MLRS Battalion Section/Element Position
Rank
MOS
Number
Heavy Vehicle Driver
E4
88M1O
10
Petrl Hvy Veh Opr Driver
E4
92F1O
2
E3
88M1O
5
Heavy Vehicle Driver
Shift A/B
Maintenance Platoon HQ
Platoon Leader
O2
91A00
1
Platoon Sergeant
E7
63X40
1
Maintenance Control Section
Maint Control Officer
O2
91A00
1
Senior Auto Mnt WO
W3
915E0
1
Maint Control Sgt
E7
63X40
1
Technical Inspector
E6
63B30
1
Equip Rec/Parts Sgt
E5
92A20
2
Equip Rec/Parts Sp
E4
92A10
2
Equip Rec/Parts Sp
E1
92A10
1
Maintenance Section
Motor Sgt
E7
63X4O
1
Shop Foreman
E6
63B3O
1
Senior Mechanic
E6
63B3O
1
MLRS Foreman
E6
94P3O
1
Pwr-Gen Equip Rep
E5
52D2O
1
Wheeled Veh Mech
E5
63B2O
4
Track Veh Mech
E5
63H2O
1
Signal Spt Sys Maint
E4
25U1O
1
Pwr-Gen Equip Rep
E4
52D1O
1
Const Equip Rep
E4
62B1O
1
Wheeled Veh Mech
E4
63B1O
4
Track Veh Mech
E4
63H1O
1
QM/Chem Equip Rep
E4
63J1O
1
Radio Repairer
E4
94E1O
1
Pwr-Gen Equip Rep
E3
52D1O
1
Wheeled Veh Mech
E3
63B1O
6
Track Veh Mech
E3
63H1O
1
Service/Recovery Section
Sr Tracked Mech
E6
63H3O
1
Welder
E5
44B2O
1
Recovery Veh Opr
E5
63H2O
1
Recovery Veh Opr
E4
63B1O
1
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
E-9
Appendix E
Table E-5. Forward Support Company with the MLRS Battalion Section/Element Position
Rank
MOS
Number
Recovery Veh Opr
E4
63H1O
1
Welder
E3
44B1O
2
Shift A/B
(X3) Maintenance Support Team (Artillery)
Motor Sgt
E7
63X4O
3
Wheeled Veh Mech
E5
63B2O
3
Recovery Veh Opr
E5
63H2O
3
Track Veh Mech
E5
63H2O
3
Wheeled Veh Mech
E4
63B1O
3
Recovery Veh Opr
E4
63H1O
3
MLRS Repairer
E4
94P1O
3
Wheeled Veh Mech
E3
63B1O
3
Track Veh Mech
E3 63H1O 3 • The forward support company shift and support locations vary widely from the brigade support area to MLRS platoon locations. Veh = vehicle Opr = operator Mech = mechanic
SECTION III—MLRS BATTERY COMMAND POST
Figure E-6. MLRS Battery CP—Split HQ Note: The support platoon leader will be in and out of the CP area. Depending on the local mission requirements, the support platoon leader may be located at the battery trains.
Table E-6. Personnel at the MLRS Battery CP Split HQ Section/Element Position
Rank
MOS
Number
Shift A/B
Battery HQ
E-10
Battery commander
CPT
13A00
1
First sergeant
1SG
13Z5M
1
Vehicle driver
PFC
13P10
1
Forward signal support NCO (attached)
SSG
31U30
1
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Command Posts
Table E-6. Personnel at the MLRS Battery CP Split HQ Section/Element Position
Rank
MOS
Number
Shift A/B
Battery Operations Center
Operations officer
1LT
13A00
1
A
Battery operations sergeant
SFC
13P40
1
B
FDC section chief
SSG
13P30
1
A
CBRN NCO
SGT
54B20
1
Battery display operator
SGT
13P20
1
B
AFATDS
SPC
13P10
2
A/B
AFATDS
PFC
13P10
2
Legend FATDS = field artillery tactical data system FDC = fire direction center CBRN = chemical, biological, radiological and nuclear NCO = noncommissioned officer
Table E-7. MLRS BOC Shifts by Duty Position Duty Position
Shift A
Shift B
Duty officer
Operations officer
Support platoon leader
Duty NCO
Chief fire direction SGT
Senior fire direction SGT
CBRN operations
CBRN NCO
Computer operator
AFATDS (SPC)
AFATDS (SPC)
Fire direction specialist
AFATDS (PFC)
AFATDS (PFC)
Note: Personnel must be cross-trained to perform administrative and CBRN duties. Legend FATDS = field artillery tactical data system CBRN = nuclear, biological, and chemical and nuclear NCO = noncommissioned officer
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
E-11
Appendix E
Figure E-7. MLRS Battery Operations Center in Carrier, CP
SECTION IV—MLRS BATTERY TRAINS
Figure E-8. MLRS Battery Trains —Split HQ
E-12
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Command Posts
Table E-8. Personnel at the MLRS Battery Trains Section/Element Position
Rank
MOS
Number
LOC Shift A/B
Support Platoon HQ
Platoon leader (BOC)
1LT
13A00
1
Platoon sergeant
SFC
13M40
1
Vehicle driver
PFC
13P10
1
Combat medic (attached)
SPC
91B10
2
A
Ammunition Section X2
Section chief
E6
13M30
2
Assistant section chief
E5
13M20
2
MLRS ammunition specialist
E4
13M10
12
MLRS ammunition specialist
E3
13M10
8
Supply Section
Supply sergeant
E5
92Y20
1
B
Armorer
E4
92Y10
1
A
Legend BFV = Bradley fighting vehicle BOC = battery operations center
Table E-9. MLRS Battery LOC Shifts by Duty Position Duty Position
Shift A
Shift B
Duty NCO
Support platoon SGT
Supply SGT
Maintenance representative
Equipment recovery/parts specialist
Equipment recovery/parts specialist
Clerk
Armorer/supply specialist
Note: Depending on local SOP and mission requirements, the battery first sergeant and the support platoon leader may be included in LOC shifts. Battery LOC could be collocated with the BOC. Legend BOC = battery operations center LOC = logistics operations center SOP = standing operating procedures
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
E-13
Appendix E
Figure E-9. Battery LOC
SECTION V—PLATOON HEADQUARTERS E-1. The POC is usually positioned near the center of the platoon HQ area. The platoon HQ is not usually split into a CP and a train’s element, like the MLRS battalion and battery may be, because the platoon HQ is not equipped and manned to do so effectively. The POC is the CP of the platoon HQ.
Figure E-10. Vehicles at the MLRS Platoon HQ
E-14
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
MLRS Command Posts
Table E-10 Personnel at the MLRS Platoon HQ Section/Element Position
Rank
MOS
Number
Shift A/B
Platoon leader
1LT
13A00
1
A
Platoon sergeant (LOC)
SFC
13M40
1
B
Battery display operator
SGT
13P20
1
B
Reconnaissance sergeant
SGT
13M20
1
A
FATDS
SPC
13P10
1
A
FATDS
PFC
13P10
1
B
Vehicle driver
PFC
13P10
1
A
Legend FATDS = field artillery tactical data system LOC = logistics operations center
Table E-11. MLRS POC Shifts by Duty Position Duty Position
Shift A
Shift B
Shift leader
Platoon leader
Platoon SGT (LOC)
Computer operator
FATDS (SPC)
Fire direction sergeant
Radiotelephone operator
Vehicle driver
FATDS (PFC)
Figure E-11. MLRS POC in C2V
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
E-15
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix F
Hasty Survey Technique—Graphic Resection DESCRIPTION F-1. Graphic resection is a method of determining position based on the known locations of certain visible points. The equipment needed to perform a graphic resection includes a theadolite, a map sheet, overlay paper or acetate, and a straightedge.
PROCEDURES F-2. Select a location from which three distant points, which appear on the map, are visible. These points are well-defined vertical features such as towers, trig markers, or church steeples. F-3. Measure the three clockwise angles between these points with the aiming circle: first point to second point, second to third, and third point back around to the first, completing a circle around the horizon. For each angle, measure to the nearest 0.5 mils as follows: • Set up and level the aiming circle over the proposed SCP. • With the upper motion, set 0.0 mils on the aiming circle. • With the lower motion, sight on the first known point. • With the upper motion, measure the angle to the second point and record this first reading to the nearest 0.5 mil. • With this reading on the scales, sight again on the first point by using the lower motion. • With the upper motion, again measure the angle to the second point. Record the second reading on the upper motion to the nearest 0.5 mil. • Divide the second reading by 2 to determine the mean angle, which must agree with the first reading to the nearest 0.5 mil. If the first reading is more than 3,200 mils, you must add 6,400 mils to the second reading before dividing by 2. If the 2 readings do not agree within 0.5 mil, return to the first step. F-4. Add the mean angles from between each point to ensure that the total sum of all three is equal to 6,400 mil, plus or minus 1.5 mil. Determine the 8-digit grid locations of the 3 known points from the map or a trig list and write these locations beside the points. F-5. Using the overlay paper or acetate, draw a central point, which will represent the location of the aiming circle. Using a straightedge, draw a line (first ray) outward. Using a range-deflection protractor or a coordinate scale (less accurate), measure clockwise the number of mils corresponding to the angle between the first and second known points. Draw a line along that mils measurement from the central point outward (second ray). Do this again with the third angle, developing a third ray from the central point outward. With the third ray in place, measure from it, clockwise back to the first ray. Compare this measurement to the mean angle from the aiming circle. These 2 angles should agree within 0.5 mil. F-6. Place the overlay with the three lines radiating out from the central point on the map sheet. Position it so that the first ray passes through the first known point from the map, the second through the second point, and likewise for the third. Once all three are aligned, the central point from the overlay paper represents the aiming circle map location. F-7. Use a coordinate scale to determine the 8-digit grid of the aiming circle and the approximate elevation. Record these data for the launcher to use in updating its PDS after every 4 to 6 kilometers of travel. This data should not be used for calibration.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
F-1
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix G
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables These tables provide leaders with a planning tool to assess the impact of intervening crests on rocket trajectories. The MLRS project office of U.S. Army Missile Command (MICOM) developed them for the U.S. Army Field Artillery School.
ASSUMPTIONS G-1. These tables establish minimum planning ranges for launchers in specific firing areas to ensure that rockets will not only clear a crest, but that a warhead event will not occur until the crest is cleared. The tables use 5 launch altitudes: sea level, +400 meters, +800 meters, +1,200 meters, and +3,048 meters. They do not represent an absolute launcher ballistic algorithm and should not be used as a firing solution safety check. The tables are based on several assumptions and conditions: • European rockets or those with lot number VGT072 or higher were used. These lots have more aerodynamic fins and therefore produce longer ranges with lower trajectories. • A warhead event will not occur until the crest is cleared. • Standard atmospheric conditions with 99 percent global wind conditions (head and tail) were applied to account for low-level winds. Rockets were conditioned both cold and hot to account for temperature extremes. • 3.3 sigma range and height dispersion errors were used to account for occasion-to-occasion (bias) and round-to-round (precision) errors. • 100-meter altitude subtracted to account for vegetation and terrain effects. • Ballistic algorithm version 6.09 with no high QE mode.
PROCEDURES G-2. There are 2 entry arguments for the tables: range (to crest) and angle of site (to crest). If the angle of site cannot be directly measured, then leaders can calculate it by using the mil relation formula. See figure G-1, figure G-2, and figure G-3.
d ALT (m)
ANGLE OF SITE =
RANGE (km) Where: d ALT = Difference in altitude between launcher and crest (meters). RANGE = Range to crest to the nearest 100 m expressed in kilometers.
Figure G-1. Mil Relation Formula
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-1
Appendix G
G-3. If the actual target location and altitude are known, the angle of site can be modified to account for the differences in launch and target altitude using the following formula. Angle of Siteeff = Angle of Site to Crest – Angle of Site to Target Where: ALTTGT(m) – ALTLCHR (m)
Angle of Site to Target =
RANGE TO TARGET and: ALTTGT = Altitude of Target ALTLCHR = Altitude of Launcher Figure G-2. Effective Angle of Site
Figure G-3. Crest Clearance
G-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-1. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
ALT: Sea Level
40
50
60
80
100
2,000
0
0
0
10,100
11,500
13,200
14,600
16,000
2,500
0
0
0
0
10,900
12,100
14,200
15,500
3,000
0
0
0
0
10,300
11,600
14,000
15,400
3,500
0
0
0
0
10,200
11,600
13,900
15,300
4,000
0
0
0
0
10,300
11,600
13,900
15,300
4,500
0
0
0
0
10,400
11,700
14,000
15,400
5,000
0
0
0
0
11,100
12,100
14,200
15,500
5,500
0
0
0
0
11,300
12,300
14,300
15,700
6,000
0
0
0
10,200
11,600
13,000
14,500
15,900
6,500
0
0
0
11,000
11,900
13,300
14,700
16,100
7,000
0
0
0
11,200
12,300
13,500
15,000
16,300
7,500
0
0
10,300
11,600
12,700
13,800
15,200
16,500
8,000
0
0
11,100
12,000
13,200
14,100
15,500
16,800
8,500
10,500
11,000
11,500
12,300
13,600
14,300
15,800
17,000
9,000
10,600
11,100
12,000
13,200
13,900
14,600
16,000
17,200
9,500
11,400
11,800
12,400
13,500
14,300
14,900
16,300
17,500
10,000
11,500
12,100
13,200
13,900
14,600
15,300
16,500
17,800
10,500
12,400
12,700
13,600
14,300
15,000
15,600
16,800
18,000
11,000
12,600
13,300
14,000
14,700
15,400
16,000
17,100
18,200
11,500
13,000
13,700
14,400
15,100
15,700
16,300
17,500
18,500
12,000
13,600
14,200
14,900
15,500
16,100
16,700
17,800
18,800
12,500
13,900
14,600
15,300
15,900
16,500
17,100
18,100
19,200
13,000
14,500
15,100
15,700
16,300
16,900
17,500
18,500
19,600
13,500
14,900
15,600
16,200
16,800
17,300
17,800
18,800
20,000
14,000
15,400
16,000
16,600
17,200
17,700
18,200
19,200
20,200
14,500
15,900
16,500
17,100
17,600
18,100
18,600
19,700
20,500
15,000
16,400
17,000
17,500
18,000
18,500
19,000
20,100
20,800
15,500
16,800
17,400
17,900
18,400
18,900
19,500
20,400
21,200
16,000
17,400
17,900
18,400
18,900
19,400
19,900
20,700
21,500
16,500
17,800
18,300
18,800
19,300
19,900
20,300
21,100
21,900
17,000
18,300
18,800
19,300
19,800
20,300
20,700
21,500
22,300
17,500
18,700
19,300
19,800
20,200
20,600
21,000
21,900
22,600
18,000
19,300
19,800
30,200
20,600
21,100
21,500
22,300
23,000
18,500
19,700
20,200
20,700
21,100
21,500
21,900
22,700
23,400
19,000
20,400
20,700
21,100
21,500
21,900
22,300
23,100
23,800
19,500
20,600
21,200
21,600
22,000
22,400
22,700
23,500
24,200
20,000
21,300
21,700
22,000
22,400
22,800
23,200
23,900
24,600
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-3
Appendix G
Table G-1. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: Sea Level
50
60
80
100
20,500
21,600
22,100
22,500
22,900
23,200
23,600
24,300
25,000
21,000
22,300
22,600
23,000
23,300
23,700
24,000
24,700
25,400
21,500
22,500
23,100
23,400
23,800
24,100
24,500
25,200
25,800
22,000
23,200
23,500
23,900
24,200
24,600
24,900
25,600
26,200
22,500
23,500
24,000
24,400
24,700
25,000
25,400
26,000
26,700
23,000
24,200
24,500
24,800
25,200
25,500
25,800
26,500
27,100
23,500
24,500
25,000
25,300
25,600
26,000
26,300
26,900
27,500
24,000
25,300
25,500
25,800
26,100
26,400
26,700
27,300
28,000
24,500
25,500
25,900
26,300
26,600
26,900
27,200
27,800
28,400
25,000
26,100
26,400
26,700
27,000
27,300
27,600
28,200
28,800
25,500
26,400
26,900
27,200
27,500
27,800
28,100
28,700
29,300
26,000
27,100
27,400
27,700
28,000
28,300
28,600
29,100
29,700
26,500
27,400
27,800
28,200
28,500
28,700
29,000
29,600
30,200
27,000
28,100
28,400
28,700
28,900
29,200
29,500
30,100
30,800
27,500
28,400
28,800
29,100
29,400
29,700
30,000
30,600
31,200
28,000
29,100
29,300
29,600
29,900
30,200
30,500
31,100
31,600
28,500
30,200
30,300
30,500
30,700
30,900
31,000
31,500
32,000
29,000
30,200
30,500
30,700
31,000
31,200
31,400
31,900
29,500
30,400
30,800
31,100
31,400
31,600
31,900
30,000
31,200
31,400
31,600
31,900
30,500
31,400
31,800
31,000 31,500 Note: “0” indicates that there is no firing constraint due to minimum range of 10 kilometers. Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-1. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
ALT: Sea Level
2,000
120 17,100
140 18,200
160 19,200
180 20,100
200 21,000
220 21,800
240 22,600
260 23,400
2,500
16,800
17,900
18,900
19,800
20,700
21,600
22,400
23,100
3,000
16,600
17,700
18,700
19,700
20,600
21,500
22,300
23,100
3,500
16,500
17,700
18,700
19,700
20,600
21,400
22,300
23,000
4,000
16,600
17,700
18,700
19,700
20,600
21,500
22,300
23,100
4,500
16,600
17,800
18,800
19,700
20,700
21,500
22,300
23,100
5,000
16,700
17,900
18,900
19,800
20,700
21,600
22,400
23,200
5,500
16,900
18,000
19,000
20,000
20,900
21,700
22,500
23,300
6,000
17,100
18,100
19,200
20,100
21,000
21,800
22,600
23,400
6,500
17,200
18,300
19,300
20,200
21,100
22,000
22,800
23,500
7,000
17,400
18,500
19,500
20,400
21,300
22,100
22,900
23,700
7,500
17,600
18,700
19,700
20,600
21,500
22,300
23,100
23,800
8,000
17,900
18,900
19,900
20,800
21,600
22,500
23,200
24,000
8,500
18,100
19,100
20,100
21,000
21,800
22,600
23,400
24,200
9,000
18,400
19,400
20,300
21,200
22,000
22,800
23,600
24,300
9,500
18,600
19,600
20,500
21,400
22,200
23,000
23,800
24,500
10,000
18,900
19,800
20,700
21,600
22,400
23,200
24,000
24,700
10,500
19,000
20,100
21,000
21,800
22,700
23,400
24,200
24,900
11,000
19,300
20,300
21,200
22,100
22,900
23,700
24,400
25,100
11,500
19,600
20,500
21,400
22,400
23,200
23,900
24,600
25,300
12,000
20,000
20,700
21,700
22,600
23,400
24,100
24,900
25,600
12,500
20,200
20,900
22,000
22,700
23,600
24,400
25,100
25,800
13,000
20,500
21,200
22,100
22,900
23,900
24,600
25,300
26,000
13,500
20,700
21,500
22,300
23,100
24,100
24,700
25,500
26,300
14,000
21,000
21,800
22,600
23,400
24,200
24,800
25,800
26,600
14,500
21,300
22,100
22,900
23,600
24,400
25,100
26,000
26,800
15,000
21,600
22,400
23,200
23,900
24,600
25,400
26,100
27,100
15,500
22,000
22,800
23,500
24,200
24,900
25,600
26,300
27,100
16,000
22,300
23,100
23,800
24,500
25,200
25,900
26,600
27,200
16,500
22,700
23,400
24,200
24,900
25,500
26,200
26,900
27,500
17,000
23,000
23,800
24,500
25,200
25,900
26,500
27,200
27,800
17,500
23,400
24,100
24,800
25,500
26,200
26,800
27,500
28,100
18,000
23,800
24,500
25,200
25,800
26,500
27,100
27,800
28,400
18,500
24,100
24,800
25,500
26,200
26,800
27,500
28,100
28,700
19,000
24,500
25,200
25,900
26,500
27,200
27,800
28,400
29,000
19,500
24,900
25,600
26,200
26,900
27,500
28,100
28,700
29,300
20,000
25,300
26,000
26,600
27,200
27,900
28,500
29,100
29,600
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-5
Appendix G
Table G-1. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: Sea Level
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
20,500
120 25,700
140 26,300
160 27,000
180 27,600
200 28,200
220 28,800
240 29,400
260 30,000
21,000
26,100
26,700
27,400
28,000
28,600
29,200
29,700
30,600
21,500
26,500
27,100
27,700
28,300
28,900
29,500
30,200
31,100
22,000
26,900
27,500
28,100
28,700
29,300
29,900
30,800
31,300
22,500
27,300
27,900
28,500
29,100
29,700
30,400
31,200
31,500
23,000
27,700
28,300
28,900
29,500
30,100
31,000
31,400
31,800
23,500
28,100
28,700
29,300
29,900
30,700
31,300
31,700
24,000
28,500
29,100
29,700
30,400
31,100
31,500
32,000
24,500
29,000
29,500
30,200
31,000
31,400
31,800
25,000
29,400
30,000
30,800
31,300
31,700
25,500
29,800
30,600
31,200
31,600
32,000
26,000
30,400
31,100
31,500
31,900
26,500
30,900
31,400
31,800
27,000
31,300
31,800
27,500
31,700
28,000 28,500 29,000 29,500 30,000 30,500 31,000 31,500 Note: “0” indicates that there is no firing constraint due to minimum range of 10 kilometers. Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-2. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
ALT: 400 m ASL
40
50
60
80
100
2,000
0
0
0
10,400
11,900
13,400
15,000
16,300
2,500
0
0
0
0
11,200
12,200
14,500
15,900
3,000
0
0
0
0
10,600
12,000
14,300
15,700
3,500
0
0
0
0
10,500
11,900
14,200
15,600
4,000
0
0
0
0
10,500
12,000
14,200
15,600
4,500
0
0
0
0
11,000
12,100
14,300
15,700
5,000
0
0
0
0
11,300
12,200
14,400
15,800
5,500
0
0
0
10,100
11,500
12,500
14,600
16,000
6,000
0
0
0
10,500
11,800
13,200
14,800
16,200
6,500
0
0
0
11,100
12,100
13,500
15,000
16,400
7,000
0
0
10,100
11,400
12,400
13,800
15,300
16,600
7,500
0
0
10,500
11,800
13,100
14,100
15,500
16,800
8,000
0
0
11,200
12,200
13,500
14,300
15,800
17,100
8,500
10,500
11,100
11,700
12,600
13,500
14,600
16,100
17,300
9,000
10,600
11,200
12,200
13,000
14,100
14,900
16,400
17,600
9,500
10,800
11,800
12,600
13,400
14,500
15,200
16,600
17,700
10,000
11,500
12,200
13,300
14,100
14,800
15,500
16,800
18,000
10,500
12,400
12,900
13,800
14,500
15,200
15,900
17,100
18,300
11,000
12,600
13,400
14,200
14,900
15,600
16,200
17,400
18,600
11,500
13,400
13,900
14,600
15,300
16,000
16,600
17,700
18,800
12,000
13,600
14,300
15,000
15,700
16,300
17,000
18,100
19,100
12,500
14,400
14,900
15,500
16,100
16,700
17,300
18,400
19,400
13,000
14,600
15,200
15,900
16,500
17,100
17,700
18,800
19,800
13,500
15,400
15,800
16,300
16,900
17,500
18,100
19,100
20,100
14,000
15,600
16,200
16,800
17,400
17,900
18,500
19,500
20,400
14,500
16,400
16,800
17,200
17,800
18,300
18,900
19,800
20,800
15,000
16,500
17,100
17,700
18,200
18,700
19,200
20,200
21,100
15,500
17,400
17,700
18,100
18,600
19,100
19,600
20,600
21,500
16,000
17,500
18,000
18,500
19,100
19,500
20,000
21,000
21,800
16,500
18,300
18,700
19,000
19,500
20,000
20,400
21,300
22,200
17,000
18,500
18,900
19,400
19,900
20,400
20,800
21,700
22,600
17,500
19,300
19,600
19,900
20,400
20,800
21,300
22,100
22,900
18,000
19,400
19,900
20,300
20,800
21,200
21,700
22,500
23,300
18,500
19,800
20,300
20,800
21,200
21,700
22,100
22,900
23,700
19,000
20,300
20,800
21,300
21,700
22,100
22,500
23,300
24,100
19,500
20,700
21,300
21,700
22,100
22,500
22,900
23,700
24,500
20,000
21,300
21,800
22,200
22,600
23,000
23,400
24,100
24,900
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-7
Appendix G
Table G-2. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 400 m ASL
50
60
80
100
20,500
21,700
22,200
22,600
23,000
23,400
23,800
24,600
25,300
21,000
22,300
22,700
23,100
23,500
23,900
24,200
25,000
25,700
21,500
22,600
23,200
23,600
23,900
24,300
24,700
25,400
26,100
22,000
23,300
23,700
24,000
24,400
24,800
25,100
25,800
26,500
22,500
23,600
24,100
24,500
24,900
25,200
25,600
26,300
27,000
23,000
24,300
24,600
25,000
25,300
25,700
26,000
26,700
27,400
23,500
24,600
25,100
25,400
25,800
26,100
26,500
27,100
27,800
24,000
25,200
25,600
25,900
26,300
26,600
26,900
27,600
28,200
24,500
25,500
26,100
26,400
26,700
27,100
27,400
28,000
28,700
25,000
26,300
26,500
26,900
27,200
27,500
27,800
28,500
29,100
25,500
26,500
27,000
27,300
27,700
28,000
28,300
28,900
29,500
26,000
27,300
27,600
27,800
28,100
28,400
28,800
29,400
30,000
26,500
27,500
28,000
28,300
28,600
28,900
29,200
29,800
30,400
27,000
28,200
28,500
28,800
29,100
29,400
29,700
30,300
30,900
27,500
28,500
28,900
29,300
29,600
29,900
30,100
30,700
31,300
28,000
29,300
29,500
29,800
30,000
30,300
30,600
31,200
31,800
28,500
29,500
29,900
30,200
30,500
30,800
31,100
31,700
29,000
30,100
30,400
30,700
31,000
31,300
31,600
29,500
30,500
30,900
31,200
31,500
31,800
30,000
31,200
31,400
31,700
32,000
30,500
31,500
31,900
31,000 31,500 Note: “0” indicates that there is no firing constraint due to minimum range of 10 kilometers. Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-8
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-2. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
ALT: 400 m ASL
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
2,000
17,500
18,600
19,600
20,600
21,500
22,400
23,200
24,000
2,500
17,100
18,300
19,300
20,300
21,200
22,100
23,000
23,700
3,000
17,000
18,100
19,200
20,200
21,100
22,000
22,800
23,600
3,500
16,900
18,100
19,100
20,100
21,100
22,000
22,800
23,600
4,000
16,900
18,100
19,200
20,200
21,100
22,000
22,800
23,600
4,500
17,000
18,200
19,200
20,200
21,200
22,100
22,900
23,700
5,000
17,100
18,300
19,300
20,300
21,200
22,100
23,000
23,800
5,500
17,200
18,400
19,400
20,400
21,400
22,200
23,100
23,900
6,000
17,400
18,500
19,600
20,600
21,500
22,400
23,200
24,000
6,500
17,600
18,700
19,700
20,700
21,600
22,500
23,300
24,100
7,000
17,800
18,900
19,900
20,900
21,800
22,700
23,500
24,300
7,500
18,000
19,100
20,100
21,100
22,000
22,800
23,600
24,400
8,000
18,200
19,300
20,300
21,200
22,100
23,000
23,800
24,600
8,500
18,500
19,500
20,500
21,400
22,300
23,200
24,000
24,800
9,000
18,700
19,800
20,700
21,600
22,500
23,400
24,200
24,900
9,500
19,000
20,000
20,900
21,900
22,700
23,600
24,400
25,100
10,000
19,200
20,200
21,200
22,100
22,900
23,800
24,600
25,300
10,500
19,400
20,500
21,400
22,300
23,200
24,000
24,800
25,500
11,000
19,600
20,700
21,700
22,600
23,400
24,200
25,000
25,700
11,500
19,800
21,000
21,900
22,800
23,700
24,400
25,200
26,000
12,000
20,100
21,200
22,000
23,100
23,900
24,700
25,400
26,200
12,500
20,400
21,300
22,300
23,300
24,100
24,900
25,700
26,400
13,000
20,700
21,600
22,500
23,400
24,300
25,200
26,000
26,700
13,500
21,000
21,900
22,800
23,600
24,500
25,400
26,200
26,900
14,000
21,300
22,200
23,000
23,800
24,700
25,500
26,300
27,200
14,500
21,700
22,500
23,300
24,100
24,900
25,600
26,500
27,400
15,000
22,000
22,800
23,600
24,400
25,100
25,900
26,700
27,600
15,500
22,300
23,200
23,900
24,700
25,400
26,100
26,900
27,900
16,000
22,700
23,500
24,300
25,000
25,700
26,400
27,100
28,000
16,500
23,000
23,800
24,600
25,300
26,000
26,700
27,400
28,100
17,000
23,400
24,200
24,900
25,600
26,300
27,000
27,700
28,400
17,500
23,700
24,500
25,200
26,000
26,700
27,300
28,000
28,700
18,000
24,100
24,900
25,600
26,300
27,000
27,700
28,300
29,000
18,500
24,500
25,200
25,900
26,600
27,300
28,000
28,600
29,300
19,000
24,800
25,600
26,300
27,000
27,700
28,300
29,000
29,600
19,500
25,200
25,900
26,600
27,300
28,000
28,600
29,300
29,900
20,000
25,600
26,300
27,000
27,700
28,300
29,000
29,600
30,200
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-9
Appendix G
Table G-2. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 400 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
20,500
26,000
26,700
27,400
28,000
28,700
29,300
29,900
30,600
21,000
26,400
27,100
27,800
28,400
29,100
29,700
30,300
30,900
21,500
26,800
27,500
28,100
28,800
29,400
30,000
30,600
31,200
22,000
27,200
27,900
28,500
29,200
29,800
30,400
31,000
31,600
22,500
27,600
28,300
28,900
29,500
30,200
30,800
31,400
31,900
23,000
28,000
28,700
29,300
29,900
30,500
31,100
31,700
23,500
28,400
29,100
29,700
30,300
30,900
31,500
24,000
28,900
29,500
30,100
30,700
31,300
31,900
24,500
29,300
29,900
30,500
31,100
31,700
25,000
29,700
30,300
30,900
31,500
25,500
30,100
30,700
31,300
31,900
26,000
30,600
31,200
31,800
26,500
31,000
31,600
27,000
31,500
27,500
31,900
28,000 28,500 29,000 29,500 30,000 30,500 31,000 31,500 Note: ”0” indicates that there is no firing constraint due to minimum range of 10 kilometers. Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-10
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-3. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
ALT: 800 m ASL
40
50
60
80
100
2,000
0
0
0
10,600
11,700
13,600
15,300
16,700
2,500
0
0
0
0
11,200
12,300
14,800
16,200
3,000
0
0
0
0
10,800
11,800
14,600
16,000
3,500
0
0
0
0
4,000
0
0
0
0
10,700 10,800
11,800 11,800
14,500 14,500
16,000 16,000
4,500
0
0
0
0
11,000
11,900
14,600
16,100
5,000
0
0
0
0
11,200
12,100
14,700
16,200
5,500
0
0
0
10,100
11,400
12,600
14,900
16,300
6,000
0
0
0
10,600
11,700
13,300
15,100
16,500
6,500
0
0
0
11,100
12,000
13,600
15,300
16,700
7,000
0
0
0
11,400
12,400
14,000
15,600
16,900
7,500
0
0
10,500
11,600
13,200
14,300
15,800
17,200
8,000
0
0
11,100
12,000
13,500
14,500
16,100
17,400
8,500
0
10,400
11,500
12,400
14,000
14,900
16,300
17,700
9,000
10,800
11,600
12,400
13,100
14,400
15,200
16,600
17,900
9,500
10,900
11,800
12,700
13,900
14,700
15,400
16,900
18,200
10,000
11,600
12,400
13,300
14,300
15,100
15,800
17,200
18,400
10,500
12,400
12,900
13,900
14,700
15,400
16,100
17,400
18,600
11,000
12,600
13,300
14,400
15,100
15,800
16,500
17,700
18,800
11,500
13,500
14,000
14,800
15,500
16,200
16,800
18,100
19,200
12,000
13,700
14,500
15,200
15,900
16,600
17,200
18,400
19,500
12,500
14,500
15,000
15,600
16,300
17,000
17,600
18,700
19,800
13,000
14,700
15,400
16,100
16,700
17,400
18,000
19,100
20,100
13,500
15,100
15,800
16,500
17,100
17,700
18,300
19,400
20,400
14,000
15,700
16,300
17,000
17,600
18,200
18,700
19,800
20,800
14,500
16,100
16,800
17,400
18,000
18,500
19,100
20,100
21,100
15,000
16,600
17,200
17,800
18,400
19,000
19,500
15,500
17,100
17,700
18,300
18,800
19,400
19,900
20,500 20,900
21,500 21,800
16,000
17,600
18,200
18,700
19,200
19,800
20,300
21,200
22,200
16,500
18,100
18,600
19,200
19,700
20,200
20,700
21,600
22,500
17,000
18,500
19,100
19,600
20,100
20,600
21,100
22,000
22,900
17,500
19,000
19,500
20,100
20,500
21,000
21,500
22,400
23,300
18,000
19,500
20,000
20,500
21,000
21,500
21,900
22,800
23,600
18,500
19,900
20,500
21,000
21,400
21,900
22,300
23,200
24,000
19,000
20,500
20,900
21,400
21,900
22,300
22,700
23,600
24,400
19,500
20,900
21,400
21,900
22,300
22,700
23,200
24,000
24,800
20,000
21,400
21,900
22,300
22,800
23,200
23,600
24,400
25,200
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-11
Appendix G
Table G-3. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 800 m ASL
50
60
80
100
20,500
21,800
22,400
22,800
23,200
23,600
24,000
24,800
25,600
21,000
22,400
22,800
23,200
23,700
24,100
24,500
25,200
26,000
21,500
22,800
23,300
23,700
24,100
24,500
24,900
25,700
26,400
22,000
23,400
23,800
24,200
24,600
25,000
25,300
26,100
26,800
22,500
23,700
24,200
24,600
25,000
25,400
25,800
26,500
27,200
23,000
24,300
24,700
25,100
25,500
25,900
26,200
27,000
27,700
23,500
24,700
25,200
25,600
26,000
26,300
26,700
27,400
28,100
24,000
25,300
25,700
26,100
26,400
26,800
27,100
27,800
28,500
24,500
25,700
26,200
26,500
26,900
27,200
27,600
28,300
29,000
25,000
26,300
26,700
27,000
27,400
27,700
28,000
28,700
29,400
25,500
26,600
27,100
27,500
27,800
28,200
28,500
29,200
29,800
26,000
27,300
27,600
28,000
28,300
28,600
29,000
29,600
30,300
26,500
27,600
28,100
28,400
28,800
29,100
29,400
30,100
30,700
27,000
28,300
28,600
28,900
29,200
29,600
29,900
30,500
31,200
27,500
28,600
29,100
29,400
29,700
30,000
30,400
31,000
31,600
28,000
29,300
29,600
29,900
30,200
30,500
30,800
31,500
28,500
29,500
30,100
30,400
30,700
31,000
31,300
31,900
29,000
30,200
30,600
30,900
31,200
31,500
31,800
29,500
30,600
31,100
31,400
31,700
32,000
30,000
31,300
31,600
31,900
30,500
31,600
31,000 31,500 Note: “0” indicates that there is no firing constraint due to minimum range of 10 kilometers. Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-12
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-3. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
ALT: 800 m ASL
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
2,000
17,900
19,100
20,100
21,100
22,100
23,000
23,800
24,600
2,500
17,500
18,700
19,800
20,800
21,800
22,700
23,500
24,400
3,000
17,300
18,500
19,600
20,700
21,600
22,600
23,400
24,300
3,500
17,300
18,500
19,600
20,600
21,600
22,500
23,400
24,200
4,000
17,300
18,500
19,600
20,600
21,600
22,500
23,400
24,300
4,500
17,400
18,600
19,700
20,700
21,700
22,600
23,500
24,300
5,000
17,500
18,700
19,800
20,800
21,800
22,700
23,600
24,400
5,500
17,600
18,800
19,900
20,900
21,900
22,800
23,700
24,500
6,000
17,800
18,900
20,000
21,000
22,000
22,900
23,800
24,600
6,500
18,000
19,100
20,200
21,200
22,100
23,100
23,900
24,700
7,000
18,200
19,300
20,400
21,400
22,300
23,200
24,100
24,900
7,500
18,400
19,500
20,500
21,500
22,500
23,400
24,200
25,100
8,000
18,600
19,700
20,800
21,700
22,700
23,600
24,400
25,200
8,500
18,900
19,900
21,000
21,900
22,900
23,700
24,600
25,400
9,000
19,100
20,200
21,200
22,100
23,000
23,900
24,800
25,600
9,500
19,300
20,400
21,400
22,400
23,300
24,100
25,000
25,800
10,000
19,500
20,700
21,600
22,600
23,500
24,300
25,200
26,000
10,500
19,800
20,900
21,900
22,800
23,700
24,500
25,400
26,200
11,000
20,100
21,100
22,200
23,100
23,900
24,800
25,600
26,400
11,500
20,300
21,300
22,400
23,300
24,200
25,000
25,800
26,600
12,000
20,500
21,600
22,600
23,500
24,400
25,200
26,100
26,800
12,500
20,800
21,800
22,800
23,800
24,700
25,500
26,300
27,100
13,000
21,100
22,000
22,900
24,100
24,900
25,800
26,500
27,300
13,500
21,400
22,300
23,200
24,300
25,200
26,000
26,800
27,600
14,000
21,700
22,600
23,500
24,500
25,500
26,300
27,100
27,900
14,500
22,000
22,900
23,800
24,700
25,600
26,400
27,400
28,100
15,000
22,400
23,200
24,100
24,900
25,700
26,700
27,500
28,300
15,500
22,700
23,500
24,400
25,200
25,900
26,900
27,600
28,500
16,000
23,000
23,900
24,700
25,500
26,300
27,100
27,700
28,700
16,500
23,400
24,200
25,000
25,800
26,500
27,300
28,000
28,900
17,000
23,700
24,600
25,300
26,100
26,900
27,600
28,300
29,000
17,500
24,100
24,900
25,700
26,400
27,200
27,900
28,600
29,300
18,000
24,500
25,300
26,000
26,800
27,500
28,200
28,900
29,600
18,500
24,800
25,600
26,400
27,100
27,800
28,500
29,200
29,900
19,000
25,200
26,000
26,700
27,400
28,200
28,800
29,500
30,200
19,500
25,600
26,300
27,100
27,800
28,500
29,200
29,800
30,500
20,000
26,000
26,700
27,400
28,100
28,800
29,500
30,200
30,800
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-13
Appendix G
Table G-3. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 800 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
20,500
26,400
27,100
27,800
28,500
29,200
29,900
30,500
31,200
21,000
26,700
27,500
28,200
28,900
29,500
30,200
30,900
31,500
21,500
27,100
27,900
28,600
29,200
29,900
30,600
31,200
31,800
22,000
27,500
28,300
28,900
29,600
30,300
30,900
31,600
22,500
28,000
28,600
29,300
30,000
30,600
31,300
31,900
23,000
28,400
29,000
29,700
30,400
31,000
31,700
23,500
28,800
29,400
30,100
30,800
31,400
32,000
24,000
29,200
29,900
30,500
31,200
31,800
24,500
29,600
30,300
30,900
31,600
25,000
30,000
30,700
31,300
32,000
25,500
30,500
31,100
31,800
26,000
30,900
31,600
26,500
31,400
32,000
27,000
31,800
27,500 28,000 28,500 29,000 29,500 30,000 30,500 31,000 31,500 Note: “0” indicates that there is no firing constraint due to minimum range of 10 kilometers. Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-14
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-4. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
40
50
60
80
100
2,000
0
0
0
11,100
12,500
14,000
15,600
17,000
2,500
0
0
0
0
11,700
13,000
15,100
16,600
3,000
0
0
0
0
11,200
12,600
14,900
16,400
3,500
0
0
0
0
11,100
12,500
14,800
16,300
4,000
0
0
0
0
11,200
12,600
14,800
16,300
4,500
0
0
0
0
11,300
12,700
14,900
16,400
5,000
0
0
0
0
11,600
12,900
15,000
16,500
5,500
0
0
0
10,000
12,100
13,100
15,200
16,700
6,000
0
0
0
11,000
12,400
13,400
15,400
16,900
6,500
0
0
0
11,300
12,700
14,000
15,600
17,100
7,000
0
0
0
12,100
13,000
14,300
15,900
17,300
7,500
0
0
10,900
12,300
13,200
14,600
16,100
17,500
8,000
0
0
11,300
12,700
13,800
14,900
16,400
17,800
8,500
0
10,300
12,100
13,000
14,300
15,200
16,600
18,000
9,000
10,700
11,300
12,600
13,400
14,600
15,400
16,800
18,300
9,500
11,600
12,200
13,000
14,100
15,000
15,700
17,100
18,500
10,000
11,700
12,600
13,400
14,500
15,300
16,000
17,400
18,700
10,500
12,400
13,000
14,100
14,900
15,700
16,400
17,700
19,000
11,000
12,700
13,500
14,500
15,300
16,000
16,700
18,000
19,200
11,500
13,600
14,200
15,000
15,700
16,400
17,100
18,300
19,500
12,000
13,800
14,600
15,400
16,100
16,800
17,400
18,700
19,800
12,500
14,500
15,100
15,800
16,500
17,200
17,800
19,000
20,100
13,000
14,800
15,500
16,300
16,900
17,600
18,200
19,300
20,400
13,500
15,400
16,000
16,700
17,300
18,000
18,600
19,700
20,800
14,000
15,700
16,500
17,100
17,800
18,400
19,000
20,100
21,100
14,500
16,400
16,900
17,600
18,200
18,800
19,300
20,400
21,400
15,000
16,600
17,400
18,000
18,600
19,200
19,700
20,800
21,800
15,500
17,200
17,800
18,400
19,000
19,600
20,100
21,200
22,100
16,000
17,600
18,300
18,900
19,400
20,000
20,500
21,500
22,500
16,500
18,200
18,700
19,300
19,900
20,400
20,900
21,900
22,900
17,000
18,500
19,200
19,800
20,300
20,800
21,300
22,300
23,200
17,500
19,400
19,800
20,200
20,700
21,200
21,700
22,700
23,600
18,000
19,600
20,100
20,700
21,200
21,700
22,100
23,100
24,000
18,500
20,100
20,600
21,100
21,600
22,100
22,600
23,500
24,300
19,000
20,500
21,100
21,600
22,100
22,500
23,000
23,900
24,700
19,500
21,000
21,500
22,000
22,500
23,000
23,400
24,300
25,100
20,000
21,400
22,000
22,500
22,900
23,400
23,800
24,700
25,500
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-15
Appendix G
Table G-4. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
50
60
80
100
20,500
22,000
22,500
22,900
23,400
23,800
24,300
25,100
25,900
21,000
22,400
22,900
23,400
23,800
24,300
24,700
25,500
26,300
21,500
23,000
23,400
23,900
24,300
24,700
25,100
25,900
26,700
22,000
23,400
23,800
24,300
24,700
25,200
25,600
26,400
27,100
22,500
23,900
24,400
24,800
25,200
25,600
26,000
26,800
27,600
23,000
24,300
24,700
25,300
25,700
26,100
26,400
27,200
28,000
23,500
24,900
25,300
25,700
26,100
26,500
26,900
27,700
28,400
24,000
25,400
25,800
26,200
26,600
27,000
27,300
28,100
28,800
24,500
25,800
26,300
26,700
27,100
27,400
27,800
28,500
29,200
25,000
26,400
26,800
27,200
27,500
27,900
28,300
29,000
29,700
25,,500
26,800
27,300
27,600
28,000
28,400
28,700
29,400
30,100
26,000
27,300
27,600
28,100
28,500
28,800
29,200
29,900
30,600
26,500
27,700
28,200
28,600
28,900
29,300
29,600
30,300
31,000
27,000
28,300
28,600
29,100
29,400
29,800
30,100
30,800
31,500
27,500
28,700
29,200
29,500
29,900
30,200
30,600
31,300
31,900
28,000
29,300
29,700
30,000
30,400
30,700
31,100
31,700
28,500
29,700
30,200
30,500
30,900
31,200
31,500
29,000
30,300
30,700
31,000
31,400
31,700
32,000
29,500
30,700
31,200
31,500
31,800
30,000
31,300
31,600
32,000
30,500
31,700
31,000 31,500 Note: “0” indicates that there is no firing constraint due to minimum range of 10 kilometers. Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-16
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-4. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
2,000
18,300
19,500
20,600
21,600
22,600
23,500
24,400
25,200
2,500
17,900
19,100
20,200
21,300
22,300
23,200
24,100
25,000
3,000
17,700
19,000
20,100
21,200
22,200
23,100
24,000
24,900
3,500
17,700
18,900
20,000
21,100
22,100
23,100
24,000
24,900
4,000
17,700
18,900
20,100
21,100
22,100
23,100
24,000
24,900
4,500
17,800
19,000
20,100
21,200
22,200
23,100
24,100
24,900
5,000
17,900
19,100
20,200
21,300
22,300
23,200
24,100
25,000
5,500
18,000
19,200
20,300
21,400
22,400
23,300
24,300
25,100
6,000
18,200
19,400
20,500
21,500
22,500
23,500
24,400
25,200
6,500
18,300
19,500
20,600
21,700
22,700
23,600
24,500
25,400
7,000
18,500
19,700
20,800
21,900
22,800
23,800
24,700
25,500
7,500
18,800
19,900
21,000
22,000
23,000
23,900
24,800
25,700
8,000
19,000
20,100
21,200
22,200
23,200
24,100
25,000
25,900
8,500
19,200
20,400
21,400
22,400
23,400
24,300
25,200
26,000
9,000
19,500
20,600
21,600
22,600
23,600
24,500
25,400
26,200
9,500
19,700
20,800
21,900
22,900
23,800
24,700
25,600
26,400
10,000
20,000
21,100
22,100
23,100
24,000
24,900
25,800
26,600
10,500
20,300
21,300
22,300
23,300
24,200
25,100
26,000
26,800
11,000
20,500
21,600
22,600
23,600
24,500
25,300
26,200
27,000
11,500
20,700
21,900
22,900
23,800
24,700
25,600
26,400
27,300
12,000
20,900
22,200
23,100
24,100
24,900
25,800
26,700
27,500
12,500
21,200
22,300
23,300
24,300
25,200
26,100
26,900
27,700
13,000
21,500
22,500
23,600
24,600
25,500
26,300
27,200
28,000
13,500
21,800
22,700
23,900
24,800
25,700
26,600
27,400
28,200
14,000
22,100
23,000
24,100
24,900
26,100
26,900
27,700
28,500
14,500
22,400
23,300
24,200
25,100
26,300
27,100
28,000
28,800
15,000
22,700
23,600
24,500
25,400
26,300
27,200
28,300
29,000
15,500
23,100
24,000
24,800
25,700
26,500
27,500
28,400
29,100
16,000
23,400
24,300
25,100
26,000
26,800
27,700
28,500
29,300
16,500
23,800
24,600
25,500
26,300
27,100
27,900
28,600
29,500
17,000
24,100
25,000
25,800
26,600
27,400
28,100
28,900
29,700
17,500
24,500
25,300
26,100
26,900
27,700
28,400
29,200
29,900
18,000
24,800
25,700
26,500
27,200
28,000
28,800
29,500
30,200
18,500
25,200
26,000
26,800
27,600
28,300
29,100
29,800
30,500
19,000
25,600
26,400
27,200
27,900
28,700
29,400
30,100
30,800
19,500
25,900
26,700
27,500
28,300
29,000
29,700
30,400
31,100
20,000
26,300
27,100
27900
28,600
29,300
30100
30,800
31,500
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-17
Appendix G
Table G-4. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
20,500
26,700
120
27,500
28,200
29,000
29,700
30,400
31,100
31,800
21,000
27,100
27,900
28,600
29,300
30,100
30,800
31,500
21,500
27,500
28,300
29,000
29,700
30,400
31,100
31,800
22,000
27,900
28,600
29,400
30,100
30,800
31,500
22,500
28,300
29,000
29,800
30,500
31,200
31,800
23,000
28,700
29,400
30,100
30,900
31,500
23,500
29,100
29,800
30,500
31,200
31,900
24,000
29,500
30,200
31,000
31,600
24,500
30,000
30,700
31,400
32,000
25,000
30,400
31,100
31,800
25,500
30,800
31,500
26,000
31,300
31,900
26,500
31,700
27,000 27,500 28,000 28,500 29,000 29,500 30,000 30,500 31,000 31,500 Note: “0” indicates that there is no firing constraint due to minimum range of 10 kilometers. Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-18
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-5. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
40
50
60
80
100
2,000
0
0
0
12,200
13,400
15,200
17,000
18,600
2,500
0
0
0
0
12,600
14,100
16,400
18,100
3,000
0
0
0
0
12,300
13,800
16,100
17,900
3,500
0
0
0
0
12,200
13,700
16,000
17,800
4,000
0
0
0
0
12,200
13,700
16,000
17,800
4,500
0
0
0
0
12,300
13,800
16,100
17,800
5,000
0
0
0
0
12,500
14,000
16,200
17,900
5,500
0
0
0
0
13,100
14,200
16,400
18,100
6,000
0
0
0
10,400
13,400
14,500
16,600
18,300
6,500
0
0
0
12,200
13,700
15,000
16,800
18,500
7,000
0
0
0
12,600
14,000
15,300
17,100
18,700
7,500
0
0
0
12,700
14,400
15,600
17,300
19,000
8,000
0
0
11,100
13,200
14,700
15,900
17,600
19,200
8,500
10,900
11,800
12,700
14,000
15,100
16,200
17,900
19,500
9,000
11,100
12,100
13,000
14,400
15,500
16,500
18,100
19,800
9,500
11,800
12,600
13,400
14,700
15,900
16,700
18,400
20,000
10,000
12,000
12,800
14,100
15,300
16,200
17,000
18,800
20,300
10,500
12,600
13,500
14,600
15,600
16,500
17,400
19,100
20,600
11,000
12,900
14,000
15,100
16,100
16,900
17,700
19,300
20,900
11,500
13,500
14,500
15,600
16,500
17,300
18,100
19,600
21,200
12,000
14,000
15,100
16,000
16,900
17,700
18,500
19,900
21,400
12,500
14,700
15,500
16,400
17,300
18,100
18,800
20,300
21,700
13,000
15,500
16,000
16,900
17,700
18,500
19,200
20,600
21,900
13,500
15,700
16,500
17,300
18,100
18,900
19,600
21,000
22,300
14,000
16,100
16,900
17,700
18,500
19,300
20,000
21,300
22,600
14,500
16,600
17,400
18,200
18,900
19,700
20,400
21,700
22,900
15,000
17,100
17,900
18,600
19,400
20,100
20,800
22,100
23,300
15,500
17,500
18,300
19,100
19,800
20,500
21,200
22,400
23,600
16,000
18,000
18,800
19,500
20,200
20,900
21,600
22,800
24,000
16,500
18,600
19,200
20,000
20,600
21,300
22,000
23,200
24,400
17,000
19,000
19,700
20,400
21,100
21,700
22,400
23,600
24,700
17,500
19,600
20,200
20,900
21,500
22,200
22,800
24,000
25,100
18,000
19,900
20,600
21,300
22,000
22,600
23,200
24,400
25,700
18,500
20,600
21,100
21,800
22,400
23,000
23,600
24,700
26,100
19,000
20,900
21,600
22,200
22,800
23,400
24,000
25,200
26,400
19,500
21,400
22,100
22,700
23,300
23,900
24,400
25,700
26,700
20,000
21,900
22,500
23,100
23,700
24,300
24,900
26,100
27,000
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-19
Appendix G
Table G-5. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
50
60
80
100
20,500
22,500
23,000
23,600
24,200
24,700
25,400
26,500
27,400
21,000
22,800
23,500
24,100
24,600
25,200
25,900
26,800
27,800
21,500
23,400
24,000
24,500
25,100
25,700
26,300
27,200
28,200
22,000
23,800
24,400
25,000
25,600
26,200
26,600
27,600
28,600
22,500
24,400
24,900
25,500
26,100
26,600
27,000
28,000
29,000
23,000
24,800
25,400
26,000
26,500
27,000
27,500
28,500
29,400
23,500
25,400
25,900
26,400
26,900
27,400
27,900
28,900
29,800
24,000
25,800
26,400
26,900
27,400
27,900
28,400
29,300
30,300
24,500
26,400
26,800
27,300
27,800
28,300
28,800
29,800
30,700
25,000
26,700
27,300
27,800
28,300
28,800
29,200
30,200
31,100
25,500
27,400
27,800
28,300
28,800
29,200
29,700
30,600
31,600
26,000
27,700
28,300
28,700
29,200
29,700
30,200
31,100
32,000
26,500
28,400
28,800
29,200
29,700
30,200
30,600
31,600
27,000
28,700
29,200
29,700
30,200
30,600
31,100
32,000
27,500
29,300
29,700
30,200
30,700
31,100
31,600
28,000
29,700
30,200
30,700
31,100
31,600
28,500
30,300
30,700
31,200
31,600
29,000
30,700
31,200
31,700
29,500
31,300
31,700
30,000
31,700
30,500 31,000 31,500 Note: “‘0” indicates that there is no firing constraint due to minimum range of 10 kilometers. Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-20
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-5. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
2,000
20,100
21,500
22,700
24,000
25,100
26,200
27,300
28,300
2,500
19,600
21,000
22,300
23,600
24,800
25,900
27,000
28,000
3,000
19,400
20,800
22,200
23,400
24,600
25,700
26,800
27,900
3,500
19,300
20,700
22,100
23,300
24,500
25,700
26,800
27,900
4,000
19,300
20,700
22,100
23,400
24,500
25,700
26,800
27,900
4,500
19,400
20,800
22,200
23,400
24,600
25,800
26,900
27,900
5,000
19,500
20,900
22,300
23,500
24,700
25,800
27,000
28,000
5,500
19,600
21,100
22,400
23,600
24,800
26,000
27,100
28,100
6,000
19,800
21,200
22,500
23,800
25,000
26,100
27,200
28,300
6,500
20,000
21,400
22,700
23,900
25,100
26,300
27,300
28,400
7,000
20,200
21,600
22,900
24,100
25,300
26,400
27,500
28,600
7,500
20,400
21,800
23,100
24,300
25,500
26,600
27,700
28,700
8,000
20,700
22,000
23,300
24,500
25,700
26,800
27,900
28,900
8,500
20,900
22,300
23,500
24,700
25,900
27,000
28,100
29,100
9,000
21,200
22,500
23,800
24,900
26,100
27,200
28,300
29,300
9,500
21,400
22,700
24,000
25,200
26,300
27,400
28,500
29,500
10,000
21,700
23,000
24,200
25,400
26,500
27,600
28,700
29,700
10,500
22,000
23,300
24,500
25,700
26,800
27,900
28,900
29,900
11,000
22,300
23,600
24,700
25,900
27,000
28,100
29,100
30,200
11,500
22,500
23,800
25,000
26,200
27,300
28,300
29,400
30,400
12,000
22,700
24,200
25,300
26,500
27,500
28,600
29,600
30,700
12,500
22,900
24,400
25,600
26,700
27,800
28,900
29,900
30,900
13,000
23,200
24,600
25,700
27,000
28,100
29,100
30,100
31,200
13,500
23,500
24,800
25,800
27,300
28,300
29,400
30,400
31,500
14,000
23,800
25,000
26,100
27,600
28,600
29,700
30,700
31,800
14,500
24,100
25,300
26,500
27,900
29,000
29,900
31,000
32,000
15,000
24,400
25,800
26,800
28,200
29,200
30,200
31,300
15,500
24,800
26,200
27,100
28,400
29,400
30,600
31,600
16,000
25,200
26,400
27,300
28,500
29,800
30,900
31,900
16,500
25,700
26,700
27,600
28,600
30,100
31,000
17,000
26,100
26,900
27,900
28,900
30,200
31,200
17,500
26,400
27,200
28,200
29,200
30,500
31,600
18,000
26,600
27,600
28,600
29,500
30,800
31,900
18,500
26,900
27,900
28,900
29,900
31,000
19,000
27,300
28,300
29,300
30,200
31,200
19,500
27,600
28,600
29,600
30,600
31,600
20,000
28,000
29,000
30,000
30,900
31,800
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-21
Appendix G
Table G-5. M26 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
140
160
180
20,500
28,400
120
29,400
30,300
31,300
21,000
28,800
29,800
30,700
31,600
21,500
29,200
30,100
31,100
32,000
22,000
29,600
30,500
31,500
22,500
30,000
30,900
31,800
23,000
30,400
31,300
23,500
30,800
31,700
24,000
31,200
24,500
31,600
200
220
240
260
25,000 25,500 26,000 26,500 27,000 27,500 28,000 28,500 29,000 29,500 30,000 30,500 31,000 31,500 Note: “‘0” indicates that there is no firing constraint due to minimum range of 10 kilometers. Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-22
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-6. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
ALT: Sea Level
40
50
60
80
100
2,000
0
0
0
0
0
16,100
18,600
20,100
2,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,100
19,500
3,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
17,200
19,200
3,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
16,900
19,000
4,000
0
0
0
16,700
19,000
4,500
0
0
0
16,600
18,900
5,000
0
0
0
16,700
19,000
5,500
0
0
0
16,900
19,000
6,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
17,100
19,100
6,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
17,200
19,200
7,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
17,400
19,300
7,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,000
19,500
8,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,200
19,700
8,500
0
0
0
0
0
16,100
18,400
20,000
9,000
0
0
0
0
0
16,300
18,600
20,100
9,500
0
0
0
0
0
16,500
18,800
20,300
10,000
0
0
0
0
16,000
17,000
19,000
20,400
10,500
0
0
0
0
16,300
17,300
19,200
20,600
11,000
0
0
0
0
16,600
18,000
19,400
20,800
11,500
0
0
0
16,200
17,100
18,300
19,800
21,100
12,000
0
0
0
16,500
17,500
18,600
20,100
21,300
12,500
0
0
16,100
16,900
18,200
18,900
20,300
21,500
13,000
0
0
16,400
17,400
18,500
19,200
20,600
21,800
13,500
0
16,100
16,900
18,100
18,800
19,600
20,900
22,100
14,000
0
16,500
17,400
18,500
19,200
20,000
21,200
22,300
14,500
16,200
17,000
18,100
18,900
19,600
20,300
21,500
22,600
15,000
16,600
17,600
18,500
19,200
20,000
20,600
21,800
22,900
15,500
17,100
18,200
18,900
19,700
20,400
20,900
22,100
23,200
16,000
17,900
18,600
19,300
20,100
20,700
21,300
22,400
23,500
16,500
18,400
19,100
19,900
20,500
21,100
21,700
22,800
23,800
17,000
18,800
19,600
20,300
20,900
21,500
22,000
23,100
24,100
17,500
19,300
20,100
20,700
21,300
21,800
22,400
23,500
24,500
18,000
19,900
20,500
21,100
21,700
22,200
22,800
23,800
24,800
18,500
20,400
20,900
21,500
22,100
22,600
23,200
24,200
25,100
19,000
20,800
21,400
22,000
22,500
23,000
23,500
24,500
25,500
19,500
21,300
21,800
22,400
22,900
23,400
23,900
24,900
25,800
20,000
21,800
22,300
22,800
23,300
23,800
24,300
25,300
26,200
12 August 2008
NO FIRING CONSTRAINT (10 KM MIN RANGE)
FM 3-09.60
G-23
Appendix G
Table G-6. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: Sea Level
50
60
80
100
20,500
22,200
22,800
23,300
23,800
24,300
24,700
25,600
26,600
21,000
22,700
23,200
23,700
24,200
24,700
25,100
26,000
27,000
21,500
23,200
23,700
24,200
24,600
25,100
25,500
26,500
27,400
22,000
23,700
24,200
24,600
25,100
25,500
26,000
26,900
27,800
22,500
24,200
24,600
25,100
25,500
26,000
26,400
27,300
28,200
23,000
24,600
25,100
25,500
26,000
26,400
26,900
27,700
28,600
23,500
25,100
25,600
26,000
26,400
26,900
27,300
28,200
29,000
24,000
25,600
26,000
26,500
26,900
27,300
27,800
28,600
29,400
24,500
26,100
26,500
27,000
27,400
27,800
28,200
29,000
29,900
25,000
26,600
27,000
27,500
27,900
28,300
28,700
29,500
30,300
25,500
27,100
27,500
27,900
28,300
28,700
29,100
29,900
30,700
26,000
27,700
28,000
28,400
28,800
29,200
29,600
30,400
31,200
26,500
28,200
28,500
28,900
29,300
29,700
30,100
30,800
31,600
27,000
28,700
29,000
29,400
29,800
30,200
30,500
31,300
32,100
27,500
29,200
29,500
29,900
30,300
30,600
31,000
31,800
32,500
28,000
29,700
30,000
30,400
30,800
31,100
31,500
32,300
32,900
28,500
30,200
30,500
30,900
31,200
31,600
32,000
32,700
33,400
29,000
30,700
31,000
31,400
31,700
32,100
32,500
33,200
33,900
29,500
31,200
31,500
31,900
32,300
32,600
32,900
33,600
34,400
30,000
31,700
32,100
32,400
32,700
33,000
33,400
34,100
34,900
30,500
32,200
32,600
32,900
33,200
33,600
33,900
34,600
35,400
31,000
32,700
33,000
33,400
33,700
34,100
34,400
35,100
35,800
31,500
33,200
33,500
33,900
34,200
34,600
34,900
35,600
36,300
32,000
33,700
34,100
34,400
34,700
35,100
35,400
36,100
36,800
32,500
34,300
34,600
34,900
35,200
35,600
35,900
36,600
37,300
33,000
34,800
35,100
35,400
35,800
36,100
36,400
37,100
37,800
33,500
35,300
35,600
35,900
36,300
36,600
37,000
37,600
38,400
34,000
35,800
36,100
36,500
36,800
37,100
37,500
38,200
38,900
34,500
36,300
36,700
37,000
37,300
37,600
38,000
38,700
39,400
35,000
36,900
37,200
37,500
37,800
38,200
38,500
39,200
39,900
35,500
37,400
37,700
38,000
38,400
38,700
39,100
39,700
40,400
36,000
37,900
38,200
38,600
38,900
39,200
39,600
40,200
40,900
36,500
38,500
38,800
39,100
39,400
39,700
40,100
40,800
41,400
37,000
39,000
39,300
39,600
39,900
40,300
40,600
41,300
41,900
37,500
39,500
39,800
40,100
40,400
40,800
41,100
41,800
38,000
40,000
40,300
40,600
41,000
41,300
41,600
38,500
40,500
40,900
41,200
41,500
41,800
39,000
41,100
41,400
41,700
42,000
G-24
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-6. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10 39,500
41,600
20
30
40
ALT: Sea Level
50
60
80
100
41,900
40,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
Table G-6. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: Sea Level
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
2,000
21,300
22,500
23,600
24,600
25,600
26,600
27,500
28,500
2,500
20,900
22,100
23,200
24,300
25,200
26,200
27,200
28,100
3,000
20,600
21,800
23,000
24,000
25,000
26,000
27,000
28,000
3,500
20,500
21,700
22,900
23,900
24,900
25,900
26,900
27,900
4,000
20,400
21,600
22,800
23,900
24,900
25,900
26,900
27,800
4,500
20,400
21,600
22,800
23,900
24,900
25,900
26,800
27,800
5,000
20,400
21,600
22,800
23,900
24,900
25,900
26,900
27,800
5,500
20,500
21,700
22,900
23,900
24,900
25,900
26,900
27,900
6,000
20,500
21,800
22,900
24,000
25,000
26,000
27,000
27,900
6,500
20,600
21,900
23,000
24,100
25,100
26,100
27,100
28,000
7,000
20,700
22,000
23,100
24,200
25,200
26,200
27,100
28,100
7,500
20,900
22,100
23,200
24,300
25,300
26,300
27,200
28,200
8,000
21,000
22,200
23,300
24,400
25,400
26,400
27,400
28,300
8,500
21,200
22,400
23,500
24,500
25,500
26,500
27,500
28,400
9,000
21,300
22,500
23,600
24,600
25,600
26,600
27,600
28,600
9,500
21,500
22,700
23,800
24,800
25,800
26,800
27,700
28,700
10,000
21,700
22,800
23,900
24,900
25,900
26,900
27,900
28,800
10,500
21,900
23,000
24,100
25,100
26,100
27,100
28,000
29,000
11,000
22,100
23,200
24,300
25,300
26,200
27,200
28,200
29,100
11,500
22,300
23,400
24,400
25,400
26,400
27,400
28,400
29,300
12,000
22,500
23,600
24,600
25,600
26,600
27,600
28,500
29,500
12,500
22,700
23,800
24,800
25,800
26,800
27,800
28,700
29,600
13,000
22,900
24,000
25,000
26,000
27,000
28,000
28,900
29,800
13,500
23,200
24,200
25,200
26,200
27,200
28,200
29,100
30,000
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-25
Appendix G
Table G-6. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: Sea Level
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
14,000
23,400
24,400
25,400
26,400
27,400
28,400
29,300
30,200
14,500
23,700
24,700
25,700
26,700
27,600
28,600
29,500
30,400
15,000
24,000
24,900
25,900
26,900
27,900
28,800
29,700
30,600
15,500
24,200
25,200
26,200
27,100
28,100
29,000
29,900
30,800
16,000
24,500
25,500
26,400
27,400
28,300
29,300
30,200
31,100
16,500
24,800
25,800
26,700
27,700
28,600
29,500
30,400
31,300
17,000
25,100
26,000
27,000
27,900
28,800
29,800
30,700
31,500
17,500
25,400
26,400
27,300
28,200
29,100
30,000
30,900
31,800
18,000
25,700
26,700
27,600
28,500
29,400
30,300
31,100
32,100
18,500
26,100
27,000
27,900
28,800
29,700
30,600
31,400
32,300
19,000
26,400
27,300
28,300
29,100
30,000
30,900
31,700
32,600
19,500
26,800
27,700
28,600
29,500
30,300
31,200
32,100
32,900
20,000
27,100
28,000
28,900
29,800
30,600
31,500
32,400
33,200
20,500
27,500
28,400
29,300
30,100
31,000
31,800
32,700
33,500
21,000
27,900
28,800
29,600
30,500
31,300
32,200
33,000
33,800
21,500
28,300
29,100
30,000
30,800
31,700
32,500
33,300
34,200
22,000
28,600
29,500
30,300
31,200
32,000
32,800
33,700
34,500
22,500
29,000
29,900
30,700
31,500
32,400
33,200
34,000
34,900
23,000
29,400
30,300
31,100
31,900
32,700
33,600
34,400
35,300
23,500
29,800
30,700
31,500
32,300
33,100
33,900
34,800
35,600
24,000
30,200
31,100
31,900
32,700
33,500
34,300
35,200
36,000
24,500
30,700
31,500
32,300
33,100
33,900
34,700
35,600
36,400
25,000
31,100
31,900
32,700
33,500
34,300
35,100
36,000
36,800
25,500
31,500
32,300
33,100
33,900
34,700
35,500
36,400
37,200
26,000
32,000
32,700
33,500
34,300
35,100
36,000
36,800
37,600
26,500
32,400
33,100
33,900
34,700
35,600
36,400
37,200
38,100
27,000
32,800
33,600
34,400
35,200
36,000
36,800
37,700
38,500
27,500
33,300
34,000
34,800
35,600
36,400
37,300
38,100
39,000
28,000
33,700
34,500
35,300
36,100
36,900
37,700
38,600
39,400
28,500
34,200
35,000
35,700
36,500
37,300
38,200
39,000
39,900
29,000
34,700
35,400
36,200
37,000
37,800
38,600
39,500
40,300
G-26
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-6. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: Sea Level
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
29,500
35,100
35,900
36,700
37,500
38,300
39,100
40,000
40,800
30,000
35,600
36,400
37,100
37,900
38,800
39,600
40,400
41,300
30,500
36,100
36,900
37,600
38,400
39,300
40,100
40,900
41,700
31,000
36,600
37,300
38,100
38,900
39,700
40,500
41,400
31,500
37,100
37,800
38,600
39,400
40,200
41,000
41,800
32,000
37,600
38,300
39,100
39,900
40,700
41,500
32,500
38,100
38,900
39,600
40,400
41,200
42,000
33,000
38,600
39,400
40,100
40,900
41,700
33,500
39,100
39,900
40,600
41,400
34,000
39,600
40,400
41,100
41,900
34,500
40,100
40,900
41,600
35,000
40,600
41,400
35,500
41,100
41,900
36,000
41,600
36,500 37,000 37,500 38,000 38,500 39,000 39,500 40,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-27
Appendix G
Table G-7. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
ALT: 400 m ASL
40
50
60
80
100
2,000
0
0
0
0
0
16,600
19,200
20,600
2,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,600
20,100
3,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
17,600
19,900
3,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
17,100
19,700
4,000
0
0
0
16,900
19,600
4,500
0
0
0
16,900
19,600
5,000
0
0
0
17,000
19,600
5,500
0
0
0
17,200
19,700
6,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
17,400
19,800
6,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
17,600
19,900
7,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
17,800
20,000
7,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,500
20,100
8,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,600
20,200
8,500
0
0
0
0
0
16,500
18,800
20,400
9,000
0
0
0
0
0
16,700
19,000
20,500
9,500
0
0
0
0
0
16,900
19,400
20,700
10,000
0
0
0
0
16,500
17,300
19,600
20,900
10,500
0
0
0
0
16,700
17,600
19,800
21,100
11,000
0
0
0
0
16,900
17,900
20,000
21,300
11,500
0
0
0
16,500
17,500
18,700
20,200
21,500
12,000
0
0
0
16,800
17,800
19,000
20,500
21,800
12,500
0
0
0
17,200
18,600
19,500
20,700
22,000
13,000
0
0
16,700
17,700
18,800
19,800
21,000
22,300
13,500
0
0
17,100
18,500
19,400
20,000
21,300
22,500
14,000
15,400
16,700
17,700
18,800
19,700
20,300
21,600
22,800
14,500
15,500
17,200
18,400
19,300
20,000
20,600
21,900
23,100
15,000
16,800
17,700
18,800
19,700
20,300
20,900
22,200
23,400
15,500
17,500
18,500
19,400
20,000
20,600
21,300
22,500
23,700
16,000
17,900
18,800
19,800
20,400
21,000
21,600
22,900
24,000
16,500
18,600
19,500
20,100
20,700
21,400
22,000
23,200
24,300
17,000
19,000
19,900
20,500
21,100
21,800
22,400
23,500
24,600
G-28
NO FIRING CONSTRAINT (10 KM MIN RANGE)
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-7. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 400 m ASL
50
60
80
100
17,500
19,700
20,300
20,900
21,500
22,100
22,700
23,900
24,900
18,000
20,100
20,700
21,300
21,900
22,500
23,100
24,200
25,300
18,500
20,500
21,100
21,700
22,300
22,900
23,500
24,600
25,600
19,000
20,900
21,600
22,200
22,800
23,300
23,900
24,900
25,900
19,500
21,400
22,000
22,600
23,200
23,700
24,300
25,300
26,300
20,000
21,900
22,500
23,100
23,600
24,100
24,700
25,700
26,700
20,500
22,400
23,000
23,500
24,000
24,600
25,100
26,100
27,100
21,000
22,900
23,400
24,000
24,500
25,000
25,500
26,500
27,500
21,500
23,400
23,900
24,400
24,900
25,400
25,900
26,900
27,800
22,000
23,800
24,300
24,800
25,300
25,800
26,300
27,300
28,100
22,500
24,300
24,800
25,300
25,800
26,300
26,800
27,700
28,500
23,000
24,800
25,300
25,800
26,200
26,700
27,200
28,000
28,900
23,500
25,300
25,800
26,200
26,700
27,200
27,600
28,400
29,300
24,000
25,800
26,200
26,700
27,200
27,600
28,000
28,900
29,800
24,500
26,300
26,700
27,200
27,600
28,000
28,400
29,300
30,200
25,000
26,800
27,200
27,600
28,000
28,400
28,900
29,700
30,600
25,500
27,300
27,700
28,100
28,500
28,900
29,300
30,200
31,000
26,000
27,700
28,100
28,500
29,000
29,400
29,800
30,600
31,500
26,500
28,200
28,600
29,000
29,400
29,800
30,300
31,100
31,900
27,000
28,700
29,100
29,500
29,900
30,300
30,700
31,600
32,400
27,500
29,200
29,600
30,000
30,400
30,800
31,200
32,000
32,800
28,000
29,700
30,100
30,500
30,900
31,300
31,700
32,500
33,300
28,500
30,200
30,600
31,000
31,400
31,800
32,200
33,000
33,800
29,000
30,700
31,100
31,500
31,900
32,300
32,700
33,400
34,200
29,500
31,200
31,600
32,000
32,400
32,800
33,100
33,900
34,700
30,000
31,800
32,100
32,500
32,900
33,300
33,600
34,400
35,200
30,500
32,300
32,600
33,000
33,400
33,800
34,100
34,900
35,700
31,000
32,800
33,100
33,500
33,900
34,300
34,600
35,400
36,200
31,500
33,300
33,700
34,000
34,400
34,800
35,100
35,900
36,700
32,000
33,800
34,200
34,500
34,900
35,300
35,600
36,400
37,200
32,500
34,300
34,700
35,100
35,400
35,800
36,100
36,900
37,700
33,000
34,900
35,200
35,600
35,900
36,300
36,700
37,400
38,200
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-29
Appendix G
Table G-7. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 400 m ASL
50
60
80
100
33,500
35,400
35,700
36,100
36,400
36,800
37,200
37,900
38,700
34,000
35,900
36,300
36,600
37,000
37,300
37,700
38,400
39,200
34,500
36,400
36,800
37,100
37,500
37,800
38,200
38,900
39,700
35,000
37,000
37,300
37,600
38,000
38,300
38,700
39,500
40,200
35,500
37,500
37,800
38,200
38,500
38,900
39,200
40,000
40,700
36,000
38,000
38,300
38,700
39,000
39,400
39,800
40,500
41,200
36,500
38,500
38,900
39,200
39,600
39,900
40,300
41,000
41,700
37,000
39,100
39,400
39,700
40,100
40,400
40,800
41,500
37,500
39,600
39,900
40,300
40,600
40,900
41,300
42,000
38,000
40,100
40,400
40,800
41,100
41,500
41,800
38,500
40,600
40,900
41,300
41,600
42,000
39,000
41,100
41,500
41,800
39,500
41,700
42,000
40,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-30
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-7. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
ALT: 400 m ASL
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
2,000
21,900
23,200
24,300
25,400
26,400
27,500
28,300
29,300
2,500
21,400
22,700
23,900
25,000
26,000
27,100
28,000
29,000
3,000
21,100
22,400
23,600
24,700
25,800
26,900
27,800
28,800
3,500
21,000
22,300
23,500
24,600
25,700
26,800
27,700
28,700
4,000
20,900
22,200
23,400
24,600
25,600
26,700
27,700
28,600
4,500
20,900
22,200
23,400
24,600
25,600
26,700
27,700
28,600
5,000
20,900
22,200
23,400
24,600
25,600
26,700
27,700
28,600
5,500
21,000
22,300
23,500
24,600
25,700
26,800
27,700
28,700
6,000
21,000
22,400
23,600
24,700
25,700
26,800
27,800
28,700
6,500
21,100
22,400
23,600
24,800
25,800
26,900
27,800
28,800
7,000
21,300
22,600
23,700
24,900
25,900
27,000
27,900
28,900
7,500
21,400
22,700
23,900
25,000
26,000
27,100
28,000
29,000
8,000
21,500
22,800
24,000
25,100
26,100
27,200
28,100
29,100
8,500
21,700
22,900
24,100
25,200
26,300
27,400
28,200
29,200
9,000
21,900
23,100
24,300
25,300
26,400
27,500
28,400
29,400
9,500
22,000
23,300
24,400
25,500
26,600
27,600
28,500
29,500
10,000
22,200
23,400
24,600
25,600
26,700
27,700
28,700
29,600
10,500
22,400
23,600
24,700
25,800
26,900
27,800
28,800
29,800
11,000
22,600
23,800
24,900
26,000
27,100
28,000
29,000
29,900
11,500
22,800
24,000
25,100
26,200
27,200
28,100
29,100
30,100
12,000
23,000
24,200
25,300
26,400
27,400
28,300
29,300
30,300
12,500
23,200
24,400
25,500
26,600
27,600
28,500
29,500
30,500
13,000
23,500
24,600
25,700
26,800
27,700
28,700
29,700
30,700
13,500
23,700
24,800
25,900
27,000
27,900
28,900
29,900
30,800
14,000
24,000
25,000
26,100
27,200
28,100
29,100
30,100
31,000
14,500
24,200
25,300
26,400
27,400
28,300
29,300
30,300
31,300
15,000
24,500
25,500
26,600
27,600
28,500
29,500
30,500
31,500
15,500
24,800
25,800
26,800
27,800
28,800
29,700
30,700
31,700
16,000
25,100
26,100
27,100
28,000
29,000
30,000
31,000
31,900
16,500
25,300
26,,400
27,400
28,300
29,200
30,200
31,200
32,200
17,000
25,600
26,700
27,600
28,500
29,500
30,500
31,400
32,400
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-31
Appendix G
Table G-7. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
120
G-32
ALT: 400 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
17,500
26,000
27,000
27,900
28,800
29,800
30,700
31,700
32,700
18,000
26,300
27,300
28,200
29,100
30,100
31,000
32,000
32,900
18,500
26,600
27,600
28,500
29,400
30,400
31,300
32,200
33,200
19,000
27,000
27,900
28,800
29,700
30,700
31,600
32,500
33,400
19,500
27,300
28,200
29,100
30,000
31,000
31,900
32,800
33,700
20,000
27,600
28,500
29,400
30,400
31,300
32,200
33,100
34,000
20,500
27,900
28,900
29,800
30,700
31,600
32,500
33,400
34,400
21,000
28,300
29,200
30,100
31,100
32,000
32,900
33,800
34,700
21,500
28,700
29,600
30,500
31,400
32,300
33,200
34,100
35,000
22,000
29,000
30,000
30,900
31,800
32,700
33,600
34,500
35,400
22,500
29,400
30,300
31,200
32,100
33,000
33,900
34,800
35,700
23,000
29,800
30,700
31,600
32,500
33,400
34,300
35,200
36,100
23,500
30,200
31,100
32,000
32,900
33,800
34,700
35,600
36,500
24,000
30,600
31,500
32,400
33,300
34,200
35,100
35,900
36,900
24,500
31,100
31,900
32,800
33,700
34,600
35,400
36,300
37,200
25,000
31,500
32,300
33,200
34,100
35,000
35,800
36,700
37,600
25,500
31,900
32,800
33,600
34,500
35,400
36,300
37,100
38,100
26,000
32,300
33,200
34,000
34,900
35,800
36,700
37,600
38,500
26,500
32,800
33,600
34,500
35,300
36,200
37,100
38,000
38,900
27,000
33,200
34,100
34,900
35,800
36,600
37,500
38,400
39,300
27,500
33,700
34,500
35,400
36,200
37,100
38,000
38,800
39,800
28,000
34,100
35,000
35,800
36,700
37,500
38,400
39,300
40,200
28,500
34,600
35,400
36,300
37,100
38,000
38,800
39,700
40,700
29,000
35,100
35,900
36,700
37,600
38,400
39,300
40,200
41,100
29,500
35,500
36,300
37,200
38,000
38,900
39,800
40,700
41,600
30,000
36,000
36,800
37,700
38,500
39,400
40,200
41,100
30,500
36,500
37,300
38,100
39,000
39,800
40,700
41,600
31,000
37,000
37,800
38,600
39,500
40,300
41,200
31,500
37,500
38,300
39,100
39,900
40,800
41,700
32,000
38,000
38,800
39,600
40,400
41,300
32,500
38,400
39,300
40,100
40,900
41,800
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-7. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 400 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
180
33,000
39,000
39,800
40,600
41,400
33,500
39,500
40,300
41,100
41,900
34,000
40,000
40,800
41,600
34,500
40,500
41,300
35,000
41,000
41,800
35,500
41,500
36,000
42,000
200
220
240
260
36,500 37,000 37,500 38,000 38,500 39,000 39,500 40,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-33
Appendix G
Table G-8. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
ALT: 800 m ASL
40
50
60
80
100
2,000
0
0
0
0
0
17,500
20,100
21,700
2,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
19,500
21,100
3,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,400
20,700
3,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,100
20,500
4,000
0
0
0
18,000
20,400
4,500
0
0
0
17,900
20,400
5,000
0
0
0
18,000
20,400
5,500
0
0
0
18,100
20,500
6,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,200
20,600
6,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,400
20,700
7,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,600
20,800
7,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,900
20,900
8,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
19,500
21,100
8,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
19,700
21,300
9,000
0
0
0
0
0
17,500
19,900
21,500
9,500
0
0
0
0
0
17,700
20,100
21,600
10,000
0
0
0
0
0
18,000
20,300
21,900
10,500
0
0
0
0
17,400
18,300
20,500
22,100
11,000
0
0
0
0
17,700
18,600
20,800
22,300
11,500
0
0
0
0
18,000
19,400
21,000
22,500
12,000
0
0
0
17,500
18,300
19,800
21,300
22,700
12,500
0
0
0
17,800
18,700
20,100
21,500
23,000
13,000
0
0
15,500
18,200
19,500
20,300
21,800
23,200
13,500
0
0
17,700
18,500
19,900
20,600
22,100
23,500
14,000
15,400
15,500
18,100
19,100
20,200
20,900
22,400
23,800
14,500
15,900
17,700
18,400
19,800
20,500
21,300
22,700
24,100
15,000
16,000
18,100
18,900
20,100
20,900
21,600
23,000
24,300
15,500
17,700
18,400
19,700
20,500
21,200
22,000
23,400
24,600
16,000
18,100
18,900
20,100
20,900
21,600
22,300
23,700
24,900
16,500
18,500
19,800
20,500
21,200
22,000
22,700
24,000
25,200
17,000
18,900
20,200
20,900
21,600
22,400
23,000
24,300
25,600
G-34
NO FIRING CONSTRAINT (10 KM MIN RANGE)
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-8. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 800 m ASL
50
60
80
100
17,500
19,900
20,600
21,300
22,100
22,800
23,400
24,700
25,900
18,000
20,300
21,000
21,700
22,500
23,100
23,800
25,000
26,200
18,500
20,700
21,500
22,200
22,900
23,500
24,200
25,400
26,600
19,000
21,200
21,900
22,600
23,300
23,900
24,600
25,700
27,000
19,500
21,700
22,400
23,100
23,700
24,300
24,900
26,100
27,300
20,000
22,200
22,800
23,500
24,100
24,700
25,300
26,500
27,600
20,500
22,600
23,300
23,900
24,600
25,100
25,700
26,900
27,900
21,000
23,100
23,800
24,400
25,000
25,600
26,100
27,300
28,300
21,500
23,600
24,200
24,800
25,400
26,000
26,600
27,700
28,600
22,000
24,100
24,700
25,300
25,800
26,400
27,000
28,000
29,000
22,500
24,600
25,200
25,700
26,300
26,900
27,500
28,400
29,400
23,000
25,100
25,600
26,200
26,800
27,300
27,800
28,800
29,800
23,500
25,600
26,100
26,700
27,300
27,700
28,200
29,200
30,200
24,000
26,000
26,600
27,200
27,700
28,100
28,600
29,600
30,600
24,500
26,600
27,100
27,600
28,000
28,500
29,000
30,000
31,000
25,000
27,100
27,600
28,000
28,500
29,000
29,500
30,500
31,500
25,500
27,600
27,900
28,400
28,900
29,400
29,900
30,900
31,900
26,000
27,900
28,400
28,900
29,400
29,900
30,400
31,300
32,300
26,500
28,400
28,900
29,400
29,900
30,400
30,800
31,800
32,800
27,000
28,900
29,400
29,900
30,400
30,800
31,300
32,200
33,200
27,500
29,400
29,900
30,400
30,800
31,300
31,800
32,700
33,600
28,000
29,900
30,400
30,900
31,300
31,800
32,200
33,200
34,100
28,500
30,400
30,900
31,400
31,800
32,300
32,700
33,600
34,600
29,000
31,000
31,400
31,800
32,300
32,700
33,200
34,100
35,000
29,500
31,500
31,900
32,300
32,800
33,200
33,700
34,600
35,500
30,000
32,000
32,400
32,800
33,300
33,700
34,200
35,100
36,000
30,500
32,500
32,900
33,300
33,800
34,200
34,700
35,500
36,400
31,000
33,000
33,400
33,900
34,300
34,700
35,100
36,000
36,900
31,500
33,500
33,900
34,400
34,800
35,200
35,600
36,500
37,400
32,000
34,000
34,500
34,900
35,300
35,700
36,100
37,000
37,900
32,500
34,600
35,000
35,400
35,800
36,200
36,600
37,500
38,400
33,000
35,100
35,500
35,900
36,300
36,700
37,100
38,000
38,900
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-35
Appendix G
Table G-8. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 800 m ASL
50
60
80
100
33,500
35,600
36,000
36,400
36,800
37,200
37,600
38,500
39,400
34,000
36,100
36,500
36,900
37,300
37,700
38,200
39,000
39,900
34,500
36,600
37,000
37,400
37,800
38,200
38,700
39,500
40,400
35,000
37,200
37,500
37,900
38,400
38,800
39,200
40,000
40,900
35,500
37,700
38,100
38,500
38,900
39,300
39,700
40,500
41,400
36,000
38,200
38,600
39,000
39,400
39,800
40,200
41,000
41,900
36,500
38,700
39,100
39,500
39,900
40,300
40,700
41,500
37,000
39,300
39,600
40,000
40,400
40,800
41,200
42,000
37,500
39,800
40,200
40,500
40,900
41,300
41,700
38,000
40,300
40,700
41,000
41,400
41,800
38,500
40,800
41,200
41,600
41,900
39,000
41,300
41,700
39,500
41,800
40,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-36
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-8. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
ALT: 800 m ASL
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
2,000
23,100
24,400
25,700
26,900
27,900
29,000
30,100
31,200
2,500
22,600
23,900
25,200
26,500
27,600
28,600
29,700
30,800
3,000
22,300
23,600
24,900
26,200
27,400
28,400
29,500
30,600
3,500
22,100
23,500
24,800
26,000
27,300
28,300
29,400
30,500
4,000
22,000
23,400
24,700
26,000
27,200
28,200
29,300
30,400
4,500
22,000
23,400
24,700
25,900
27,200
28,200
29,300
30,400
5,000
22,000
23,400
24,700
26,000
27,200
28,200
29,300
30,400
5,500
22,000
23,500
24,800
26,000
27,300
28,300
29,400
30,500
6,000
22,100
23,500
24,800
26,100
27,300
28,300
29,500
30,600
6,500
22,200
23,600
24,900
26,200
27,400
28,400
29,500
30,600
7,000
22,300
23,700
25,000
26,300
27,500
28,500
29,600
30,700
7,500
22,500
23,800
25,100
26,400
27,600
28,600
29,700
30,800
8,000
22,600
24,000
25,300
26,500
27,700
28,700
29,800
30,900
8,500
22,800
24,100
25,400
26,700
27,800
28,900
30,000
31,100
9,000
22,900
24,300
25,600
26,800
27,900
29,000
30,100
31,200
9,500
23,100
24,500
25,700
27,000
28,000
29,100
30,200
31,300
10,000
23,300
24,600
25,900
27,100
28,200
29,300
30,400
31,500
10,500
23,500
24,800
26,100
27,300
28,300
29,400
30,600
31,700
11,000
23,700
25,000
26,200
27,500
28,500
29,600
30,700
31,800
11,500
23,900
25,200
26,400
27,600
28,700
29,800
30,900
32,000
12,000
24,100
25,400
26,600
27,800
28,800
30,000
31,100
32,200
12,500
24,300
25,600
26,900
27,900
29,000
30,200
31,300
32,300
13,000
24,600
25,800
27,100
28,100
29,200
30,300
31,400
32,500
13,500
24,800
26,000
27,300
28,300
29,400
30,500
31,600
32,700
14,000
25,000
26,300
27,500
28,500
29,600
30,800
31,900
32,900
14,500
25,300
26,500
27,700
28,700
29,900
31,000
32,100
33,100
15,000
25,600
26,800
27,900
29,000
30,100
31,200
32,300
33,400
15,500
25,800
27,100
28,100
29,200
30,300
31,400
32,500
33,600
16,000
26,100
27,400
28,300
29,500
30,600
31,700
32,700
33,800
16,500
26,500
27,600
28,600
29,700
30,800
31,900
33,000
34,100
17,000
26,800
27,800
28,900
30,000
31,100
32,100
33,200
34,300
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-37
Appendix G
Table G-8. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
120
G-38
ALT: 800 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
17,500
27,100
28,100
29,200
30,200
31,300
32,400
33,500
34,600
18,000
27,400
28,400
29,500
30,500
31,600
32,700
33,700
34,800
18,500
27,700
28,700
29,800
30,800
31,800
32,900
34,000
35,100
19,000
27,900
29,000
30,100
31,100
32,200
33,200
34,300
35,300
19,500
28,300
29,300
30,400
31,400
32,500
33,500
34,600
35,600
20,000
28,600
29,700
30,700
31,800
32,800
33,800
34,800
35,900
20,500
29,000
30,000
31,100
32,100
33,100
34,100
35,100
36,200
21,000
29,300
30,400
31,400
32,400
33,500
34,500
35,500
36,500
21,500
29,700
30,700
31,800
32,800
33,800
34,800
35,800
36,800
22,000
30,100
31,100
32,100
33,100
34,100
35,100
36,200
37,200
22,500
30,400
31,500
32,500
33,500
34,500
35,500
36,500
37,500
23,000
30,800
31,800
32,800
33,900
34,900
35,900
36,900
37,900
23,500
31,200
32,200
33,200
34,200
35,200
36,200
37,300
38,300
24,000
31,600
32,600
33,600
34,600
35,600
36,600
37,600
38,700
24,500
32,000
33,000
34,000
35,000
36,000
37,000
38,000
39,000
25,000
32,400
33,400
34,400
35,400
36,400
37,400
38,400
39,400
25,500
32,900
33,800
34,800
35,800
36,800
37,800
38,800
39,800
26,000
33,300
34,300
35,200
36,200
37,200
38,200
39,200
40,200
26,500
33,700
34,700
35,600
36,600
37,600
38,600
39,600
40,600
27,000
34,200
35,100
36,100
37,000
38,000
39,000
40,000
41,100
27,500
34,600
35,500
36,500
37,500
38,500
39,500
40,500
41,500
28,000
35,000
36,000
36,900
37,900
38,900
39,900
40,900
41,900
28,500
35,500
36,400
37,400
38,400
39,300
40,300
41,300
29,000
35,900
36,900
37,800
38,800
39,800
40,800
41,800
29,500
36,400
37,300
38,300
39,300
40,200
41,200
30,000
36,900
37,800
38,800
39,700
40,700
41,700
30,500
37,300
38,300
39,200
40,200
41,100
31,000
37,800
38,800
39,700
40,600
41,600
31,500
38,300
39,200
40,200
41,100
32,000
38,800
39,700
40,600
41,600
32,500
39,300
40,200
41,100
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-8. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 800 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160 41,600
33,000
39,800
40,700
33,500
40,300
41,200
34,000
40,700
41,700
34,500
41,200
35,000
41,700
180
200
220
240
260
35,500 36,000 36,500 37,000 37,500 38,000 38,500 39,000 39,500 40,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-39
Appendix G
Table G-9. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
40
50
60
80
100
2,000
0
0
0
0
0
17,500
20,100
21,700
2,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
19,500
21,100
3,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,400
20,700
3,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,100
20,500
4,000
0
0
0
18,000
20,400
4,500
0
0
0
17,900
20,400
5,000
0
0
0
18,000
20,400
5,500
0
0
0
18,100
20,500
6,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,200
20,600
6,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,400
20,700
7,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,600
20,800
7,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
18,900
20,900
8,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
19,500
21,100
8,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
19,700
21,300
9,000
0
0
0
0
0
17,500
19,900
21,500
9,500
0
0
0
0
0
17,700
20,100
21,600
10,000
0
0
0
0
0
18,000
20,300
21,900
10,500
0
0
0
0
17,400
18,300
20,500
22,100
11,000
0
0
0
0
17,700
18,600
20,800
22,300
11,500
0
0
0
0
18,000
19,400
21,000
22,500
12,000
0
0
0
17,500
18,300
19,800
21,300
22,700
12,500
0
0
0
17,800
18,700
20,100
21,500
23,000
13,000
0
0
15,500
18,200
19,500
20,300
21,800
23,200
13,500
0
0
17,700
18,500
19,900
20,600
22,100
23,500
14,000
15,400
15,500
18,100
19,100
20,200
20,900
22,400
23,800
14,500
15,900
17,700
18,400
19,800
20,500
21,300
22,700
24,100
15,000
16,000
18,100
18,900
20,100
20,900
21,600
23,000
24,300
15,500
17,700
18,400
19,700
20,500
21,200
22,000
23,400
24,600
16,000
18,100
18,900
20,100
20,900
21,600
22,300
23,700
24,900
16,500
18,500
19,800
20,500
21,200
22,000
22,700
24,000
25,200
17,000
18,900
20,200
20,900
21,600
22,400
23,000
24,300
25,600
G-40
NO FIRING CONSTRAINT (10 KM MIN RANGE)
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-9. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
50
60
80
100
17,500
19,900
20,600
21,300
22,100
22,800
23,400
24,700
25,900
18,000
20,300
21,000
21,700
22,500
23,100
23,800
25,000
26,200
18,500
20,700
21,500
22,200
22,900
23,500
24,200
25,400
26,600
19,000
21,200
21,900
22,600
23,300
23,900
24,600
25,700
27,000
19,500
21,700
22,400
23,100
23,700
24,300
24,900
26,100
27,300
20,000
22,200
22,800
23,500
24,100
24,700
25,300
26,500
27,600
20,500
22,600
23,300
23,900
24,600
25,100
25,700
26,900
27,900
21,000
23,100
23,800
24,400
25,000
25,600
26,100
27,300
28,300
21,500
23,600
24,200
24,800
25,400
26,000
26,600
27,700
28,600
22,000
24,100
24,700
25,300
25,800
26,400
27,000
28,000
29,000
22,500
24,600
25,200
25,700
26,300
26,900
27,500
28,400
29,400
23,000
25,100
25,600
26,200
26,800
27,300
27,800
28,800
29,800
23,500
25,600
26,100
26,700
27,300
27,700
28,200
29,200
30,200
24,000
26,000
26,600
27,200
27,700
28,100
28,600
29600
30,600
24,500
26,600
27,100
27,600
28,000
28,500
29,000
30,000
31,000
25,000
27,100
27,600
28,000
28,500
29,000
29,500
30,500
31,500
25,500
27,600
27,900
28,400
28,900
29,400
29,900
30,900
31,900
26,000
27,900
28,400
28,900
29,400
29,900
30,400
31,300
32,300
26,500
28,400
28,900
29,400
29,900
30,400
30,800
31,800
32,800
27,000
28,900
29,400
29,900
30,400
30,800
31,300
32,200
33,200
27,500
29,400
29,900
30,400
30,800
31,300
31,800
32,700
33,600
28,000
29,900
30,400
30,900
31,300
31,800
32,200
33,200
34,100
28,500
30,400
30,900
31,400
31,800
32,300
32,700
33,600
34,600
29,000
31,000
31,400
31,800
32,300
32,700
33,200
34,100
35,000
29,500
31,500
31,900
32,300
32,800
33,200
33,700
34,600
35,500
30,000
32,000
32,400
32,800
33,300
33,700
34,200
35,100
36,000
30,500
32,500
32,900
33,300
33,800
34,200
34,700
35,500
36,400
31,000
33,000
33,400
33,900
34,300
34,700
35,100
36,000
36,900
31,500
33,500
33,900
34,400
34,800
35,200
35,600
36,500
37,400
32,000
34,000
34,500
34,900
35,300
35,700
36,100
37,000
37,900
32,500
34,600
35,000
35,400
35,800
36,200
36,600
37,500
38,400
33,000
35,100
35,500
35,900
36,300
36,700
37,100
38,000
38,900
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-41
Appendix G
Table G-9. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
50
60
80
100
33,500
35,600
36,000
36,400
36,800
37,200
37,600
38,500
39,400
34,000
36,100
36,500
36,900
37,300
37,700
38,200
39,000
39,900
34,500
36,600
37,000
37,400
37,800
38,200
38,700
39,500
40,400
35,000
37,200
37,500
37,900
38,400
38,800
39,200
40,000
40,900
35,500
37,700
38,100
38,500
38,900
39,300
39,700
40,500
41,400
36,000
38,200
38,600
39,000
39,400
39,800
40,200
41,000
41,900
36,500
38,700
39,100
39,500
39,900
40,300
40,700
41,500
37,000
39,300
39,600
40,000
40,400
40,800
41,200
42,000
37,500
39,800
40,200
40,500
40,900
41,300
41,700
38,000
40,300
40,700
41,000
41,400
41,800
38,500
40,800
41,200
41,600
41,900
39,000
41,300
41,700
39,500
41,800
40,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-42
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-9. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
2,000
23,100
24,400
25,700
26,900
27,900
29,000
30,100
31,200
2,500
22,600
23,900
25,200
26,500
27,600
28,600
29,700
30,800
3,000
22,300
23,600
24,900
26,200
27,400
28,400
29,500
30,600
3,500
22,100
23,500
24,800
26,000
27,300
28,300
29,400
30,500
4,000
22,000
23,400
24,700
26,000
27,200
28,200
29,300
30,400
4,500
22,000
23,400
24,700
25,900
27,200
28,200
29,300
30,400
5,000
22,000
23,400
24,700
26,000
27,200
28,200
29,300
30,400
5,500
22,000
23,500
24,800
26,000
27,300
28,300
29,400
30,500
6,000
22,100
23,500
24,800
26,100
27,300
28,300
29,500
30,600
6,500
22,200
23,600
24,900
26,200
27,400
28,400
29,500
30,600
7,000
22,300
23,700
25,000
26,300
27,500
28,500
29,600
30,700
7,500
22,500
23,800
25,100
26,400
27,600
28,600
29,700
30,800
8,000
22,600
24,000
25,300
26,500
27,700
28,700
29,800
30,900
8,500
22,800
24,100
25,400
26,700
27,800
28,900
30,000
31,100
9,000
22,900
24,300
25,600
26,800
27,900
29,000
30,100
31,200
9,500
23,100
24,500
25,700
27,000
28,000
29,100
30,200
31,300
10,000
23,300
24,600
25,900
27,100
28,200
29,300
30,400
31,500
10,500
23,500
24,800
26,100
27,300
28,300
29,400
30,600
31,700
11,000
23,700
25,000
26,200
27,500
28,500
29,600
30,700
31,800
11,500
23,900
25,200
26,400
27,600
28,700
29,800
30,900
32,000
12,000
24,100
25,400
26,600
27,800
28,800
30,000
31,100
32,200
12,500
24,300
25,600
26,900
27,900
29,000
30,200
31,300
32,300
13,000
24,600
25,800
27,100
28,100
29,200
30,300
31,400
32,500
13,500
24,800
26,000
27,300
28,300
29,400
30,500
31,600
32,700
14,000
25,000
26,300
27,500
28,500
29,600
30,800
31,900
32,900
14,500
25,300
26,500
27,700
28,700
29,900
31,000
32,100
33,100
15,000
25,600
26,800
27,900
29,000
30,100
31,200
32,300
33,400
15,500
25,800
27,100
28,100
29,200
30,300
31,400
32,500
33,600
16,000
26,100
27,400
28,300
29,500
30,600
31,700
32,700
33,800
16,500
26,500
27,600
28,600
29,700
30,800
31,900
33,000
34,100
17,000
26,800
27,800
28,900
30,000
31,100
32,100
33,200
34,300
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-43
Appendix G
Table G-9. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
120
G-44
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
17,500
27,100
28,100
29,200
30,200
31,300
32,400
33,500
34,600
18,000
27,400
28,400
29,500
30,500
31,600
32,700
33,700
34,800
18,500
27,700
28,700
29,800
30,800
31,800
32,900
34,000
35,100
19,000
27,900
29,000
30,100
31,100
32,200
33,200
34,300
35,300
19,500
28,300
29,300
30,400
31,400
32,500
33,500
34,600
35,600
20,000
28,600
29,700
30,700
31,800
32,800
33,800
34,800
35,900
20,500
29,000
30,000
31,100
32,100
33,100
34,100
35,100
36,200
21,000
29,300
30,400
31,400
32,400
33,500
34,500
35,500
36,500
21,500
29,700
30,700
31,800
32,800
33,800
34,800
35,800
36,800
22,000
30,100
31,100
32,100
33,100
34,100
35,100
36,200
37,200
22,500
30,400
31,500
32,500
33,500
34,500
35,500
36,500
37,500
23,000
30,800
31,800
32,800
33,900
34,900
35,900
36,900
37,900
23,500
31,200
32,200
33,200
34,200
35,200
36,200
37,300
38,300
24,000
31,600
32,600
33,600
34,600
35,600
36,600
37,600
38,700
24,500
32,000
33,000
34,000
35,000
36,000
37,000
38,000
39,000
25,000
32,400
33,400
34,400
35,400
36,400
37,400
38,400
39,400
25,500
32,900
33,800
34,800
35,800
36,800
37,800
38,800
39,800
26,000
33,300
34,300
35,200
36,200
37,200
38,200
39,200
40,200
26,500
33,700
34,700
35,600
36,600
37,600
38,600
39,600
40,600
27,000
34,200
35,100
36,100
37,000
38,000
39,000
40,000
41,100
27,500
34,600
35,500
36,500
37,500
38,500
39,500
40,500
41,500
28,000
35,000
36,000
36,900
37,900
38,900
39,900
40,900
41,900
28,500
35,500
36,400
37,400
38,400
39,300
40,300
41,300
29,000
35,900
36,900
37,800
38,800
39,800
40,800
41,800
29,500
36,400
37,300
38,300
39,300
40,200
41,200
30,000
36,900
37,800
38,800
39,700
40,700
41,700
30,500
37,300
38,300
39,200
40,200
41,100
31,000
37,800
38,800
39,700
40,600
41,600
31,500
38,300
39,200
40,200
41,100
32,000
38,800
39,700
40,600
41,600
32,500
39,300
40,200
41,100
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-9. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160 41,600
33,000
39,800
40,700
33,500
40,300
41,200
34,000
40,700
41,700
34,500
41,200
35,000
41,700
180
200
220
240
260
35,500 36,000 36,500 37,000 37,500 38,000 38,500 39,000 39,500 40,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-45
Appendix G
Table G-10. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
40
50
60
80
100
2,000
0
0
0
0
0
19,100
22,300
24,200
2,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
21,500
23,500
3,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
20,300
23,000
3,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
20,000
22,800
4,000
0
0
0
0
0
4,500
0
0
0
0
0
5,000
0
0
0
0
0
5,500
0
0
0
0
0
6,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
19,900
22,700
6,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
20,100
22,800
7,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
20,300
23,000
7,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
20,500
23,100
8,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
20,900
23,300
8,500
0
0
0
0
0
0
21,500
23,500
9,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
21,700
23,700
9,500
0
0
0
0
0
19,000
21,900
23,900
10,000
0
0
0
0
0
19,300
22,200
24,100
10,500
0
0
0
0
0
19,600
22,400
24,300
11,000
0
0
0
0
0
19,900
22,600
24,500
11,500
0
0
0
0
19,200
20,300
22,900
24,800
12,000
0
0
0
0
19,500
20,800
23,200
25,000
12,500
0
0
0
0
19,800
21,500
23,400
25,200
13,000
0
0
0
19,100
20,200
21,800
23,700
25,500
13,500
0
0
0
19,500
20,700
22,200
24,000
25,800
14,000
15,400
15,400
15,500
19,900
21,500
22,500
24,300
26,000
14,500
15,900
15,900
19,300
20,300
21,900
22,800
24,600
26,300
15,000
16,400
16,400
19,700
20,900
22,200
23,200
25,000
26,600
15,500
16,900
19,100
20,100
21,600
22,600
23,500
25,300
27,000
16,000
17,400
19,500
20,600
22,000
23,000
23,900
25,600
27,300
16,500
18,000
19,900
21,400
22,400
23,400
24,300
25,900
27,600
17,000
19,400
20,400
21,900
22,800
23,700
24,600
26,300
28,000
G-46
NO FIRING CONSTRAINT (10 KM MIN RANGE)
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-10. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
50
60
80
100
17,500
19,900
21,000
22,300
23,200
24,100
25,000
26,700
28,200
18,000
20,300
21,800
22,700
23,600
24,500
25,400
27,100
28,400
18,500
20,900
22,200
23,200
24,100
24,900
25,800
27,400
28,700
19,000
21,700
22,700
23,600
24,500
25,300
26,200
27,800
29,100
19,500
22,200
23,100
24,000
24,900
25,700
26,600
28,100
29,400
20,000
22,700
23,600
24,500
25,300
26,100
27,000
28,400
29,800
20,500
23,200
24,100
24,900
25,700
26,600
27,400
28,700
30,100
21,000
23,700
24,500
25,400
26,200
27,000
27,800
29,100
30,500
21,500
24,100
25,000
25,800
26,600
27,500
28,100
29,400
30,800
22,000
24,600
25,500
26,300
27,100
27,900
28,400
29,800
31,200
22,500
25,100
25,900
26,800
27,600
28,200
28,800
30,200
31,600
23,000
25,600
26,400
27,300
28,000
28,500
29,200
30,600
32,000
23,500
26,100
26,900
27,700
28,300
29,000
29,700
31,000
32,400
24,000
26,700
27,500
28,100
28,700
29,400
30,100
31,400
32,800
24,500
27,200
28,000
28,400
29,100
29,800
30,500
31,800
33,200
25,000
27,700
28,300
28,900
29,600
30,300
30,900
32,300
33,600
25,500
28,100
28,700
29,400
30,000
30,700
31,400
32,700
34,000
26,000
28,500
29,200
29,800
30,500
31,200
31,800
33,100
34,400
26,500
29,000
29,600
30,300
31,000
31,600
32,300
33,500
34,800
27,000
29,500
30,100
30,800
31,400
32,100
32,700
34,000
35,300
27,500
30,000
30,600
31,300
31,900
32,500
33,200
34,400
35,700
28,000
30,500
31,100
31,700
32,400
33,000
33,600
34,900
36,100
28,500
31,000
31,600
32,200
32,800
33,500
34,100
35,300
36,600
29,000
31,500
32,100
32,700
33,300
33,900
34,600
35,800
37,000
29,500
32,000
32,600
33,200
33,800
34,400
35,000
36,200
37,500
30,000
32,500
33,100
33,700
34,300
34,900
35,500
36,700
37,900
30,500
33,000
33,600
34,200
34,800
35,400
36,000
37,200
38,400
31,000
33,500
34,100
34,700
35,300
35,900
36,400
37,600
38,800
31,500
34,000
34,600
35,200
35,800
36,300
36,900
38,100
39,300
32,000
34,500
35,100
35,700
36,200
36,800
37,400
38,600
39,800
32,500
35,000
35,600
36,200
36,700
37,300
37,900
39,100
40,200
33,000
35,500
36,100
36,700
37,200
37,800
38,400
39,500
40,700
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-47
Appendix G
Table G-10. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
50
60
80
100
33,500
36,100
36,600
37,200
37,700
38,300
38,900
40,000
41,200
34,000
36,600
37,100
37,700
38,200
38,800
39,400
40,500
41,700
34,500
37,100
37,600
38,200
38,700
39,300
39,900
41,000
35,000
37,600
38,200
38,700
39,300
39,800
40,400
41,500
35,500
38,100
38,700
39,200
39,800
40,300
40,900
42,000
36,000
38,700
39,200
39,700
40,300
40,800
41,300
36,500
39,200
39,700
40,200
40,800
41,300
41,800
37,000
39,700
40,200
40,700
41,300
41,800
37,500
40,200
40,700
41,200
41,800
38,000
40,700
41,200
41,700
38,500
41,200
41,700
39,000
41,700
39,500 40,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
G-48
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-10. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
2,000
25,900
27,700
29,000
30,400
31,900
33,300
34600
36,000
2,500
25,300
27,000
28,400
29,900
31,300
32,700
34,100
35,500
3,000
24,900
26,600
28,200
29,500
31,000
32,400
33,800
35,200
3,500
24,600
26,400
28,000
29,400
30,800
32,200
33,700
35,000
4,000
24,500
26,300
28,000
29,300
30,700
32,200
33,600
35,000
4,500
24,500
26,200
27,900
29,200
30,700
32,100
33,500
34,900
5,000
24,500
26,200
27,900
29,200
30,700
32,100
33,500
34,900
5,500
24,500
26,300
28,000
29,300
30,700
32,200
33,600
35,000
6,000
24,600
26,300
28,000
29,300
30,800
32,200
33,700
35,000
6,500
24,700
26,400
28,100
29,400
30,900
32,300
33,700
35,100
7,000
24,800
26,600
28,200
29,500
31,000
32,400
33,800
35,200
7,500
25,000
26,700
28,200
29,600
31,100
32,500
34,000
35,300
8,000
25,100
26,900
28,300
29,800
31,200
32,700
34,100
35,500
8,500
25,300
27,000
28,400
29,900
31,400
32,800
34,200
35,600
9,000
25,500
27,200
28,600
30,100
31,500
33,000
34,400
35,800
9,500
25,600
27,400
28,700
30,200
31,700
33,100
34,500
35,900
10,000
25,800
27,600
28,900
30,400
31,900
33,300
34,700
36,100
10,500
26,000
27,800
29,100
30,600
32,000
33,400
34,800
36,200
11,000
26,300
28,000
29,300
30,800
32,200
33,600
35,000
36,400
11,500
26,500
28,100
29,500
31,000
32,400
33,800
35,200
36,600
12,000
26,700
28,300
29,700
31,200
32,600
34,000
35,400
36,800
12,500
27,000
28,400
29,900
31,400
32,800
34,200
35,600
37,000
13,000
27,200
28,600
30,100
31,600
33,000
34,400
35,800
37,200
13,500
27,500
28,800
30,300
31,800
33,200
34,600
36,000
37,400
14,000
27,800
29,100
30,600
32,000
33,400
34,800
36,200
37,600
14,500
28,000
29,300
30,800
32,200
33,700
35,100
36,500
37,800
15,000
28,200
29,600
31,000
32,500
33,900
35,300
36,700
38,100
15,500
28,400
29,800
31,300
32,700
34,100
35,500
36,900
38,300
16,000
28,600
30,100
31,500
33,000
34,400
35,800
37,200
38,500
16,500
28,900
30,400
31,800
33,200
34,600
36,000
37,400
38,800
17,000
29,200
30,600
32,100
33,500
34,900
36,300
37,700
39,000
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-49
Appendix G
Table G-10. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
17,500
29,500
30,900
32,300
33,700
35,100
36,500
37,900
39,300
18,000
29,800
31,200
32,600
34,000
35,400
36,800
38,200
39,600
18,500
30,100
31,500
32,900
34,300
35,700
37,100
38,400
39,800
19,000
30,500
31,900
33,200
34,600
36,000
37,300
38,700
40,100
19,500
30,800
32,200
33,500
34,900
36,200
37,600
39,000
40,400
20,000
31,100
32,500
33,800
35,200
36,500
37,900
39,300
40,700
20,500
31,500
32,800
34,200
35,500
36,800
38,200
39,600
41,000
21,000
31,800
33,200
34,500
35,800
37,100
38,500
39,900
41,300
21,500
32,200
33,500
34,900
36,200
37,500
38,800
40,200
41,600
22,000
32,600
33,900
35,200
36,500
37,800
39,100
40,500
41,900
22,500
32,900
34,300
35,600
36,900
38,200
39,500
40,800
23,000
33,300
34,600
35,900
37,200
38,500
39,800
41,100
23,500
33,700
35,000
36,300
37,600
38,900
40,200
41,500
24,000
34,100
35,400
36,700
38,000
39,300
40,600
41,900
24,500
34,500
35,800
37,100
38,300
39,600
40,900
25,000
34,900
36,200
37,400
38,700
40,000
41,300
25,500
35,300
36,600
37,800
39,100
40,400
41,700
26,000
35,700
37,000
38,200
39,500
40,800
26,500
36,100
37,400
38,600
39,900
41,200
27,000
36,500
37,800
39,000
40,300
41,600
27,500
36,900
38,200
39,500
40,700
42,000
28,000
37,400
38,600
39,900
41,100
28,500
37,800
39,100
40,300
41,600
29,000
38,200
39,500
40,700
42,000
29,500
38,700
39,900
41,200
30,000
39,100
40,400
41,600
30,500
39,600
40,800
42,000
31,000
40,100
41,300
31,500
40,500
41,700
32,000
41,000
32,500
41,400
G-50
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-10. M26A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
120 33,000
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
41,900
33,500 34,000 34,500 35,000 35,500 36,000 36,500 37,000 37,500 38,000 38,500 39,000 39,500 40,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-51
Appendix G
Table G-11. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
G-52
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
40
ALT: Sea Level
10
20
30
1,000
9,300
9,500
9,700
10,000
10,200
10,400
10,800
11,100
1,250
8,800
9,000
9,300
9,500
9,800
10,000
10,400
10,800
1,500
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,500
9,700
10,200
10,600
1,750
8,200
8,500
8,800
9,100
9,300
9,600
10,000
10,400
2,000
8,000
8,400
8,700
8,900
9,200
9,400
9,900
10,300
2,250
7,900
8,200
8,500
8,800
9,100
9,400
9,800
10,300
2,500
7,800
8,200
8,500
8,800
9,000
9,300
9,800
10,200
2,750
0
8,100
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,700
10,200
3,000
0
8,100
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,200
9,700
10,200
3,250
0
8,100
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,200
9,700
10,200
3,500
0
8,100
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,700
10,200
3,750
0
8,100
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,800
10,200
4,000
8,000
8,200
8,500
8,800
9,000
9,300
9,800
10,200
4,250
8,100
8,300
8,600
8,800
9,100
9,300
9,800
10,300
4,500
8,200
8,400
8,700
8,900
9,100
9,400
9,900
10,300
4,750
8,300
8,500
8,800
9,000
9,200
9,400
9,900
10,400
5,000
8,400
8,700
8,900
9,100
9,300
9,500
10,000
10,400
5,250
8,600
8,800
9,000
9,200
9,500
9,700
10,100
10,500
5,500
8,700
8,900
9,200
9,400
9,600
9,800
10,200
10,600
5,750
8,800
9,100
9,300
9,500
9,700
9,900
10,300
10,600
6,000
9,000
9,200
9,400
9,600
9,800
10,000
10,400
10,800
6,250
9,200
9,400
9,600
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,500
10,900
6,500
9,300
9,500
9,700
9,900
10,100
10,300
10,700
11,000
6,750
9,500
9,700
9,900
10,100
10,300
10,400
10,800
11,100
7,000
9,700
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,400
10,600
10,900
11,300
7,250
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,400
10,600
10,700
11,100
11,400
7,500
10,000
10,200
10,400
10,500
10,700
10,900
11,200
11,500
7,750
10,200
10,400
10,500
10,700
10,900
11,000
11,400
11,700
8,000
10,400
10,500
10,700
10,900
11,000
11,200
11,500
11,800
8,250
10,500
10,700
10,900
11,000
11,200
11,400
11,700
12,000
8,500
10,700
10,900
11,100
11,200
11,400
11,500
11,800
12,100
FM 3-09.60
50
60
80
100
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-11. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: Sea Level
50
60
80
100
8,750
10,900
11,100
11,200
11,400
11,500
11,700
12,000
12,300
9,000
11,100
11,300
11,400
11,600
11,700
11,900
12,200
12,500
9,250
11,300
11,400
11,600
11,700
11,900
12,000
12,300
12,600
9,500
11,500
11,600
11,800
11,900
12,100
12,200
12,500
12,800
9,750
11,700
11,800
12,000
12,100
12,300
12,400
12,700
13,000
10,000
11,900
12,000
12,100
12,300
12,400
12,600
12,900
13,100
10,250
12,100
12,200
12,400
12,500
12,600
12,800
13,000
13,300
10,500
12,300
12,400
12,600
12,700
12,800
13,000
13,200
13,500
10,750
12,500
12,600
12,800
12,900
13,000
13,200
13,400
13,700
11,000
12,700
12,800
13,000
13,100
13,200
13,400
13,600
13,800
11,250
12,900
13,000
13,200
13,300
13,400
13,600
13,800
14,000
11,500
13,100
13,300
13,400
13,500
13,600
13,800
14,000
14,200
11,750
13,300
13,500
13,600
13,700
13,800
14,000
14,200
14,400
12,000
13,600
13,700
13,800
13,900
14,000
14,200
14,400
14,600
12,250
13,800
13,900
14,000
14,100
14,300
14,400
14,600
14,800
12,500
14,000
14,100
14,200
14,400
14,500
14,600
14,800
12,750
14,200
14,300
14,500
14,600
14,700
14,800
13,000
14,500
14,600
14,700
14,800
Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-53
Appendix G
Table G-11. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
G-54
ALT: Sea Level
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
1,000
11,500
11,800
12,100
12,400
12,700
12,900
13,200
13,400
1,250
11,200
11,500
11,800
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,200
1,500
11,000
11,300
11,700
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,800
13,100
1,750
10,800
11,200
11,500
11,900
12,200
12,500
12,700
13,000
2,000
10,700
11,100
11,500
11,800
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
2,250
10,700
11,000
11,400
11,700
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
2,500
10,600
11,000
11,400
11,700
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
2,750
10,600
11,000
11,300
11,700
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
3,000
10,600
11,000
11,300
11,700
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
3,250
10,600
11,000
11,300
11,700
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
3,500
10,600
11,000
11,400
11,700
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
3,750
10,600
11,000
11,400
11,700
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
4,000
10,700
11,000
11,400
11,700
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
4,250
10,700
11,100
11,400
11,800
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
4,500
10,700
11,100
11,500
11,800
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
4,750
10,800
11,200
11,500
11,900
12,200
12,500
12,800
13,100
5,000
10,800
11,200
11,600
11,900
12,200
12,500
12,800
13,100
5,250
10,900
11,300
11,600
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
5,500
11,000
11,300
11,700
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
5,750
11,000
11,400
11,800
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,300
6,000
11,100
11,500
11,800
12,200
12,500
12,800
13,100
13,300
6,250
11,200
11,600
11,900
12,200
12,500
12,800
13,100
13,400
6,500
11,300
11,600
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,500
6,750
11,500
11,800
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,500
7,000
11,600
11,900
12,200
12,500
12,800
13,100
13,300
13,600
7,250
11,700
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,100
13,400
13,700
7,500
11,900
12,200
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,200
13,500
13,800
7,750
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,100
13,400
13,600
13,800
8,000
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,200
13,500
13,700
13,900
8,250
12,300
12,600
12,800
13,100
13,400
13,600
13,800
14,100
8,500
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,200
13,500
13,700
14,000
14,200
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-11. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: Sea Level
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
8,750
12,600
12,900
13,100
13,400
13,600
13,900
14,100
14,300
9,000
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,500
13,800
14,000
14,200
14,400
9,250
12,900
13,200
13,400
13,700
13,900
14,100
14,300
14,600
9,500
13,100
13,300
13,600
13,800
14,000
14,300
14,500
14,700
9,750
13,200
13,500
13,700
14,000
14,200
14,400
14,600
14,800
10,000
13,400
13,600
13,900
14,100
14,300
14,500
14,700
10,250
13,600
13,800
14,000
14,300
14,500
14,700
10,500
13,700
14,000
14,200
14,400
14,600
14,800
10,750
13,900
14,100
14,400
14,600
14,800
11,000
14,100
14,300
14,500
14,700
11,250
14,300
14,500
14,700
11,500
14,400
14,700
14,800
11,750
14,600
14,800
12,000
14,800
12,250 12,500 12,750 13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-55
Appendix G
Table G-12. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
G-56
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
40
ALT: 400 m ASL
10
20
30
1,000
9,400
9,700
9,900
10,200
10,400
10,600
11,000
11,400
1,250
8,900
9,200
9,500
9,700
10,000
10,200
10,600
11,000
1,500
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,400
9,700
9,900
10,400
10,800
1,750
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,200
9,500
9,700
10,200
10,600
2,000
8,200
8,500
8,800
9,100
9,400
9,600
10,100
10,500
2,250
8,100
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,500
10,000
10,500
2,500
8,000
8,300
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,500
10,000
10,400
2,750
7,900
8,300
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,400
9,900
10,400
3,000
7,900
8,200
8,600
8,900
9,100
9,400
9,900
10,400
3,250
7,900
8,200
8,600
8,900
9,100
9,400
9,900
10,400
3,500
7,900
8,200
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,400
9,900
10,400
3,750
8,000
8,300
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,400
9,900
10,400
4,000
8,100
8,300
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,500
10,000
10,400
4,250
8,200
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,200
9,500
10,000
10,500
4,500
8,300
8,600
8,800
9,000
9,300
9,600
10,100
10,500
4,750
8,400
8,700
8,900
9,100
9,400
9,600
10,100
10,600
5,000
8,500
8,800
9,000
9,300
9,500
9,700
10,200
10,600
5,250
8,700
8,900
9,100
9,400
9,600
9,800
10,200
10,700
5,500
8,800
9,000
9,300
9,500
9,700
9,900
10,300
10,700
5,750
8,900
9,200
9,400
9,600
9,800
10,000
10,400
10,800
6,000
9,100
9,300
9,500
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,600
10,900
6,250
9,200
9,500
9,700
9,900
10,100
10,300
10,700
11,100
6,500
9,400
9,600
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,400
10,800
11,200
6,750
9,600
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,400
10,600
10,900
11,300
7,000
9,700
9,900
10,100
10,300
10,500
10,700
11,100
11,400
7,250
9,900
10,100
10,300
10,500
10,700
10,900
11,200
11,600
7,500
10,100
10,300
10,500
10,700
10,800
11,000
11,400
11,700
7,750
10,300
10,400
10,600
10,800
11,000
11,200
11,500
11,800
8,000
10,400
10,600
10,800
11,000
11,200
11,300
11,700
12,000
8,250
10,600
10,800
11,000
11,100
11,300
11,500
11,800
12,100
8,500
10,800
11,000
11,100
11,300
11,500
11,600
12,000
12,300
FM 3-09.60
50
60
80
100
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-12. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 400 m ASL
50
60
80
100
8,750
11,000
11,200
11,300
11,500
11,600
11,800
12,100
12,400
9,000
11,200
11,300
11,500
11,700
11,800
12,000
12,300
12,600
9,250
11,400
11,500
11,700
11,800
12,000
12,100
12,500
12,800
9,500
11,500
11,700
11,900
12,000
12,200
12,300
12,600
12,900
9,750
11,700
11,900
12,000
12,200
12,400
12,500
12,800
13,100
10,000
11,900
12,100
12,200
12,400
12,600
12,700
13,000
13,300
10,250
12,100
12,300
12,400
12,600
12,700
12,900
13,200
13,500
10,500
12,300
12,500
12,600
12,800
12,900
13,100
13,400
13,600
10,750
12,500
12,700
12,800
13,000
13,100
13,300
13,500
13,800
11,000
12,800
12,900
13,100
13,200
13,300
13,500
13,700
14,000
11,250
13,000
13,100
13,300
13,400
13,500
13,700
13,900
14,200
11,500
13,200
13,300
13,500
13,600
13,700
13,900
14,100
14,400
11,750
13,400
13,500
13,700
13,800
13,900
14,100
14,300
14,500
12,000
13,600
13,800
13,900
14,000
14,100
14,300
14,500
14,700
12,250
13,900
14,000
14,100
14,200
14,300
14,500
14,700
12,500
14,100
14,200
14,300
14,400
14,600
14,700
12,750
14,300
14,400
14,500
14,600
14,800
13,000
14,500
14,600
14,700
Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-57
Appendix G
Table G-12. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
120
G-58
ALT: 400 ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
1,000
11,700
12,000
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,200
13,500
13,800
1,250
11,400
11,700
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,500
1,500
11,200
11,600
11,900
12,200
12,500
12,800
13,100
13,400
1,750
11,100
11,400
11,800
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,300
2,000
11,000
11,300
11,700
12,000
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,300
2,250
10,900
11,300
11,600
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
2,500
10,800
11,200
11,600
11,900
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
2,750
10,800
11,200
11,600
11,900
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
3,000
10,800
11,200
11,600
11,900
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
3,250
10,800
11,200
11,600
11,900
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
3,500
10,800
11,200
11,600
11,900
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
3,750
10,800
11,200
11,600
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
4,000
10,900
11,300
11,600
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
4,250
10,900
11,300
11,700
12,000
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,300
4,500
10,900
11,300
11,700
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,300
4,750
11,000
11,400
11,700
12,100
12,400
12,800
13,100
13,300
5,000
11,000
11,400
11,800
12,100
12,500
12,800
13,100
13,400
5,250
11,100
11,500
11,900
12,200
12,500
12,800
13,100
13,400
5,500
11,200
11,600
11,900
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,500
5,750
11,200
11,600
12,000
12,300
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,500
6,000
11,300
11,700
12,000
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,600
6,250
11,400
11,800
12,100
12,500
12,800
13,100
13,400
13,700
6,500
11,500
11,800
12,200
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,700
6,750
11,600
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,800
7,000
11,800
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,600
13,900
7,250
11,900
12,200
12,500
12,800
13,100
13,400
13,700
14,000
7,500
12,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,800
14,000
7,750
12,200
12,500
12,800
13,100
13,300
13,600
13,900
14,100
8,000
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,700
14,000
14,200
8,250
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,600
13,800
14,100
14,300
8,500
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,400
13,700
14,000
14,200
14,500
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-12. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 400 ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
8,750
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,600
13,800
14,100
14,300
14,600
9,000
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,700
14,000
14,200
14,500
14,700
9,250
13,100
13,300
13,600
13,900
14,100
14,400
14,600
14,800
9,500
13,200
13,500
13,800
14,000
14,300
14,500
14,700
9,750
13,400
13,600
13,900
14,200
14,400
14,600
10,000
13,500
13,800
14,100
14,300
14,500
14,800
10,250
13,700
14,000
14,200
14,500
14,700
10,500
13,900
14,100
14,400
14,600
14,800
10,750
14,100
14,300
14,500
14,800
11,000
14,200
14,500
14,700
11,250
14,400
14,600
11,500
14,600
14,800
11,750
14,800
12,000 12,250 12,500 12,750 13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-59
Appendix G
Table G-13. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
G-60
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
30
40
ALT: 800 m ASL
10
20
1,000
9,600
9,900
10,100
10,400
10,600
10,800
11,200
11,600
1,250
9,100
9,400
9,700
9,900
10,200
10,400
10,800
11,300
1,500
8,800
9,100
9,400
9,600
9,900
10,100
10,600
11,000
1,750
8,500
8,800
9,100
9,400
9,700
9,900
10,400
10,900
2,000
8,300
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,500
9,800
10,300
10,800
2,250
8,200
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,400
9,700
10,200
10,700
2,500
8,100
8,500
8,800
9,100
9,400
9,700
10,200
10,600
2,750
8,100
8,400
8,700
9,100
9,300
9,600
10,100
10,600
3,000
0
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,600
10,100
10,600
3,250
0
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,600
10,100
10,600
3,500
0
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,600
10,100
10,600
3,750
8,100
8,400
8,700
9,100
9,300
9,600
10,100
10,600
4,000
8,200
8,400
8,800
9,100
9,400
9,600
10,200
10,600
4,250
8,300
8,500
8,800
9,100
9,400
9,700
10,200
10,700
4,500
8,400
8,700
8,900
9,200
9,500
9,700
10,200
10,700
4,750
8,500
8,800
9,000
9,300
9,500
9,800
10,300
10,800
5,000
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,400
9,600
9,800
10,300
10,800
5,250
8,800
9,000
9,300
9,500
9,700
9,900
10,400
10,900
5,500
8,900
9,200
9,400
9,600
9,900
10,100
10,500
10,900
5,750
9,000
9,300
9,500
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,600
11,000
6,000
9,200
9,400
9,700
9,900
10,100
10,300
10,700
11,100
6,250
9,300
9,600
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,400
10,800
11,200
6,500
9,500
9,700
9,900
10,200
10,400
10,600
11,000
11,300
6,750
9,700
9,900
10,100
10,300
10,500
10,700
11,100
11,500
7,000
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,500
10,700
10,900
11,200
11,600
7,250
10,000
10,200
10,400
10,600
10,800
11,000
11,400
11,700
7,500
10,200
10,400
10,600
10,800
11,000
11,100
11,500
11,900
7,750
10,300
10,500
10,700
10,900
11,100
11,300
11,700
12,000
8,000
10,500
10,700
10,900
11,100
11,300
11,400
11,800
12,100
8,250
10,700
10,900
11,100
11,300
11,400
11,600
11,900
12,300
8,500
10,900
11,100
11,200
11,400
11,600
11,800
12,100
12,400
FM 3-09.60
50
60
80
100
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-13. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 800 m ASL
50
60
80
100
8,750
11,100
11,200
11,400
11,600
11,800
11,900
12,300
12,600
9,000
11,200
11,400
11,600
11,800
11,900
12,100
12,400
12,800
9,250
11,400
11,600
11,800
11,900
12,100
12,300
12,600
12,900
9,500
11,600
11,800
11,900
12,100
12,300
12,500
12,800
13,100
9,750
11,800
12,000
12,100
12,300
12,500
12,600
13,000
13,300
10,000
12,000
12,200
12,300
12,500
12,700
12,800
13,100
13,400
10,250
12,200
12,400
12,500
12,700
12,900
13,000
13,300
13,600
10,500
12,400
12,600
12,700
12,900
13,000
13,200
13,500
13,800
10,750
12,600
12,800
12,900
13,100
13,200
13,400
13,700
14,000
11,000
12,800
13,000
13,100
13,300
13,400
13,600
13,900
14,100
11,250
13,000
13,200
13,300
13,500
13,600
13,800
14,100
14,300
11,500
13,300
13,400
13,600
13,700
13,800
14,000
14,200
14,500
11,750
13,500
13,600
13,800
13,900
14,000
14,200
14,400
14,700
12,000
13,700
13,800
14,000
14,100
14,200
14,400
14,600
12,250
13,900
14,100
14,200
14,300
14,500
14,600
14,800
12,500
14,100
14,300
14,400
14,500
14,700
14,800
12,750
14,400
14,500
14,600
14,700
13,000
14,600
14,700
14,800
Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-61
Appendix G
Table G-13. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
120
G-62
ALT: 800 ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
1,000
12,000
12,300
12,600
13,000
13,300
13,500
13800
14,100
1,250
11,600
12,000
12,300
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,600
13,900
1,500
11,400
11,800
12,100
12,500
12,800
13,100
13,400
13,700
1,750
11,300
11,700
12,000
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,600
2,000
11,200
11,600
11,900
12,300
12,600
13,000
13,300
13,600
2,250
11,100
11,500
11,900
12,200
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,500
2,500
11,100
11,500
11,800
12,200
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,500
2,750
11,000
11,400
11,800
12,200
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,500
3,000
11,000
11,400
11,800
12,200
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,500
3,250
11,000
11,400
11,800
12,200
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,500
3,500
11,000
11,400
11,800
12,200
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,500
3,750
11,000
11,500
11,800
12,200
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,500
4,000
11,100
11,500
11,900
12,200
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,500
4,250
11,100
11,500
11,900
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,300
13,600
4,500
11,100
11,600
11,900
12,300
12,600
13,000
13,300
13,600
4,750
11,200
11,600
12,000
12,300
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,600
5,000
11,200
11,700
12,000
12,400
12,700
13,100
13,400
13,700
5,250
11,300
11,700
12,100
12,400
12,800
13,100
13,400
13,700
5,500
11,400
11,800
12,100
12,500
12,800
13,200
13,500
13,800
5,750
11,400
11,800
12,200
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,800
6,000
11,500
11,900
12,300
12,600
13,000
13,300
13,600
13,900
6,250
11,600
12,000
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,400
13,700
14,000
6,500
11,700
12,100
12,400
12,800
13,100
13,400
13,700
14,000
6,750
11,800
12,200
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,800
14,100
7,000
11,900
12,300
12,600
12900
13,300
13,600
13,900
14,200
7,250
12,100
12,400
12,700
13,000
13,400
13,700
14,000
14,200
7,500
12,200
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,800
14,000
14,300
7,750
12,300
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,600
13,800
14,100
14,400
8,000
12,500
12,800
13,100
13,400
13,700
14,000
14,200
14,500
8,250
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,800
14,100
14,400
14,600
8,500
12,800
13,100
13,400
13,700
13,900
14,200
14,500
14,700
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-13. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 800 ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
260 14,800
8,750
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,800
14,100
14,300
14,600
9,000
13,100
13,400
13,700
13,900
14,200
14,500
14,700
9,250
13,200
13,500
13,800
14,100
14,300
14,600
14,800
9,500
13,400
13,700
14,000
14,200
14,500
14,700
9,750
13,500
13,800
14,100
14,400
14,600
10,000
13,700
14,000
14,300
14,500
14,800
10,250
13,900
14,200
14,400
14,700
10,500
14,100
14,300
14,600
14,800
10,750
14,200
14,500
14,700
11,000
14,400
14,700
11,250
14,600
14,800
11,500
14,800
11,750 12,000 12,250 12,500 12,750 13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-63
Appendix G
Table G-14. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
G-64
20
30
40
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
50
60
80
100
1,000
9,800
10,100
10,300
10,600
10,800
11,000
11,400
11,800
1,250
9,300
9,600
9,900
10,100
10,400
10,600
11,100
11,500
1,500
8,900
9,200
9,500
9,800
10,100
10,300
10,800
11,200
1,750
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,600
9,900
10,100
10,600
11,100
2,000
8,500
8,800
9,200
9,500
9,700
10,000
10,500
11,000
2,250
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,600
9,900
10,400
10,900
2,500
8,300
8,600
9,000
9,300
9,600
9,800
10,400
10,800
2,750
0
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,500
9,800
10,300
10,800
3,000
0
8,500
8,900
9,200
9,500
9,800
10,300
10,800
3,250
0
8,500
8,900
9,200
9,500
9,800
10,300
10,800
3,500
0
8,500
8,900
9,200
9,500
9,800
10,300
10,800
3,750
0
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,500
9,800
10,300
10,800
4,000
8,300
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,500
9,800
10,400
10,800
4,250
8,400
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,600
9,900
10,400
10,900
4,500
8,500
8,800
9,100
9,300
9,600
9,900
10,400
10,900
4,750
8,600
8,900
9,200
9,400
9,700
10,000
10,500
11,000
5,000
8,800
9,000
9,300
9,500
9,800
10,000
10,500
11,000
5,250
8,900
9,100
9,400
9,700
9,900
10,100
10,600
11,100
5,500
9,000
9,300
9,500
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,700
11,100
5,750
9,200
9,400
9,600
9,900
10,100
10,300
10,800
11,200
6,000
9,300
9,500
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,500
10,900
11,300
6,250
9,400
9,700
9,900
10,100
10,400
10,600
11,000
11,400
6,500
9,600
9,800
10,100
10,300
10,500
10,700
11,100
11,500
6,750
9,800
10,000
10,200
10,400
10,600
10,900
11,300
11,600
7,000
9,900
10,100
10,400
10,600
10,800
11,000
11,400
11,800
7,250
10,100
10,300
10,500
10,700
10,900
11,100
11,500
11,900
7,500
10,300
10,500
10,700
10,900
11,100
11,300
11,700
12,000
7,750
10,400
10,600
10,800
11,000
11,200
11,400
11,800
12,200
8,000
10,600
10,800
11,000
11,200
11,400
11,600
11,900
12,300
8,250
10,800
11,000
11,200
11,400
11,500
11,700
12,100
12,500
8,500
11,000
11,200
11,300
11,500
11,700
11,900
12,300
12,600
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-14. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 1,200 m ASL
50
60
80
100
8,750
11,100
11,300
11,500
11,700
11,900
12,100
12,400
12,800
9,000
11,300
11,500
11,700
11,900
12,000
12,200
12,600
12,900
9,250
11,500
11,700
11,900
12,000
12,200
12,400
12,700
13,100
9,500
11,700
11,900
12,000
12,200
12,400
12,600
12,900
13,200
9,750
11,900
12,100
12,200
12,400
12,600
12,800
13,100
13,400
10,000
12,100
12,300
12,400
12,600
12,800
12,900
13,300
13,600
10,250
12,300
12,500
12,600
12,800
13,000
13,100
13,400
13,800
10,500
12,500
12,700
12,800
13,000
13,200
13,300
13,600
13,900
10,750
12,700
12,900
13,000
13,200
13,400
13,500
13,800
14,100
11,000
12,900
13,100
13,200
13,400
13,500
13,700
14,000
14,300
11,250
13,100
13,300
13,400
13,600
13,700
13,900
14,200
14,500
11,500
13,300
13,500
13,600
13,800
13,900
14,100
14,400
14,700
11,750
13,600
13,700
13,900
14,000
14,100
14,300
14,600
14,800
12,000
13,800
13,900
14,100
14,200
14,300
14,500
14,800
12,250
14,000
14,100
14,300
14,400
14,600
14,700
12,500
14,200
14,300
14,500
14,600
14,800
12,750
14,400
14,600
14,700
14,800
13,000
14,700
14,800
Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-65
Appendix G
Table G-14. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
G-66
ALT: 1,200 ASL
140
160
180
200
220
240
260
1,000
12,200
12,600
12,900
13,300
13,600
13,900
14,200
14,400
1,250
11,900
12,300
12,600
13,000
13,300
13,600
13,900
14,200
1,500
11,700
12,000
12,400
12,800
13,100
13,400
13,700
14,000
1,750
11,500
11,900
12,300
12,600
13,000
13,300
13,600
13,900
2,000
11,400
11,800
12,200
12,600
12,900
13,200
13,600
13,900
2,250
11,300
11,700
12,100
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,800
2,500
11,300
11,700
12,100
12,500
12,800
13,200
13,500
13,800
2,750
11,300
11,700
12,100
12,400
12,800
13,100
13,500
13,800
3,000
11,200
11,700
12,000
12,400
12,800
13,100
13,500
13,800
3,250
11,200
11,700
12,100
12,400
12,800
13,100
13,500
13,800
3,500
11,200
11,700
12,100
12,400
12,800
13,200
13,500
13,800
3,750
11,300
11,700
12,100
12,500
12,800
13,200
13,500
13,800
4,000
11,300
11,700
12,100
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,800
4,250
11,300
11,700
12,100
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,600
13,900
4,500
11,400
11,800
12,200
12,600
12,900
13,300
13,600
13,900
4,750
11,400
11,800
12,200
12,600
13,000
13,300
13,600
13,900
5,000
11,500
11,900
12,300
12,600
13,000
13,300
13,700
14,000
5,250
11,500
11,900
12,300
12,700
13,100
13,400
13,700
14,000
5,500
11,600
12,000
12,400
12,800
13,100
13,500
13,800
14,100
5,750
11,700
12,100
12,400
12,800
13,200
13,500
13,800
14,100
6,000
11,700
12,100
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,600
13,900
14,200
6,250
11,800
12,200
12,600
13,000
13,300
13,600
14,000
14,300
6,500
11,900
12,300
12,700
13,000
13,400
13,700
14,000
14,300
6,750
12,000
12,400
12,800
13,100
13,500
13,800
14,100
14,400
7,000
12,100
12,500
12,800
13,200
13,500
13,900
14,200
14,500
7,250
12,300
12,600
12,900
13,300
13,600
13,900
14,300
14,500
7,500
12,400
12,700
13,100
13,400
13,700
14,000
14,300
14,600
7,750
12,500
12,900
13,200
13,500
13,800
14,100
14,400
14,700
8,000
12,700
13,000
13,300
13,600
13,900
14,200
14,500
14,800
8,250
12,800
13,100
13,500
13,800
14,100
14,300
14,600
8,500
12,900
13,300
13,600
13,900
14,200
14,500
14,700
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-14. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 1,200 ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
180
200
220
8,750
13,100
13,400
13,700
14,000
14,300
14,600
9,000
13,200
13,600
13,900
14,200
14,400
14,700
9,250
13,400
13,700
14,000
14,300
14,600
9,500
13,600
13,900
14,200
14,400
14,700
9,750
13,700
14,000
14,300
14,600
10,000
13,900
14,200
14,500
14,700
10,250
14,100
14,300
14,600
10,500
14,200
14,500
14,800
10,750
14,400
14,700
11,000
14,600
14,800
11,250
14,700
240
260
11,500 11,750 12,000 12,250 12,500 12,750 13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-67
Appendix G
Table G-15. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
G-68
20
30
40
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
50
60
80
100
1,000
10,800
11,100
11,400
11,700
11,900
12,200
12,700
13,100
1,250
10,200
10,600
10,900
11,200
11,400
11,700
12,200
12,700
1,500
9,800
10,200
10,500
10,800
11,100
11,400
11,900
12,400
1,750
9,500
9,900
10,200
10,600
10,900
11,200
11,700
12,200
2,000
9,300
9,700
10,100
10,400
10,700
11,000
11,600
12,100
2,250
9,200
9,500
9,900
10,300
10,600
10,900
11,500
12,000
2,500
9,100
9,500
9,800
10,200
10,500
10,800
11,400
11,900
2,750
0
9,400
9,800
10,100
10,400
10,800
11,300
11,900
3,000
0
9,300
9,700
10,100
10,400
10,700
11,300
11,900
3,250
0
9,300
9,700
10,100
10,400
10,700
11,300
11,900
3,500
0
9,300
9,700
10,100
10,400
10,700
11,300
11,900
3,750
0
9,300
9,700
10,100
10,400
10,700
11,300
11,900
4,000
0
9,300
9,700
10,100
10,400
10,700
11,300
11,900
4,250
9,100
9,400
9,800
10,100
10,500
10,800
11,400
11,900
4,500
9,200
9,500
9,800
10,200
10,500
10,800
11,400
12,000
4,750
9,300
9,600
9,900
10,200
10,500
10,900
11,500
12,000
5,000
9,400
9,700
10,000
10,300
10,600
10,900
11,500
12,100
5,250
9,500
9,800
10,100
10,400
10,700
11,000
11,600
12,100
5,500
9,600
9,900
10,200
10,500
10,800
11,000
11,600
12,200
5,750
9,700
10,000
10,300
10,600
10,900
11,100
11,700
12,200
6,000
9,900
10,200
10,400
10,700
11,000
11,300
11,800
12,300
6,250
10,000
10,300
10,600
10,800
11,100
11,400
11,900
12,400
6,500
10,100
10,400
10,700
11,000
11,200
11,500
12,000
12,500
6,750
10,300
10,600
10,800
11,100
11,400
11,600
12,100
12,600
7,000
10,400
10,700
11,000
11,200
11,500
11,700
12,200
12,700
7,250
10,600
10,900
11,100
11,400
11,600
11,900
12,300
12,800
7,500
10,700
11,000
11,300
11,500
11,800
12,000
12,500
12,900
7,750
10,900
11,200
11,400
11,700
11,900
12,100
12,600
13,100
8,000
11,100
11,300
11,600
11,800
12,000
12,300
12,700
13,200
8,250
11,200
11,500
11,700
12,000
12,200
12,400
12,900
13,300
8,500
11,400
11,600
11,900
12,100
12,400
12,600
13,000
13,500
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-15. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
10
20
30
40
ALT: 3,048 m ASL
50
60
80
100
8,750
11,600
11,800
12,000
12,300
12,500
12,700
13,200
13,600
9,000
11,700
12,000
12,200
12,400
12,700
12,900
13,300
13,800
9,250
11,900
12,100
12,400
12,600
12,800
13,100
13,500
13,900
9,500
12,100
12,300
12,600
12,800
13,000
13,200
13,700
14,100
9,750
12,300
12,500
12,700
13,000
13,200
13,400
13,800
14,200
10,000
12,500
12,700
12,900
13,200
13,400
13,600
14,000
14,400
10,250
12,700
12,900
13,100
13,300
13,500
13,800
14,200
14,500
10,500
12,900
13,100
13,300
13,500
13,700
13,900
14,300
14,700
10,750
13,100
13,300
13,500
13,700
13,900
14,100
14,500
11,000
13,300
13,500
13,700
13,900
14,100
14,300
14,700
11,250
13,500
13,700
13,900
14,100
14,300
14,500
11,500
13,700
13,900
14,100
14,300
14,500
14,700
11,750
13,900
14,100
14,300
14,500
14,700
12,000
14,100
14,300
14,500
14,700
12,250
14,300
14,500
14,700
12,500
14,600
14,700
12,750
14,800
13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-69
Appendix G
Table G-15. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
G-70
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
ALT: 3048 ASL
120
140
160
180
1,000
13,600
14,000
14,400
14,800
1,250
13,200
13,600
14,000
14,400
14,800
1,500
12,900
13,400
13,800
14,200
14,600
1,750
12,700
13,200
13,600
14,100
14,500
14,800
2,000
12,600
13,100
13,500
13,900
14,400
14,700
2,250
12,500
13,000
13,400
13,900
14,300
14,700
2,500
12,400
12,900
13,400
13,800
14,200
14,600
2,750
12,400
12,900
13,400
13,800
14,200
14,600
3,000
12,400
12,900
13,300
13,800
14,200
14,600
3,250
12,400
12,900
13,300
13,800
14,200
14,600
3,500
12,400
12,900
13,300
13,800
14,200
14,600
3,750
12,400
12,900
13,300
13,800
14,200
14,600
4,000
12,400
12,900
13,400
13,800
14,200
14,600
4,250
12,400
12,900
13,400
13,800
14,300
14,700
4,500
12,500
13,000
13,400
13,900
14,300
14,700
4,750
12,500
13,000
13,500
13,900
14,300
14,700
5,000
12,600
13,100
13,500
14,000
14,400
14,800
5,250
12,600
13,100
13,600
14,000
14,400
14,800
5,500
12,700
13,200
13,600
14,100
14,500
5,750
12,700
13,200
13,700
14,100
14,500
6,000
12,800
13,300
13,700
14,200
14,600
6,250
12,900
13,400
13,800
14,200
14,700
6,500
13,000
13,400
13,900
14,300
14,700
6,750
13,000
13,500
14,000
14,400
14,800
7,000
13,100
13,600
14,000
14,500
7,250
13,200
13,700
14,100
14,500
7,500
13,400
13,800
14,200
14,600
7,750
13,500
13,900
14,300
14,700
8,000
13,600
14,000
14,400
14,800
8,250
13,700
14,200
14,500
8,500
13,900
14,300
14,700
FM 3-09.60
200
220
240
260
12 August 2008
M26, M26A1/A2, and M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Table G-15. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3048 m ASL) Range to Crest (m)
ALT: 3048 ASL
Angle of Site to Crest (mil)
120
140
160
8,750
14,000
14,400
14,800
9,000
14,200
14,600
9,250
14,300
14,700
9,500
14,500
14,800
9,750
14,600
10,000
14,800
180
200
220
240
260
10,250 10,500 10,750 11,000 11,250 11,500 11,750 12,000 12,250 12,500 12,750 13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
G-71
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix H
Firing Safety Firing safety is always a prime consideration of soldiers and trainers at all levels, especially when training exercises use live ammunition. Units must be able to conduct realistic training using live or training ammunition while meeting all safety requirements. Firing safety procedures are based on the principles of artillery safety in AR 385-63 and all of the MLRS-specific guidance from TRADOC (see these publications for details). See FM 3-09.8 (Section V MLRS Safety Procedures Para 285 Pg 2-51) for guidelines to compute MLRS firing safety.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
H-1
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix I
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions I-1. Conditions: BAV609, sea level standard (no wind). For illustration purposes only. Table I-1. M26 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Apogee Payload Time to Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude Range (m) Time (sec) (m)
10,000
13,772
161.8
14.33
570
9,487
33.3
613
7,614
11.39
10,100
13,772
161.8
14.52
564
9,589
33.3
613
7,614
11.39
10,200
13,772
161.8
14.71
559
9,691
33.3
613
7,614
11.39
10,300
13,772
161.8
14.89
552
9,791
33.3
613
7,614
11.39
10,400
13,772
161.8
15.07
546
9,890
33.2
613
7,614
11.39
10,500
13,772
161.8
15.26
540
9,990
33.2
613
7,614
11.39
10,600
13,772
161.8
15.45
533
10,092
33.2
613
7,614
11.39
10,700
13,772
161.8
15.65
525
10,198
33.1
613
7,614
11.39
10,800
13,772
161.8
15.84
517
10,300
33.1
613
7,614
11.39
10,900
13,772
161.8
16.04
509
10,401
33.0
613
7,614
11.39
11,000
13,772
161.8
16.23
500
10,503
32.9
613
7,614
11.39
11,100
13,772
161.8
16.43
491
10,605
32.9
613
7,614
11.39
11,200
13,772
161.8
16.62
482
10,707
32.8
613
7,614
11.39
11,300
13,772
161.8
16.81
473
10,803
32.7
613
7,614
11.39
11,400
13,772
161.8
17.01
463
10,906
32.6
613
7,614
11.39
11,500
13,772
161.8
17.21
452
11,008
32.4
613
7,614
11.39
11,600
13,809
162.4
17.42
449
11,109
32.5
618
7,613
11.39
11,700
13,877
163.6
17.62
450
11,211
32.7
627
7,916
11.89
11,800
13,944
164.7
17.82
451
11,311
32.9
636
7,915
11.89
11,900
14,012
165.9
18.03
453
11,412
33.1
645
7,914
11.89
12,000
14,081
167.1
18.23
455
11,513
33.3
654
7,913
11.89
12,100
14,151
168.3
18.44
456
11,614
33.6
664
7,913
11.89
12,200
14,221
169.5
18.65
458
11,715
33.8
673
7,912
11.89
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-1
Appendix I
Table I-1. M26 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
I-2
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude Range (m) Time (sec) (m)
12,300
14,290
170.7
18.86
459
11,815
34.0
683
7,911
11.89
12,400
14,363
172.0
19.07
461
11,916
34.2
693
8,218
12.41
12,500
14,433
173.2
19.28
462
12,017
34.4
703
8,217
12.41
12,600
14,504
174.5
19.49
464
12,118
34.6
713
8,206
12.39
12,700
14,578
175.8
19.71
465
12,219
34.9
724
8,205
12.39
12,800
14,649
177.1
19.92
467
12,320
35.1
735
8,204
12.39
12,900
14,723
178.4
20.14
469
12,421
35.3
746
8,203
12.39
13,000
14,797
179.7
20.36
470
12,521
35.5
756
8,496
12.89
13,100
14,870
181.1
20.58
472
12,623
35.8
768
8,494
12.89
13,200
14,944
182.5
20.80
473
12,724
36.0
779
8,493
12.89
13,300
15,019
183.9
21.02
475
12,824
36.2
791
8,492
12.89
13,400
15,094
185.3
21.24
476
12,926
36.4
803
8,491
12.89
13,500
15,173
186.7
21.46
479
13,026
36.7
815
8,489
12.89
13,600
15,251
188.2
21.69
481
13,127
36.9
828
8,777
13.39
13,700
15,328
189.7
21.92
483
13,228
37.2
841
8,776
13.39
13,800
15,408
191.2
22.15
485
13,329
37.4
854
8,775
13.39
13,900
15,486
192.7
22.38
487
13,430
37.7
867
8,782
13.41
14,000
15,566
194.2
22.61
489
13,531
37.9
880
8,781
13.41
14,100
15,645
195.8
22.84
491
13,632
38.2
894
8,779
13.41
14,200
15,724
197.4
23.07
493
13,733
38.4
908
9,062
13.91
14,300
15,804
198.9
23.31
495
13,833
38.7
922
9,061
13.91
14,400
15,885
200.5
23.54
497
13,935
38.9
936
9,059
13.91
14,500
15,965
202.1
23.78
499
14,036
39.2
951
9,057
13.91
14,600
16,046
203.8
24.02
501
14,137
39.4
965
9,056
13.91
14,700
16,127
205.4
24.26
503
14,238
39.7
980
9,334
14.41
14,800
16,208
207.0
24.50
505
14,339
39.9
996
9,333
14.41
14,900
16,290
208.7
24.74
508
14,440
40.2
1,011
9,331
14.41
15,000
16,372
210.4
24.99
510
14,541
40.5
1,027
9,329
14.41
15,100
16,453
212.1
25.23
512
14,642
40.7
1,043
9,327
14.41
15,200
16,537
213.8
25.48
514
14,743
41.0
1,059
9,601
14.91
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-1. M26 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude Range (m) Time (sec) (m)
15,300
16,619
215.6
25.73
516
14,844
41.2
1,075
9,599
14.91
15,400
16,703
217.3
25.98
518
14,945
41.5
1,092
9,597
14.91
15,500
16,785
219.1
26.23
520
15,047
41.8
1,109
9,595
14.91
15,600
16,868
220.9
26.48
522
15,148
42.0
1,126
9,593
14.91
15,700
16,952
222.7
26.74
524
15,249
42.3
1,143
9,863
15.41
15,800
17,035
224.5
26.99
526
15,350
42.6
1,161
9,861
15.41
15,900
17,119
226.3
27.25
528
15,451
42.8
1,179
9,859
15.41
16,000
17,204
228.2
27.51
530
15,552
43.1
1,197
9,857
15.41
16,100
17,288
230.0
27.77
532
15,653
43.4
1,215
9,854
15.41
16,200
17,373
231.9
28.03
535
15,754
43.7
1,234
10,120
15.91
16,300
17,458
233.8
28.29
537
15,855
43.9
1,253
10,118
15.91
16,400
17,543
235.7
28.56
539
15,957
44.2
1,273
10,115
15.91
16,500
17,628
237.6
28.82
541
16,057
44.5
1,292
10,113
15.91
16,600
17,714
239.6
29.09
543
16,159
44.8
1,312
10,110
15.91
16,700
17,800
241.6
29.36
545
16,260
45.0
1,332
10,372
16.41
16,800
17,885
243.6
29.63
547
16,362
45.3
1,352
10,370
16.41
16,900
17,972
245.5
29.90
549
16,462
45.6
1,373
10,367
16.41
17,000
18,058
247.6
30.17
551
16,564
45.9
1,394
10,364
16.41
17,100
18,144
249.6
30.44
553
16,665
46.2
1,415
10,361
16.41
17,200
18,231
251.7
30.72
555
16,766
46.5
1,437
10,619
16.91
17,300
18,319
253.7
31.00
557
16,867
46.7
1,459
10,616
16.91
17,400
18,405
255.8
31.28
559
16,969
47.0
1,481
10,613
16.91
17,500
18,493
257.9
31.55
562
17,070
47.3
1,504
10,610
16.91
17,600
18,579
260.0
31.84
563
17,171
47.6
1,526
10,865
17.41
17,700
18,668
262.2
32.12
566
17,273
47.9
1,550
10,861
17.41
17,800
18,755
264.3
32.40
567
17,374
48.2
1,573
10,858
17.41
17,900
18,844
266.5
32.69
570
17,476
48.5
1,597
10,854
17.41
18,000
18,932
268.7
32.97
572
17,576
48.8
1,621
11,105
17.91
18,100
19,020
270.9
33.26
574
17,678
49.1
1,645
11,102
17.91
18,200
19,109
273.1
33.55
576
17,780
49.4
1,670
11,098
17.91
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-3
Appendix I
Table I-1. M26 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
I-4
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude Range (m) Time (sec) (m)
18,300
19,197
275.4
33.85
577
17,881
49.7
1,695
11,094
17.91
18,400
19,287
277.7
34.14
580
17,982
50.0
1,720
11,342
18.41
18,500
19,375
279.9
34.43
582
18,083
50.3
1,746
11,338
18.41
18,600
19,465
282.2
34.73
584
18,185
50.6
1,773
11,334
18.41
18,700
19,554
284.5
35.03
586
18,286
50.9
1,799
11,337
18.42
18,800
19,644
286.9
35.32
588
18,387
51.2
1,825
11,325
18.41
18,900
19,733
289.2
35.63
590
18,489
51.5
1,853
11,569
18.91
19,000
19,823
291.6
35.93
592
18,590
51.8
1,881
11,565
18.91
19,100
19,913
294.0
36.23
594
18,692
52.1
1,909
11,560
18.91
19,200
20,003
296.4
36.54
596
18,793
52.4
1,937
11,587
18.97
19,300
20,094
298.8
36.84
598
18,894
52.7
1,965
11,827
19.47
19,400
20,184
301.3
37.15
600
18,996
53.0
1,995
11,822
19.47
19,500
20,274
303.8
37.46
602
19,097
53.4
2,024
11,817
19.47
19,600
20,365
306.2
37.77
604
19,199
53.7
2,054
11,812
19.47
19,700
20,456
308.7
38.08
606
19,300
54.0
2,084
12,049
19.97
19,800
20,548
311.3
38.40
608
19,402
54.3
2,114
12,021
19.92
19,900
20,639
313.8
38.71
611
19,503
54.6
2,145
12,016
19.92
20,000
20,730
316.4
39.03
613
19,604
55.0
2,177
12,250
20.42
20,100
20,821
318.9
39.35
614
19,706
55.3
2,208
12,245
20.42
20,200
20,913
321.6
39.66
617
19,807
55.6
2,241
12,239
20.42
20,300
21,005
324.2
39.99
619
19,909
55.9
2,273
12,233
20.42
20,400
21,096
326.8
40.31
621
20,010
56.3
2,306
12,464
20.92
20,500
21,188
329.5
40.63
623
20,112
56.6
2,340
12,458
20.92
20,600
21,281
332.1
40.96
625
20,213
56.9
2,373
12,452
20.92
20,700
21,372
334.8
41.28
627
20,314
57.3
2,407
12,445
20.92
20,800
21,465
337.5
41.61
629
20,416
57.6
2,442
12,703
21.48
20,900
21,558
340.3
41.94
631
20,518
57.9
2,477
12,696
21.48
21,000
21,650
343.0
42.27
633
20,619
58.3
2,512
12,689
21.48
21,100
21,743
345.8
42.61
635
20,721
58.6
2,548
12,682
21.48
21,200
21,836
348.6
42.94
637
20,822
58.9
2,585
12,907
21.98
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-1. M26 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude Range (m) Time (sec) (m)
21,300
21,929
351.4
43.28
639
20,924
59.3
2,622
12,900
21.98
21,400
22,022
354.2
43.61
641
21,025
59.6
2,659
12,892
21.98
21,500
22,115
357.1
43.95
643
21,126
60.0
2,696
12,885
21.98
21,600
22,209
359.9
44.29
645
21,228
60.3
2,734
13,107
22.48
21,700
22,302
362.8
44.63
647
21,330
60.7
2,773
13,099
22.48
21,800
22,395
365.7
44.97
650
21,431
61.0
2,812
13,091
22.48
21,900
22,489
368.6
45.32
652
21,532
61.4
2,851
13,310
22.98
22,000
22,583
371.6
45.66
654
21,634
61.7
2,891
13,301
22.98
22,100
22,677
374.5
46.01
656
21,736
62.1
2,932
13,293
22.98
22,200
22,771
377.5
46.36
658
21,837
62.4
2,972
13,284
22.98
22,300
22,864
380.5
46.71
660
21,939
62.8
3,014
13,500
23.48
22,400
22,958
383.5
47.06
662
22,040
63.1
3,056
13,491
23.48
22,500
23,054
386.6
47.41
664
22,142
63.5
3,098
13,481
23.48
22,600
23,147
389.7
47.77
666
22,243
63.9
3,141
13,695
23.98
22,700
23,242
392.7
48.13
668
22,345
64.2
3,184
13,685
23.98
22,800
23,336
395.8
48.48
670
22,446
64.6
3,228
13,675
23.98
22,900
23,431
399.0
48.84
672
22,548
65.0
3,272
13,886
24.48
23,000
23,526
402.1
49.20
674
22,650
65.3
3,317
13,883
24.50
23,100
23,620
405.3
49.56
676
22,751
65.7
3,362
13,872
24.50
23,200
23,715
408.4
49.93
679
22,852
66.1
3,408
13,861
24.50
23,300
23,810
411.6
50.29
680
22,954
66.5
3,454
14,069
25.00
23,400
23,905
414.9
50.66
682
23,056
66.8
3,501
14,058
25.00
23,500
24,000
418.1
51.03
685
23,157
67.2
3,548
14,046
25.00
23,600
24,095
421.4
51.40
687
23,259
67.6
3,596
14,251
25.50
23,700
24,190
424.7
51.78
689
23,360
68.0
3,645
14,239
25.50
23,800
24,285
428.0
52.15
691
23,461
68.4
3,694
14,227
25.50
23,900
24,382
431.4
52.53
693
23,563
68.8
3,744
14,429
26.00
24,000
24,477
434.7
52.90
695
23,665
69.1
3,794
14,416
26.00
24,100
24,572
438.1
53.28
697
23,766
69.5
3,844
14,403
26.00
24,200
24,668
441.5
53.66
699
23,868
69.9
3,896
14,603
26.50
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-5
Appendix I
Table I-1. M26 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
I-6
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude Range (m) Time (sec) (m)
24,300
24,764
444.9
54.05
702
23,969
70.3
3,948
14,590
26.50
24,400
24,859
448.4
54.43
703
24,071
70.7
4,000
14,576
26.50
24,500
24,954
451.8
54.82
705
24,172
71.1
4,053
14,773
27.00
24,600
25,050
455.3
55.21
707
24,274
71.5
4,107
14,758
27.00
24,700
25,146
458.8
55.60
709
24,376
71.9
4,161
14,743
27.00
24,800
25,242
462.4
55.99
712
24,477
72.3
4,216
14,944
27.52
24,900
25,338
466.0
56.38
714
24,579
72.7
4,272
14,923
27.50
25,000
25,434
469.5
56.78
716
24,681
73.1
4,328
14,907
27.50
25,100
25,531
473.2
57.18
718
24,782
73.5
4,385
15,099
28.00
25,200
25,627
476.8
57.58
720
24,884
74.0
4,443
15,082
28.00
25,300
25,723
480.5
57.98
722
24,985
74.4
4,501
15,065
28.00
25,400
25,819
484.2
58.39
724
25,087
74.8
4,559
15,254
28.50
25,500
25,915
487.9
58.79
726
25,188
75.2
4,619
15,236
28.50
25,600
26,012
491.6
59.20
728
25,290
75.6
4,679
15,218
28.50
25,700
26,109
495.4
59.61
730
25,391
76.1
4,740
15,411
29.02
25,800
26,205
499.1
60.02
732
25,493
76.5
4,801
15,393
29.02
25,900
26,302
503.0
60.44
734
25,595
76.9
4,864
15,373
29.02
26,000
26,399
506.8
60.86
737
25,696
77.4
4,927
15,557
29.52
26,100
26,496
510.7
61.28
739
25,797
77.8
4,991
15,537
29.52
26,200
26,592
514.6
61.70
741
25,899
78.2
5,055
15,718
30.02
26,300
26,688
518.5
62.12
743
26,001
78.7
5,120
15,697
30.02
26,400
26,785
522.5
62.55
745
26,102
79.1
5,186
15,675
30.02
26,500
26,882
526.4
62.98
747
26,203
79.6
5,253
15,854
30.52
26,600
26,979
530.5
63.41
749
26,305
80.0
5,320
15,831
30.52
26,700
27,076
534.5
63.84
752
26,407
80.5
5,389
15,808
30.52
26,800
27,175
538.6
64.28
755
26,509
80.9
5,459
16,008
31.08
26,900
27,274
542.8
64.72
759
26,611
81.4
5,530
15,984
31.08
27,000
27,371
547.0
65.16
762
26,712
81.9
5,601
15,959
31.08
27,100
27,469
551.2
65.61
765
26,813
82.4
5,674
16,131
31.58
27,200
27,566
555.5
66.06
768
26,914
82.9
5,748
16,105
31.58
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-1. M26 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude Range (m) Time (sec) (m)
27,300
27,665
559.8
66.51
772
27,016
83.4
5,823
16,274
32.08
27,400
27,763
564.2
66.97
775
27,117
83.9
5,899
16,246
32.08
27,500
27,861
568.5
67.43
779
27,219
84.4
5,976
16,218
32.08
27,600
27,959
573.0
67.89
782
27,321
85.0
6,054
16,389
32.59
27,700
28,057
577.5
68.36
785
27,422
85.5
6,133
16,360
32.59
27,800
28,155
582.0
68.83
789
27,524
86.0
6,213
16,522
33.09
27,900
28,253
586.5
69.31
792
27,625
86.5
6,295
16,491
33.09
28,000
28,352
591.1
69.79
795
27,727
87.1
6,377
16,651
33.59
28,100
28,450
595.8
70.27
799
27,829
87.6
6,461
16,618
33.59
28,200
28,548
600.5
70.76
802
27,930
88.1
6,545
16,584
33.59
28,300
28,646
605.2
71.25
805
28,032
88.7
6,631
16,740
34.09
28,400
28,744
610.0
71.75
809
28,133
89.2
6,719
16,704
34.09
28,500
28,842
614.9
72.25
813
28,235
89.8
6,808
16,857
34.59
28,600
28,941
619.8
72.76
816
28,336
90.3
6,899
16,819
34.59
28,700
29,039
624.8
73.28
819
28,438
90.9
6,990
16,968
35.09
28,800
29,137
629.8
73.79
823
28,540
91.5
7,084
16,928
35.09
28,900
29,235
635.0
74.32
827
28,641
92.1
7,179
17,074
35.59
29,000
29,333
640.1
74.85
829
28,743
92.7
7,275
17,032
35.59
29,100
29,431
645.3
75.38
833
28,844
93.2
7,373
17,173
36.09
29,200
29,531
650.7
75.93
836
28,947
93.8
7,474
17,128
36.09
29,300
29,630
656.1
76.48
840
29,049
94.5
7,576
17,266
36.59
29,400
29,727
661.6
77.04
843
29,150
95.1
7,681
17,223
36.61
29,500
29,825
667.2
77.62
846
29,252
95.7
7,788
17,172
36.61
29,600
29,923
672.9
78.19
850
29,353
96.3
7,897
17,304
37.11
29,700
30,021
678.7
78.78
854
29,455
97.0
8,009
17,432
37.61
29,800
30,119
684.7
79.38
858
29,556
97.6
8,124
17,375
37.61
29,900
30,217
690.7
79.99
861
29,658
98.3
8,241
17,498
38.11
30,000
30,315
696.8
80.60
864
29,760
98.9
8,361
17,437
38.11
30,100
30,414
703.2
81.23
867
29,863
99.6
8,485
17,553
38.61
30,200
30,513
709.7
81.88
871
29,965
100.3
8,612
17,487
38.61
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-7
Appendix I
Table I-1. M26 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
I-8
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude Range (m) Time (sec) (m)
30,300
30,611
716.3
82.53
875
30,066
101.0
8,743
17,596
39.11
30,400
30,708
723.1
83.21
877
30,168
101.7
8,877
17,701
39.61
30,500
30,805
730.1
83.90
881
30,269
102.5
9,017
17,625
39.61
30,600
30,905
737.4
84.61
884
30,372
103.3
9,163
17,742
40.17
30,700
31,003
744.9
85.35
888
30,475
104.0
9,313
17,656
40.17
30,800
31,100
752.7
86.11
890
30,577
104.8
9,470
17,724
40.63
30,900
31,198
760.9
86.90
894
30,680
105.7
9,636
17,800
41.13
31,000
31,296
769.5
87.74
899
30,782
106.6
9,811
17,889
41.69
31,100
31,393
778.6
88.61
902
30,884
107.5
9,996
17,776
41.69
31,200
31,490
788.3
89.54
906
30,986
108.5
10,196
17,822
42.19
31,300
31,588
798.8
90.55
909
31,090
109.5
10,412
17,853
42.69
31,400
31,685
810.3
91.63
913
31,193
110.6
10,649
17,866
43.19
31,500
31,781
823.1
92.84
917
31,296
111.9
10,914
17,853
43.69
31,600
31,877
837.9
94.22
920
31,400
113.3
11,222
17,968
44.69
31700
31,972
855.8
95.87
924
31,504
115.0
11,597
17,864
45.20
31800
32,072
883.8
98.42
930
31,618
117.6
12,186
17,894
46.70
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Figure I-1. M26 Low Quadrant Elevation Trajectories. Conditions: BA-ER-D, sea level standard (no wind). For illustration purposes only.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-9
Appendix I
Table I-2. M26 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
10,000
16,361
209.91
14.36
1,023
9,459
45.71
1,024
9,319
14.38
10,100
16,361
209.91
14.54
1,023
9,560
45.84
1,024
9,319
14.38
10,200
16,408
210.90
14.72
1,032
9,659
46.21
1,033
9,318
14.38
10,300
16,408
210.90
14.91
1,031
9,760
46.33
1,033
9,318
14.38
10,400
16,456
211.88
15.09
1,039
9,860
46.70
1,042
9,317
14.38
10,500
16,456
211.88
15.27
1,037
9,956
46.80
1,042
9,317
14.38
10,600
16,504
212.87
15.46
1,045
10,057
47.16
1,051
9,315
14.38
10,700
16,551
213.86
15.65
1,053
10,157
47.52
1,061
9,591
14.88
10,800
16,598
214.85
15.84
1,061
10,258
47.87
1,070
9,590
14.88
10,900
16,597
214.85
16.04
1,058
10,361
47.95
1,070
9,590
14.88
11,000
16,644
215.84
16.23
1,065
10,462
48.30
1,080
9,589
14.88
11,100
16,692
216.83
16.43
1,072
10,563
48.64
1,089
9,587
14.88
11,200
16,692
216.83
16.62
1,069
10,666
48.70
1,089
9,587
14.88
11,300
16,738
217.82
16.82
1,075
10,768
49.03
1,098
9,586
14.88
11,400
16,784
218.80
17.03
1,081
10,871
49.36
1,108
9,585
14.88
11,500
16,830
219.79
17.23
1,088
10,972
49.68
1,117
9,584
14.88
11,600
16,877
220.78
17.43
1,094
11,074
50.00
1,127
9,583
14.88
11,700
16,923
221.77
17.62
1,100
11,170
50.32
1,136
9,581
14.88
11,800
16,968
222.76
17.82
1,105
11,270
50.62
1,146
9,853
15.38
11,900
17,013
223.75
18.03
1,111
11,371
50.93
1,156
9,852
15.38
12,000
17,014
223.75
18.23
1,105
11,472
50.93
1,156
9,852
15.38
12,100
17,059
224.74
18.44
1,110
11,573
51.23
1,165
9,851
15.38
12,200
17,105
225.73
18.64
1,115
11,674
51.52
1,175
9,849
15.38
12,300
17,150
226.71
18.85
1,119
11,774
51.80
1,185
9,848
15.38
12,400
17,195
227.70
19.06
1,123
11,876
52.09
1,194
9,847
15.38
12,500
17,240
228.69
19.27
1,127
11,976
52.36
1,204
9,846
15.38
12,600
17,329
230.67
19.48
1,143
12,076
52.95
1,224
9,843
15.38
12,700
17,374
231.66
19.70
1,147
12,177
53.22
1,233
10,111
15.88
12,800
17,419
232.65
19.91
1,150
12,278
53.48
1,243
10,109
15.88
12,900
17,462
233.63
20.13
1,154
12,379
53.74
1,253
10,108
15.88
I-10
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-2. M26 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
13,000
17,506
234.62
20.34
1,156
12,480
53.98
1,263
10,107
15.88
13,100
17,550
235.61
20.56
1,159
12,581
54.24
1,273
10,105
15.88
13,200
17,594
236.60
20.78
1,161
12,682
54.47
1,283
10,104
15.88
13,300
17,637
237.59
21.00
1,164
12,783
54.70
1,293
10,103
15.88
13,400
17,724
239.57
21.22
1,178
12,883
55.27
1,313
10,100
15.88
13,500
17,768
240.56
21.44
1,180
12,984
55.49
1,323
10,364
16.38
13,600
17,810
241.54
21.67
1,182
13,085
55.71
1,334
10,362
16.38
13,700
17,853
242.53
21.89
1,183
13,186
55.92
1,344
10,361
16.38
13,800
17,939
244.51
22.12
1,197
13,287
56.48
1,364
10,358
16.38
13,900
17,981
245.50
22.35
1,197
13,387
56.67
1,375
10,357
16.38
14,000
18,023
246.49
22.58
1,198
13,489
56.87
1,385
10,355
16.38
14,100
18,102
248.33
22.81
1,209
13,589
57.35
1,404
10,353
16.38
14,200
18,138
249.19
23.04
1,207
13,691
57.49
1,413
10,613
16.88
14,300
18,216
251.03
23.27
1,219
13,791
57.97
1,432
10,610
16.88
14,400
18,253
251.89
23.51
1,216
13,893
58.09
1,441
10,609
16.88
14,500
18,330
253.73
23.74
1,227
13,993
58.57
1,461
10,615
16.90
14,600
18,366
254.58
23.98
1,224
14,094
58.67
1,470
10,613
16.90
14,700
18,443
256.43
24.22
1,234
14,196
59.14
1,490
10,602
16.88
14,800
18,518
258.27
24.46
1,244
14,296
59.60
1,509
10,858
17.38
14,900
18,554
259.13
24.70
1,240
14,398
59.68
1,518
10,856
17.38
15,000
18,630
260.97
24.94
1,250
14,498
60.14
1,539
10,853
17.38
15,100
18,704
262.81
25.19
1,260
14,599
60.59
1,559
10,850
17.38
15,200
18,739
263.67
25.43
1,255
14,700
60.65
1,568
10,849
17.38
15,300
18,815
265.51
25.68
1,264
14,802
61.09
1,588
10,846
17.38
15,400
18,888
267.36
25.93
1,273
14,902
61.52
1,608
10,843
17.38
15,500
18,964
269.20
26.18
1,281
15,003
61.95
1,628
11,095
17.88
15,600
19,036
271.04
26.43
1,290
15,104
62.37
1,649
11,092
17.88
15,700
19,110
272.89
26.68
1,298
15,205
62.79
1,669
11,089
17.88
15,800
19,183
274.73
26.93
1,306
15,305
63.20
1,690
11,086
17.88
15,900
19,256
276.58
27.19
1,314
15,407
63.61
1,711
11,082
17.88
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-11
Appendix I
Table I-2. M26 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
16,000
19,328
278.42
27.44
1,322
15,507
64.01
1,731
11,331
18.38
16,100
19,400
280.26
27.70
1,329
15,609
64.41
1,752
11,328
18.38
16,200
19,471
282.11
27.96
1,336
15,709
64.81
1,773
11,324
18.38
16,300
19,542
283.95
28.22
1,343
15,811
65.19
1,794
11,321
18.38
16,400
19,609
285.79
28.48
1,347
15,912
65.52
1,814
11,318
18.38
16,500
19,679
287.64
28.75
1,353
16,013
65.89
1,835
11,563
18.88
16,600
19,749
289.48
29.01
1,360
16,114
66.26
1,857
11,560
18.88
16,700
19,818
291.32
29.28
1,365
16,214
66.63
1,878
11,556
18.88
16,800
19,888
293.17
29.54
1,370
16,316
66.98
1,900
11,553
18.88
16,900
19,957
295.01
29.81
1,376
16,417
67.33
1,921
11,549
18.88
17,000
20,026
296.86
30.08
1,380
16,519
67.67
1,943
11,791
19.38
17,100
20,094
298.70
30.36
1,385
16,620
68.00
1,964
11,788
19.38
17,200
20,198
301.53
30.63
1,406
16,720
68.77
1,998
11,782
19.38
17,300
20,266
303.38
30.90
1,409
16,821
69.09
2,020
11,778
19.38
17,400
20,334
305.22
31.18
1,413
16,923
69.41
2,042
11,774
19.38
17,500
20,401
307.06
31.46
1,417
17,024
69.72
2,064
12,021
19.90
17,600
20,467
308.91
31.74
1,419
17,125
70.01
2,087
12,017
19.90
17,700
20,569
311.74
32.02
1,439
17,226
70.75
2,121
12,011
19.90
17,800
20,635
313.58
32.30
1,441
17,327
71.04
2,143
12,007
19.90
17,900
20,702
315.43
32.58
1,443
17,429
71.32
2,166
12,003
19.90
18,000
20,802
318.26
32.87
1,462
17,529
72.04
2,201
12,237
20.40
18,100
20,867
320.10
33.15
1,464
17,631
72.31
2,224
12,233
20.40
18,200
20,932
321.95
33.44
1,465
17,732
72.56
2,246
12,229
20.40
18,300
21,031
324.78
33.73
1,483
17,833
73.27
2,281
12,222
20.40
18,400
21,095
326.62
34.02
1,483
17,935
73.51
2,305
12,456
20.90
18,500
21,159
328.47
34.31
1,483
18,036
73.74
2,328
12,451
20.90
18,600
21,257
331.30
34.61
1,500
18,137
74.44
2,364
12,445
20.90
18,700
21,320
333.14
34.90
1,499
18,238
74.65
2,387
12,440
20.90
18,800
21,416
335.97
35.20
1,516
18,339
75.33
2,423
12,668
21.40
18,900
21,479
337.82
35.50
1,515
18,441
75.53
2,446
12,664
21.40
I-12
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-2. M26 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
19,000
21,576
340.65
35.80
1,531
18,541
76.19
2,483
12,657
21.40
19,100
21,637
342.49
36.10
1,529
18,644
76.37
2,507
12,652
21.40
19,200
21,732
345.33
36.40
1,544
18,744
77.03
2,543
12,645
21.40
19,300
21,794
347.17
36.71
1,541
18,846
77.19
2,567
12,873
21.90
19,400
21,888
350.00
37.01
1,556
18,947
77.84
2,604
12,866
21.90
19,500
21,948
351.85
37.32
1,552
19,049
77.97
2,628
12,861
21.90
19,600
22,042
354.68
37.63
1,567
19,150
78.60
2,666
12,853
21.90
19,700
22,134
357.51
37.94
1,581
19,251
79.22
2,703
13,076
22.40
19,800
22,195
359.36
38.25
1,576
19,353
79.34
2,728
13,099
22.46
19,900
22,286
362.19
38.56
1,589
19,454
79.95
2,765
13,091
22.46
20,000
22,377
365.02
38.88
1,603
19,555
80.55
2,803
13,084
22.46
20,100
22,441
367.00
39.20
1,599
19,657
80.71
2,830
13,305
22.96
20,200
22,536
369.96
39.51
1,614
19,757
81.36
2,870
13,276
22.91
20,300
22,630
372.93
39.83
1,629
19,859
82.00
2,911
13,288
22.96
20,400
22,692
374.91
40.15
1,624
19,961
82.13
2,937
13,283
22.96
20,500
22,786
377.87
40.47
1,638
20,062
82.76
2,978
13,499
23.46
20,600
22,878
380.84
40.80
1,652
20,163
83.38
3,019
13,490
23.46
20,700
22,971
383.81
41.12
1,666
20,264
84.00
3,060
13,481
23.46
20,800
23,062
386.77
41.45
1,679
20,365
84.61
3,101
13,472
23.46
20,900
23,154
389.74
41.78
1,692
20,466
85.21
3,143
13,686
23.96
21,000
23,215
391.71
42.11
1,684
20,569
85.27
3,170
13,680
23.96
21,100
23,305
394.68
42.44
1,696
20,669
85.86
3,212
13,670
23.96
21,200
23,395
397.65
42.77
1,708
20,771
86.44
3,254
13,881
24.46
21,300
23,485
400.61
43.11
1,720
20,872
87.01
3,296
13,879
24.48
21,400
23,574
403.58
43.44
1,731
20,973
87.57
3,339
13,869
24.48
21,500
23,662
406.54
43.78
1,741
21,074
88.12
3,381
13,859
24.48
21,600
23,750
409.51
44.12
1,751
21,176
88.66
3,424
14,068
24.98
21,700
23,838
412.48
44.46
1,761
21,277
89.19
3,467
14,057
24.98
21,800
23,925
415.44
44.80
1,771
21,378
89.72
3,510
14,047
24.98
21,900
24,011
418.41
45.15
1,780
21,480
90.23
3,553
14,036
24.98
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-13
Appendix I
Table I-2. M26 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
22,000
24,098
421.38
45.49
1,788
21,582
90.73
3,597
14,243
25.48
22,100
24,183
424.34
45.84
1,796
21,683
91.23
3,640
14,232
25.48
22,200
24,269
427.31
46.19
1,804
21,785
91.72
3,684
14,221
25.48
22,300
24,382
431.26
46.54
1,833
21,885
92.75
3,743
14,421
25.98
22,400
24,466
434.23
46.89
1,840
21,987
93.22
3,787
14,410
25.98
22,500
24,550
437.19
47.25
1,847
22,088
93.68
3,832
14,398
25.98
22,600
24,633
440.16
47.61
1,852
22,190
94.12
3,876
14,600
26.48
22,700
24,716
443.13
47.96
1,857
22,291
94.55
3,921
14,588
26.48
22,800
24,799
446.09
48.32
1,862
22,393
94.98
3,966
14,576
26.48
22,900
24,908
450.05
48.69
1,889
22,494
95.96
4,026
14,771
26.98
23,000
24,989
453.01
49.05
1,892
22,596
96.35
4,072
14,759
26.98
23,100
25,070
455.98
49.41
1,895
22,697
96.74
4,118
14,747
26.98
23,200
25,178
459.93
49.78
1,921
22,798
97.70
4,179
14,730
26.98
23,300
25,258
462.90
50.15
1,924
22,900
98.08
4,225
14,927
27.48
23,400
25,338
465.87
50.52
1,926
23,002
98.44
4,271
14,914
27.48
23,500
25,444
469.82
50.89
1,950
23,102
99.37
4,333
14,897
27.48
23,600
25,523
472.79
51.26
1,951
23,205
99.71
4,380
15,101
28.00
23,700
25,602
475.75
51.64
1,951
23,307
100.02
4,427
15,088
28.00
23,800
25,706
479.71
52.02
1,974
23,407
100.93
4,489
15,070
28.00
23,900
25,783
482.67
52.40
1,972
23,509
101.21
4,536
15,262
28.50
24,000
25,886
486.63
52.78
1,995
23,610
102.09
4,600
15,243
28.50
24,100
25,962
489.59
53.16
1,992
23,712
102.36
4,647
15,229
28.50
24,200
26,065
493.55
53.55
2,014
23,813
103.22
4,711
15,421
29.02
24,300
26,141
496.51
53.94
2,009
23,916
103.46
4,759
15,406
29.02
24,400
26,241
500.47
54.33
2,029
24,017
104.29
4,823
15,387
29.02
24,500
26,340
504.42
54.72
2,049
24,118
105.11
4,888
15,570
29.52
24,600
26,414
507.39
55.12
2,043
24,220
105.30
4,937
15,555
29.52
24,700
26,513
511.34
55.51
2,061
24,321
106.10
5,002
15,534
29.52
24,800
26,611
515.30
55.91
2,078
24,422
106.87
5,067
15,715
30.02
24,900
26,683
518.25
56.31
2,070
24,525
107.01
5,116
15,699
30.02
I-14
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-2. M26 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
25,000
26,780
522.19
56.71
2,086
24,626
107.77
5,182
15,678
30.02
25,100
26,876
526.13
57.12
2,101
24,727
108.50
5,248
15,856
30.52
25,200
26,970
530.07
57.53
2,116
24,829
109.22
5,314
15,834
30.52
25,300
27,065
534.00
57.94
2,130
24,930
109.92
5,380
15,812
30.52
25,400
27,183
538.93
58.36
2,169
25,031
111.23
5,464
15,982
31.02
25,500
27,275
542.87
58.77
2,181
25,132
111.91
5,531
15,984
31.08
25,600
27,368
546.81
59.19
2,193
25,233
112.57
5,599
15,960
31.08
25,700
27,459
550.74
59.61
2,204
25,335
113.20
5,667
16,134
31.58
25,800
27,571
555.67
60.04
2,239
25,436
114.43
5,752
16,103
31.58
25,900
27,661
559.61
60.48
2,246
25,540
114.99
5,820
16,275
32.08
26,000
27,750
563.54
60.90
2,258
25,638
115.64
5,889
16,250
32.08
26,100
27,859
568.47
61.35
2,288
25,741
116.78
5,975
16,218
32.08
26,200
27,946
572.41
61.79
2,295
25,842
117.33
6,044
16,387
32.58
26,300
28,032
576.34
62.23
2,300
25,944
117.84
6,114
16,361
32.58
26,400
28,140
581.27
62.68
2,329
26,046
118.96
6,201
16,521
33.08
26,500
28,245
586.19
63.13
2,358
26,147
120.06
6,289
16,493
33.09
26,600
28,330
590.13
63.58
2,361
26,249
120.52
6,359
16,466
33.09
26,700
28,434
595.05
64.05
2,387
26,351
121.58
6,447
16,623
33.59
26,800
28,516
598.99
64.50
2,388
26,453
122.00
6,518
16,595
33.59
26,900
28,618
603.92
64.97
2,412
26,555
123.00
6,607
16,749
34.09
27,000
28,719
608.84
65.45
2,435
26,657
123.97
6,697
16,713
34.09
27,100
28,818
613.76
65.93
2,456
26,758
124.93
6,787
16,865
34.59
27,200
28,916
618.69
66.42
2,476
26,861
125.84
6,877
16,827
34.59
27,300
28,994
622.62
66.89
2,470
26,963
126.12
6,950
16,796
34.59
27,400
29,090
627.55
67.38
2,488
27,065
127.00
7,041
16,946
35.09
27,500
29,185
632.47
67.88
2,504
27,167
127.84
7,132
16,906
35.09
27,600
29,298
638.38
68.40
2,546
27,268
129.28
7,242
17,045
35.59
27,700
29,391
643.30
68.90
2,559
27,371
130.05
7,334
17,004
35.59
27,800
29,483
648.23
69.41
2,571
27,473
130.81
7,427
17,148
36.09
27,900
29,573
653.15
69.93
2,581
27,575
131.52
7,520
17,111
36.11
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-15
Appendix I
Table I-2. M26 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
28,000
29,661
658.07
70.45
2,589
27,678
132.19
7,613
17,247
36.59
28,100
29,766
663.98
71.00
2,620
27,780
133.41
7,725
17,195
36.59
28,200
29,868
669.89
71.56
2,648
27,882
134.58
7,838
17,324
37.09
28,300
29,951
674.81
72.11
2,648
27,985
135.09
7,933
17,284
37.11
28,400
30,050
680.72
72.67
2,673
28,087
136.18
8,047
17,411
37.61
28,500
30,147
686.63
73.25
2,693
28,190
137.20
8,161
17,355
37.61
28,600
30,242
692.54
73.84
2,712
28,293
138.17
8,275
17,478
38.11
28,700
30,335
698.44
74.43
2,727
28,395
139.08
8,391
17,420
38.11
28,800
30,427
704.35
75.03
2,741
28,498
139.94
8,506
17,540
38.61
28,900
30,516
710.26
75.63
2,751
28,601
140.74
8,622
17,479
38.61
29,000
30,617
717.15
76.28
2,779
28,704
142.00
8,758
17,585
39.11
29,100
30,701
723.06
76.91
2,782
28,807
142.65
8,875
17,699
39.61
29,200
30,797
729.95
77.58
2,803
28,911
143.74
9,012
17,624
39.61
29,300
30,890
736.84
78.26
2,820
29,015
144.77
9,150
17,724
40.11
29,400
30,981
743.74
78.95
2,833
29,118
145.72
9,288
17,668
40.17
29,500
31,080
751.61
79.69
2,862
29,222
147.07
9,446
17,751
40.67
29,600
31,174
759.49
80.45
2,883
29,326
148.27
9,605
17,831
41.17
29,700
31,264
767.37
81.23
2,898
29,431
149.33
9,765
17,892
41.63
29,800
31,349
775.25
82.03
2,905
29,535
150.23
9,925
17,794
41.63
29,900
31,440
784.11
82.89
2,922
29,641
151.45
10,107
17,874
42.19
30,000
31,534
793.96
83.82
2,947
29,747
152.89
10,308
17,915
42.69
30,100
31,613
802.82
84.74
2,945
29,853
153.70
10,491
17,965
43.19
30,200
31,693
812.66
85.73
2,948
29,959
154.69
10,694
17,997
43.69
30,300
31,772
823.50
86.81
2,950
30,067
155.76
10,918
17,844
43.69
30,400
31,849
835.31
87.99
2,950
30,176
156.86
11,164
18,003
44.69
30,500
31,921
848.11
89.29
2,941
30,285
157.87
11,431
17,973
45.19
30,600
31,955
855.00
90.22
2,855
30,390
156.74
11,575
17,867
45.19
30,700
31,990
862.88
91.23
2,768
30,495
155.67
11,740
17,911
45.70
30,800
32,015
869.77
92.21
2,661
30,599
154.09
11,885
17,961
46.20
30,900
32,040
877.65
93.27
2,552
30,703
152.53
12,050
17,833
46.20
I-16
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-2. M26 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Dud Target (m) Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Apogee
Payload Time to Range (m) Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
31,000
32,060
885.53
94.36
2,430
30,807
150.68
12,216
17,861
46.70
31,100
32,077
894.39
95.55
2,302
30,911
148.75
12,403
17,870
47.20
31,200
32,085
903.25
96.78
2,153
31,014
146.35
12,589
17,716
47.20
31,300
32,085
903.25
97.28
1,972
31,111
142.46
12,589
17,716
47.20
31,400
32,085
903.25
97.79
1,788
31,208
138.45
12,589
17,716
47.20
31,500
32,085
903.25
98.30
1,602
31,305
134.35
12,589
17,716
47.20
31,600
32,085
903.25
98.82
1,411
31,403
130.12
12,589
17,716
47.20
31,700
32,085
903.25
99.36
1,216
31,501
125.74
12,589
17,716
47.20
31,800
32,085
903.25
99.91
1,015
31,602
121.16
12,589
17,716
47.20
31,900 32,000 Note: Blank cells indicate that a solution is not available for the range indicated.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-17
Appendix I
Figure I-2. M26 High Quadrant Elevation Trajectories. Conditions: BA-ER-D, sea level standard (no wind). For illustration purposes only.
I-18
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
15,000
18,000
161.8
20.06
667
14,502
41.8
878
10,552
13.49
15,100
18,000
161.8
20.26
656
14,605
41.7
878
10,552
13.49
15,200
18,000
161.8
20.46
643
14,708
41.5
878
10,552
13.49
15,300
18,000
161.8
20.66
630
14,811
41.3
878
10,552
13.49
15,400
18,000
161.8
20.87
617
14,914
41.1
878
10,552
13.49
15,500
18,000
161.8
21.07
603
15,015
40.8
878
10,552
13.49
15,600
18,000
161.8
21.27
590
15,117
40.6
878
10,552
13.49
15,700
18,000
161.8
21.48
576
15,217
40.4
878
10,552
13.49
15,800
18,000
161.8
21.69
561
15,321
40.1
878
10,552
13.49
15,900
18,000
161.8
21.90
545
15,424
39.8
878
10,552
13.49
16,000
18,000
161.8
22.12
529
15,528
39.5
878
10,552
13.49
16,100
18,000
161.8
22.33
513
15,630
39.3
878
10,552
13.49
16,200
18,000
161.8
22.54
497
15,732
38.9
878
10,552
13.49
16,300
18,000
161.8
22.76
480
15,835
38.6
878
10,552
13.49
16,400
18,020
162.0
22.97
466
15,936
38.4
880
10,552
13.49
16,500
18,100
163.2
23.19
467
16,038
38.6
892
10,593
13.55
16,600
18,170
164.4
23.40
469
16,138
38.8
905
10,562
13.50
16,700
18,250
165.6
23.62
470
16,240
39.1
918
10,561
13.50
16,800
18,330
166.8
23.83
472
16,341
39.3
931
10,886
14.00
16,900
18,410
168.0
24.05
474
16,441
39.5
944
10,885
14.00
17,000
18,490
169.3
24.27
476
16,543
39.8
958
10,925
14.07
17,100
18,570
170.6
24.49
477
16,644
40.0
971
10,925
14.07
17,200
18,650
171.8
24.71
479
16,745
40.2
985
10,924
14.07
17,300
18,730
173.1
24.94
480
16,846
40.5
999
10,923
14.07
17,400
18,810
174.4
25.16
482
16,947
40.7
1,013
11,212
14.52
17,500
18,900
175.7
25.38
484
17,048
40.9
1,028
11,211
14.52
17,600
18,980
177.1
25.61
485
17,148
41.1
1,043
11,240
14.57
17,700
19,060
178.4
25.84
487
17,251
41.4
1,058
11,239
14.57
17,800
19,140
179.7
26.07
488
17,351
41.6
1,073
11,238
14.57
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-19
Appendix I
Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
17,900
19,220
181.1
26.30
490
17,453
41.9
1,088
11,208
14.52
18,000
19,310
182.5
26.53
492
17,553
42.1
1,104
11,521
15.02
18,100
19,390
183.9
26.77
494
17,655
42.4
1,120
11,520
15.02
18,200
19,470
185.3
27.00
496
17,756
42.6
1,136
11,559
15.08
18,300
19,560
186.7
27.23
498
17,857
42.8
1,152
11,558
15.08
18,400
19,640
188.2
27.47
499
17,958
43.1
1,169
11,557
15.08
18,500
19,730
189.6
27.71
501
18,059
43.3
1,185
11,556
15.08
18,600
19,810
191.1
27.95
503
18,160
43.6
1,202
11,863
15.58
18,700
19,900
192.5
28.19
505
18,261
43.8
1,220
11,863
15.58
18,800
19,980
194.0
28.43
507
18,362
44.1
1,237
11,871
15.60
18,900
20,070
195.5
28.67
508
18,463
44.3
1,255
11,870
15.60
19,000
20,150
197.0
28.91
510
18,565
44.6
1,273
11,869
15.60
19,100
20,240
198.5
29.16
512
18,666
44.9
1,291
11,868
15.60
19,200
20,320
200.1
29.41
514
18,767
45.1
1,310
12,171
16.10
19,300
20,410
201.6
29.65
516
18,868
45.4
1,328
12,170
16.10
19,400
20,490
203.2
29.90
518
18,970
45.6
1,347
12,168
16.10
19,500
20,580
204.7
30.15
519
19,070
45.9
1,366
12,177
16.11
19,600
20,670
206.3
30.40
521
19,172
46.2
1,386
12,176
16.11
19,700
20,750
207.9
30.65
523
19,273
46.4
1,405
12,473
16.61
19,800
20,840
209.5
30.91
525
19,374
46.7
1,425
12,472
16.61
19,900
20,930
211.1
31.16
527
19,476
46.9
1,446
12,471
16.61
20,000
21,020
212.8
31.42
529
19,577
47.2
1,466
12,469
16.61
20,100
21,100
214.4
31.68
530
19,678
47.5
1,487
12,468
16.61
20,200
21,190
216.1
31.94
532
19,779
47.7
1,508
12,761
17.11
20,300
21,280
217.7
32.19
534
19,880
48.0
1,529
12,760
17.11
20,400
21,370
219.4
32.46
536
19,982
48.3
1,551
12,759
17.11
20,500
21,460
221.1
32.72
537
20,083
48.5
1,572
12,766
17.13
20,600
21,540
222.8
32.98
539
20,184
48.8
1,594
12,765
17.13
20,700
21,630
224.5
33.24
541
20,285
49.1
1,617
13,053
17.63
Range to Target (m)
I-20
Warhead Event
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
20,800
21,720
226.2
33.51
543
20,386
49.3
1,639
13,052
17.63
20,900
21,810
228.0
33.77
545
20,487
49.6
1,662
13,050
17.63
21,000
21,900
229.8
34.04
547
20,590
49.9
1,686
13,049
17.63
21,100
21,990
231.5
34.31
548
20,689
50.2
1,709
13,323
18.11
21,200
22,080
233.3
34.58
550
20,791
50.4
1,733
13,321
18.11
21,300
22,170
235.1
34.86
552
20,893
50.7
1,757
13,320
18.11
21,400
22,260
236.9
35.13
554
20,994
51.0
1,781
13,327
18.13
21,500
22,350
238.7
35.40
556
21,095
51.3
1,806
13,326
18.13
21,600
22,440
240.6
35.67
558
21,196
51.6
1,830
13,597
18.61
21,700
22,530
242.4
35.95
560
21,298
51.9
1,856
13,604
18.63
21,800
22,620
244.3
36.22
561
21,399
52.1
1,881
13,602
18.63
21,900
22,710
246.1
36.50
563
21,501
52.4
1,907
13,600
18.63
22,000
22,800
248.0
36.78
565
21,601
52.7
1,933
13,598
18.63
22,100
22,890
249.9
37.06
567
21,703
53.0
1,959
13,874
19.13
22,200
22,980
251.8
37.34
569
21,804
53.3
1,986
13,873
19.13
22,300
23,070
253.7
37.62
571
21,905
53.6
2,013
13,871
19.13
22,400
23,170
255.7
37.91
573
22,007
53.9
2,040
13,869
19.13
22,500
23,260
257.6
38.19
575
22,107
54.2
2,068
14,150
19.64
22,600
23,350
259.6
38.47
577
22,209
54.5
2,096
14,148
19.64
22,700
23,440
261.6
38.76
579
22,310
54.8
2,124
14,145
19.64
22,800
23,530
263.5
39.04
582
22,412
55.1
2,153
14,143
19.64
22,900
23,630
265.5
39.33
584
22,513
55.4
2,182
14,412
20.14
23,000
23,720
267.5
39.62
586
22,614
55.7
2,211
14,410
20.14
23,100
23,810
269.6
39.91
588
22,716
56.0
2,241
14,408
20.14
23,200
23,900
271.6
40.20
590
22,817
56.3
2,270
14,405
20.14
23,300
24,000
273.6
40.49
593
22,918
56.6
2,300
14,437
20.21
23,400
24,090
275.7
40.78
595
23,019
56.9
2,331
14,676
20.66
23,500
24,180
277.8
41.07
597
23,121
57.2
2,362
14,674
20.66
23,600
24,280
279.8
41.37
599
23,222
57.5
2,393
14,672
20.66
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-21
Appendix I
Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
23,700
24,370
281.9
41.66
601
23,323
57.8
2,424
14,669
20.66
23,800
24,460
284.0
41.96
603
23,425
58.1
2,455
14,700
20.72
23,900
24,560
286.1
42.25
605
23,526
58.4
2,487
14,961
21.22
24,000
24,650
288.2
42.55
608
23,628
58.8
2,520
14,958
21.22
24,100
24,750
290.3
42.85
609
23,729
59.1
2,552
14,956
21.22
24,200
24,840
292.5
43.14
612
23,830
59.4
2,585
15,189
21.68
24,300
24,930
294.6
43.44
614
23,932
59.7
2,618
15,187
21.68
24,400
25,030
296.8
43.74
616
24,032
60.0
2,652
15,216
21.74
24,500
25,120
298.9
44.04
618
24,133
60.3
2,685
15,213
21.74
24,600
25,220
301.1
44.34
621
24,236
60.7
2,719
15,236
21.78
24,700
25,310
303.2
44.64
623
24,336
61.0
2,753
15,491
22.28
24,800
25,410
305.4
44.94
624
24,438
61.3
2,788
15,488
22.28
24,900
25,500
307.6
45.24
627
24,539
61.6
2,823
15,485
22.28
25,000
25,600
309.8
45.55
629
24,640
61.9
2,858
15,481
22.28
25,100
25,690
312.0
45.85
631
24,741
62.3
2,893
15,741
22.80
25,200
25,790
314.3
46.16
634
24,843
62.6
2,929
15,738
22.80
25,300
25,880
316.5
46.46
635
24,944
62.9
2,966
15,735
22.80
25,400
25,980
318.8
46.77
638
25,045
63.2
3,002
15,732
22.80
25,500
26,070
321.0
47.08
640
25,146
63.5
3,039
15,980
23.30
25,600
26,170
323.3
47.39
642
25,248
63.9
3,076
15,976
23.30
25,700
26,260
325.6
47.70
644
25,349
64.2
3,114
15,981
23.32
25,800
26,360
327.9
48.00
646
25,450
64.5
3,152
15,977
23.32
25,900
26,450
330.1
48.31
648
25,551
64.9
3,189
16,223
23.82
26,000
26,550
332.4
48.63
651
25,653
65.2
3,228
16,219
23.82
26,100
26,640
334.7
48.94
653
25,754
65.5
3,267
16,223
23.83
26,200
26,740
337.1
49.25
655
25,855
65.9
3,306
16,219
23.83
26,300
26,830
339.4
49.56
657
25,957
66.2
3,345
16,463
24.33
26,400
26,930
341.7
49.87
659
26,058
66.5
3,385
16,459
24.33
26,500
27,030
344.1
50.19
662
26,159
66.9
3,425
16,455
24.33
Range to Target (m)
I-22
Warhead Event
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
26,600
27,120
346.4
50.50
664
26,260
67.2
3,465
16,450
24.33
26,700
27,220
348.8
50.81
666
26,362
67.5
3,505
16,699
24.85
26,800
27,320
351.1
51.13
669
26,463
67.9
3,547
16,695
24.85
26,900
27,410
353.5
51.45
671
26,565
68.2
3,588
16,691
24.85
27,000
27,510
355.9
51.76
674
26,665
68.6
3,630
16,686
24.85
27,100
27,600
358.3
52.08
676
26,766
68.9
3,671
16,924
25.35
27,200
27,700
360.7
52.40
678
26,868
69.3
3,714
16,919
25.35
27,300
27,800
363.1
52.71
681
26,969
69.6
3,757
16,922
25.36
27,400
27,900
365.5
53.03
684
27,070
70.0
3,800
16,917
25.36
27,500
27,990
368.0
53.35
686
27,171
70.3
3,843
17,153
25.86
27,600
28,090
370.4
53.67
689
27,274
70.7
3,887
17,155
25.88
27,700
28,190
372.9
53.99
691
27,373
71.0
3,931
17,134
25.85
27,800
28,280
375.3
54.31
693
27,474
71.4
3,975
17,159
25.91
27,900
28,380
377.8
54.64
696
27,576
71.7
4,020
17,362
26.35
28,000
28,480
380.3
54.96
698
27,677
72.1
4,065
17,386
26.41
28,100
28,580
382.8
55.28
701
27,778
72.4
4,110
17,381
26.41
28,200
28,670
385.2
55.61
703
27,880
72.8
4,155
17,590
26.86
28,300
28,770
387.7
55.93
706
27,981
73.1
4,201
17,584
26.86
28,400
28,870
390.2
56.25
709
28,082
73.5
4,247
17,608
26.93
28,500
28,970
392.7
56.57
711
28,183
73.9
4,293
17,602
26.93
28,600
29,060
395.2
56.90
713
28,284
74.2
4,340
17,596
26.93
28,700
29,160
397.7
57.22
716
28,386
74.6
4,387
17,825
27.43
28,800
29,260
400.2
57.55
718
28,487
74.9
4,434
17,819
27.43
28,900
29,360
402.7
57.87
721
28,587
75.3
4,481
17,820
27.44
29,000
29,450
405.2
58.20
723
28,689
75.7
4,529
18,047
27.94
29,100
29,550
407.7
58.52
726
28,790
76.0
4,577
18,041
27.94
29,200
29,650
410.2
58.85
728
28,891
76.4
4,626
18,034
27.94
29,300
29,750
412.7
59.17
731
28,992
76.8
4,674
18,028
27.94
29,400
29,840
415.3
59.50
733
29,093
77.1
4,723
18,253
28.44
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-23
Appendix I
Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
29,500
29,940
417.8
59.83
736
29,195
77.5
4,772
18,253
28.46
29,600
30,040
420.4
60.15
739
29,295
77.8
4,822
18,246
28.46
29,700
30,140
422.9
60.48
741
29,397
78.2
4,871
18,239
28.46
29,800
30,240
425.4
60.81
743
29,498
78.6
4,921
18,462
28.96
29,900
30,330
428.0
61.14
746
29,599
78.9
4,972
18,455
28.96
30,000
30,430
430.6
61.47
748
29,700
79.3
5,022
18,448
28.96
30,100
30,530
433.1
61.79
751
29,801
79.7
5,073
18,669
29.46
30,200
30,630
435.7
62.13
753
29,902
80.0
5,124
18,668
29.47
30,300
30,720
438.2
62.45
755
30,001
80.4
5,175
18,661
29.47
30,400
30,820
440.8
62.78
758
30,103
80.8
5,226
18,653
29.47
30,500
30,930
443.3
63.11
762
30,206
81.2
5,279
18,902
30.03
30,600
31,020
445.9
63.44
764
30,307
81.5
5,331
18,894
30.03
30,700
31,120
448.4
63.76
766
30,407
81.9
5,382
18,893
30.05
30,800
31,220
451.0
64.09
768
30,508
82.2
5,435
18,885
30.05
30,900
31,320
453.6
64.42
771
30,609
82.6
5,487
19,102
30.55
31,000
31,420
456.2
64.75
774
30,711
83.0
5,541
19,094
30.55
31,100
31,510
458.7
65.08
775
30,811
83.3
5,594
19,085
30.55
31,200
31,610
461.3
65.41
778
30,912
83.7
5,648
19,076
30.55
31,300
31,710
464.0
65.75
781
31,014
84.1
5,703
19,299
31.07
31,400
31,810
466.6
66.08
784
31,115
84.5
5,758
19,290
31.07
31,500
31,910
469.2
66.41
787
31,216
84.9
5,813
19,281
31.07
31,600
32,010
471.8
66.74
790
31,316
85.3
5,868
19,494
31.57
31,700
32,110
474.5
67.08
792
31,416
85.6
5,923
19,485
31.57
31,800
32,210
477.1
67.41
796
31,518
86.0
5,980
19,475
31.57
31,900
32,300
479.7
67.75
798
31,619
86.4
6,036
19,493
31.63
32,000
32,400
482.4
68.08
801
31,720
86.8
6,092
19,705
32.13
32,100
32,500
485.0
68.41
804
31,821
87.2
6,149
19,695
32.13
32,200
32,600
487.6
68.75
807
31,921
87.6
6,205
19,664
32.08
32,300
32,700
490.3
69.08
809
32,022
88.0
6,262
19,681
32.14
Range to Target (m)
I-24
Warhead Event
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
32,400
32,800
492.9
69.42
813
32,124
88.4
6,320
19,892
32.64
32,500
32,900
495.6
69.75
815
32,225
88.8
6,378
19,888
32.66
32,600
33,000
498.2
70.08
818
32325
89.1
6,435
19,870
32.64
32,700
33,100
500.8
70.42
820
32,426
89.5
6,493
20,079
33.14
32,800
33,200
503.5
70.75
824
32,527
89.9
6,552
20,068
33.14
32,900
33,290
506.1
71.09
826
32,628
90.3
6,611
20,063
33.16
33,000
33,390
508.8
71.42
829
32,729
90.7
6,669
20,052
33.16
33,100
33,490
511.5
71.76
832
32,830
91.1
6,729
20,259
33.66
33,200
33,590
514.1
72.09
834
32,931
91.4
6,788
20,247
33.66
33,300
33,690
516.9
72.44
839
33,034
91.9
6,850
20,235
33.66
33,400
33,790
519.5
72.77
841
33,135
92.3
6,910
20,448
34.18
33,500
33,890
522.2
73.11
842
33,231
92.6
6,969
20,426
34.16
33,600
33,990
524.8
73.44
845
33,332
93.0
7,030
20,413
34.16
33,700
34,090
527.6
73.79
848
33,435
93.4
7,092
20,400
34.16
33,800
34,190
530.3
74.12
851
33,535
93.8
7,153
20,605
34.66
33,900
34,290
532.9
74.46
854
33,636
94.2
7,214
20,592
34.66
34,000
34,390
535.6
74.79
857
33,737
94.6
7,276
20,578
34.66
34,100
34,490
538.3
75.13
859
33,838
95.0
7,337
20,788
35.18
34,200
34,590
540.9
75.46
863
33,939
95.4
7,399
20,775
35.18
34,300
34,680
543.6
75.79
865
34,040
95.8
7,461
20,761
35.18
34,400
34,780
546.2
76.12
867
34,138
96.1
7,522
20,963
35.68
34,500
34,880
548.9
76.46
869
34,239
96.5
7,585
20,949
35.68
34,600
34,990
551.6
76.80
875
34,346
97.0
7,650
20,951
35.71
34,700
35,090
554.3
77.13
878
34,446
97.4
7,714
20,937
35.71
34,800
35,180
556.9
77.47
879
34,543
97.7
7,775
21,130
36.19
34,900
35,280
559.7
77.81
883
34,647
98.1
7,842
21,121
36.21
35,000
35,380
562.4
78.15
883
34,742
98.5
7,905
21,097
36.19
35,100
35,470
565.0
78.48
885
34,841
98.8
7,968
21,296
36.69
35,200
35,580
567.8
78.83
889
34,944
99.3
8,035
21,280
36.69
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-25
Appendix I
Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
35,300
35,680
570.5
79.17
894
35,050
99.7
8,102
21,273
36.71
35,400
35,780
573.2
79.51
897
35,150
100.1
8,167
21,257
36.71
35,500
35,880
575.8
79.84
898
35,248
100.5
8,231
21,455
37.21
35,600
35,980
578.6
80.18
901
35,349
100.9
8,298
21,446
37.22
35,700
36,080
581.3
80.52
905
35,451
101.3
8,365
21,429
37.22
35,800
36,180
584.0
80.86
907
35,550
101.7
8,431
21,624
37.72
35,900
36,280
586.7
81.20
910
35,651
102.1
8,499
21,607
37.72
36,000
36,380
589.5
81.54
914
35,752
102.5
8,567
21,616
37.78
36,100
36,480
592.3
81.88
917
35,853
102.9
8,635
21,598
37.78
36,200
36,580
595.0
82.23
920
35,953
103.3
8,703
21,772
38.24
36,300
36,680
597.8
82.57
923
36,054
103.7
8,772
21,754
38.24
36,400
36,780
600.5
82.91
927
36,154
104.2
8,841
21,762
38.30
36,500
36,880
603.3
83.25
929
36,254
104.6
8,910
21,954
38.80
36,600
36,980
606.0
83.60
932
36,355
104.9
8,979
21,935
38.80
36,700
37,080
608.8
83.94
936
36,457
105.4
9,050
21,923
38.82
36,800
37,180
611.6
84.28
939
36,558
105.8
9,120
22,114
39.32
36,900
37,280
614.3
84.63
941
36,657
106.2
9,190
22,094
39.32
37,000
37,380
617.1
84.97
944
36,757
106.6
9,261
22,074
39.32
37,100
37,480
619.9
85.31
947
36,858
107.0
9,332
22,264
39.82
37,200
37,580
622.6
85.66
951
36,959
107.4
9,403
22,243
39.82
37,300
37,680
625.4
86.00
953
37,060
107.8
9,475
22,223
39.82
37,400
37,780
628.2
86.35
957
37,161
108.2
9,547
22,208
39.83
37,500
37,880
631.0
86.69
960
37,261
108.7
9,619
22,396
40.33
37,600
37,980
633.7
87.03
963
37,361
109.1
9,691
22,375
40.33
37,700
38,080
636.5
87.38
966
37,461
109.5
9,764
22,353
40.33
37,800
38,180
639.4
87.73
970
37,564
109.9
9,839
22,546
40.85
37,900
38,280
642.2
88.08
973
37,665
110.3
9,913
22,524
40.85
38,000
38,380
645.0
88.42
975
37,763
110.7
9,986
22,500
40.85
38,100
38,480
647.8
88.77
978
37,864
111.1
10,061
22,685
41.35
Range to Target (m)
I-26
Warhead Event
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
38,200
38,580
650.6
89.13
981
37,965
111.6
10,137
22,661
41.35
38,300
38,680
653.5
89.47
984
38,065
112.0
10,212
22,638
41.35
38,400
38,780
656.3
89.82
988
38,166
112.4
10,287
22,821
41.85
38,500
38,880
659.1
90.17
991
38,266
112.8
10,363
22,797
41.85
38,600
38,980
662.0
90.52
994
38,367
113.3
10,439
22,778
41.86
38,700
39,080
664.8
90.87
996
38,467
113.6
10,515
22,960
42.36
38,800
39,180
667.6
91.22
1000
38,569
114.1
10,592
22,936
42.36
38,900
39,280
670.5
91.57
1003
38,670
114.5
10,670
22,910
42.36
39,000
39,380
673.3
91.92
1007
38,769
114.9
10,747
23,097
42.88
39,100
39,480
676.1
92.27
1009
38,869
115.3
10,825
23,063
42.86
39,200
39,580
679.0
92.63
1012
38,970
115.8
10,903
23,043
42.88
39,300
39,680
681.9
92.98
1016
39,070
116.2
10,982
23,221
43.38
39,400
39,780
684.8
93.33
1018
39,171
116.6
11,061
23,194
43.38
39,500
39,880
687.6
93.68
1022
39,271
117.0
11,140
23,167
43.38
39,600
39,980
690.5
94.04
1025
39,372
117.5
11,220
23,164
43.44
39,700
40,080
693.4
94.39
1028
39,472
117.9
11,300
23,322
43.89
39,800
40,180
696.2
94.74
1031
39,572
118.3
11,379
23,293
43.89
39,900
40,280
699.1
95.09
1033
39,672
118.7
11,459
23,469
44.39
40,000
40,380
702.0
95.45
1038
39,775
119.2
11,541
23,466
44.46
40,100
40,480
704.8
95.80
1041
39,875
119.6
11,622
23,417
44.41
40,200
40,580
707.7
96.15
1044
39,974
120.0
11,702
23,405
44.46
40,300
40,680
710.6
96.51
1046
40,074
120.4
11,783
23,560
44.91
40,400
40,780
713.5
96.86
1049
40,175
120.8
11,866
23,554
44.97
40,500
40,880
716.4
97.22
1053
40,276
121.3
11,949
23,523
44.97
40,600
40,980
719.3
97.57
1057
40,376
121.7
12,031
23,695
45.47
40,700
41,080
722.2
97.92
1060
40,476
122.1
12,114
23,663
45.47
40,800
41,180
725.0
98.28
1063
40,577
122.6
12,197
23,637
45.49
40,900
41,280
727.9
98.63
1066
40,676
123.0
12,278
23,808
45.99
41,000
41,380
730.8
98.98
1069
40,776
123.4
12,362
23,775
45.99
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-27
Appendix I
Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
41,100
41,490
733.7
99.33
1074
40,879
123.9
12,447
23,743
45.99
41,200
41,590
736.6
99.69
1077
40,981
124.3
12,533
23,917
46.50
41,300
41,680
739.5
100.05
1079
41,079
124.7
12,616
23,876
46.49
41,400
41,780
742.5
100.41
1082
41,179
125.1
12,702
23,847
46.50
41,500
41,890
745.5
100.77
1086
41,280
125.6
12,791
24,013
47.00
41,600
41,990
748.5
101.13
1089
41,380
126.0
12,878
23,977
47.00
41,700
42,090
751.5
101.50
1092
41,480
126.5
12,967
24,142
47.50
41,800
42,190
754.5
101.87
1096
41,581
126.9
13,057
24,104
47.50
41,900
42,290
757.5
102.24
1099
41,681
127.4
13,146
24,072
47.52
42,000
42,390
760.6
102.61
1102
41,781
127.8
13,237
24,234
48.02
42,100
42,490
763.6
102.98
1106
41,881
128.3
13,327
24,195
48.02
42,200
42,590
766.7
103.35
1109
41,983
128.7
13,420
24,155
48.02
42,300
42,690
769.8
103.73
1113
42,086
129.2
13,514
24,321
48.53
42,400
42,790
773.0
104.11
1116
42,185
129.6
13,608
24,279
48.53
42,500
42,890
776.1
104.49
1118
42,283
130.1
13,702
24,235
48.53
42,600
42,990
779.4
104.88
1123
42,384
130.6
13,800
24,391
49.03
42,700
43,090
782.6
105.28
1125
42,485
131.0
13,899
24,346
49.03
42,800
43,190
785.9
105.67
1129
42,585
131.5
13,998
24,506
49.55
42,900
43,290
789.2
106.07 1,132
42,685
132.0
14,099
24,458
49.55
43,000
43,390
792.5
106.48 1,135
42,786
132.4
14,201
24,410
49.55
43,100
43,490
795.9
106.88 1,137
42,885
132.9
14,303
24,561
50.05
43,200
43,590
799.3
107.29 1,141
42,986
133.4
14,408
24,510
50.05
43,300
43,690
802.8
107.71 1,145
43,090
133.9
14,516
24,663
50.57
43,400
43,790
806.3
108.13 1,148
43,189
134.4
14,623
24,610
50.57
43,500
43,890
809.9
108.56 1,150
43,287
134.9
14,733
24,553
50.57
43,600
43,990
813.5
109.00 1,154
43,389
135.4
14,848
24,694
51.07
43,700
44,090
817.3
109.44 1,158
43,489
135.9
14,964
24,659
51.13
43,800
44,190
821.0
109.89 1,161
43,589
136.4
15,081
24,802
51.64
43,900
44,290
824.9
110.35 1,164
43,690
137.0
15,201
24,739
51.64
Range to Target (m)
I-28
Warhead Event
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-3. M26A1/2 (Low Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
44,000
44,390
828.8
110.81 1,168
43,790
137.5
15,323
24,871
52.14
44,100
44,490
832.7
111.28 1,170
43,890
138.0
15,447
24,804
52.14
44,200
44,590
836.8
111.77 1,175
43,993
138.6
15,576
24,741
52.16
44,300
44,690
841.0
112.26 1,177
44,093
139.2
15,709
24,865
52.66
44,400
44,790
845.3
112.78 1,180
44,191
139.7
15,845
24,787
52.66
44,500
44,890
849.9
113.31 1,184
44,294
140.4
15,990
24,901
53.16
44,600
44,990
854.5
113.85 1,187
44,393
141.0
16,136
25,012
53.66
44,700
45,090
859.3
114.41 1,191
44,494
141.6
16,288
24,929
53.68
44,800
45,190
864.2
114.99 1,194
44,595
142.3
16,446
25,029
54.18
44,900
45,290
869.3
115.59 1,197
44,696
142.9
16,609
24,931
54.18
45,000
45,390
874.7
116.21 1,201
44,798
143.6
16,783
25,025
54.69
45,100
45,490
880.4
116.88 1,204
44,898
144.4
16,967
25,103
55.19
45,200
45,590
886.5
117.59 1,207
44,998
145.1
17,165
24,976
55.19
45,300
45,690
893.0
118.34 1,210
45,100
145.9
17,375
25,032
55.69
45,400
45,780
900.0
119.14 1,213
45,200
146.8
17,601
25,073
56.19
45,500
45,880
908.0
120.06 1,219
45,304
147.8
17,862
25,094
56.71
45,600
45,980
917.2
121.10 1,221
45,403
148.9
18,159
25,075
57.21
45,700
46,080
928.3
122.36 1,223
45,506
150.2
18,522
25,009
57.72
45,800
46,170
946.3
124.38 1,227
45,609
152.2
19,111
24,962
58.78
45,900
46,180
951.1
125.34 1,047
45,710
148.3
19,269
25,024
59.29
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-29
Appendix I
Figure I-3. M26A1/2 Trajectories
I-30
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
10,000
19,090
178.91
11.65
1,026
9,443
45.53
1,033
9,679
12.76
10,100
19,150
179.90
11.80
1,039
9,542
46.03
1,046
9,776
12.89
10,200
19,150
179.90
11.94
1,043
9,643
46.24
1,053
9,923
12.57
10,300
19,210
180.89
12.09
1,056
9,744
46.74
1,062
9,971
13.14
10,400
19,210
180.89
12.23
1,060
9,844
46.95
1,065
10,065
13.25
10,500
19,269
181.87
12.38
1,073
9,944
47.44
1,081
10,228
13.02
10,600
19,269
181.87
12.53
1,076
10,044
47.64
1,081
10,228
13.02
10,700
19,328
182.86
12.68
1,089
10,144
48.12
1,093
10,354
13.63
10,800
19,328
182.86
12.83
1,092
10,244
48.32
1,099
10,560
13.52
10,900
19,387
183.85
12.98
1,104
10,345
48.80
1,110
10,600
13.58
11,000
19,387
183.85
13.13
1,107
10,446
48.99
1,111
10,600
13.58
11,100
19,446
184.83
13.28
1,120
10,546
49.47
1,122
10,734
14.11
11,200
19,446
184.83
13.44
1,122
10,647
49.65
1,127
10,925
14.08
11,300
19,504
185.82
13.59
1,134
10,746
50.12
1,137
10,925
14.08
11,400
19,563
186.81
13.74
1,147
10,846
50.60
1,149
11,015
14.48
11,500
19,563
186.81
13.90
1,148
10,948
50.77
1,152
11,244
14.58
11,600
19,621
187.80
14.06
1,160
11,048
51.24
1,163
11,243
14.58
11,700
19,621
187.80
14.22
1,162
11,149
51.40
1,163
11,243
14.58
11,800
19,679
188.78
14.37
1,174
11,248
51.88
1,176
11,556
15.08
11,900
19,737
189.77
14.53
1,186
11,348
52.34
1,187
11,556
15.08
12,000
19,737
189.77
14.69
1,186
11,444
52.47
1,187
11,556
15.08
12,100
19,794
190.76
14.85
1,199
11,545
52.94
1,199
11,632
15.26
12,200
19,851
191.74
15.01
1,210
11,645
53.40
1,210
11,863
15.58
12,300
19,851
191.74
15.17
1,210
11,746
53.53
1,211
11,863
15.58
12,400
19,908
192.73
15.34
1,222
11,847
54.00
1,222
11,862
15.58
12,500
19,964
193.72
15.51
1,233
11,950
54.45
1,234
11,871
15.60
12,600
20,021
194.71
15.68
1,245
12,052
54.91
1,246
11,871
15.60
12,700
20,021
194.71
15.85
1,244
12,155
55.03
1,246
11,871
15.60
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-31
Appendix I
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
12,800
20,077
195.69
16.02
1,256
12,256
55.48
1,257
11,870
15.60
12,900
20,132
196.68
16.19
1,267
12,357
55.92
1,269
11,869
15.60
13,000
20,132
196.68
16.35
1,266
12,455
56.02
1,269
11,869
15.60
13,100
20,189
197.67
16.52
1,276
12,554
56.46
1,281
11,869
15.60
13,200
20,245
198.65
16.69
1,287
12,654
56.90
1,292
12,172
16.10
13,300
20,300
199.64
16.87
1,298
12,756
57.34
1,304
12,171
16.10
13,400
20,355
200.63
17.04
1,308
12,856
57.77
1,317
12,170
16.10
13,500
20,410
201.62
17.21
1,319
12,955
58.21
1,329
12,170
16.10
13,600
20,410
201.62
17.39
1,317
13,058
58.28
1,328
12,170
16.10
13,700
20,465
202.60
17.57
1,327
13,157
58.70
1,340
12,169
16.10
13,800
20,520
203.59
17.75
1,337
13,258
59.13
1,353
12,178
16.11
13,900
20,574
204.58
17.93
1,347
13,359
59.56
1,365
12,177
16.11
14,000
20,629
205.57
18.11
1,357
13,459
59.97
1,377
12,176
16.11
14,100
20,675
206.42
18.29
1,365
13,560
60.34
1,387
12,176
16.11
14,200
20,721
207.27
18.47
1,373
13,660
60.71
1,398
12,474
16.61
14,300
20,768
208.13
18.65
1,380
13,761
61.06
1,408
12,473
16.61
14,400
20,815
208.98
18.84
1,388
13,862
61.42
1,419
12,473
16.61
14,500
20,861
209.83
19.02
1,396
13,962
61.78
1,430
12,472
16.61
14,600
20,907
210.69
19.21
1,403
14,062
62.13
1,440
12,471
16.61
14,700
20,952
211.54
19.40
1,410
14,164
62.48
1,451
12,470
16.61
14,800
20,998
212.40
19.58
1,417
14,264
62.81
1,462
12,470
16.61
14,900
21,095
214.24
19.77
1,438
14,365
63.55
1,485
12,468
16.61
15,000
21,141
215.09
19.96
1,444
14,466
63.89
1,496
12,762
17.11
15,100
21,187
215.94
20.15
1,451
14,565
64.22
1,506
12,761
17.11
15,200
21,231
216.80
20.35
1,457
14,667
64.55
1,517
12,761
17.11
15,300
21,276
217.65
20.54
1,463
14,768
64.87
1,528
12,760
17.11
15,400
21,321
218.50
20.74
1,469
14,868
65.19
1,539
12,759
17.11
15,500
21,366
219.36
20.93
1,475
14,970
65.51
1,550
12,759
17.11
15,600
21,462
221.20
21.13
1,496
15,069
66.23
1,574
12,766
17.13
Range to Target (m)
I-32
Warhead Event
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
15,700
21,506
222.05
21.33
1,501
15,171
66.54
1,585
12,765
17.13
15,800
21,551
222.91
21.53
1,506
15,271
66.84
1,596
12,765
17.13
15,900
21,594
223.76
21.73
1,511
15,371
67.14
1,607
13,054
17.63
16,000
21,638
224.61
21.93
1,516
15,473
67.43
1,618
13,053
17.63
16,100
21,733
226.46
22.13
1,537
15,572
68.15
1,642
13,052
17.63
16,200
21,776
227.31
22.33
1,541
15,674
68.44
1,653
13,051
17.63
16,300
21,820
228.16
22.54
1,545
15,775
68.72
1,665
13,050
17.63
16,400
21,914
230.00
22.74
1,565
15,874
69.43
1,689
13,049
17.63
16,500
21,953
230.86
22.95
1,569
15,976
69.70
1,700
13,038
17.61
16,600
21,996
231.71
23.16
1,572
16,077
69.96
1,711
13,323
18.11
16,700
22,040
232.57
23.37
1,576
16,178
70.23
1,723
13,322
18.11
16,800
22,132
234.41
23.58
1,596
16,278
70.93
1,747
13,320
18.11
16,900
22,174
235.26
23.79
1,599
16,379
71.18
1,759
13,320
18.11
17,000
22,218
236.11
24.01
1,601
16,480
71.42
1,770
13,319
18.11
17,100
22,309
237.95
24.22
1,621
16,580
72.12
1,795
13,326
18.13
17,200
22,351
238.81
24.43
1,623
16,681
72.36
1,807
13,326
18.13
17,300
22,442
240.65
24.65
1,642
16,781
73.05
1,831
13,597
18.61
17,400
22,484
241.50
24.87
1,644
16,883
73.28
1,843
13,604
18.63
17,500
22,525
242.36
25.08
1,646
16,984
73.49
1,855
13,604
18.63
17,600
22,615
244.20
25.30
1,665
17,084
74.18
1,880
13,602
18.63
17,700
22,657
245.05
25.52
1,666
17,185
74.39
1,892
13,601
18.63
17,800
22,746
246.89
25.74
1,684
17,286
75.07
1,917
13,599
18.63
17,900
22,787
247.75
25.96
1,685
17,386
75.27
1,929
13,599
18.63
18,000
22,875
249.59
26.19
1,703
17,487
75.94
1,955
13,875
19.13
18,100
22,916
250.44
26.41
1,704
17,589
76.13
1,967
13,874
19.13
18,200
23,003
252.28
26.64
1,721
17,688
76.79
1,993
13,872
19.13
18,300
23,045
253.14
26.87
1,721
17,790
76.97
2,005
13,871
19.13
18,400
23,132
254.98
27.09
1,739
17,890
77.63
2,030
13,869
19.13
18,500
23,172
255.83
27.32
1,738
17,992
77.79
2,042
13,869
19.13
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-33
Appendix I
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
18,600
23,259
257.67
27.55
1,756
18,091
78.44
2,069
14,149
19.64
18,700
23,300
258.52
27.79
1,754
18,193
78.59
2,081
14,149
19.64
18,800
23,385
260.37
28.02
1,771
18,294
79.24
2,107
14,147
19.64
18,900
23,426
261.22
28.25
1,769
18,395
79.37
2,119
14,146
19.64
19,000
23,511
263.06
28.48
1,786
18,495
80.02
2,146
14,144
19.64
19,100
23,597
264.90
28.72
1,802
18,596
80.64
2,172
14,142
19.64
19,200
23,636
265.76
28.96
1,800
18,698
80.77
2,185
14,412
20.14
19,300
23,721
267.60
29.19
1,816
18,797
81.39
2,212
14,410
20.14
19,400
23,760
268.45
29.44
1,813
18,899
81.50
2,224
14,409
20.14
19,500
23,845
270.29
29.67
1,829
18,999
82.11
2,251
14,407
20.14
19,600
23,929
272.13
29.91
1,845
19,101
82.74
2,278
14,405
20.14
19,700
23,968
272.99
30.16
1,840
19,202
82.81
2,291
14,404
20.14
19,800
24,052
274.83
30.40
1,856
19,303
83.42
2,318
14,677
20.66
19,900
24,136
276.67
30.64
1,871
19,403
84.02
2,345
14,675
20.66
20,000
24,218
278.51
30.89
1,886
19,504
84.62
2,373
14,673
20.66
20,100
24,263
279.50
31.14
1,883
19,605
84.74
2,388
14,672
20.66
20,200
24,351
281.47
31.38
1,901
19,706
85.41
2,417
14,670
20.66
20,300
24,395
282.46
31.63
1,897
19,807
85.51
2,432
14,668
20.66
20,400
24,484
284.43
31.88
1,914
19,908
86.17
2,462
14,963
21.22
20,500
24,571
286.41
32.13
1,931
20,008
86.83
2,492
14,961
21.22
20,600
24,615
287.39
32.39
1,927
20,110
86.91
2,507
14,959
21.22
20,700
24,702
289.37
32.64
1,943
20,210
87.55
2,537
14,957
21.22
20,800
24,790
291.34
32.89
1,960
20,311
88.19
2,567
14,930
21.18
20,900
24,833
292.33
33.15
1,954
20,413
88.25
2,582
15,189
21.68
21,000
24,919
294.30
33.40
1,970
20,514
88.89
2,613
15,187
21.68
21,100
25,006
296.28
33.66
1,986
20,614
89.51
2,644
15,217
21.74
21,200
25,049
297.27
33.92
1,980
20,716
89.56
2,659
15,216
21.74
21,300
25,138
299.24
34.17
1,996
20,817
90.19
2,690
15,239
21.78
21,400
25,224
301.21
34.43
2,011
20,917
90.80
2,721
15,236
21.78
Range to Target (m)
I-34
Warhead Event
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
21,500
25,266
302.20
34.70
2,004
21,018
90.82
2,737
15,234
21.78
21,600
25,352
304.18
34.96
2,019
21,120
91.42
2,768
15,489
22.28
21,700
25,437
306.15
35.22
2,033
21,220
92.02
2,799
15,487
22.28
21,800
25,522
308.12
35.48
2,048
21,321
92.61
2,831
15,484
22.28
21,900
25,607
310.10
35.74
2,062
21,422
93.20
2,862
15,481
22.28
22,000
25,649
311.09
36.02
2,053
21,524
93.18
2,878
15,480
22.28
22,100
25,733
313.06
36.28
2,067
21,624
93.76
2,910
15,740
22.80
22,200
25,818
315.03
36.55
2,080
21,725
94.33
2,942
15,737
22.80
22,300
25,901
317.01
36.81
2,093
21,826
94.90
2,974
15,734
22.80
22,400
25,985
318.98
37.08
2,106
21,927
95.46
3,006
15,731
22.80
22,500
26,067
320.96
37.35
2,119
22,027
96.00
3,038
15,980
23.30
22,600
26,109
321.94
37.63
2,107
22,130
95.93
3,054
15,978
23.30
22,700
26,191
323.92
37.91
2,120
22,231
96.47
3,087
15,975
23.30
22,800
26,274
325.89
38.18
2,132
22,332
97.01
3,119
15,980
23.32
22,900
26,357
327.87
38.45
2,143
22,433
97.54
3,152
15,977
23.32
23,000
26,440
329.84
38.72
2,155
22,533
98.08
3,184
15,974
23.32
23,100
26,521
331.82
39.00
2,167
22,634
98.60
3,218
16,220
23.82
23,200
26,604
333.79
39.28
2,178
22,735
99.12
3,251
16,225
23.83
23,300
26,685
335.77
39.55
2,189
22,836
99.63
3,284
16,222
23.83
23,400
26,767
337.74
39.83
2,199
22,937
100.13
3,317
16,218
23.83
23,500
26,848
339.71
40.11
2,210
23,039
100.64
3,350
16,462
24.33
23,600
26,930
341.69
40.39
2,220
23,139
101.13
3,384
16,459
24.33
23,700
27,010
343.66
40.67
2,230
23,240
101.62
3,418
16,455
24.33
23,800
27,091
345.64
40.96
2,239
23,342
102.10
3,452
16,452
24.33
23,900
27,171
347.61
41.24
2,249
23,443
102.58
3,485
16,448
24.33
24,000
27,253
349.59
41.52
2,258
23,544
103.06
3,520
16,698
24.85
24,100
27,333
351.56
41.80
2,267
23,645
103.52
3,554
16,694
24.85
24,200
27,414
353.54
42.09
2,276
23,746
103.99
3,588
16,691
24.85
24,300
27,493
355.51
42.38
2,284
23,847
104.44
3,623
16,687
24.85
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-35
Appendix I
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
24,400
27,572
357.48
42.67
2,292
23,948
104.88
3,657
16,682
24.85
24,500
27,691
360.45
42.94
2,327
24,048
106.01
3,709
16,920
25.35
24,600
27,771
362.42
43.23
2,334
24,149
106.45
3,744
16,923
25.36
24,700
27,850
364.39
43.52
2,342
24,251
106.88
3,779
16,920
25.36
24,800
27,928
366.37
43.81
2,349
24,352
107.30
3,814
16,915
25.36
24,900
28,008
368.34
44.11
2,356
24,453
107.72
3,849
17,160
25.88
25,000
28,086
370.32
44.40
2,362
24,555
108.13
3,885
17,156
25.88
25,100
28,165
372.29
44.70
2,369
24,656
108.54
3,920
17,152
25.88
25,200
28,279
375.25
44.98
2,401
24,755
109.61
3,973
17,159
25.91
25,300
28,356
377.23
45.28
2,406
24,857
109.99
4,009
17,363
26.35
25,400
28,435
379.20
45.58
2,411
24,958
110.38
4,045
17,389
26.41
25,500
28,513
381.18
45.88
2,416
25,059
110.76
4,081
17,384
26.41
25,600
28,591
383.15
46.17
2,422
25,161
111.14
4,117
17,380
26.41
25,700
28,668
385.13
46.47
2,426
25,263
111.50
4,153
17,353
26.36
25,800
28,785
388.09
46.76
2,460
25,362
112.61
4,208
17,584
26.86
25,900
28,863
390.06
47.06
2,464
25,464
112.97
4,245
17,608
26.93
26,000
28,940
392.04
47.36
2,467
25,565
113.31
4,281
17,604
26.93
26,100
29,017
394.01
47.66
2,471
25,667
113.66
4,318
17,599
26.93
26,200
29,133
396.97
47.95
2,504
25,767
114.75
4,374
17,827
27.43
26,300
29,210
398.95
48.25
2,507
25,868
115.09
4,411
17,822
27.43
26,400
29,287
400.92
48.56
2,510
25,970
115.41
4,448
17,825
27.44
26,500
29,364
402.89
48.87
2,512
26,071
115.73
4,486
17,820
27.44
26,600
29,479
405.86
49.15
2,545
26,171
116.81
4,542
18,046
27.94
26,700
29,556
407.83
49.46
2,547
26,273
117.12
4,580
18,041
27.94
26,800
29,632
409.80
49.77
2,549
26,374
117.43
4,617
18,036
27.94
26,900
29,747
412.77
50.06
2,581
26,474
118.51
4,674
18,028
27.94
27,000
29,823
414.74
50.37
2,582
26,575
118.80
4,712
18,254
28.44
27,100
29,900
416.72
50.68
2,583
26,677
119.09
4,751
18,249
28.44
27,200
30,014
419.68
50.97
2,615
26,777
120.15
4,808
18,248
28.46
Range to Target (m)
I-36
Warhead Event
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
27,300
30,090
421.65
51.28
2,616
26,879
120.43
4,847
18,243
28.46
27,400
30,166
423.63
51.60
2,616
26,980
120.69
4,885
18,467
28.96
27,500
30,279
426.59
51.87
2,651
27,075
121.83
4,944
18,459
28.96
27,600
30,356
428.56
52.19
2,650
27,178
122.07
4,983
18,453
28.96
27,700
30,431
430.54
52.51
2,649
27,280
122.30
5,022
18,448
28.96
27,800
30,545
433.50
52.80
2,680
27,380
123.36
5,080
18,668
29.46
27,900
30,620
435.47
53.12
2,679
27,482
123.59
5,120
18,662
29.46
28,000
30,734
438.43
53.42
2,710
27,582
124.65
5,179
18,660
29.47
28,100
30,809
440.41
53.74
2,707
27,686
124.85
5,219
18,654
29.47
28,200
30,926
443.37
54.04
2,740
27,789
125.93
5,279
18,902
30.03
28,300
31,002
445.34
54.36
2,736
27,893
126.12
5,319
18,896
30.03
28,400
31,077
447.32
54.67
2,737
27,990
126.38
5,360
18,890
30.03
28,500
31,190
450.28
54.96
2,768
28,090
127.44
5,420
18,887
30.05
28,600
31,266
452.25
55.28
2,765
28,192
127.63
5,460
18,881
30.05
28,700
31,379
455.22
55.58
2,797
28,292
128.70
5,521
19,097
30.55
28,800
31,454
457.19
55.90
2,793
28,394
128.88
5,562
19,090
30.55
28,900
31,567
460.15
56.20
2,824
28,493
129.93
5,623
19,080
30.55
29,000
31,641
462.13
56.52
2,820
28,595
130.09
5,664
19,298
31.05
29,100
31,754
465.09
56.82
2,852
28,695
131.15
5,726
19,296
31.07
29,200
31,829
467.06
57.15
2,847
28,797
131.31
5,768
19,289
31.07
29,300
31,940
470.02
57.45
2,878
28,897
132.35
5,830
19,278
31.07
29,400
32,013
472.00
57.78
2,871
28,999
132.46
5,871
19,494
31.57
29,500
32,124
474.96
58.08
2,901
29,099
133.49
5,934
19,483
31.57
29,600
32,199
476.93
58.41
2,895
29,201
133.63
5,976
19,476
31.57
29,700
32,310
479.90
58.71
2,925
29,301
134.65
6,039
19,492
31.63
29,800
32,384
481.87
59.04
2,919
29,403
134.77
6,081
19,707
32.13
29,900
32,495
484.83
59.35
2,949
29,503
135.79
6,145
19,696
32.13
30,000
32,569
486.81
59.68
2,942
29,605
135.90
6,187
19,667
32.08
30,100
32,680
489.77
59.98
2,972
29,705
136.92
6,251
19,683
32.14
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-37
Appendix I
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
30,200
32,754
491.74
60.31
2,965
29,807
137.02
6,294
19,896
32.64
30,300
32,867
494.70
60.62
2,996
29,907
138.06
6,359
19,864
32.60
30,400
32,941
496.68
60.95
2,988
30,009
138.17
6,402
19,884
32.66
30,500
33,051
499.64
61.25
3,017
30,109
139.15
6,467
19,864
32.64
30,600
33,125
501.61
61.59
3,009
30,210
139.24
6,510
20,076
33.14
30,700
33,236
504.58
61.89
3,038
30,311
140.25
6,576
20,063
33.14
30,800
33,310
506.55
62.23
3,029
30,412
140.31
6,620
20,062
33.16
30,900
33,420
509.51
62.54
3,059
30,513
141.32
6,685
20,268
33.66
31,000
33,530
512.45
62.85
3,087
30,613
142.30
6,751
20,255
33.66
31,100
33,603
514.41
63.18
3,076
30,715
142.33
6,795
20,246
33.66
31,200
33,712
517.34
63.49
3,105
30,815
143.30
6,861
20,233
33.66
31,300
33,785
519.30
63.83
3,093
30,917
143.31
6,905
20,442
34.16
31,400
33,888
522.23
64.15
3,116
31,017
144.16
6,970
20,426
34.16
31,500
33,997
525.16
64.46
3,144
31,117
145.13
7,037
20,412
34.16
31,600
34,106
528.10
64.78
3,171
31,217
146.09
7,103
20,615
34.66
31,700
34,179
530.05
65.12
3,159
31,319
146.09
7,148
20,606
34.66
31,800
34,288
532.98
65.43
3,188
31,419
147.07
7,216
20,591
34.66
31,900
34,398
535.92
65.74
3,215
31,519
148.03
7,283
20,577
34.66
32,000
34,471
537.87
66.08
3,203
31,622
148.02
7,328
20,790
35.18
32,100
34,580
540.80
66.39
3,230
31,722
148.98
7,396
20,775
35.18
32,200
34,690
543.74
66.70
3,259
31,822
149.95
7,465
20,760
35.18
32,300
34,763
545.69
67.04
3,245
31,924
149.93
7,510
20,750
35.18
32,400
34,871
548.62
67.35
3,273
32,024
150.88
7,579
20,950
35.68
32,500
34,944
550.58
67.70
3,259
32,125
150.84
7,625
20,940
35.68
32,600
35,060
553.51
67.99
3,293
32,226
151.96
7,696
20,941
35.71
32,700
35,167
556.44
68.31
3,319
32,325
152.86
7,765
21,132
36.19
32,800
35,238
558.40
68.66
3,303
32,428
152.79
7,812
21,122
36.19
32,900
35,346
561.33
68.98
3,329
32,528
153.71
7,882
21,112
36.21
33,000
35,447
564.26
69.32
3,348
32,629
154.48
7,950
21,300
36.69
Range to Target (m)
I-38
Warhead Event
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
33,100
35,554
567.20
69.63
3,375
32,728
155.42
8,021
21,283
36.69
33,200
35,626
569.15
69.98
3,358
32,831
155.32
8,068
21,272
36.69
33,300
35,740
572.08
70.28
3,391
32,930
156.41
8,140
21,264
36.71
33,400
35,848
575.02
70.61
3,417
33,031
157.32
8,211
21,460
37.21
33,500
35,919
576.97
70.96
3,399
33,133
157.20
8,259
21,455
37.22
33,600
36,028
579.90
71.27
3,427
33,233
158.16
8,331
21,437
37.22
33,700
36,136
582.84
71.59
3,453
33,333
159.08
8,403
21,446
37.28
33,800
36,241
585.77
71.92
3,477
33,433
159.96
8,475
21,613
37.72
33,900
36,313
587.72
72.27
3,458
33,535
159.82
8,523
21,627
37.78
34,000
36,419
590.66
72.59
3,483
33,635
160.73
8,595
21,608
37.78
34,100
36,526
593.59
72.92
3,508
33,736
161.62
8,668
21,781
38.24
34,200
36,632
596.52
73.25
3,532
33,836
162.50
8,741
21,762
38.24
34,300
36,739
599.46
73.57
3,558
33,936
163.41
8,815
21,769
38.30
34,400
36,810
601.41
73.93
3,537
34,038
163.23
8,863
21,756
38.30
34,500
36,915
604.34
74.25
3,561
34,138
164.11
8,937
21,947
38.80
34,600
37,021
607.28
74.58
3,586
34,239
165.00
9,012
21,927
38.80
34,700
37,129
610.21
74.91
3,611
34,339
165.91
9,086
21,914
38.82
34,800
37,200
612.16
75.26
3,590
34,441
165.72
9,136
22,110
39.32
34,900
37,304
615.10
75.60
3,612
34,541
166.55
9,210
22,089
39.32
35,000
37,410
618.03
75.93
3,635
34,642
167.42
9,285
22,067
39.32
35,100
37,516
620.96
76.25
3,660
34,741
168.30
9,360
22,256
39.82
35,200
37,622
623.89
76.58
3,683
34,842
169.16
9,436
22,234
39.82
35,300
37,693
625.85
76.94
3,660
34,944
168.94
9,486
22,219
39.82
35,400
37,798
628.78
77.27
3,684
35,044
169.81
9,562
22,413
40.33
35,500
37,903
631.71
77.61
3,707
35,144
170.65
9,639
22,390
40.33
35,600
38,008
634.65
77.94
3,728
35,245
171.48
9,715
22,368
40.33
35,700
38,114
637.58
78.27
3,753
35,345
172.37
9,792
22,554
40.83
35,800
38,219
640.51
78.61
3,775
35,445
173.20
9,869
22,537
40.85
35,900
38,288
642.47
78.97
3,749
35,547
172.92
9,921
22,521
40.85
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-39
Appendix I
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
36,000
38,391
645.40
79.31
3,768
35,648
173.69
9,997
22,497
40.85
36,100
38,495
648.33
79.65
3,790
35,748
174.52
10,075
22,681
41.35
36,200
38,599
651.26
79.99
3,811
35,848
175.32
10,153
22,656
41.35
36,300
38,702
654.20
80.33
3,832
35,948
176.13
10,231
22,632
41.35
36,400
38,806
657.13
80.67
3,853
36,049
176.93
10,310
22,814
41.85
36,500
38,910
660.06
81.01
3,873
36,149
177.74
10,389
22,788
41.85
36,600
39,014
662.99
81.35
3,894
36,249
178.54
10,467
22,769
41.86
36,700
39,117
665.93
81.69
3,914
36,350
179.33
10,547
22,950
42.36
36,800
39,188
667.88
82.05
3,889
36,452
179.06
10,600
22,933
42.36
36,900
39,291
670.81
82.39
3,908
36,552
179.83
10,680
22,907
42.36
37,000
39,392
673.75
82.74
3,925
36,652
180.56
10,759
23,086
42.86
37,100
39,495
676.68
83.09
3,945
36,752
181.34
10,839
23,059
42.86
37,200
39,597
679.61
83.43
3,964
36,853
182.10
10,920
23,038
42.88
37,300
39,700
682.55
83.78
3,982
36,953
182.86
11,000
23,215
43.38
37,400
39,803
685.48
84.13
4,000
37,054
183.60
11,081
23,187
43.38
37,500
39,905
688.41
84.47
4,019
37,154
184.36
11,162
23,159
43.38
37,600
40,008
691.34
84.82
4,038
37,254
185.13
11,243
23,361
43.94
37,700
40,110
694.28
85.16
4,056
37,354
185.87
11,325
23,313
43.89
37,800
40,213
697.21
85.51
4,074
37,455
186.61
11,407
23,283
43.89
37,900
40,317
700.14
85.85
4,095
37,555
187.42
11,489
23,484
44.46
38,000
40,419
703.07
86.20
4,112
37,655
188.15
11,572
23,454
44.46
38,100
40,522
706.01
86.55
4,130
37,756
188.89
11,655
23,405
44.41
38,200
40,621
708.94
86.91
4,145
37,856
189.56
11,737
23,596
44.96
38,300
40,723
711.87
87.26
4,161
37,957
190.27
11,820
23,546
44.91
38,400
40,825
714.80
87.61
4,179
38,057
191.00
11,904
23,540
44.97
38,500
40,927
717.74
87.96
4,196
38,157
191.72
11,987
23,712
45.47
38,600
41,029
720.67
88.31
4,212
38,257
192.43
12,071
23,680
45.47
38,700
41,097
722.62
88.68
4,178
38,360
191.98
12,127
23,658
45.47
38,800
41,199
725.56
89.03
4,195
38,460
192.71
12,211
23,631
45.49
Range to Target (m)
I-40
Warhead Event
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
38,900
41,301
728.49
89.38
4,212
38,560
193.42
12,296
23,802
45.99
39,000
41,403
731.42
89.73
4,228
38,661
194.13
12,381
23,768
45.99
39,100
41,508
734.35
90.08
4,248
38,761
194.91
12,466
23,735
45.99
39,200
41,609
737.29
90.43
4,264
38,861
195.61
12,552
23,910
46.50
39,300
41,707
740.22
90.79
4,275
38,961
196.20
12,637
23,868
46.49
39,400
41,807
743.15
91.16
4,287
39,062
196.82
12,722
24,042
47.00
39,500
41,938
747.06
91.50
4,350
39,160
198.58
12,837
23,994
47.00
39,600
42,036
749.99
91.87
4,360
39,261
199.17
12,923
23,958
47.00
39,700
42,134
752.93
92.24
4,371
39,361
199.76
13,010
24,124
47.50
39,800
42,231
755.86
92.61
4,381
39,462
200.32
13,097
24,093
47.52
39,900
42,328
758.79
92.98
4,389
39,562
200.87
13,183
24,056
47.52
40,000
42,424
761.73
93.35
4,397
39,663
201.40
13,271
24,219
48.02
40,100
42,521
764.66
93.73
4,405
39,764
201.94
13,358
24,181
48.02
40,200
42,650
768.57
94.08
4,466
39,862
203.66
13,476
24,137
48.03
40,300
42,745
771.50
94.46
4,472
39,963
204.14
13,564
24,299
48.53
40,400
42,836
774.43
94.85
4,472
40,064
204.51
13,651
24,258
48.53
40,500
42,927
777.37
95.24
4,473
40,165
204.91
13,740
24,419
49.03
40,600
43,049
781.28
95.63
4,523
40,264
206.39
13,858
24,365
49.03
40,700
43,139
784.21
96.03
4,522
40,365
206.75
13,947
24,323
49.03
40,800
43,257
788.12
96.42
4,568
40,464
208.15
14,066
24,474
49.55
40,900
43,346
791.05
96.82
4,563
40,566
208.44
14,155
24,432
49.55
41,000
43,462
794.96
97.23
4,606
40,665
209.78
14,275
24,574
50.05
41,100
43,549
797.89
97.63
4,600
40,766
210.03
14,365
24,530
50.05
41,200
43,637
800.83
98.04
4,597
40,867
210.33
14,456
24,493
50.07
41,300
43,750
804.74
98.46
4,633
40,966
211.55
14,576
24,633
50.57
41,400
43,858
808.65
98.89
4,662
41,067
212.61
14,696
24,572
50.57
41,500
43,965
812.56
99.33
4,693
41,166
213.70
14,817
24,709
51.07
41,600
44,044
815.49
99.77
4,672
41,270
213.65
14,909
24,687
51.13
41,700
44,149
819.40 100.20
4,704
41,365
214.78
15,030
24,631
51.14
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-41
Appendix I
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Target (m)
I-42
Dud Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
Apogee Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
41,800
44,251
823.31 100.67
4,722
41,469
215.62
15,152
24,765
51.64
41,900
44,352
827.22 101.13
4,742
41,569
216.50
15,275
24,700
51.64
42,000
44,451
831.13 101.60
4,760
41,670
217.33
15,397
24,831
52.14
42,100
44,549
835.04 102.07
4,774
41,770
218.10
15,520
24,765
52.14
42,200
44,646
838.95 102.55
4,787
41,871
218.84
15,644
24,900
52.66
42,300
44,757
843.84 103.07
4,828
41,971
220.24
15,798
24,814
52.66
42,400
44,845
847.75 103.58
4,828
42,072
220.73
15,922
24,939
53.16
42,500
44,951
852.64 104.13
4,863
42,172
222.01
16,077
24,850
53.16
42,600
45,035
856.55 104.65
4,856
42,274
222.34
16,202
24,979
53.68
42,700
45,135
861.43 105.21
4,882
42,374
223.45
16,358
24,888
53.68
42,800
45,232
866.32 105.80
4,897
42,478
224.33
16,514
24,988
54.18
42,900
45,343
872.19 106.46
4,934
42,584
225.77
16,702
25,067
54.68
43,000
45,433
877.07 107.08
4,935
42,690
226.38
16,860
24,977
54.69
43,100
45,544
883.92 107.84
4,977
42,798
228.02
17,080
25,030
55.19
43,200
45,636
889.78 108.57
4,983
42,906
228.84
17,270
25,100
55.69
43,300
45,737
896.62 109.38
5,005
43,017
230.08
17,491
25,146
56.19
43,400
45,827
903.47 110.22
5,010
43,127
231.00
17,713
25,004
56.21
43,500
45,929
912.27 111.24
5,040
43,240
232.61
17,999
24,998
56.71
43,600
46,025
922.04 112.40
5,062
43,357
234.17
18,318
25,149
57.71
43,700
46,113
933.77 113.80
5,075
43,478
235.78
18,702
25,063
58.22
43,800
46,182
950.39 115.83
5,065
43,611
237.48
19,245
25,042
59.29
43,900
46,181
950.39 116.24
4,889
43,712
234.00
19,246
25,042
59.29
44,000
46,181
950.39 116.65
4,712
43,814
230.47
19,245
25,042
59.29
40,100
42,521
764.66
93.73
4,405
39,764
201.94
13,358
24,181
48.02
40,200
42,650
768.57
94.08
4,466
39,862
203.66
13,476
24,137
48.03
40,300
42,745
771.50
94.46
4,472
39,963
204.14
13,564
24,299
48.53
40,400
42,836
774.43
94.85
4,472
40,064
204.51
13,651
24,258
48.53
40,500
42,927
777.37
95.24
4,473
40,165
204.91
13,740
24,419
49.03
40,600
43,049
781.28
95.63
4,523
40,264
206.39
13,858
24,365
49.03
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim
Warhead Event
Apogee
Dud Fuze (m)
QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
40,700
43,139
784.21
96.03
4,522
40,365
206.75
13,947
24,323
49.03
40,800
43,257
788.12
96.42
4,568
40,464
208.15
14,066
24,474
49.55
40,900
43,346
791.05
96.82
4,563
40,566
208.44
14,155
24,432
49.55
41,000
43,462
794.96
97.23
4,606
40,665
209.78
14,275
24,574
50.05
41,100
43,549
797.89
97.63
4,600
40,766
210.03
14,365
24,530
50.05
41,200
43,637
800.83
98.04
4,597
40,867
210.33
14,456
24,493
50.07
41,300
43,750
804.74
98.46
4,633
40,966
211.55
14,576
24,633
50.57
41,400
43,858
808.65
98.89
4,662
41,067
212.61
14,696
24,572
50.57
41,500
43,965
812.56
99.33
4,693
41,166
213.70
14,817
24,709
51.07
41,600
44,044
815.49
99.77
4,672
41,270
213.65
14,909
24,687
51.13
41,700
44,149
819.40 100.20
4,704
41,365
214.78
15,030
24,631
51.14
41,800
44,251
823.31 100.67
4,722
41,469
215.62
15,152
24,765
51.64
41,900
44,352
827.22 101.13
4,742
41,569
216.50
15,275
24,700
51.64
42,000
44,451
831.13 101.60
4,760
41,670
217.33
15,397
24,831
52.14
42,100
44,549
835.04 102.07
4,774
41,770
218.10
15,520
24,765
52.14
42,200
44,646
838.95 102.55
4,787
41,871
218.84
15,644
24,900
52.66
42,300
44,757
843.84 103.07
4,828
41,971
220.24
15,798
24,814
52.66
42,400
44,845
847.75 103.58
4,828
42,072
220.73
15,922
24,939
53.16
42,500
44,951
852.64 104.13
4,863
42,172
222.01
16,077
24,850
53.16
42,600
45,035
856.55 104.65
4,856
42,274
222.34
16,202
24,979
53.68
42,700
45,135
861.43 105.21
4,882
42,374
223.45
16,358
24,888
53.68
42,800
45,232
866.32 105.80
4,897
42,478
224.33
16,514
24,988
54.18
42,900
45,343
872.19 106.46
4,934
42,584
225.77
16,702
25,067
54.68
43,000
45,433
877.07 107.08
4,935
42,690
226.38
16,860
24,977
54.69
43,100
45,544
883.92 107.84
4,977
42,798
228.02
17,080
25,030
55.19
43,200
45,636
889.78 108.57
4,983
42,906
228.84
17,270
25,100
55.69
43,300
45,737
896.62 109.38
5,005
43,017
230.08
17,491
25,146
56.19
43,400
45,827
903.47 110.22
5,010
43,127
231.00
17,713
25,004
56.21
43,500
45,929
912.27 111.24
5,040
43,240
232.61
17,999
24,998
56.71
Range to Target (m)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
I-43
Appendix I
Table I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Rocket Trajectory Data Aim Range to Target (m)
Dud Fuze (m)
Warhead Event QE (mil)
Fuze Setting (sec)
HOB (m)
Range (m)
Payload Time to Impact (sec)
Apogee Apogee Altitude (m)
Range (m)
Time (sec)
43,600
46,025
922.04 112.40
5,062
43,357
234.17
18,318
25,149
57.71
43,700
46,113
933.77 113.80
5,075
43,478
235.78
18,702
25,063
58.22
43,800
46,182
950.39 115.83
5,065
43,611
237.48
19,245
25,042
59.29
43,900
46,181
950.39 116.24
4,889
43,712
234.00
19,246
25,042
59.29
44,000
46,181
950.39 116.65
4,712
43,814
230.47
19,245
25,042
59.29
44,100
46,181
950.39 117.07
4,534
43,915
226.86
19,246
25,042
59.29
44,200
46,181
950.39 117.49
4,354
44,016
223.18
19,245
25,042
59.29
44,300
46,182
950.39 117.91
4,173
44,117
219.45
19,245
25,042
59.29
44,400
46,182
950.39 118.34
3,991
44,217
215.66
19,245
25,042
59.29
44,500
46,182
950.39 118.76
3,808
44,317
211.78
19,245
25,042
59.29
44,600
46,182
950.39 119.19
3,624
44,416
207.85
19,245
25,042
59.29
44,700
46,181
950.39 119.63
3,438
44,515
203.85
19,246
25,042
59.29
44,800
46,182
950.39 120.06
3,251
44,615
199.76
19,245
25,042
59.29
44,900
46,182
950.39 120.51
3,062
44,713
195.60
19,245
25,042
59.29
45,000
46,181
950.39 120.95
2,872
44,812
191.36
19,246
25,042
59.29
45,100
46,181
950.39 121.40
2,680
44,911
187.01
19,246
25,042
59.29
45,200
46,182
950.39 121.86
2,486
45,009
182.60
19,245
25,042
59.29
45,300
46,182
950.39 122.31
2,291
45,107
178.08
19,245
25,042
59.29
45,400
46,182
950.39 122.78
2,092
45,206
173.44
19,245
25,042
59.29
45,500
46,181
950.39 123.26
1,892
45,304
168.71
19,245
25,042
59.29
45,600
46,182
950.39 123.74
1,688
45,404
163.84
19,245
25,042
59.29
45,700
46,182
950.39 124.23
1,479
45,504
158.80
19,245
25,042
59.29
45,800
46,181
950.39 124.74
1,265
45,605
153.58
19,245
25,042
59.29
45,900 46,000 Note: Blank cells indicate that a solution is not available for the range indicated.
I-44
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Figure I-4. M26A1/2 (High Quadrant Elevation) Trajectories
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-45
Appendix I
Table I-5. M28A1/A2 Rocket (Reduced Range, Practice) Ballistic Algorithm Solutions Aim Range to Target (m)
I-46
Apogee
QE (mil)
Time to Impact (sec)
Time (sec)
Altitude (m)
Range (m)
7,500
150
16.8
8.14
319
4,411
7,600
153
17.1
8.14
334
4,410
7,700
157
17.5
8.64
349
4,628
7,800
160
17.8
8.64
364
4,627
7,900
163
18.2
8.64
380
4,626
8,000
167
18.5
9.14
396
4,836
8,100
171
18.9
9.14
414
4,835
8,200
174
19.3
9.14
431
4,834
8,300
178
19.6
9.64
449
5,038
8,400
182
20.0
9.66
468
5,042
8,500
186
20.4
9.66
487
5,040
8,600
190
20.8
9.66
507
5,039
8,700
194
21.1
10.14
528
5,230
8,800
198
21.5
10.14
549
5,228
8,900
202
21.9
10.64
571
5,419
9,000
206
22.3
10.64
593
5,417
9,100
210
22.7
10.64
617
5,415
9,200
215
23.1
11.14
640
5,601
9,300
219
23.5
11.14
665
5,598
9,400
224
23.9
11.14
690
5,595
9,500
228
24.3
11.66
716
5,783
9,600
233
24.8
11.64
743
5,773
9,700
238
25.2
11.64
770
5,770
9,800
243
25.6
12.14
799
5,947
9,900
247
26.1
12.16
828
5,948
10,000
252
26.5
12.16
858
5,944
10,100
258
26.9
12.66
889
6,116
10,200
263
27.4
12.64
920
6,106
10,300
268
27.9
13.14
953
6,273
10,400
273
28.3
13.16
987
6,274
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Table I-5. M28A1/A2 Rocket (Reduced Range, Practice) Ballistic Algorithm Solutions Aim Range to Target (m)
Apogee
QE (mil)
Time to Impact (sec)
Time (sec)
Altitude (m)
Range (m)
10,500
279
28.8
13.16
1,021
6,269
10,600
284
29.2
13.66
1,056
6,432
10,700
290
29.7
13.66
1,093
6,426
10,800
296
30.2
13.66
1,130
6,420
10,900
302
30.7
14.16
1,169
6,579
11,000
308
31.2
14.16
1,209
6,572
11,100
314
31.7
14.66
1,249
6,727
11,200
320
32.2
14.66
1,291
6,719
11,300
326
32.7
15.16
1,334
6,871
11,400
333
33.2
15.16
1,379
6,863
11,500
339
33.7
15.16
1,424
6,854
11,600
346
34.3
15.66
1,471
7,001
11,700
353
34.8
15.67
1,519
6,996
11,800
359
35.4
16.17
1,569
7,140
11,900
367
35.9
16.16
1,620
7,124
12,000
374
36.5
16.66
1,673
7,264
12,100
381
37.0
16.66
1,727
7,252
12,200
388
37.6
17.16
1,782
7,389
12,300
396
38.2
17.16
1,840
7,374
12,400
404
38.8
17.66
1,899
7,507
12,500
412
39.4
17.66
1,961
7,492
12,600
420
40.0
18.16
2,024
7,621
12,700
428
40.7
18.17
2,090
7,607
12,800
437
41.3
18.66
2,157
7,727
12,900
446
42.0
18.67
2,227
7,712
13,000
455
42.6
19.17
2,300
7,832
13,100
464
43.3
19.17
2,375
7,809
13,200
473
44.0
19.67
2,453
7,925
13,300
483
44.7
20.17
2,533
8,037
13,400
493
45.5
20.17
2,618
8,009
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-47
Appendix I
Table I-5. M28A1/A2 Rocket (Reduced Range, Practice) Ballistic Algorithm Solutions Aim Range to Target (m)
I-48
Apogee
QE (mil)
Time to Impact (sec)
Time (sec)
Altitude (m)
Range (m)
13,500
504
46.2
20.67
2,705
8,116
13,600
514
47.0
21.17
2,797
8,218
13,700
525
47.8
21.17
2,892
8,184
13,800
537
48.6
21.67
2,993
8,279
13,900
549
49.5
22.17
3,098
8,370
14,000
562
50.4
22.17
3,210
8,326
14,100
575
51.3
22.73
3,329
8,423
14,200
589
52.3
23.23
3,456
8,497
14,300
604
53.3
23.73
3,592
8,563
14,400
620
54.4
24.25
3,741
8,624
14,500
638
55.6
24.73
3,905
8,665
14,600
657
57.0
25.23
4,089
8,694
14,700
680
58.5
25.75
4,304
8,706
14,800
708
60.3
26.75
4,571
8,793
14,900
749
63.0
27.75
4,969
8,783
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
Figure I-5. M28A1/2 RRPR Trajectories
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
I-49
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix J
JSTARS CGS Interoperability Procedures for the MLRS Battalion This appendix provides the tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) for MLRS battalion employment of a CGS while conducting ATACM missions. The MLRS battalion and CGS crew should use these procedures as a guide for development of individual TSOPs tailored to their mission(s).
JSTARS J-1. The JSTARS is an Army and U.S. Air Force multi-service system designed to provide real time surveillance, intelligence, targeting, and battlefield management information to the land component commander. The JSTARS components consist of 2 major subgroups: the E-8C aircraft (a Boeing 707 variant) and the Army CGS. JSTARS can locate and track moving vehicles over a large surveillance area day or night and in almost all weather conditions. The aircraft sends this information near real time (NRT) to CGSs on the ground. The radar aboard the aircraft operates in 2 modes: moving target indicator (MTI) and synthetic aperture radar (SAR). Commanders often use the SAR capability to determine the disposition of stationary vehicles and weapon systems. Figure J-1 displays the JSTARS MTI radar capabilities. Figure J-2 outlines some of the JSTARS SAR capabilities. JSTARS MTI Can Detect—
Moving ground vehicles the size of a HMMWV. Slow-moving aircraft (fixed and rotary wing). Convoy movement (speed, direction, location, and time). Choke points based on traffic analysis. Operational bridges and causeways due to traffic pattern analysis. Possible locations of logistics sites, CPs, and rest stops. JSTARS MTI Cannot—
See through hills and mountains because of terrain masking. Identify the difference between types of vehicles (e.g., T-55 or T-72). Determine where static defended areas are; if they are manned, with what type of weapon system. Locate, track, and identify people moving on the ground. Detect or track rockets or tactical ballistic missiles in flight. Figure J-1. JSTARS MTI Capabilities
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
J-1
Appendix J
JSTARS SAR Can—
Through pattern analysis, confirm the presence of occupied artillery, surface to air missile, and air and missile defense (AMD) sites. Locate individual vehicles. Refine target accuracy/description. Support limited BDA; e.g., bridges (by looking for traffic on them). JSTARS SAR Cannot—
Identify the type of vehicles that are in a particular location, only if they are there or not. By itself, detect mobile SSM units (the JSTARS must cue or be cued by other sensors). Build a theater-level mosaic (because the SAR frame is relatively small compared to the view provided by the MTI radar). Figure J-2. JSTARS SAR Capabilities
COMMON GROUND STATION J-2. The CGS is the ground communications link to the airborne station of the JSTARS. There are up to 6 CGSs at corps, supporting the corps FC/FE and other elements designated by the commander. The CGS can send targets to AFATDS using the fire mission-call for fire (FM;CFF/K02.04) message and target information in the artillery target intelligence coordinate report (ATI;CDR/K02.09) message. The CGS can communicate using wire, MSE, SINCGARS, or TACSAT. J-3. The JSTARS system can locate and potentially classify (wheel/track) targets with sufficient accuracy for AFOM employment. JSTARS can also predict movement routes. The JSTARS CGS can predict target locations and time-on-location data for moving targets. J-4. The CGS supports cross-cueing operations against single- and multiple-vehicle targets. In this role, the CGS operator can track vehicle movements from SSM launch sites reported from other sources to hide or reload locations. The CGS automatically records “tracks,” so the operator can “replay” them to monitor the target's movement until it stops. The CGS operator may give the location to the JSTARS aircraft (or other sensors such as a UAS) with a request for more information or target location confirmation. The operator may also pass it to the FDC as a target location for engagement. J-5. The CGS can receive and display imagery from UAS ground control stations. It has a joint tactical terminal (JTT) communications system for the receipt of SIGINT data from the various IEW sensors capable of collecting this type of data. The CGS can overlay the SIGINT data on its display for correlation with JSTARS and UAS imagery data. J-6. The JSTARS CGS has the ability to display maps, friendly graphics, enemy graphics, NAIs, and TAIs. This allows the CGS operator to scan areas that the corps commander has deemed vital to the operation. The CGS is also a valuable tool in supporting cue-track operations against single- and multiplevehicle targets. For example, the CGS operator may be tasked to track vehicle movements from SSM launch sites to locations where the vehicle may return to hide or begin reloading operations. J-7. The JSTARS CGS operators can perform all their tasks from within the FA TOC by using a remote workstation (RWS). The RWS is linked to the CGS with fiber optic cable. Each CGS supports up to 4 RWSs. Locating the RWS in the MLRS battalion TOC greatly improves coordination. Note: The CGS operator can only view or enter locations expressed in either latitude/longitude (lat/long) or the military grid reference system (MGRS), not the UTM system. However, the CGS can convert the lat/long coordinates to UTM grid before sending the data to AFATDS. To avoid confusion, send only short UTM grids to the CGS. The CGS location data is expressed in the default datum entered during setup. The CGS must operate in the same datum to avoid coordinate errors.
J-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
JSTARS CGS Interoperability Procedures for the MLRS Battalion
STAFF ACTIONS AND EQUIPMENT SETUP PROCEDURES J-8. The corps commander (or his designated representative) determines the need for the CGS to be collocated with the MLRS battalion based on his concept of operation and guidance for attacking HPTs with short dwell times. His guidance is incorporated into taskings for the target acquisition systems and fire support units. These taskings include engagement areas (EAs), NAIs, TAIs, cueing and reporting instructions for sensors, and instructions for “shooters.” The EAs or TAIs are developed where SSM transporter erector launcher (TEL) activities have been identified through the IPB process. J-9. The corps matches launchers with targets through weapons target pairing. The corps sends the targets and target numbers to the MLRS battalion. The corps then clears the platoon and target area airspace (and conducts necessary coordination) for the decentralized execution missions. Careful positioning of launchers can enable the corps to range a majority of targets on the battlefield without moving the launcher loader module due to the AFOM off-axis launch capability.
FRAGORD J-10. The FRAGORD provides the execution authority for collocating the CGS with the MLRS battalion. It changes the mission for both the CGS and the MLRS battalion. The corps must provide reaction time (such as CGS travel time and database maintenance) prior to FRAGORD effective time. J-11. The FRAGORD for either the CGS or MLRS battalion should contain at a minimum (not allinclusive): • Brief situation outline. • Unit identification and location (including both MLRS battalion and CGS elements). • CGS cueing guidance and monitor criteria (from internal and external sources). • Criteria for what constitutes engagement trigger events. • Specific time window for the decentralized execution mission. • Mission data. • Battlefield geometry changes (if any). • Datum to be used. • Special post-mission reporting instructions. • Determination if the CGS should provide limited BDA. • Number of missiles battalion must have ready to fire. • Verification of platoon/firing unit locations in FC/FE database or if MLRS battalion moves.
MLRS BATTALION J-12. The MLRS battalions with a decentralized execution mission (mission execution is normally decentralized down to the battalion when CGS is collocated) must ensure that the locations of platoons equipped with AFOM are reported to the corps FC/FE for airspace de-confliction. If the platoon locations change, the battalion must inform the corps or division FC/FE so they may clear the airspace with the appropriate agencies. The battalion FDC must confirm that launchers can still range the target areas from the new firing point locations. The ammunition allocation plan must support the expected AFOM expenditures. The battalion builds fire missions from mission data contained in the FRAGORD. The battalion postures launchers appropriately to accomplish the mission. For example, launchers may be postured in the “stay hot, shoot fast” method for theater missile defense (TMD) missions but postured in hide areas for Block II missions.
COMMON GROUND STATION J-13. The CGS operator initiates the execution of decentralized fire missions. When the target activity meets the engagement trigger event criteria, the CGS sends the target data/coordinate report or fire mission message constructed earlier for that particular target area. The target report contains the new target location and adds any new information concerning the target.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
J-3
Appendix J
MLRS BATTERY, PLATOON, AND LAUNCHERS J-14. The battery/platoon must designate launchers to “hot” status to ensure continuity. The battalion must be informed of launcher status at all times. The firing points should be selected with great care since the launchers may be in a hot status in the open for extended times. Launcher vulnerability to enemy air attack must be considered. If possible, the launchers should consider firing from their hide positions.
COMMUNICATIONS CGS TO AFATDS INTERFACE J-15. The CGS can communicate digitally with the AFATDS using standard fire support message formats over wire or SINCGARS radios. The CGS and AFATDS have full communications capability for the following message formats: • PTM/free text (K01.01). • DATUM/geographical reference data (K02.41). • CFF/call for fire (K02.04). J-16. Upon arrival, the CGS crew chief and the battalion FDC chief establish communications, by either radio or wire (BN FD NET). Source address and the logical name of both nodes (frequency, logical name, and address) are in the FRAGORD or the FS annex of the OPORD. Once digital communications have been established, the CGS transmits datum information to the FDC with the DATUM/K02.04 message.
CONDUCTING A REHEARSAL VERIFY TARGET NUMBERS AGAINST THE FRAGORD, CGS, AND /AFATDS J-17. The FC/FE’s input to the FRAGORD contains a list of target numbers used for fire missions. This permits the tasking artillery headquarters to use the same target number in the fire mission passed to the launcher to maintain mission status. Because the CGS uses a different target numbering system for intelligence reporting, the FRAGORD correlates FS and CGS target numbers. This permits rapid target engagement by the proper unit. This also ensures that the CGS operator is able to go back in his track database (using his target numbering system) and find earlier target tracks, if necessary. This number stays with that target through the reporting cycle and every time the CGS generates an updated report. J-18. The CGS crew chief and the battalion FDC chief verify that the geometry, datum, fire mission, and initialization data in both the CGS and the AFATDS are the same. Any differences must be corrected. This is easily accomplished by sending the appropriate message (unless geometry is different). It is imperative that those critical files are the same between both systems prior to conducting the mission. Finally, system time is verified or synchronized. J-19. Verify that the unit is postured to accomplish the mission: • Ensure that necessary database corrections have been accomplished. • Ensure that all battalion elements are on a common standard time. • Ensure that the AFOM ammunition is on hand. • Ensure that launchers are in position and ready to fire. z Verify the fire mission status.
MISSION REHEARSAL J-20. The MLRS battalion and CGS operators should practice the decentralized execution procedures outlined in this appendix. Table J-1 provides a basic list of execution procedures to assist in the rehearsal.
J-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
JSTARS CGS Interoperability Procedures for the MLRS Battalion
Note: Although the following procedures involve digital message traffic between the CGS and MLRS battalion, the mission can still be accomplished with voice communications. Collocating the CGS and battalion FDC/S-3 tracks facilitates communications and coordination; however, it is not required.
BLOCK I AND BLOCK IA DECENTRALIZED MISSION EXECUTION DECENTRALIZED EXECUTION MISSIONS TARGET SET J-21. The target set for Block IA decentralized missions consists of those high-payoff targets that have short dwell times (as determined during IPB). Some potential targets are: z SSM TELs in hide positions, reload points, and firing points. z Heavy multiple rocket launchers. J-22. The requirements for decentralized execution are identified by the FC/FE. The MLRS battalion focuses on the delivery of munitions within the target's dwell time. The MLRS battalion follows the same procedures to attack all decentralized execution targets. To keep this appendix brief, the following paragraphs focus on SSM TEL target engagement. Figure J-3 depicts the decentralized execution mission.
Figure J-3. Decentralized Mission Communications Channels for MLRS/HIMARS
JSTARS TBM ATTACK OPERATIONS MISSION EXECUTION J-23. During normal surveillance operations, JSTARS provides surveillance of the NAIs and TAIs according to predetermined IPB analysis and current intelligence updates. Commanders should prioritize these for the CGS operator. If theater ballistic missile (TBM) launchers are on the high-payoff target list, JSTARS focuses its efforts on locations defined by cues from other sensors indicating TBM activity.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
J-5
Appendix J
J-24. Once the launcher has been positively located and identified, JSTARS can provide launch site data to support TBM attack operations for decentralized execution sensor-to-shooter missions. If the vehicles depart the area before an attack can be processed, JSTARS can track them to their hide site and provide vehicle targeting information such as location and formation description. J-25. The preferred attack locations in declining order are rearm points, hide areas, and firing points (before and after launch). If the target leaves the area where airspace is cleared, the mission can proceed using emergency airspace clearance methods (bull’s eye call is a possibility). Successful TBM attack operations require procedures to provide the flexibility and timeliness required for mission execution. J-26. JSTARS supports TMD attack operations by: • Obtaining and disseminating enhanced information or intelligence on fixed and mobile target locations in near real time MTI and SAR analysis. • Surveillance of high-probability TBM operating and deployment areas (identified through the IPB process) and detecting, locating, and tracking potential TBM launchers. • Providing the attack asset with accurate target and threat information before and during the mission. This is critical for attack assets diverted from other missions. • Facilitating timely initial BDA information to support the combat assessment process.
CAUTION Some CGS operators report a target with multiple target elements as a circular target; others report this type of target with length and width dimensions. Either alternative will work; however, during the rehearsal, the battalion FDC and CGS operator must coordinate on which target reporting procedure they will use for the remainder of the operation. If the CGS operator can identify the target critical element (for example, SSM TEL), he should report its grid as a point target since its value surpasses all others.
AT MY COMMAND MISSIONS J-27. The AMC mission provides flexible response to decentralized execution missions. AMC missions permit launchers to attack targets using an initial fire mission and subsequent fire command message. This process decreases mission response time and, in some cases, permits fire plan changes. Units must balance launcher availability and survivability when using this method of control. J-28. A special use of the AMC mission has been developed to provide responsive fires for decentralized execution missions. The corps FC and the ACE analyze the battlefield prior to the decentralized execution mission. They determine areas where these types of high-payoff targets are likely to be attacked. The FC/FE pairs platoons with specific target areas through a process known as weapon target pairing. To shorten the command and control timelines, a CGS is attached or placed under the operational control of an MLRS battalion, or a battalion/battery can be placed under FC/FE control. J-29. The MLRS launchers are postured on firing points for rapid execution using an amended AMC mission. The launchers load the fire mission data into the missile. The missile then powers down. The CGS tracks the TEL until it disappears from the screen. This is often at a reload point where the TEL rendezvouses with its resupply vehicle (dwell times at such locations are within the response time for the postured launchers). As time permits, the CGS operator requests a SAR image or confirmation from another sensor. He also verifies the trigger criteria, and refines the target location. J-30. AMC missions are “amended” with changes either in target location, time to fire, method of control, method of engagement, method of attack, or dispersal pattern. For example, using guidance from the FRAGORD, the CGS operator may change the target grid to the new location and transmit the new target
J-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
JSTARS CGS Interoperability Procedures for the MLRS Battalion
location to the MLRS FDC. The FDC then formats an amended MLRS;CFF message with the updated grid and a WR method of control for transmission to the launcher(s). The launcher activates the missile(s) and fires the mission at the new target location. Figure J-4 provides an example of the steps involved in conducting an amended AMC mission.
Figure J-4. Example of Block I/IA Amended At My Command Mission MLRS/HIMARS
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
J-7
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix K
Environmental Awareness Commanders, unit leaders, and soldiers have specific duties and responsibilities concerning protection of the environment. The following overview builds basic environmental awareness by describing those expected duties and responsibilities. Soldiers are expected to do what is right in the absence of specific guidance. Unit leaders and commanders must be competent and confident in the area of environmental stewardship. Not all leaders are required to be environmental experts; however, they must be aware and responsive to compliance and prevention issues required during the execution of their duties. References to material for further reading are located throughout this appendix; these documents provide a complete explanation of legal and ethical responsibilities.
SECTION I—ARMY ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS K-1. The Army's environmental vision states: “The Army will be a national leader in environmental and natural resource stewardship for present and future generations as an integral part of our mission.” To achieve this vision, the Army's environmental strategy places a high priority on sustained compliance with all environmental laws; takes into account the restoration of previously contaminated sites; focuses on pollution prevention; and accounts for the conservation and preservation of natural resources. K-2. The Army environmental ethic calls for the chain of command to establish and support a stewardship climate that supports compliance—obeying the law; prevention—the concept of reduce, reuse, recycle; conservation—control and protection of natural resources; and restoration—the cleanup of contaminated areas. This ethic supports caring for the environment while conducting realistic training. K-3. Army personnel should become familiar with these policy statements; they are established so our natural environment will be available for present and future generations.
SECTION II—ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
FIELD ACTIVITIES K-4. The MLRS is a powerful, highly mobile, and very lethal weapon system capable of providing devastating fire support from multiple locations. Because of this power and mobility, the MLRS provides tremendous tactical advantage. The same attributes that contribute to weapon lethality and tactical value make the weapons a threat to our environment unless they are employed prudently and in consideration of environmental preservation. This section presents various preventive measures that can decrease possible environmental damage from the MLRS, associated vehicles, and support personnel involved in training and operations. K-5. Key field environmental considerations for the MLRS, associated vehicles, and support personnel include, but are not limited to, the following: • Wheeled and tracked combat vehicles should stay on established roads, trails, firing points, and firebreaks unless conducting specific cross-country maneuver exercises. Additionally, confine pivot turns and neutral steers to the middle of the roadway. • Follow land contours rather than driving up and down hills or along creeks.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
K-1
Appendix K
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
To minimize siltation of streams, use bridges or low-water crossings when crossing permanent streams. If it becomes necessary to cross through a stream, then do so by the most direct route (90-degree angle). Establish refueling and maintenance areas away from wetlands and drainage areas, and near or over water sources. Federal law prohibits the removal of artifacts from federal property. Do not excavate, remove, damage, or otherwise alter or deface any archaeological resource located on a military reservation. Avoid and mark off-limit areas for known archaeological sites during military training exercises. Penalties can be up to $250,000 for knowingly disturbing a site. Be aware of and avoid nesting, bedding, and habitats of all species of birds and animals. Mark as off-limits, designated threatened or endangered species areas. Use camouflage netting instead of live vegetation. When planning training activities, conform to installation and community noise-abatement regulations. Identify and mark the off-limit boundaries. Open fires, such as burning garbage, refuse, and rubbish, are not allowed on the range areas. Conform to field sanitation and medical standards when using soakage pits for wash water, liquid kitchen wastes, and grease traps per FM 21-10. Establish field satellite-accumulation site and procedures. Police field locations and establish field trash collection point and procedures. Remove materials packed into training area on departure from the training area. When the training exercise is complete, repair any field damage such as ruts from vehicles, foxholes, and other emplacements. Conduct all training with a concern for conservation and future use of range training areas.
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL AND HAZARDOUS WASTE K-6. The Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) of 1976 is the framework for managing hazardous waste and has established standards for identifying, classifying, and storing these wastes. RCRA regulations require those involved in managing hazardous substances to be properly trained, and the training to be properly documented. K-7. Key hazardous material and hazardous waste environmental considerations include, but are not limited to, the following items: • Personnel dealing with hazardous materials should be trained in proper handling, containment, cleanup, and reporting procedures. • A material safety data sheet (MSDS) must be on file and made available to all personnel regarding hazardous material. • Battery electrolyte (acid) from damaged batteries should be drained and disposed of through turnin via installation policy and maintenance SOP. Refer to TB 43-0134 for complete procedures regarding battery handling and disposal. • Never allow the accumulation of more than 55 gallons of a hazardous waste, or 1 quart of acutely hazardous waste, at the satellite accumulation point. Process all hazardous waste in a timely manner. • Hazardous waste containers should be kept closed when not in use, kept free of rust and leaks, and stored separately from incompatible wastes. • Incompatible wastes must never be transported on the same vehicle. • Ensure that all departments of transportation (DOT) and hazardous waste transportation requirements are met prior to transporting hazardous material or hazardous waste on public highways. • Check with the local environmental office for transportation procedures within the installation boundary.
K-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Environmental Awareness
z
For complete information regarding storage and handling of hazardous materials, refer to TM 38-410.
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET K-8. An MSDS is a summary of information on a given chemical identifying material, health, and physical hazards, exposure limits, and precautions (see table K-1). An MSDS describes the hazards of a material and provides information on how the material can be safely handled, used, and stored. Insist on receiving a copy of an MSDS when receiving a hazardous chemical from supply, and retain it for when, or if, you turn in the material. As time permits, periodically review each MSDS pertaining to your unit. This will ensure a quick response when identifying symptoms and handling emergencies. K-9. Unfortunately, there is no specified format for an MSDS, and it doesn't contain all known data of a chemical, but there are typical components. These are outlined in 29 CFR 1910.1200. Use the following information as a guide to what to expect on most MSDS forms. Table K-1. Material Safety Data Sheet Section/Topic
Contents
Section 1—General Information
Manufacturer’s name and address. Trade or common name of product.
Section 2—Hazardous Components
NIOSH and/or CAS number. Chemical name and percentage.
Section 3—Physical Properties
For example, boiling point, freezing point, water solubility. Appearance and odor under normal conditions.
Section 4—Fire & Explosion Hazard
Fire-fighting equipment. Any unusual fire and explosion hazards.
Section 5—Health Hazard
Routes of entry into the body. Emergency and first aid procedures.
Section 6—Reactivity Data
Conditions to avoid. Incompatibility with other materials.
Section 7—Control Measures
Recommended respiratory and ventilation. Personal protective equipment, if needed.
Section 8—Special Precautions
Handling and storage precautions.
Section 9— Transportation
Applicable regulations. Hazards class and required labeling.
MAINTENANCE K-10. The maintenance officer acts as the hazardous material/hazardous waste (HM/HW) spill coordinator. He/she ensures the accountability, proper storage, and disposal of all HM/HW, and ensures that HM/HW spills are immediately contained and reported. Additionally, the maintenance officer reports nonfunctional/inoperative treatment/collection facilities (such as oil/grease interceptors, floor drains, or catch basins) to the installation environmental office through the unit environmental compliance officer (ECO). •
K-11. Key maintenance environmental considerations include, but are not limited to, the following: Motor maintenance areas require SOPs and close monitoring. This operation is a continuous source of minor pollution to storm drainage systems due to the constant threat of a spill of fuel or oil. SOPs for prevention or cleanup of spills should be posted in motor maintenance areas, and should be understood by all personnel involved in maintenance activities. • Refueling operation SOPs should address practices to minimize spills. • Implement preventive maintenance on all heavy equipment to ensure that petroleum products will not be released from the belly pan.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
K-3
Appendix K
• • • •
Ensure that pollutants are not discharged into storm or wash rack drains or poured on the ground or along fence lines. Some common pollutants are oil, solvents, soap, diesel, gasoline, battery acid, chemicals, waste antifreeze, paint, and grease. Asbestos-containing parts such as brake shoes, clutch plates, and equipment insulation should be removed, collected, and disposed according to installation policy. The least hazardous or, preferably, non-hazardous material to perform a function should be used unless previous research of options clearly indicates otherwise. The Defense Logistics Agency (DLA) produces publications to assist in this process. Do not mix fuel, oil, or antifreeze together. This is considered a mixed waste.
SUPPLY K-12. The supply sergeant is required to have a complete inventory of HM/HW generated by the unit. He/she must also know what chemicals the unit requires, where and how they are stored, how much hazardous waste is generated, and necessary spill response procedures. The supply sergeant should coordinate with the unit S-3 or ECO to ensure that this information is incorporated into the unit SOP. K-13. Key supply environmental considerations include, but are not limited to, the following items: • Requisition only supplies needed and authorized, avoid stockpiling excessive materials. • Maintain an accurate inventory in unit SOP of hazardous waste used by the generating unit. This listing should include waste by volume, type, generating process, and location. • Use of used oil tanks for disposal of solvents, antifreeze, or other HM/HW is against regulation. Storage of hazardous material must be in clearly marked DOT-approved containers. • Actively support a unit-recycling program. • Ensure that tires and batteries are properly turned in for recycling. • Ensure that used batteries are turned in on a 1-for-1 basis.
SPILL RESPONSE K-14. Generally, only persons specifically trained to respond to a spill should handle unit spills. However, all personnel should, at a minimum, report the spill and be aware of the following 4 basic steps to spill response: • Protect yourself. Use personal protective equipment specified in the MSDS. • Stop the flow. This may be as simple as placing the container upright or closing a valve. • Contain the spill. Place absorbent material around the spill, and protect drains and ditches. • Report the spill. Notify supervisor and other key personnel. K-15. Each unit is responsible for the cleanup of their own spills, as long as no personnel are put in danger. After the above 4 steps are completed, take the necessary steps to clean up the spill. Information on cleanup procedures can be found on the MSDS or in the unit SOP, or contact installation environmental staff for guidance. Turn in the spilled and absorbent material to the defense reutilization marketing office (DRMO) or another designated point if a DRMO is not available. Also, ensure that there are adequate spill supplies on hand for future use. K-16. Key spill prevention, response, and cleanup considerations include, but are not limited to, the following items: • A spill prevention and response section should be included in the unit SOPs, outlining installation spill plan requirements. • Each unit should make available and maintain a spill cleanup kit near any satellite-accumulation area, or where a potential for spill exists. The kit should contain, at a minimum, absorbent material, shovel, brooms, gloves, and appropriate containers. Units that have a potential for releases or spills that may impact streams should also maintain booms for containment. • Drip pans should be used under vehicles and equipment where spills are likely to occur.
K-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Environmental Awareness
• •
Spills of oil, fuel, or other hazardous pollutants over 5 gallons in volume, 100 square feet in area, or in any waterway should be reported immediately to the chain of command. All topsoil contaminated with oil should be removed, properly disposed, and replaced by the unit. While awaiting disposal, keep the excavated soil covered to prevent run-off in case of rain.
SECTION III—REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
LAWS AND REGULATIONS K-17. Military facilities are subject to federal, state, local, and host nation environmental laws; when the requirements differ, the most stringent applies. Ignorance of environmental laws is not an excuse for noncompliance; and it will not protect commanders, soldiers, or the military services from civil and criminal liability. Figure K-1 lists the federal and military laws and regulations that are frequently encountered by Army personnel; however, it is not inclusive of all requirements. K-18. Additionally, environmental law varies with differing countries, states, and cities. What is legal in one area may be illegal in another. Staff at each installation environmental office knows the laws for that locality and should be consulted on environmental considerations during the planning and execution of training. K-19. Army units outside the United States (OCONUS) that are not subject to federal environmental regulations decreed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) should comply with the final governing standards of the host nation. In areas where a host nation has minimal or no environmental laws and regulations, comply with AR 200-1. Army Regulations
Federal Laws
AR 200-1. Environmental Enhancement
Protection
and
Archaeological Protection Act of 1979 Clean Air Act of 1970
AR 420-1. Army Facilities Management
Clean Water Act of 1972 CERCLA of 1980 EPCRA of 1986 Federal Facilities Compliance Act of 1992
Executive Orders
Hazardous Materials Transportation Act of 1975 National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 Noise Control Act of 1972 Oil Pollution Act of 1990
EO 11989. Use of off-road vehicles on public land EO 11990. Wetland protection EO 12114. Effects of federal actions abroad EO 12196. OSHA compliance for federal employees EO 12580. CERCLA duties and powers EO 13101. Pollution prevention and recycling
RCRA of 1976 Toxic Substances Control Act of 1976
Figure K-1. Environmental Laws and Regulations
REGULATORY TRAINING REQUIREMENTS K-20. Regulatory agencies exist that require environmental training. This training may be at the awareness level for all personnel or at a more specialized level designed for specific personnel. The installation
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
K-5
Appendix K
environmental and safety offices can best assist in determining your training requirements and who to contact for additional information. Table K-2 provides possible training requirements for the MLRS unit. Note: The depth or level of training will vary between target audiences. For example, K and E will need in-depth training, while A will only require broad overviews. The letters K, E, N, or A denote target audience and are listed below: Table K-2. Regulatory Training Requirements Training Topic
Regulatory Reference
K
E
N
A
*
*
*
*
*
*
Archaeological Resources Protection Act (ARPA)
43 CFR 7.7 (4) ARPA of 1979
Asbestos
40 CFR part 763, 40 CFR 61, part M
CFC/halon refrigerants
EO 11051, 40 CFR 82.40, 40 CFR 282, 58 FR 92 (p. 28660)
Clean Water Act (CWA)
CWA S 311
*
*
Confined space entry
29 CFR 1910.146
*
*
*
*
Department of Transportation
49 CFR172.704
*
*
*
*
Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act (EPCRA)
EPCRA/SARA 1986 Title 3, Executive Order 12856
*
*
*
*
Emergency response to hazardous materials incidents/hazardous material technician
29 CFR 1910.120 *
*
*
Endangered Species Act (ESA)
ESA 1973 as amended, 50 CFR par 402
Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA)
FIFRA of 1972, 40 CFR 265.16, SARA of 1986
Hazard communication standard
29 CFR 1910.1200
*
*
*
*
Hazardous materials/waste compliance training
29 CFR 1200; 40 CFR 262.34, 264.16, 265.16; 49 CFR 172
*
*
*
*
Hazardous waste operations (HAZWOPER) for IR
29 CFR 1910.120
*
*
Hazardous waste operations (HAZWOPER) for TSDF
29 CFR 1910.120
*
*
Lead based paint
Lead Based Paint Exposure Reduction Act of 1992, 24 CFR 35
*
*
*
*
National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA)
NEPA of 1969
National Historic Preservation Act (NHPA)
36 CFR part 800, 36 CFR part 63, NHPA of 1966
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)
CWA of 1990, 40 CFR 122-129
Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation Act (NAGPRA)
NAGPRA of 1990
Occupational exposures to blood-borne pathogens
29 CFR 1910.1030
Occupational respiratory protection Solid waste management
K-6
* *
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
29 CFR 1926.58, 29 CFR 1910.134
*
*
40 CFR 240-257/RCRA Subtitle D
*
FM 3-09.60
*
*
*
*
12 August 2008
Environmental Awareness
Table K-2. Regulatory Training Requirements Training Topic
Regulatory Reference
K
E
*
*
*
*
N
A
Storm water compliance
40 CFR 122-129, WPCA S 319
Storm water pollution prevention planning
CWA S 319
Underground storage tanks
40 CFR part 280, RCRA Subtitle I
Knowledge
Personnel who administer, implement, or comply with contents of regulations such as program managers and technicians in the environmental field. Also includes organizations that need in-depth knowledge of the environmental laws/regulations/programs, such as Staff Judge Advocate.
Executors
All personnel who supervise or actually handle responsibilities dealing with environmental programs, to include ECOs, technicians, and workers. Also includes unit personnel required to execute responsibilities with environmental ramifications as part of their mission.
Need to Know
Personnel who may encounter environmental issues as part of their mission. This may include personnel within the following activities: engineers, designers, emergency personnel, safety, Reserve components, first-line supervisors, crew chiefs, NCOs, and various unit personnel as identified by the installation environmental office and their supervisors.
Awareness
Public affairs office, Reserve components, other unit personnel.
*
*
ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES K-21. It is the unit commander's duty to appoint an ECO and a hazardous waste coordinator; the same person can serve in both positions, per AR 200-1. These appointments are made to ensure that environmental compliance occurs at the unit level. Appointed personnel should— • Receive formal training and act as an advisor on environmental regulatory compliance during training, operations, and logistics functions. • Be the commander's eyes and ears for environmental matters, as the safety officer/NCO is for safety matters. • Function as the liaison between the unit and higher HQ regarding environmental matters such as training requirements, equipment, or supplies that unit personnel need. • Inspect HM/HW accumulation sites and ensure that soldiers handling these materials are properly trained. • Ensure that the unit's SOP covers environmental considerations, conservation, natural resources, pollution prevention, HM/HW, and spill procedures. • Support the Army's pollution prevention/recycling program. • Report hazardous material and waste spills immediately. • Conduct environmental self-assessments or internal environmental compliance assessments, and meet with key installation environmental points of contact, as necessary, to remain updated on any regulatory changes.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
K-7
Appendix K
SECTION IV—ENVIRONMENTAL RISK MANAGEMENT
GENERAL K-22. Leaders at all levels are required to make timely and appropriate decisions regarding the environment. Failure to do so may negatively impact the training environment, which could then lead to personal liability of individuals directly involved, the chain of command, and the U.S. Army. Therefore, leaders must have a method of managing, assessing, and reducing environmental risks.
FIVE-STEP PROCESS K-23. Risk management is a 5-step process designed to provide leaders with a methodology for the identification, assessment, control, and evaluation of environmental risks. The following is a summary of these steps from FM 3-100.4 and FM 5-19; refer to them for detailed information. Step 1. Identify hazards. Environmental hazards include all activities that may pollute, create negative noise-related effects, degrade archeological/cultural resources, or negatively affect threatened or endangered species habitats. A select listing of common environmental hazards is located in table K-3. Table K-3. Common Environmental Hazards Media Area
Hazards
Air
Equipment exhaust, convoy dust, range fires, open-air burning, pyrotechnics/smoke pots/smoke grenades, part-washer emissions, paint emissions, air-conditioner/refrigeration CFCs, HM/HW release, pesticides, other toxic industrial chemicals or material.
Archeological and cultural
Maneuvering and digging in sensitive areas, disturbing or removing artifacts, demolition/munitions effects, HM/HW spills.
Noise
Low-flying aircraft (helicopters), demolition/munitions effects, nighttime operations, operations near post/camp boundaries and civilian populations, vehicle convoys/maneuvers, large-scale exercises.
Threatened and/or endangered species
Maneuvering in sensitive areas, demolition/munitions effects, especially during breeding seasons, disturbing habitat or individual species, HM/HW spills or releases, poor field sanitation, improper cutting of vegetation, damage to coral reefs.
Soil (terrain)
Over use of maneuver areas, demolition/munitions effects, range fires, poor field sanitation, poor maneuver-damage control, erosion, troop construction effect, refueling operations, HM/HW spills, maneuver in ecologically sensitive areas such as wetlands and tundra, industrial waste runoff, pesticide accumulation in soil, vegetation, and terrestrial organisms.
Water
Refueling operations near water sources, HM/HW spills, erosion and unchecked drainage, amphibious/water-crossing operations, troop construction effects, poor field sanitation, washing vehicles at unapproved sites. Step 2. Assess environmental hazards to determine risk. A risk assessment is a tool used for evaluating the most pressing or most hazardous potential environmental damage. It considers 2 factors: probability—how often a hazard is likely to occur; and severity—the effect in degrees a hazard will have on personnel, equipment, environment, and mission. Unit leaders should conduct risk assessments before conducting any training, operations, or logistical activities that are not previously addressed in the SOP, or when conditions differ significantly from the SOP. Complete information on how to perform an environmental risk assessment can be obtained from FM 3-100.4.
K-8
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Environmental Awareness
Step 3. Develop controls and make a decision. This step is designed to reduce the probability or severity of each hazard, which in turn lowers the overall risk. Control types fall into the categories of educational, physical, or avoidance. Table K-4 outlines examples of environmental controls. Section II contains the specifics pertinent to the MLRS unit. Table K-4. Environmental-related Controls Control Type
Examples
Educational
Conducting unit environmental-awareness training. Conducting an environmental briefing before deployment. Performing tasks to environmental standards. Reviewing environmental considerations in after action reviews. Reading unit's environmental SOPs and policies.
Physical
Providing spill-prevention equipment. Establishing field satellite-accumulation site and procedures. Policing field locations. Practicing good field sanitation. Posting signs and warnings for off-limit areas.
Avoidance
Maneuvering around historical/cultural sites. Establishing refueling and maintenance areas away from wetlands and drainage areas. Crossing streams at approved sites. Preventing pollution. Limiting noise in endangered and threatened species habitats.
Step 4. Implement controls. Leaders must inform subordinates of risk-control measures, state how each control is to be implemented, and assign responsibilities. They must also ensure that these controls are in place prior to the operation. This is accomplished by using the before, during, and after checklists and the environmental risk-assessment process. Examples of checklists can be obtained from TC 3-34.489 to determine the environmental considerations that may affect MLRS training and operations. Step 5. Supervise and evaluate. Leaders should monitor controls to ensure effectiveness and determine whether controls require modification. They should ensure that the after action review process includes an evaluation of environmental-related hazards, controls, soldier performance, and leader supervision.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
K-9
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix L
Raid Planning Checklists RAID PLANNING CHECKLIST (BATTALION) Verify that raid order contains all pertinent data. If not specified by higher HQ, what size MLRS unit is necessary for successful mission? Who is the raid force commander (maneuver, FA)? What force protection will support the raid force? • Maneuver force? •
Fire support?
•
Air defense?
•
Reconnaissance and security?
•
Radar?
•
Observers?
What are the abort criteria? What frequencies will be used to C2 the raid (Command, Retransmission)? Any updates on enemy/friendly situation that impact on raid? What is the route (does it require clearance by a force commander)? Passage of lines. • Link-up grid and time? •
Routes?
•
Maneuver graphics?
•
Engineer plan (mobility/countermobility)?
•
Air defense plan and coverage?
•
Fire support and observation plan?
•
Command and control (raid battle handover line)?
•
MEDEVAC support?
•
Maintenance support?
What survey support is optimal/adequate for raid force? Will ammunition need to be brought forward? How much? What is the reload plan (approved location for reload operations)? Need to conduct reload to complete the mission? Will the firing point require clearance by a maneuver force? Will this be in addition to the security force? What is the link-up grid for coordinating with the raid force commander? When will the link-up take place? What are the name, frequency, and call sign of the raid force commander/security force? Notify the raid battery commander of the raid mission and time/place of briefing. Plot firing positions, passage lanes/points/routes to OPAREA. Determine/verify firing elements, number of launchers and C2 structure.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
L-1
Appendix L
RAID PLANNING CHECKLIST (BATTALION) Develop timetable (SP, TOT). Brief the battery commander of the raid element battery. Track planning and rehearsal schedule coordinated by battery and progress of actual raid. RAID CHECKLIST (BATTERY COMMANDER) What force protection will support the raid force? • Maneuver force? •
Fire support?
•
Air defense?
•
Reconnaissance and security?
•
Radar?
•
Observers?
What are the abort criteria? What frequencies will be used to C2 the raid (CMD, RTS)? Any updates on enemy/friendly situation that impact on raid? What is the route (does it require clearance by a force commander)? Passage of lines. • Link-up grid and time? •
Routes?
•
Maneuver graphics?
•
Engineer plan (mobility/countermobility)?
•
Air defense plan and coverage?
•
Fire support and observation plan?
•
Command and control (raid battle handover line)?
•
MEDEVAC support?
•
Maintenance support?
What survey support is optimal/adequate for raid force? Pre-position pods for reload (if required). Coordinate sustainment, sustainment operations, or support for follow-on missions (if required). Brief raid OIC/NCOIC on the raid mission. (The battalion checklist should be used for this brief.) Brief the raid OIC/NCOIC on the higher headquarters’ concept of the operation. Maintain voice and digital with battalion and raid element (possible re-trans). Provide any changes to the mission to the OIC/NCOIC.
L-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Raid Planning Checklists
COORDINATION MEETING WITH FORCE COMMANDER CHECKLIST (PASSED FORCE) Mission Provide a description of vehicles (if possible use photographs). • HIMARS launcher. •
FDC HMMWV.
•
M998/1038 HMMWV.
•
M985 HEMTT (if reload required).
•
Maintenance/recovery vehicle.
Number of personnel in raid party. How long you will remain in this area. Route from link-up point to firing point. Recognition Signals NEAR
FAR
DAY NIGHT Force protection. • Maneuver force protection? •
Security force fire support and observation plan?
•
Raid force air defense?
•
Reconnaissance and security?
•
Radar?
•
Observers?
Passage of lines. • Link-up grid and time? •
Routes?
•
Maneuver graphics?
•
Engineer plan (mobility/countermobility)?
•
Air defense plan and coverage?
•
Fire support and observation plan?
•
Command and control (raid battle handover line)?
MEDEVAC support? Maintenance support?
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
L-3
Appendix L
BRIEF TO RAID ELEMENT CHECKLIST (RAID LEADER) Situation Friendly forces. • Maneuver force protection. •
Fire support/observers.
•
Raid force air defense.
•
Reconnaissance and security.
•
Radar.
•
Enemy forces.
Mission Execution Target number(s), grid(s), munitions type(s), and quantity (provide hard copy to each chief). OPAREA/FP grids (recon, map recon if time constraint). Route of march/order of march/movement formation. Rally point grid(s). SP, CP, RP times and locations (reported to BOC). SP CP GRID TIME
CP
RP
Survey plan. • Take survey to provide SCPs at link-up point. •
Launchers will update/realign prior to occupying OPAREA.
•
SCPs or global positioning system (GPS) at FP will be used as needed.
Follow-on missions (if required). Miscellaneous: • Actions upon enemy contact. •
Air guards.
•
UBL distribution.
•
Radio listening silence.
Service and Support Reload location(s), grid and route to them (if required). Maintenance support. Command and Signal Link-up grid and procedures. Frequencies, call signs, abort code word/phrase. Recognition Signals NEAR
FAR
DAY NIGHT Time hack (GPS).
L-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Raid Planning Checklists
BRIEF TO RAID ELEMENT CHECKLIST (RAID LEADER) Safety Risk assessment. Control measures. RAID CHECKLIST (LAUNCHER SECTION CHIEF) Receive brief from OIC/NCOIC of raid party. Fire mission buffer clear except for raid target. Fire mission hard copy on hand and posted. Target Number Target Grid/Alt
Ammunition Type/Quantity
Link up grid. Firing point grid. Rally point grid. SRP aligned, PDS updated. Time hack (GPS). Adequate fuel. Adequate ammunition (LPCs and small arms). Adequate food and water. Communication checks complete. PMCS (batteries, charging system). Other Details
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
L-5
This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix M
ATACMS Block II Employment The capability to attack enemy ACV formations is an essential component of fires. Block II is designed to attack moving enemy maneuver forces equipped with ACVs. The process involves targeting procedures, mission flow, and techniques for rapid processing of targets, de-conflicting operations, and synchronizing target attack. The corps/JTF typically engages battalion-size units with Block II. The Block II fires support the overall plan to— • • • • •
Destroy enemy capabilities before they can be used on friendly forces. Limit the enemy's freedom of action. Alter the tempo of operations in favor of friendly forces. Deny the enemy the capability to concentrate his forces. Control the rate of introduction of enemy forces into the close battle.
The Block II contains the BAT submunition. The BAT with its infrared seeker is only effective against moving ACVs. After dispense, the 13 BAT submunitions independently locate, attack, and destroy moving ACVs. Each BAT has passive acoustic and infrared sensors designed to resist enemy countermeasures. BAT submunitions can be used day or night. Block II missiles should be deployed into the theater with early-entry contingency forces as part of a task organized force with an integrated intelligence/fire support organization and self-deployable sensors such as JSTARS. These sensors can provide real time or near-real time information to the targeting cell to attack unassigned area targets with Block II missiles.
BLOCK II OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS z
M-1. Platoon Air Hazard Area Refer to Paragraph 5-72When an ATACMS family of munitions (AFOM) fire mission is processed, a PAH area is computed. The PAH describes the aircraft danger area around the platoon selected to fire. The area is defined by 4 grid locations on the ground (depicted in figure M-1 by the numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4) and an altitude (depicted as ZALT). This area is used to warn all flight operations of the restricted airspace associated with the launch area and to gain clearance to fly through the airspace. • This area can be increased or decreased in size by manipulation of the ZALT and XDIST values via the LMM manager within AFATDS. • The XDIST value indicates the size of the platoon area in which the launcher is operating and defaults to the value of 3,000 meters, which is the doctrinal size of a platoon area. Since AFATDS tracks the launcher locations and draws the PAH area around the launch platform, the XDIST can be reduced to 150 meters. A value less than doctrinal standard can be included if the known location of the firing point is used. A size greater than 3,000 meters can be used if the firing area being used is larger than the doctrinal platoon area. • ZDIST2 is a buffer zone left and right of the gun-target-line. This buffer zone is hard coded and provides airspace for the missile’s off-axis launch capability. • ZALT depicts the altitude above which the flight of the missile is unrestricted. ZALT defaults to 5,000 meters. The size of the PAH is directly related to the ZALT value used. The larger
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-1
Appendix M
the ZALT value, the further downrange the missile must travel for its trajectory to attain the ZALT altitude entered, thereby increasing the PAH size. Correspondingly, a low ZALT enables the missile trajectory to attain ZALT closer to the launch area, thereby reducing the PAH size. • If more than 1 launcher is required to fire the mission, separate messages are displayed for each launch platform. The messages are munition specific and only generated for those launchers that are listed in the computer as having the munition. If a fire unit was specified in the fire mission message, that fire unit is used. If a fire unit was not specified, the computer provides the best solution based on available information. The operator can enter an effective date-time group indicating when the platoon air hazard area is valid. The PAH may be passed to other organizations as a ROZ. Note: A ROZ is a volume of space that the Air Force uses to restrict airspace. The same 4 points (1, 2, 3, and 4) and altitude (ZALT) define the ROZ.
Figure M-1. AFOM Platoon Air Hazard Area
TARGET AIR HAZARD AREA M-2. The TAH area describes the area where the missile dispenses the submunitions. It is used to warn all flight operations and to gain airspace clearance. The Block II TAH volume of space is larger than the other ATACMS missiles due to the BAT submunitions’ flyout trajectory. Unlike the Block I and IA target air hazard area, the Block II target air hazard area is a volume of space that is shaped like 2
M-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
cylinders instead of a box (see figure M-2). The top cylinder defines the space where the Block II missile dispenses the BATs. The bottom cylinder defines the space the BATs use to fly to the target. A-1. M-3. The Block II software segments large targets and targets with a large number of ACVs into separate segments comprised of a maximum of 2 aim-points to improve effects. Each aim-point has a separate TAH. As up to 16 aim-points can be associated with a single Block II fire mission, a maximum of 16 TAHs can therefore be generated. The Block II software describes the volume of space each TAH occupies as an aim-point grid, a radius, and an altitude for airspace clearance. The operator should send both the target air hazard coordinates and the coordinates for the missile location to clear target area airspace.
Figure M-2. Typical Block II Target Air Hazard Area
MISSILE FLIGHT PROFILE M-4.
Figure M-3 depicts a typical Block II missile flight profile. The launcher and missile perform prelaunch procedures to prepare the missile for launch. After arrival on the firing point, all prelaunch functions occur automatically during the firing sequence, requiring no special actions by the crew. The launcher provides the missile with its initial location and elevation information through alignment transfer. After the fire switch has been toggled and before launch, the launcher activates the missile’s internal batteries, loads mission data for the missile and BAT payload, and initializes the missile’s global positioning system (GPS) receiver. The missile motor is then armed and ignited.
TERMINAL FLIGHT SEQUENCE M-5.
Once the missile enters its descending trajectory, it initiates terminal guidance and activates each BAT's thermal battery. The BAT navigation function begins and the missile downloads mission data. The missile then concludes its guidance and dispenses the submunitions. After the submunition dispense event, the empty missile continues on its trajectory to the ground. Figure M-4 illustrates the BAT submunition dispense sequence.
BAT SUBMUNITION TRAJECTORY M-6. Each BAT is pre-programmed to divide the target array into sectors and attack a specific target sector (see figure M-5). The BAT engagement sequence begins when the submunition stabilizes its flight after dispense, decelerating to a speed that enables the deployment of the wings and parachute. Once the primary parachute is deployed, the submunition begins its acoustic search for a target, conducts a maneuver to position itself above the acoustic signature, deploys its secondary
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-3
Appendix M
parachute, and conducts an IR search for the target. Once the target is acquired with the BAT’s IR seeker, the BAT releases its secondary parachute and glides to the target (see figure M-6).
Figure M-3. Missile Mission and Flight Profile
Figure M-4. BAT Submunition Dispense Sequence
M-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
Figure M-5. BAT Target Attack Profile
Figure M-6. BAT Engagement Sequence
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-5
Appendix M
BLOCK II TARGETING M-7. FM 6-20-10 discusses targeting objectives in terms of limit, disrupt, delay, divert, or destroy. These terms describe the effects of attack on enemy capabilities. We can limit the enemy's options or disrupt his plans by interfering with the enemy's combat and combat support systems. Delay alters the time that forces arrive at a point on the battlefield. This denies the enemy the ability to project combat power from a point on the battlefield. We can also cause the enemy commander to divert or shift capabilities or assets from one area (activity) to another. M-8. Block II engagements are planned, on-call fires. The Block II targeting process begins when the staff analyzes enemy capabilities, movement norms, and estimated enemy COAs to determine where and when the enemy is likely to deploy follow-on forces. The targeting staff uses the D3A process to properly plan and execute Block II fires.
DECIDE M-9. The staff planning performed in the decide function is crucial to the success of Block II missions. The fact that the Block II target is moving makes the task more difficult. Effective employment of Block II on moving enemy targets requires careful planning, coordination, and preplanning missions to perform the following tasks: • Determine where to track the enemy by use of named areas of interest (NAIs) and TAIs. • Establish trigger events associated with NAIs (decision trigger events [DTEs]) and TAIs (engagement trigger events [ETEs]) to trip as the enemy enters or crosses the geometries (automated process with AFATDS,). • Determine which sensor(s) will track the enemy. • Determine how to attack the target, including: Which MLRS unit(s) will fire (with respective firing platoon centers). How many missiles each unit will fire. Generating and distributing the PAH/TAH and missile flight path for airspace clearance. • Create and store posture instructions for MLRS unit(s) to fire. • Determine how to clear airspace for fire missions such as for a timed window or on-call target.
NAIs M-10. NAIs are locations where targeting information is gathered to determine if the enemy activity meets attack guidance. NAIs should be placed in areas that: • Confirm the enemy’s movement decision (for example, after a “fork” in the road). • Track the enemy’s movement progress. • Are accessible to sensors (visible to, or sensor can operate there). • Provide enough distance between them (NAIs) and their respective TAIs to permit launchers to be positioned on firing points—ready to fire. M-11. Target information from sensors reporting enemy activity in NAIs near TAIs is more time sensitive than that needed for the initial NAIs. Therefore, sensors should function in their most responsive mode when reporting target information in these NAIs. Sensors should report: • Type of enemy units (for example, armor, mechanized infantry, or infantry. • Size of the moving elements (length, width, and, if possible, number of ACVs). • Force-march columns and serials (if possible). • Estimation of target speed and direction. • Last known location. • Time of detection.
M-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
DTEs M-12. A DTE is the enemy activity in an NAI that initiates the Block II fire mission on a target. DTE criteria must be clearly defined and sent to the appropriate elements. An example of enemy activity that meets DTE criteria is: the enemy force arrives at full strength at the DTE at the predicted time, speed, and direction of travel. An example of enemy activity that does not meet DTE criteria is: the enemy force arrives at DTE and stops in a final deployment area. DTE criteria are based on the commander's defeat criteria and the unique performance characteristics of Block II. When a DTE is “tripped,” the mission controller sends an AMC fire mission to unit(s), which causes launchers to go to their firing points and prepare to fire.
TAIs M-13. Block II engagements occur at planned target locations (PTLs) located within TAIs. The staff places TAIs on routes of advance that enemy forces will likely use. The TAIs can be placed in depth to provide multiple engagement opportunities against a target that does not stop or to engage multiple elements of a large target. As with NAIs, the number of TAIs varies with the terrain and enemy situation. TAIs should not be placed in urban areas, canyons with very deep slopes, and heavily forested areas. The BAT submunitions could collide with objects before getting to the target in these types of terrain.
ETEs M-14. An ETE is the enemy activity that causes the fire command to be executed. The staff establishes an ETE where the enemy is expected to be and a sensor can observe. The purpose of the ETE is to confirm that the target still meets engagement criteria. The criteria may be as simple as confirming that the target is still moving at the speed and in the direction predicted in the NAI. When the ETE criteria are met, the fire mission is executed. The staff places the ETE based on enemy travel speed norms or observed enemy travel speeds. They establish the ETE by “backing off” a distance from the PTL along the enemy’s route based on: • Sensor/processor response times. • Command, control, communications, and computers (C4) processing times. • Time the launcher requires to reapply power to the missile(s) and execute the fire command. • Missile time of flight. M-15. This interval is the minimum time required between the ETE and PLT to engage the target. Sensors should be in their most responsive mode for reporting enemy activity at the ETE. However, the tactical situation may not permit this. The sensors will typically be shared assets. In the case of Joint Stars, the wide area search mode may be the only mode available. If so, that is the sensor response time to use when determining where to put the ETE. M-16. Table M-1 provides guidelines for determining the ETE-PTL distance based on a nominal 180second timeline. It assumes the 4 time components listed above. The table displays target speed and launcher to target range; the ETE distance (in meters) is where these factors intersect in the table. Figure M-7 is a job aid that enables manual calculation of the engagement and decision trigger events.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-7
Appendix M
Table M-1. Planned Target Location to Engagement Trigger Events Distance Target Speed (kilometers per hour)
Launcher to Target Range
35-60 km
61-80 km
81-100 km
101-120 km
121-145 km
10-15
900 m
1,000 m
1,200 m
1,300 m
1,400 m
16-20
1,300 m
1,500 m
1,700 m
1,800 m
2,000 m
21-25
1,700 m
1,900 m
2,100 m
2,300 m
2,500 m
26-30
2,100 m
2,300 m
2,600 m
2,800 m
3,100 m
31-35
2,500 m
2,800 m
3,000 m
3,300 m
3,600 m
35-40
2,800 m
3,100 m
3,500 m
3,800 m
4,100 m
41-45
3,200 m
3,600 m
4,000 m
4,400 m
4,700 m
46-50
3,600 m
4,000 m
4,400 m
4,900 m
5,300 m
Km = kilometers
m = meters
Note: Once the ETE-PTL distance has been established, new targets whose speed varies significantly from the planned speed will be evaluated to determine if the target requires a different PTL. The fire support (FS) computer operator should only change the PTL for targets that cause a 1,000-meter or greater variation from the value derived from table M-1. For example, if the ETEPTL distance was 1,400 meters, based on a target speed of 15 kph and range to target of 130 km, a target moving at 20 kph would not require a different PTL (since the ETE-PTL distance of 2,000 meters is not 1,000 meters greater than the 1,400-meter distance derived earlier). However, if the target were moving at 23 kph (an ETE-PTL distance of 2,500 meters), a new PTL should be calculated. This procedure can only be used before the target trips the DTE.
M-8
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
Total System Time
Establish the time for the common ground station (CGS) to process the track and pass the target array to the AFATDS in seconds. (Default time is 40 seconds.) Establish the time required for each AFATDS in the fire mission chain to process and transmit the FIRE command in seconds. (Default time is 7 seconds for each system.) Establish the time required for each AFATDS in the fire mission chain to process and transmit the FIRE command in seconds. (Default time is 5 seconds for each system.) Add in the launcher time. (Default time is 50 seconds.) Add the totals from steps 1-4. Enter the time of flight (TOF) from the mission calculator on the AFATDS in seconds. Add in the 23 seconds from dispense to state 4. Add the totals from steps 6 and 7. (This is the time to state 4.) Add the totals from steps 5 and 8. (This is the total system time in seconds. Engagement Trigger Event (ETE)
Enter total system time from line 9. Enter the speed of the target in kph. Multiply steps 10 and 11. Divide step 12 by 3.6. (This is the total distance the target array will move in meters.) Take the value of step 13 and trace back along the route of march of the target array to find the placement of the engagement trigger event. Place the ETE geometry perpendicular to the route of march. Decision Trigger Event (DTE)
Enter the time desired between the DTE and the ETE in seconds. (Default time is 1,200 seconds/20 minutes.) Enter the speed of the target in kph. Multiply steps 15 and 16. Divide step 17 by 3.6. (This is the total distance in meters that the DTE should be placed from the ETE.) Take the value of step 18 and trace back along the route of march of the target array from the ETE point to find the placement of the DTE. Place the DTE geometry perpendicular to the route of march. Note: Round numbers up to the next whole number. Figure M-7. Manual Calculation of Trigger Events Job Aid
M-17. Though DTEs and ETEs may be established as a box, circle, or line, it is recommended that DTEs and ETEs be established as lines since it is the easiest method for the sensor to view enemy progress and report when the center of the enemy force passes through them. It is important to note that AFATDS treats line that any event set to “trip” a trigger in 1 DTE or ETE will trip the trigger whenever that event occurs anywhere along that line. DTEs and ETEs can be placed independently or in conjunction with NAIs. Figure M-8 graphically portrays the Block II target engagement process.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-9
Appendix M
Figure M-8. Block II Target Engagement Process
Mission Cancellation M-18. Guidelines should be established for cancellation of missions. A mission may be canceled anytime prior to missile launch. The executing operational facility (OPFAC) should cancel missions based on the following parameters: • Maximum acceptable deviation of target speed at the ETE from the reported calculated speed of the fire mission. • Minimum number of ACVs that still constitutes a target if forces split. • Unavailability of the sensor or an acceptable substitute to report target data at the ETE.
Automated Fire Mission Planning M-19.
The AFATDS operators have automated tools to perform preliminary analysis of a moving target fire mission without allocating ammunition or committing a unit to fire. AFATDS operators use the munitions calculator AFATDS operators use the capabilities of fire mission processing.
Ammunition and Fire Unit Management M-20. The decide function includes estimating the number of missiles needed to meet operational objectives. The staff considers ammunition and launcher allocation when they wargame the courses of action. The wargaming should include how many targets can be attacked simultaneously. The required number of launchers is based on time available, number of missiles needed, and the projected launch rates. The staff should allocate 2 missiles for each enemy unit with 26-50 ACV targets (unless commander's attack guidance specifies desired effects on the targets). They must use intelligence estimates to determine the number of battalion-sized targets expected on the battlefield and the total quantity of launchers required. The staff must be careful not to overestimate the number of launchers required since targets will not all move at the same time.
M-10
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
Note: The ammunition estimate is critical. Since MLRS units require pre-positioned ammunition, mistakes in ammunition allocation are costly in time and assets required to redistribute ammunition.
DETECT Sensors Supporting Block II Fires M-21.
Numerous sensor systems support target development for Block II. Sensors include TENCAP, JSTARS, UAS, and SOF. The staff needs sensor information to operate in near-real time. Sensors such as JSTARS or UAS support target coverage through automated interfaces with intelligence and fire support C2 facilities.
M-22. The JSTARS CGS receives processed intelligence data from a variety of platforms and sensors. It can display JSTARS and UAS imagery and receives a wide variety of information from a JTT. JSTARS imagery consists of data that includes continuously updated direction, location, number and rate of movement of enemy force vehicles, plus location of movers that have stopped. The JTT provides the capability to receive and transmit SIGINT from guardrail common sensor (GRCS) and intelligence broadcasts. In addition, the CGS (if co-located with the ground control station) can receive and display video and telemetry from UAS sensors. M-23. JSTARS can locate, track, and potentially identify wheeled versus tracked vehicles (out to a certain range), and predict arrival times and coordinates of moving targets. The system can bracket areas and provide an estimated count of targets in that area (target density). This targeting information can be auto-filled into fire support messages. To maximize effectiveness, the AFATDS uses both target size and target density when they process Block II fire missions. The CGS should be co-located with the supported fire support node if at all possible to facilitate coordination. The CGS has a remote workstation (laptop portable computer) that can be brought directly into the FS tactical operations center. M-24. JSTARS and UAS complement each other. The UA's ability to conduct general search and detection over unfamiliar terrain is extremely limited. However, the UA is effective in observing point targets or conducting route reconnaissance. JSTARS can locate targets with area coverage and direct the UA to confirm the targets. The intelligence community calls this process “observation-cueobservation”; in other communities, it may also be referred to as “cross cueing.” A short scenario of this process follows: • JSTARS locates moving targets through MTI radar (observation); UAS flies to confirm (cue); CGS operator identifies and observes (observation). • UAS identifies moving targets; JSTARS tracks the target, updates its disposition, and passes information on for targeting. • UAS observes a temporary stationary target; JSTARS confirms the target through SAR mode, CGS operator observes for movement. • JSTARS takes a SAR image of a given area based on other intelligence; UAS flies to confirm, identify, and provide the command more visual intelligence.
DELIVER Weapon Aimpoint and Target Engagement M-25. Target engagement is the process of determining when, where, and how targets should be attacked within TAIs. The target size and composition determines the number of missiles required. The FS computer determines the optimum placement of the BATs’ dispense for each missile to be fired. This is the missile’s aim-point. The sensor should be tasked to provide more frequent updates as the target approaches the ETE.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-11
Appendix M
Fire Missions with Multiple Launchers M-26.
The FS computer software segments large targets (with a length of 6,000 meters and/or width of 5,000 meters) or smaller targets with 70 or more ACVs to achieve the desired effects. The C2 system generates up to 8 child targets, each containing a maximum of 2 aim-points. A single target can require a maximum number of 16 missiles per target (maximum 4 segments per target, maximum 2 aim-points per segment, and maximum 2 missiles per aim-point) (see paragraph M-56.M-57 on target segmentation).
M-27.
The AFATDS performing the target segmentation assigns new target numbers to all child targets and associates them back to the original parent target number. The AFATDS uses the original parent target number as the first target and assigns additional child target numbers as required, all associated back to the parent. When each launcher receives an AMC fire mission, they report “ready” for the target they are assigned. The controlling AFATDS will consolidate these commands and present the final “ready” when all units have reported “ready.” If the controlling system is AFATDS, and if it executes the mission prior to receiving the ready commands for all segments, the launchers that had not reported ready will automatically be sent an EOM for their assigned target. The ready launchers will receive a fire command.
ASSESS M-28.
The Block II assess function differs from the other AFOM in that it will usually take longer to perform. This is due to the targeting objectives of these fires: to divert, disrupt, or delay the enemy forces. For example, the evaluation of mission success may take hours to perform if the commander's attack guidance directs such a delay. The focus for Block II assessment should be on the functional damage caused to the enemy. If possible, this should include an estimate of the time the enemy unit needs to recover from an attack. The collection manager must know precisely what to report as battle damage assessment (BDA) so he can task the appropriate sensor(s). In some cases, it may be as simple as “monitor enemy activity and report if and when they resume movement.”
FUNCTIONAL FLOW OF MISSIONS M-29. The Block II C2 process includes both planning and execution functions. The planning function consists of decision making and guideline development. The execution function involves trigger points, fire mission processing, and tactical/technical direction. Fires may be centrally controlled and executed or centrally controlled but de-centrally executed. Centralized execution is the most frequent scenario. Figure M-9 provides a summary of the Block II mission functional flow.
M-12
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
Figure M-9. Block II Mission Functional Flow
USING AFATDS TO EXECUTE BLOCK II FIRE MISSIONS M-30. In AFATDS, mission processing begins when a fire mission is received or initiated at an OPFAC. The AFATDS then goes through a series of “filter” checks (for example, duplication, TSS) to see if it qualifies as a fire mission. If it passes these filters, the AFATDS provides the operator with a list of munitions that are effective against the target, along with a list of available units capable of firing the mission. AFATDS also provides enhanced communications capabilities. Note: AFATDS limits Block II to the attack of the target types/subtypes listed in table M-2.) M-31. The AFATDS operator specifies to the CGS operator that he wants moving armor targets reported to him as they are acquired and how often he wants to receive target updates (based on METT-TC). He can predict the number of launchers needed to execute the Block II fire missions, based on intelligence reports of the number of targets he can expect, with the AFATDS munitions calculator function. He also uses the munition calculator to derive PAHs, TAHs, and missile flight paths for airspace clearance.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-13
Appendix M
Table M-2. AFATDS Target Type/Subtypes Applicable to Block II Target Type
Target Subtype
arty, hvy SP Fire Support
arty, med SP arty, lt SP APC armored vehicle
Maneuver
tank, hvy tank, med tank, lt
ADA
ADA, lt
Legend: AMD— air and missile defense APC—armored personnel carrier arty—artillery hvy—heavy
lt—light med—medium SP— self-propelled
CREATING NAMED AREAS OF INTEREST AND DECISION TRIGGER EVENTS M-32. Create the NAIs along the projected route the enemy unit is expected to travel. Use the “general geometry” type and name each NAI (for example, NAI 12). Create an NAI for the following: • To send posture instructions to the fire unit(s). This NAI should be located far enough away from the next NAI to enable the fire unit to move to the postured location prior to the arrival of the enemy unit there. • To trigger initiation of the preplanned mission. This NAI contains the DTE that serves as the trigger. The DTE must be located far enough away from the ETE to enable final coordination of the PAH, TAH, and missile flight path (MFP) geometries as well as any FSCMs or clearance to fire prior to the enemy arrival at the ETE.
CREATING TARGETED AREAS OF INTEREST AND ENGAGEMENT TRIGGER EVENTS M-33. TAIs must be created with the same general geometry type used to create NAIs. Name each in a similar manner used to name the NAIs. The ETE serves as the trigger for the fire command. It must be located at a distance from the PTL to permit C4 actions, account for missile time of flight (TOF) (obtained from the data for the MFP geometry), and the enemy’s movement speed. For example, if expected C4 time plus time of flight is 4 minutes and the enemy is expected to be moving at 30 kph (that’s 0.5 kilometers—or 500 meters per minute), then the ETE should be placed 2 kilometers from the PTL (500 meters x 4 minutes = 2,000 meters). The formula is: ETEPTL distance = speed of enemy unit (in meters/minutes) x expected C4 time + TOF (in minutes). Note: Important. When creating DTEs and ETEs in AFATDS, always draw the line from left to right. This ensures that the trigger will trip properly when the trigger activity is reported “forward” of the geometry.
CREATING SENSOR ORDERS M-34. AFATDS may create orders for the sensors supporting the mission. For example, if JSTARS is available, use the “ATI;TCRIT” message format. For PK 10 JSTARS, this is under “Alerts &
M-14
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
Messaging” Æ “Messages” Æ “New.” Select “ATI; TCRIT,” then “Joint STARS.” Fill out the message specifying search areas and target type. If the enemy is an armored vehicle column, select “Armored Vehicle.” The initial sensor tasking may be sent immediately. The ATI;TCRIT window permits geometries to be defined as either circles (grid and radius) or rectangular (2 grids and a width). These geometries appear on the CGS operator’s screen after the CGS receives and processes the message. The AFATDS operator must build a separate ATI;TCRIT window for each NAI and TAI geometry. Create and save (don’t send) additional sensor orders (if necessary) to be used based on enemy movement.
AFATDS TARGET PROCESSING PROCEDURES Establishing On-Call Targets M-35. The AFATDS operator establishes on-call targets (using the planned target location grids) for each ETE using the procedures in figure M-10. The AFATDS operator will later use these on-call targets to execute the Block II fire missions. The operator must build the on-call targets in the “Current” window or the triggers associated with the targets will not activate them. He must also specify the target direction in the “Moving Target Information” window to convey this information to AFATDS.
Figure M-10. Block II On-Call Target Establishment Procedures
Associating On-Call Targets with Trigger Events M-36. Once the AFATDS operator establishes the on-call target, an association must be made with the trigger event. AFATDS initiates the on-call target when the trigger is tripped. The operator does this using the procedures in figure M-11. When the operator completes the association of all the on-call targets with a trigger event, the target planning preparation is complete.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-15
Appendix M
Figure M-11. Block II Trigger Event Establishment Procedures M-37.
Caution: Do not select target location based on the vector map display (remember, the vector map is not accurate enough for determination of targeting data). Target location should be coordinated using accurate map data such as a paper or digitized map.
Tripping Trigger Events M-38.
The AFATDS operator can automate the “tripping” of DTEs and ETEs by using up to 200 trigger events. The trigger event may be based on target (type/subtype or target number) or enemy unit data (by name) that is reported in a specific (by name) geometry (for example, in an NAI or TAI). Trigger events may also be based on specific times. A rule based on time will simply “trip” when the system clock reaches the specified time.
M-39.
This rule is not used for Block II fire missions. The AFATDS operator can establish criteria to trip a trigger event once a certain number of ACVs enter a defined area on the battlefield (for example, NAIs and TAIs). These methods are discussed below.
Tripping Trigger Events by Target Type/Subtype M-40. The AFATDS operator establishes the trigger to trip when the specified target type/subtype (with the specified strength) enters a specific geometry (DTE) or crosses a line (ETE).
CAUTION The target type/subtype the AFATDS operator uses must be the same as the target type/subtype reported by the CGS (for example, armor/heavy) for the trigger to trip. If the systems do not agree in this respect, the CGS will report the enemy activity but the AFATDS will not trip the trigger.
Tripping Trigger Events by Target Number M-41. The AFATDS operator establishes the trigger to trip when the enemy force with the reported target number enters a specific geometry or crosses a line. The CGS operator must continue to use the target
M-16
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
number generated by his system when he first reports the enemy activity to track the target. He should inform the AFATDS operator (by voice or free text message) that the target number is associated with that particular target. Once he “hooks” the target (identifies it with an internal tracking number), the CGS uses that same target number every time he updates it in his system. The CGS operator must ensure that he does not report the target as a new target when using this method since the CGS will assign a new target number. Tripping trigger events by target number is the preferred method because it is less likely to trip due to false reports. M-42. Figure M-12 provides an example of how the “Trigger Event” screen appears to the operator and a recommended procedure for using trigger events. The shaded areas and numbers within the circles do not appear on the AFATDS screens. They identify zones in the “Trigger Event” window where specific activities discussed in the figure occur.
Engagement of Targets with Gaps Between Subunits M-43.. If gaps between subunits (groups of vehicles) are 500 meters or less, the array should be treated as a homogeneous linear array and engaged as 1 target. When gaps are greater than 500 meters between subunits, engagement of these subunits provide the most effective results. The subunits could be attacked all at the same time or when the individual units trip their separate engagement trigger event. The engagement timing is situation dependent. If the subunits maintain the same speed (and therefore the gaps remain constant), all targets could be engaged as soon as the first subunit trips its trigger event. If the gaps between subunits get larger or smaller, then each subunit should be engaged separately as it trips its trigger event (see table M-3). Table M-3. Engagement of Targets with Gaps Between Subunits Target Formation
Gaps of 500 meters or less between subunits. Gaps greater than 500 meters between subunits.
12 August 2008
Method of Engagement
1 segment. Engage subunits.
FM 3-09.60
Engagement Guidance
Off road for clear weather, on road for cloudy weather. Off road for clear weather, on road for cloudy weather.
M-17
Appendix M
Trigger Event Implement Plan Phase
State:
Trigger Event:
Execute Fire Plan Initiate Fire Mission
Trigger Time (DTG):
DTG-Related Unit Target Related
Activate Geometry
Interval (hours;minutes):
Item ID:
2
Transmit Message
1
Reported:
Geometry:
Send Move Order Radius:
Location:
To: Send Sensor Order
Direction Moving:
Activity:
Send Posture Order From (DTG):
To (DTG):
To:
Reported Location:
Item ID: Time of Report (DTG):
3
Trigger Tripped (DTG):
Reported Activity: Movement Speed (kph):
Direction Moving:
Comments: OK
Window Zone
1
2 3 4
Cancel
4
Execute
Delete
Help
Activity
The operator uses this section of the screen to identify the events that will cause AFATDS to trip the trigger event. He uses the Trigger Event field to give it a name. He sets or suspends the trigger event in the State field. The trigger event is tripped based on either a specified date-time group (DTG) or unit target related activity. The operator selects the Unit Target Activity trigger event option for Block II fire missions. He selects “navigation aids” or another unlikely target type from the Item ID menu options. The operator can either use the reported options of “behind” or “forward of” to tell AFATDS when to trip the trigger based on linear DTEs and ETEs (recommended procedure). IMPORTANT: AFATDS uses the same methodology TACFIRE used to draw lines; it interprets lines drawn from left to right differently than those drawn from right to left. This affects whether the operator selects the “behind” or “forward of” option to cause the trigger to trip. Thus, the operator needs to ensure that he selects the appropriate one based on how he built the DTE and ETE lines. He then specifies “moving” from the Activity menu options and selects the enemy’s general heading from the Direction Moving menu options. This section of the screen defines the actions AFATDS will take once the trigger event is tripped. The operator selects the “on-call target list” from the Initiate Fire Mission menu options and selects the on-call target he previously built. This section of the Trigger Event window is where AFATDS displays the sensor’s trigger event activity report once the trigger is tripped. The AFATDS operator uses this section to send comments (to himself or others); ask AFATDS for help; and cancel, execute, or delete the trigger event. He will type instructions to himself that AFATDS will display once the trigger event is tripped. Figure M-12. AFATDS Trigger Event Window
M-18
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
Analyzing Targets M-44. The AFATDS operator opens the munition calculator and types in the target number for the target he created earlier. After the operator tabs out of the field, AFATDS will retrieve the target data and place it on the window. M-45. Select the FS system (rocket/missile), and then select the munition type (ATACMS BAT). No other entries are required. M-46.
Select the “Next” button.
M-47. On the ATACMS BAT window, selected target information will be displayed. If this is the first time this target was analyzed, the bottom section of the window will be blank. Otherwise, the results of the most recent analysis will be displayed. M-48.
To conduct an analysis to determine the number of missiles (“Total Qty”) required to achieve a specific “effects desired,” select the “Calculate Qty” button. This will segment the target (if necessary). The bottom of the window will now be filled out with a row for each target segment. Each row identifies the coverage achieved on the segment, the quantity to be fired on that segment (this will always be 1 or 2 missiles), a “Go/No-Go” status and a “No-Go” reason (if applicable). If the number of missiles or number of segments is too large, reduce the “effects desired” value and try again
M-49.
To conduct an analysis to determine the expected effects (“effects desired”) achieved by a specified number of missiles, select the “Calculate Coverage” button. Enter the quantity of missiles desired/available. AFATDS divides the total number of missiles among the required target segments (a segment may be assigned a maximum of 2 missiles). For example, if the target requires 2 segments (due to target strength or size) and “4 missiles” is entered, each segment will be assigned 2 missiles. If “6 missiles” is entered, AFATDS will segment the target into three segments. If the number of missiles or number of segments is too large, reduce the “Total Qty” value and try again.
M-50.
Once segmentation and volume of fire processing is complete, enter a desired fire unit ID or firing point location for each segment. If a specific location is required, enter the firing location (not the fire unit). If the fire unit (but not the firing point) is entered, that fire unit’s current location will be used to run the analysis.
M-51. Select the “Calculate PAH/TAH” button. This will compute the PAH, TAH, and MFP for each segment. Each segment will also be assigned a target number at this time. The PAH, TAH, and MFP will be displayed on the map. You may change firing points and perform this step again if desired. M-52.
Once the PAH, TAH, and MFP locations are calculated, enter fire unit ID for each segment. Select the “Store” button (this will close the window and save the target segments, now called “child targets,” of the original “parent target”).
Pre-coordinate Mission M-53. The AFATDS operator may “push” the PAH/TAH and MFP geometries to the AFATDS unit responsible for clearing ATACMS missions with the supporting air components (typically the battlefield coordination detachment). This provides that OPFAC with a graphic of what these geometries look like. For airspace clearance, set up the AFATDS data distribution to distribute “This Unit’s” “PAH/TAH/MFP” geometries to the OPFAC responsible for clearing ATACMS missions.
Creating Posture Instructions M-54. Select the MLRS fire unit(s) assigned to each segment and then select “Posture.” Create a new posture and when the window opens, type the target number into the target number field and tab out. The firing location used in the munition calculator will be automatically placed in the posture instruction. The volume of fire (1 or 2 missiles) will also be placed in the munitions to be
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-19
Appendix M
uploaded portion of the instructions in the “greater than 20 min” column. Move the quantity from the greater than 20 minute column to the 2-minute quantity. OK the form and send it when the target requires posture action.
ATI and Suspect Target Processing. M-55. The CGS operator uses the ATI; CDR message format to report, update, or delete the current location of a target. This message type is only available to the CGS operator as an outgoing message. The ATI;CDR message is especially useful for tripping trigger events. The CGS operator can auto-fill this message. However, the grid the CGS enters will be the enemy’s location at the time the activity was reported. This is okay for early warning reports and reports concerning enemy activity in DTEs. However, the AFATDS operator must not use the grid reported in the ATI;CDR message as the target location (the stored on-call target contains the PTL coordinates). The CGS operator should send all ATI;CDR reports dealing with enemy activity in the engagement trigger event (ETE). The ATI; CDR message does not report the enemy’s speed or heading. The CGS operator can report enemy speed and heading in a follow-up free text or voice message. Or the AFATDS operator can provide the CGS operator the maximum allowable deviation in the ETE from target speed reported in the Decision trigger event (DTE) and allow the CGS operator to decide whether the target meets the engagement criteria.
A-2.
Suspect Target Processing
M-56. The basic functionally of ST processing is that if a FR/ATI is received that fails TSS checks and is denied by an operator action or a system recommendation, it will be processed as a Suspect Target Processing). If the target is an ATI and the TSS checks fail, the target is submitted for ST processing. Otherwise the ATI is processed normally. FR processing is dependent on whether intervention is on or off. If intervention is on, the target will be submitted for attack analysis even if an initial filter check fails. With intervention off, AFATDS will deny the FR if a filter check fails. If the failure is TSS, the target is sent to ST processing; otherwise the target is placed on the Inactive Target List. Since attack analysis is performed on a target that fails filter checks only when intervention is on, all denials will be as a result of an operator action at the Intervention window. When a denial is issued, the target is checked for TSS failure. If the failure is TSS, the target is sent to ST processing; otherwise the target is placed on the Inactive Target List.
Target Segmentation M-57. Target segmentation occurs at the executing echelon where the target engagement decision is made, normally at the FC/FE. The executing echelon has the sensor information required to perform the target segmentation (target length, width, and strength). Very large targets must be segmented into individual targets according to sizes, which are most efficient for BAT attack (figure M-13). Target segmentation occurs when targets are either 6,000 meters in length, 5,000 meters in width, or have a target strength of greater than 70 ACVs. Target segmentation in AFATDS will also occur based on operator-specified effects. The BAT “acoustic footprint” is the circular area on the ground where the acoustic sensor can acquire targets.
M-20
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
Figure M-13. BAT Acoustic Footprint
AFATDS Segmentation M-58.
When an AFATDS is in the command and control flow and passing data to a non-AFATDS device , AFATDS executes 1 additional segmentation step. The difference is the view to the operator on the number of child targets (AFATDS view). AFATDS, during the analysis of the mission, will execute an additional segmentation whenever the volume of fire for any segment is greater than 2 missiles. The entire process results in the generation of child targets (segments) for each parent.
M-59. When 2 missiles are required for a child target, the AFATDS will automatically compute the aimpoint offset for the second missile. The aim-point-offset routine will increase the effectiveness of the ATACMS Block II. For example, a linear target that is 8,000 meters in length with a strength of less than 141 ACVs will result in the creation of 2 child targets linked to the initial target. If each of those targets required 4 missiles to meet the defeat criteria, they would be segmented again with each containing 1 aim-point for a total of 4 child targets. AFATDS software also precludes the creation of more than 8 child targets (segments) and complies with the restriction of 16 missiles maximum against any target. Figure M-14 depicts the segmentation as a result of the AFATDS processing.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-21
Appendix M
Figure M-14. Block II Linear Target Segmentation—AFATDS View
Figure M-15. Target Segmentation in NAI and TAI
M-22
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
OTHER EMPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS Target Engagement and Battle Damage Assessment M-60. The trigger event is initiated as targets move into the leading edge of the TAI. The location of the leading edge, relative to the planned target location, is based on expected (nominal) total system response time and target velocity. Soon after the fire mission is initiated, the operator requests a SAR if JSTARS is to provide the BDA. However, the JSTARS SAR may prove inconclusive due to its low resolution. SAR capabilities are further discussed in appendix A. If the BDA does not require reporting damage to individual targets, the JSTARS MTI mode can report how many vehicles are still moving after the attack.
Safety M-61. Mission planners and executors must keep the safety of friendly forces in mind when employing Block II. The following minimum safe distances should be observed: 10-kilometer radius from aimpoint for vehicles, and 5-kilometer radius from aim-point for personnel.
Environmental Conditions M-62. Block II is a robust system that is capable of effective employment in a wide range of environmental conditions. However, maximum performance cannot be achieved in all conditions. Table M-4 lists those target area environmental conditions where Block II (with basic BAT) fires should not be used. The probability of the environmental conditions listed in the table occurring is low. Environmental conditions that don’t exceed the values in the table may degrade BAT performance. However, these conditions usually must occur in combination to have any significant effect. Table M-4. Block II (with Basic BAT) Target Area No-Go Environmental Conditions Environmental Condition
No-Go Criteria
Sandstorms Thunderstorms Snowstorms
Present in target area
Advective fog
Less than 500 m AGL
Cloud ceiling
Less than 150 m AGL
Whole gale winds at altitude
15 m/sec (54 kph, 29 knots, 33 mph) or greater surface winds, OR 25 m/sec (90 kph, 49 knots, 55 mph) or greater winds between 2,500 m and 5,000 m AGL
Legend AGL = above ground level kph = kilometers per hour m = meters mph = miles per hour m/sec = meters per second
Fire Mission Recomputation M-63. The FS computer will re-compute the Block II fire mission if 1 or more of the following occurs: • If the target strength changes more than 15 ACVs. • If the number of missiles changes. • If the target location changes more than 1,000 meters.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-23
Appendix M
• •
If the firing platoon’s location changes more than 1,000 meters. If changes in target segmentation causes the target location to change more than 1,000 meters.
Target Patterns M-64. The Block II targets fit into 1 of 2 target pattern categories: linear and dispersed. The FS computer treats on road targets as linear targets. Off road targets are evaluated based on the rules discussed earlier in the target segmentation section to determine if they are linear or dispersed targets. Figure M-16 portrays how these targets would look on the CGS operator's screen. Note that there are 2 dispersed target patterns—those moving in parallel columns and clusters of vehicles. The FS computer operator can enter the target pattern in the DP:_; field of the FM;THMTGT message. Entries are not required in the DP field to employ the BAT. However, if the target dispersal pattern is provided in the message, BAT performance will be enhanced.
DISPERSED
LINEAR
Figure M-16. Target Dispersal Patterns
Total System Error M-65. The size of total system error (TSE) has a direct impact on weapon effectiveness. Block II effectiveness is defined in terms of kills per launcher load (2 missiles). Kills per launcher load should be evaluated with respect to the commander's defeat criteria, battlefield conditions, IPB, and the scheme of operations. The TSE increases as the time from target acquisition to target attack increases. While BAT submunition performance is relatively unaffected by TSE until excessive values occur, the staff should understand the performance degradation that may occur. M-66. BAT performance may also be affected by severe weather and/or countermeasures that tend to aggravate the impact of TSE. Countermeasures to BAT include: foliage, camouflage nets, infrared kits, infrared decoys, sandbags, flares, and smoke. The staff may enhance kill capabilities during degraded conditions by sensor reprioritization, ensuring that processing time lines are minimized, and by fast launch response. Mission processing time lines account for more than half of the TSE. The major components of TSE are: • Sensor errors (includes TLE and target speed estimation error). • Variations from predicted total system response time (C2). • Changes in target movement speed and/or direction (enemy actions). • Delivery error. M-67. Block II effectiveness depends on the accuracy of the predicted moving target location. Variations in target positions around the predicted attack point are known as “down-road” and “cross-road” errors. The down-road error is the largest since it is based on target speed and response time estimations. Since road locations are accurately defined within terrain data, the crossroad error is negligible for targets attacked on roads. M-68. The sensor must be able to monitor the target's behavior, observe the TAI, and quickly relay the required targeting information. Targeting teams evaluate the TLEs of available acquisition systems and fire support system response times. The total fire support reaction time includes: • Target reporting time (including sensor processing).
M-24
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
ATACMS Block II Employment
M-69.
• Fire mission processing. • Communication times between nodes. • Missile time of flight to dispense point. • Launcher operations. As these time line components increase, the probability that weapon performance will degrade also increases. Intelligence sources can provide threat IPB templates and movement norms. Time lines drive the appropriate method of mission execution (centralized or decentralized), unit posture, and methods of control.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
M-25
This page intentionally left blank.
Glossary SECTION I – ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 1LT
first lieutenant
1SG
first sergeant
ABCS
Army battle command system
ACE
analysis and control element
ACV
armored combat vehicle
ACUS AMD
area common user system air and missile defense
ADDS
Army data distribution system
admin
administration
AFATDS AFOM AFU
advanced field artillery tactical data system Army tactical missile system family of munitions ammunition and fire unit
AGM
attack guidance matrix
AHA
ammunition holding area
ALOC alt
administrative and logistics operations center altitude
ALZ
assault landing zone
AM
amplitude modulated
AMC
at my command
ammo
ammunition
ANR AO AOE APAM
active noise reduction area of operations Army of Excellence antipersonnel and antimateriel
ARTY/POS
artillery, type position (mnemonic)
ARTY/UNK
artillery, type unknown (mnemonic)
ASIP
advanced lightweight single channel ground and airborne radio system improvement package
ASL
authorized stockage list, above sea level
ASP
ammunition supply point
ATACMS ATCCS ATHS ATI;CDR ATI;TCRIT
12 August 2008
Army Tactical Missile System Army tactical command and control system airborne target handover system artillery target information coordinate report (mnemonic) artillery target information target criteria
FM 3-09.60
Glossary-1
Glossary
ATIZ
artillery target intelligence zone
ATK
Attack
ATLASS ATOSUM
automatic message processing summary (mnemonic)
ATP
ammunition transfer point
AVN
Aviation
AZ
Azimuth
BAO
battalion ammunition officer
BAS
battalion aid station
BAT
brilliant antiarmor technology submunition
BC
boom controller
BCS
battery computer system
BCT
brigade combat team
BDA
Battle damage assessment
BDAR
battlefield damage assessment and repair
BDE
brigade
BER
bit error rate
BFV
Bradley fighting vehicle
BIT
built-in test
BITE
built-in test equipment
BLK
block
BMT
battalion maintenance technician
BN BOC
battalion battery operations center
BPS
bits per second
BSA
brigade support area
BSB
brigade support battalion
BSFV
Bradley stinger fighting vehicles
BSOC
battalion supply operations center
BTRY
battery
C
Change
C2 C2AP
command and control command and control application software
C2V
command and control vehicle
CAS
close air support
CAV
Cavalry
CBRN CCB CD
Glossary-2
asset tracking for logistics and supply system
chemical, biological, radiological, nuclear center core burster compact disc
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Glossary
CD-ROM
compact disc-read only memory
CDR
commander
CEP
circular error probable
CEU
central electronics unit
CFF
call for fire
CFFZ
call-for-fire zone
CFL
coordinated fire line
CFZ
critical friendly zone
CGS
common ground station
CI
civilian internee
CMD
command
CMP
communications processor
CNR
combat net radio
CNTDN COA
countdown course of action
COLT
combat observation and lasing team
comm
communications
COMMZ
communications zone
COMSEC
communications security
CONUS
continental United States
COP
common operational picture
CP
command post; control point
CPT
captain
CSA
Corps storage area
CSB
common sensor boundary
CSEU
control system electronics unit
CSM
command sergeant major
CSN
circuit switched network
CSR
controlled supply rate
CSU
communications service unit
CTA
common table of allowances
CVC
combat vehicle crewman
CZ D D3A DA DAGR DAO DC
12 August 2008
censor zone digital decide, detect, deliver, and assess Department of the Army Defense advanced global position system receiver division ammunition officer Direct current
FM 3-09.60
Glossary-3
Glossary
DD
Department of Defense (form identification)
DF
direction finding
DIV
division
DLA
defense logistics agency
DMD
digital message device
DNVT DOD DODAC DODIC
Department of Defense Department of Defense accounting code Department of Defense identification code
DOP
degree of protection
DOS
days of supply
DOT
department of transportation
DP
dispersal pattern
DPICM
dual-purpose improved conventional munition
DRMO
defense reutilization marketing office
DS
direct support
DSA
division support area
DSB
division support battalion
DSS
deceleration and stabilization subsystem
DST
decision support template
DSU
data service unit
DSVT DT
digital secure voice terminal distance traveled
DTD
data transfer device
DTG
date-time group
DTE
decision trigger event
DTO
division transportation officer
EA
engagement area, each
EAC
echelons above corps
EAD
echelons above division
EBC
embedded battle command
ECO
environmental compliance officer
ECOF ED
effects cutoff factor emergency destruction
EDM
enhanced data mode
EDPS
encapsulation and dispensing protection subassembly
EEI EGR ELINT
Glossary-4
digital non-secure voice terminal
essential elements of information embedded GPS receiver electronic intelligence
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Glossary
ELMC EMC EMI EOM EPA EPCRA EPE EPLRS
electronics maintenance company electromagnetic countermeasure electromagnetic interference end of mission Environmental Protection Agency Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act estimated position error Enhanced Position Location Reporting System
EPLU
Embedded Program load unit
EPUU
EPLRS user unit
EPW ER ER-MLRS ESA ESAD ETE EU EVAC EW F FA
enemy prisoner of war extended range extended range MLRS rocket Endangered Species Act electronic safe and arm device engagement trigger event electronics unit evacuate electronic warfare Fahrenheit field artillery
FAIO
field artillery intelligence officer
FARP
forward area resupply point
FASP
field artillery support plan
FATDS FAX FBCB2 FC
field artillery tactical data systems Facsimile Force XXI battle command, brigade and below fires cell
FCE
fire control element
FCP
fire control panel; functional command post
FCS
fire control system,
FCSB FCU FD FDC FDNCO FDO FE FED
12 August 2008
forward corps support battalion fire control unit fire direction fire direction center fire direction noncommissioned officer fire direction officer fires element forward entry device
FM 3-09.60
Glossary-5
Glossary
FH
frequency hop
FIB
fires brigade
FIST FLOT FM FM;CFF
forward line of own troops field manual; frequency modulation, fire mission fire mission; call for fire (mnemonic)
FOB
forward operating base
FOM
figure of merit
FOS FP FRAGORD FS FSC
forward observer system firing point fragmentary order fire support forward support company
FSCL
fire support coordination line
FSCM
fire support coordination measure
FSCOORD FSEM
fire support coordinator fire support execution matrix
FSK
frequency shift keying
FSO
fire support officer
FSE
force support element
FSSG ft
force service support group feet
FU
fire unit
FWD
forward
FWR
fire when ready
G&C
guidance and control
GCA
guidancne and control assembly
GCE
ground combat element
GCS
guidance and control section
GCSS-A GEN GMLA GMLRS
ground combat support system-Army generator guided missile launch assembly guided MLRS rocket
GPS
global positioning system
GRCS
guardrail common sensor
GRT
ground receiver terminal
GS
Glossary-6
fire support team
general support
GSR
general support reinforcing
GTA
graphic training aid
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Glossary
HA
hide area
HE
high explosive
HEMAT
heavy expanded mobility ammunition trailer
HEMTT
heavy expanded mobility tactical truck
HET HF
heavy equipment transport high frequency
HHB
headquarters and headquarters battery
HHC
headquarters and headquarters company
HIMARS
high mobility artillery rocket system
HM/HW
hazardous material/hazardous waste
HMMWV
high-mobility, multipurpose wheeled vehicle
HNS
host nation support
HOB
height of burst
HPT
high-payoff target
HPTL HSL HQ HTU HUMINT HVT
high-payoff target list helicopter sling load headquarters hand-held terminal unit human intelligence high-value target
HVTL
high-value target list
ICOM
inputs, controls, outputs and mechanisms
ICP ID IETM
Increased Crew Protection identity interactive electronic technical manual
IEW
intelligence and electronic warfare
IFCS
improved fire control system
IGAMMUNITION
ignore ammunition (mnemonic)
ILMS
improved launcher mechanical system
IMGS
improved missile guidance set
IMINT IMU in INC INOP INS INTEL IP IPB
12 August 2008
imagery intelligence internal measurement unit inch Internet controller inoperational inertial navigation system Intelligence intervention points intelligence preparation of the battlefield
FM 3-09.60
Glossary-7
Glossary
IR
infrared, information requirements
ISA
inertial sensor assembly
ISC
inertial sensor computer
IWIU JMEM/SS JP JSOTF JSTARS
Improved Weapon interface unit joint munition effects manual for surface to surface joint publication joint special operations task force joint surveillance and target attack radar system
JTF
joint task force
JTT
joint tactical terminal
JVMF
joint variable message format
JWES
joint munitions effectiveness manual surface-to-surface weapon effectiveness systems
kg
kilogram
kHz
kilohertz
km
kilometer
kph
kilometer per hour
kW
kilowatt
LAN lb LFCP
local area network pound Low Cost Fire Control Panel
LCHR LAY
launcher lay (mnemonic)
LCHR LST
launcher list (mnemonic)
LCAC
landing craft air cushioned
LCM
landing craft mechanized
LDS
launcher drive system
LIU
launcher interface unit
LM
launcher module
LMM LNO
liaison officer
LOC
lines of communication; logistics operations center
LOGPAC LOGSTAT LOS LP
logistics package logistics status line of sight listening post
LPC
launch pod container
LRP
logistics release point
LRSD LRU m
Glossary-8
loadable munition module
long range surveillance detachment line replaceable unit Meter
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Glossary
MAGTF MARFOR MAXRKTS
Marine air ground task force Marine forces maximum rockets (mnemonic)
MCC
movement control center
MCS
maneuver control system
MDMP
military decisionmaking process
MDU
Mass storage unit
MEB
Marine expeditionary brigade
Mech
mechanic
MEDEVAC
medical evacuation
MEF
Marine expeditionary force
MET
Meteorology (message format)
METT-TC MFOM
mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops, time available, and civil considerations MLRS family of munitions
MFP
missile flight path
MFR
mission fired report
MGRS MHE MI MICOM MIJI min
military grid reference system material handling equipment military intelligence U.S. Army Missile Command meaconing, intrusion, jamming, and interference operations minute
M/LPA
missile launch pod assembly
MLRS
multiple launch rocket system
MLRS;CFF MLRSIZ mm MMS
MLRS call for fire (mnemonic) multiple launch rocket system size (mnemonic) millimeter metrological measuring set
MOBL
Mobile (launcher status)
MOPP
mission-oriented protection posture
MOS MP
military occupational specialty military police
MRL
multiple rocket launcher
MSD
mass storage device
MSD-FR MSDS
maintenance support device field ready material safety data sheet
MSE
mobile subscriber equipment
MSL
missile
MSR
main supply route
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Glossary-9
Glossary
MSRT
mobile subscriber radio telephone
MST
maintenance support team
MSU
Mass Storage Unit
MTF
message text format
MTI
moving target indicator
MTP
mission training plan
MTOE
modification table of organization and equipment
MTS
movement tracking system
MVR
maneuver
mW
milliwatt
MWR NAD NAI NATO NCO NCOIC
morale, welfare, and recreation net access delay named area of interest North Atlantic Treaty Organization noncommissioned officer noncommissioned officer in charge
NCS
net control station
NET
no earlier than
NFA
no fire area
NKT
net key time
NLT
not later than
NMC
not mission capable
NRT
near real time
NTDR OIC ONC OP OPAREA OPCON OPER
near term digital radio officer in charge on call observation post; operational MLRS platoon operations area operational control Operational (launcher status)
OPFAC
operational facility
OPLAN
operation plan
OPORD
operation order
Opr OPS/F OPS OPSEC OPSTAT ORF
Glossary-10
operator operations/fire net operations, operations (radio net) operations security operational status operational readiness float
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Glossary
PA
physician’s assistant; position areas
PAC
personnel and administration center
PADS
position and azimuth determining system
PAH
platoon airspace hazard
PART
Partial (launcher status)
PASR
personnel accounting and strength reporting
PBO
property book officer
PCC
precombat check
PCI PCMCIA
precombat inspection personnel computer memory card international association
PDB
power distribution box
PDS
position determining system
PE
probable error
PI
probability of incapacitation, product improved
PIM
payload interface module
PIR
priority intelligence requirements
PLGR
precision lightweight GPS receiver
PLL
prescribed load list
PLS
palletized load system
PLT
platoon
PLU
program load unit
PMCS
preventive maintenance checks and services
PNU
position navigation unit
POC
platoon operations center
POL
petroleum, oils, and lubricants
PSU
power switching unit
PTL
planned target location
QE
quadrant elevation
QM
Quartermaster
QRU R
quick reaction unitary reinforcing
RAM
random access memory
RAU
random access unit
RCRA RDF RETRANS RF RKT RL
12 August 2008
Resource Conservation Recovery Act radio direction finding retransmit; retransmission radio frequency relative key time reload point
FM 3-09.60
Glossary-11
Glossary
ROE
rules of engagement
ROZ
restricted operating zone
RP
release point
RS
radio set
RSOI
reception, staging, onward movement, and integration
RSOP
reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of position
RST
resupply trailer
RSV
resupply vehicle
RT
radio transmitter
RWS
remote work station
S-1
adjutant
S-2
intelligence officer
S-3
operations officer
S-4
battalion logistics officer
S-6
signal officer
S/N
signal to noise
SA
situational awareness
SALUTE
size, activity, location, unit, time and equipment (memory aid)
SAR
synthetic aperture radar
SCP
survey control point
SEAD
suppression of enemy air defenses
SHSF
Stay hot shoot fast
SIGINT
signal intelligence
SINCGARS SIP SITREP SIU SNVT
submunition interface processor, system improvement package situation report sequencer interface unit short/no-voltage tester
SOF
special operations forces
SOI
signal operating instructions
SOP
standing operating procedure
SP
start point, self propelled
SPCE
survey, plans, and coordination element
SPLL
self-propelled loader launcher
spt SQDN
Glossary-12
single-channel ground and airborne radio system
support Squadron
SRP
stabilization reference package
SSB
single side band
SSM
surface to surface missile
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Glossary
STAMIS STANAG SVF SYS;PTM TA
standard Army management information system standardization agreement standard volleys factor plain text message (mnemonic) target acquisition
TAB
target acquisition battery
TAC
tactical
TACSAT
tactical satellite
TAH
target airspace hazard
TAI
target area of interest
TBM TCIM
theater ballistic missile tactical communications interface module
TDA
target damage assessment
TEL
transporter erector launcher
TFC
tactical fire control
TFDMD
tacfire digital message device
tgt
target
TI
tactical internet
TLE
target location error
TM
technical manual, team
TMD
theater missile defense
TMM
target management matrix
TOC
tactical operations center
TOE
table of organization and equipment
TOT
time on target
TPN
tactical packet network
TPU
tactical processing unit
TRADOC
U.S. Army Training and Doctrine Command
TRP
target refereence point, troop
TSE
total system error
TSOP
tactical standing operating procedures
TSS
target selection standards
TTF
time to fire
TTP
tactics, techniques, and procedures
TTT
timed time on target
TWR
timed when ready
UA
unmanned aircraft
UAS
unmanned aircraft system
UBL
unit basic load
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
Glossary-13
Glossary
UFFE
unit to fire in effect
UHF
ultra-high frequency
ULLS
unit level logistics system
ULLS-G
unit level logistics system-ground
UMCP
unit maintenance collection point
UMT
unit ministry team
URO
user read out
USAF USMC USMTF UTM V
United States Air Force United States Marine Corps United States message text format Universal Transverse Mercator voice (net)
VA
Veterans Administration
Veh
vehicle
VHF
very high frequency
VIC
vehicle internal communications
VINSON VMF WARNORD WGS WILCO
secure device for voice and FM communications variable message format warning order world geodetic survey will comply (mnemonic)
WIU
weapon interface unit
WO2
warrant officer 2
WO
warrant officer
WR
when ready
WSRO XO
weapons system replacement order executive officer
ZALT
zone altitude
ZUPT
zero velocity update
Z-VEL
zero velocity
SECTION II – TERMS None
Glossary-14
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
References These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication. ARMY REGULATIONS
AR 25-52. Authorized Abbreviations, Brevity Codes, and Acronyms. 4 January 2005. AR 200-1. Environmental Protection and Enhancement. 13 December 2007. AR 385-10. The Army Safety Program. 23 August 2007. AR 385-63. Range Safety. 19 May 2003. AR 420-1. Army Facilities Management. 12 February 2008. AR 700-8. Logistics Planning Factors and Data Management. 23 July 2007. AR 700-138. Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability. 26 February 2004.
DA PAMPHLETS DA Pam 25-30. Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms. 1 January 2007. DA Pam 385-63. Range Safety. 10 April 2003. DA Pam 700-19. Procedures for U.S. Army Munitions Reporting System. 18 January 2007. DA Pam 710-2-1. Using Unit Supply System (Manual Procedures). 31 December 1997. DA Pam 750-8. The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual. 22 August 2005.
FIELD MANUALS FM 1-02. Operational Terms and Graphics. 21 September 2004. FM 3-0. Operations. 27 February 2008. FM 3-07. Stability Operations and Support Operations. 20 February 2003. FM 3-09.8. Field Artillery Gunnery. 31 July 2006. FM 3-09.12. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Target Acquisition. 21 June 2002. FM 3-09.15.. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Meteorology. 25 October 2007. FM 3-09.21. Tactics, Techniques and Procedures for the Field Artillery Battalion. 22 March 2001. FM 3-09.22. Tactics, Techniques and Procedures for Corps Artillery, Division Artillery, and Field Artillery Brigade Operations. 2 March 2001. FM 3-09.31. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for the Combined Arms Commander . 1 October 2002. FM 3-11. Multi-Service Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Defense Operations. 10 March 2003. FM 3-11.3. Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Contamination Avoidance. 2 February 2006. FM 3-19.1. Military Police Operations. 22 March 2001. FM 3-19.40. Internment/Resettlement Operations. 4 September 2007. FM 3-25.26. (O)Map Reading and Land Navigation. 18 January 2005. FM 3-28.1. Multiservice Tactics, Techniques and Procedures for Civil Support Operations. 3 December 2007. FM 3-34.214. Explosives and Demolitions. 11 July 2007. FM 3-35.1. Army Pre-positioned Operations. 1 July 2008.
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
References -1
References
FM 3-50. Smoke Operations. 4 December 1990. FM 3-90.5. The Combined Arms Battalion. 7 March 2008. FM 3-90.6. The Brigade Combat Team. 4 August 2006. FM 3-100.4. Environmental Considerations in Military Operations. 15 June 2000. FM 4-0. Combat Service Support. 29 August 2003. FM 4-01.30. Movement Control. 1 September 2003. FM 4-01.011. Unit Movement Operations. 31 October 2002. FM 4-02.1. Combat Health Logistics. 28 Sep 2001. FM 4-02.2. Medical Evacuation. 8 May 2007. FM 4-02.6. The Medical Company Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures. 1 August 2002. FM 4-20.197. Multi-Service Helicopter Sling Load: Basic Operations and Equipment. 20 July 2006. FM 4-30.1. Munitions Distribution in the Theater of Operations. 16 December 2003. FM 4-30.3. Maintenance Operations and Procedures. 28 July 2004. FM 4-30.13. Ammunition Handbook: Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Munitions Handlers. 1 March 2001. FM 5-0. Army Planning and Orders Production. 20 January 2005. FM 5-19. Composite Risk Management. 21 August 2006. FM 5-103. Survivability. 10 June 1985. FM 6-2. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Survey. 23 September 1993. FM 6-20. Fire Support in the Airland Battle. 17 May 1988. FM 6-20-10. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Targeting Process. 8 May 1996. FM 6-20-30. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Corps and Division Operations. 18 October 1989. FM 6-20-40. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Heavy). 5 January 1990. FM 6-20-50. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Light). 15 January 1990. FM 6-99.2. Us Army Report And Message Formats. 30 April 2007. FM 10-450-4. Multi-service Helicopter Sling Load: Single-Point Load Rigging Procedures. 30 May 1998. FM 10-450-5. Multi-service Helicopter Sling Load: Dual-Point Load Rigging Procedures. 30 August 1999. FM 19-25. Military Police Traffic Operations. 30 September 1977. FM 20-3. Camouflage, Concealment, and Decoys. 30 August 1999. FM 21-10. Field Hygiene and Sanitation. 21 June 2000. FM 21-60. Visual Signals. 30 September 1987. FM 24-1. Signal Support in the Airland Battle. 15 October 1990. FM 27-10. The Law of Land Warfare. 18 July 1956. FM 31-70. Basic Cold Weather Manual. 12 April 1968. FM 54-30. Corps Support Groups. 17 June 1993. FM 55-1. Transportation Operations. 3 October 1995. FM 55-15. Transportation Reference Data. 27 October 1997. FM 55-30. Army Motor Transport Units and Operations. 27 June 1997. FM 63-2. Division Support Command, Armored, Infantry, and Mechanized Infantry Divisions. 20 May 1991.
References-2
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
References
FM 63-3. Corps Support Command. 30 September 1993. FM 63-20. Forward Support Battalion. 26 February 1990. FM 63-21. Main Support Battalion. 7 August 1990. FM 71-100. Division Operations. 28 August 1996. FM 90-3. Desert Operations. 08/24 /1993. FM 100-15. Corps Operations. 29 October 1996. FMI 3-35. Army Deployment and Redeployment. 15 June 2007.
FORMS Except where otherwise indicated below, the following forms are available as follows: DA Forms are available on the APD web site (www.apd.army.mil). DD forms are available on the OSD web site (http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/formsprogram.htm). DA Form 1156. Casualty Feeder Report. DA Form 1594. Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officer's Log. DA Form 7232-R. MLRS FDC Fire Mission Log(LRA). DA Form 7233-R. MLRS Launcher Fire Mission Log(LRA). DD Form 93. Record of Emergency Data. VA Form SGLV 8286. Servicemembers’ Group Life Insurance Election and Certificate. (This form is available from the Veterans Affairs Web site at www.va.gov/vaforms.) PUBLICATIONS for ADVANCED FIELD ARTILLERY TACTICAL DATA SYSTEM “CD” (AFATDS) TB 11-7025-354-10-3 Technical Fire Direction MLRS Operations for AFATDS V6.4.0.1. 1 August 2006. TM 11-7025-297-10 -1,2&3. Operator’s Manual Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS) Operational System Software . 20 July 2006.
TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 5-6675-308-12. Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Position and Azimuth Determining System, AN/USQ-7, Part No. 880500-1 (NSN 6675-01-071-5552). 28 October 1988. TM 9-1425-646-L. List of Applicable Publications (LOAP) for Multiple Launch Rocket System. 22 June 2007. TM 9-1055-647-13&P. Interactive Electronic Technical Manual (IETM) for the Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) M270A1 Launcher and M993/M993A1 Carrier. 22 June 2007. TM 9-1055-1646-13&P. Interactive Electronic Technical Manual (IETM) for High Mobility Artillery Rocket System (HIMARS) (Multiple Launch Rocket System) Operator's, Organizational, and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for High Mobility Artillery Rocket System Model No. M142, Part Number 13541000 (EIC AAD). 15 May 2008. TM 9-1425-648-13&P. Operator, Organizational, and Direct Support Maintenance Instructions, Destruction of Equipment to Prevent Enemy Use Battlefield Damage Assessment and Repair, Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Launcher, Rocket, Armored Vehicle Mounted: M270 (NSN 1055-01-329-6826) EIC: QBU, Part Number 13029700-203. 15 June 2006. TM 9-1450-646-10. Operator's Manual for Carrier, Multiple Launch Rocket System, M993 (NSN 2350-01-091-5405). 31 August 2007. TM 9-2320-279-10-1. Operators Manual for M977 Series 8 x 8 Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical Trucks (HEMTT), Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977 (NSN 2320-01-097-0260) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977A2 (2320-01-493-3774) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-01-4933782) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M977 (2320-01-099-6426) Truck, Cargo, without Winch,
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
References-3
References
M977A2 (2320-01-493-3779) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-01-493-3785) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978 (2320-01-097-0249) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978A2 (2320-01-492-8216) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978A2R1 (2320-01-492-8226) Truck, Tank, Fuel, without Winch, M978 (2320-01-100-7672) Truck, Tank, Fuel, without Winch, M978A2 (2320-01-492-8215) Truck, Tank, Fuel, without Winch, M978A2R1 (2320-01-492-8225) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, without Crane, M983 (2320-01-097-0247) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, without Crane, M983A2 (2320-01-492-8223) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, without Crane, M983A2R1 (2320-01-492-8231) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, with Crane, M983 (2320-01-0996421) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984 (2320-01-097-0248) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984A1 (2320-01- 195-7641) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984A2 (2320-01-492-8224) Truck, WreckerRecovery, M984A2R1 (2320-01-492-8233) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985 (2320-01-097-0261) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985A2 (2320-01-492-8214) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985A2R1 (2320-01- 493-3787) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M985 (2320-01-100-7673) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M985A2 (2320-01-492-8201) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M985A2R1 (2320-01493-3789) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1 (2320-01-194-7032) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1A2 (2320-01-493-3790) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1A2R1 (2320-01-493-3792). 21 November 1986. TM 9-2320-279-10-2. Operator's Manual for M977 Series, 8x8 Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical Trucks (HEMTT) Truck, Cargo, with Winch M977 (2320-01- 097-0260) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977A2 (2320-01-493-3774) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-01-493-3782) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M977 (2320-01-099-6426) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M977A2 (2320-01-493-3779) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-01-493-3785) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978 (2320-01-097-0249) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978A2 (2320-01492-8216) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978A2R1 (2320-01-492-8226) Truck, Tank, Fuel, without Winch, M978 (2320-01-100-7672) Truck, Tank, Fuel, without Winch, M978A2 (2320-01492-8215) Truck, Tank, Fuel, without Winch, M978A2R1 (2320-01-492-8225) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, without Crane, M983 (2320-01-097-0247) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, without Crane, M983A2 (2320-01-492-8223) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, without Crane, M983A2R1 (2320-01-492-8231) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, with Crane, M983 (2320-01-099-6421) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984 (2320-01-097-0248) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984A1 (2320-01-1957641) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984A2 (2320-01-492-8224) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984A2R1 (2320-01-492-8233) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985 (2320-01-097-0261) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985A2 (2320-01-492-8214) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985A2R1 (232001-493-3787) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M985 (2320-01-100-7673) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M985A2 (2320-01-492-8201) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M985A2R1 (2320-01-4933789) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1 (2320-01-194-7032) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1A2 (2320-01-493-3790) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1A2R1 (2320-01-493-3792). 15 June 1987. TM 9-2320-279-20-1. Maintenance Instructions for Organizational Maintenance M977 Series, 8 x 8 Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical Trucks (HEMTT) Truck, Cargo, with Winch M977 (NSN 232001-097-0260) Truck, Cargo, without Winch M977 (2320-01-099-6426) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch M978 (2320-01-097-0249) Truck, Tank, Fuel, without Winch M978 (2320-01-100-7672) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, without Crane M983 (2320-01-097-0247) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, with Crane M983 (2320-01-099-6421) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery M984 (2320-01-097-0248) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery M984E1 (2320-01-195-7641) Truck, Cargo, Truck, Cargo, with Winch M985 (2320-01-097-0261) Truck, Cargo, without Winch M985 (2320-01-100-7673) Truck, Cargo, with Winch M985E1 (2320-01-194-7032) Truck, Cargo without Winch M985E1 (2320-01-1947031). 7 April 1987. TM 9-2320-279-20-2. Maintenance Instructions for Organizational Maintenance for M977 Series, 8 x 8 Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical Trucks (HEMTT) Truck, Cargo, with Winch M977 (2320-01097-0260) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977A2 (2320-01-493-3774) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-01-493-3782) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M977 (2320-01-099-6426) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M977A2 (2320-01-493-3779) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-01-493-3785) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978 (2320-01-097-0249) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978A2 (2320-01-492-8216) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978A2R1 (2320-01492-8226) Truck, Tank, Fuel, without Winch, M978 (2320-01-100-7672) Truck, Tank, Fuel,
References-4
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
References
without Winch, M978A2 (2320-01-492-8215) Truck, Tank, Fuel, without Winch, M978A2R1 (2320-01-492-8225) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, without Crane, M983 (2320-01-097-0247) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, without Crane, M983A2 (2320-01-492-8223) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, without Crane, M983A2R1 (2320-01-492-8231) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, with Crane, M983 (2320-01-099-6421) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984 (2320-01-097-0248) Truck, WreckerRecovery, M984A1 (2320-01-195-7641) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984A2 (2320-01-492-8224) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984A2R1 (2320-01-492-8233) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985 (2320-01-097-0261) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985A2 (2320-01-492-8214) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985A2R1 (2320-01-493-3787) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M985 (2320-01-100-7673) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M985A2 (2320-01-492-8201) Truck, Cargo, without Winch, M985A2R1 (2320-01-493-3789) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1 (2320-01-194-7032) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1A2 (2320-01-493-3790) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1A2R1 (2320-01-493-3792). 7 April 1987. TM 9-2320-279-20-3. Maintenance Instructions Organizational Maintenance M977 Series, 8 x 8 Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical (HEMTT) Truck, Cargo with Winch M977 (NSN 2320-01-0970260) Truck, Cargo, without Winch M977 (2320-01-099-6426) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch M978 (2320-01-097-0249) Truck, Tank, Fuel, without Winch M978 (2320-01-100-7672) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, without Crane M983 (2320-01-097-0247) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, with Crane M983 (2320-01-099-6421) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery M984 (2320-01-097-0248) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery M984E1 (2320-01-195-7641) Truck, Cargo, with Winch M985 (2320-01-0970261) Truck, Cargo, without Winch M985 (2320-01-100-7673) Truck, Cargo, with Winch M985E1 (2320-01-194-7032) Truck, Cargo, without Winch M985E1 (2320-01-194-7031). 8 April 1987. TM 9-2330-383-14&P. Operator's Unit, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual (Including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists) for Trailer, Ammunition, Heavy Expanded Mobility, 11-Ton, M989A1(NSN 2330-01-275-7474) (EIC: CAG). 13 December 1991. TM 9-6920-647-13&P. Operator, Organizational, and Direct Support Maintenance Manual, Trainer, Launch Pod Assembly: M68 Part Number: 13288848 (NSN 6920-01-299-2216) EIC: (QAM) Multiple Launch Rocket System: M270. 22 June 2007. TM 9-7440-648-12. Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Communications System Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS). 10 January 1996. TM 11-5820-890-10-1. Operator's Manual for SINCGARS Ground Combat Net Radio, ICOM MANPACK Radio AN/PRC-119A (NSN 5820-01-267-9482) (EIC: L2Q) Short Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-87A (5820-01-267-9480) (EIC: L22) Short Range Vehicular Radio with Single Radio Mount AN/VRC-87C (5820-01-304-2045) (EIC: GDC) Short Range Vehicular Radio with Dismount AN/VRC-88A (5820-01-267-9481) (EIC: L23) Short Range Vehicular Radio with Dismount and Single Radio Mount AN/VRC-88C (5820-01-304-2044) (EIC: GDD) Short Range/Long Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-89A (5820-01-267-9479) (EIC: L24) Long Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-90A (5820-01-268-5105) (EIC: L25) Short Range/Long Range Vehicular Radio with Dismount AN/VRC-91A (5820-01-267-9478) (EIC: L26) Long Range/Long Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-92A (5820-01-267-9477) (EIC: L27). 1 September 1992. TM 11-5840-355-20-2. Organizational Maintenance Manual (Antenna Removal and Installation Procedures) for Radar Set, AN/TPQ-37(V)1 (NSN 5840-01-043-4258) (EIC: IYB) AN/TPQ-37(V)2 (5840-01-084-5374) (EIC: IYD) AN/TPQ-37(V)5 (5840-01-270-5101) (EIC: IYG) AND AN/TPQ-37(V)6 (5840-01-270-5100) (EIC: IYF) 1 October 1981. TM 11-7025-297-10-2 Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS) Operational Systems Software Version 6.4.0.1 Volume 2. 1 October 2007. TM 38-410. Storage and Handling of Hazardous Materials. 13 January 1999. TM 55-2320-279-14. Transportability Guidance Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical Truck (HEMTT), 10-Ton, 8 x 8 Truck, Cargo, Tactical, 10-Ton, 8 x 8, with Light Crane, M977 WOWN (NSN 232001-099-6426) WWN (2320-01-097-0269) Truck, Fuel-Servicing, 10-Ton, M978 WOWN (2320-01100-7672) WWN (2320-01-097-0249) Truck, Tractor, 10-Ton, 8 x 8, M983 with 2-Inch Fifth Wheel (2320-01-099-6421) (w/Crane) with 3.5-Inch Fifth Wheel (2320-01-097-0247) (w/o Crane) Truck, Wrecker, Recovery, 10-Ton, 8 x 8, M984E1 (2320-01-195-7641) Truck, Cargo, Tactical, 10-Ton 8 x 8, with Medium Crane, M985 WOWN (2320-01-100-7673) WWN (2320-01-097-0261)
12 August 2008
FM 3-09.60
References-5
References
Truck, Wrecker, Recovery, 10-Ton, 8 x 8, M984 (2320-01-097-0248) Truck, Cargo, Tactical, 10Ton, 8 x 8, M985E1, Guided Missile Transporter (GMT) WOWN (2320-01-194-7031) WWN (2320-01-194-7032). 29 January 1987.
OTHER DOCUMENTS JP 1-02. Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms. 12 April 2001. JP 3-0. Joint Operations. 17 September 2006. STANAG 2934. Artillery Procedures – AArty-1(A). Edition 2. 31 March 2004. STANAG 5620. Standards for the Interoperability of Fire Support ADP Systems. 27 March 1987. TB 43-0134. Battery Disposition and Disposal. 19 May 2008. TC 3-34.489. The Soldier and the Environment. 8 May 2001. TOE 06465G000. Field Artillery Battalion, Multiple Launch Rocket System Fires. 20 July 2005. TOE 06465G100. Field Artillery Battalion, High Mobility Artillery Rocket System (HIMARS), Fires. 29 June 2005. TOE 06466G000. Headquarters and Headquarters Battery, Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS), Battalion Fires Brigade. 10 January 2005. TOE 06466G100. Headquarters and Headquarters Battery, Field Artillery Battalion, High Mobility Artillery Rocket System (HIMARS), Fires Brigade. 29 June 2005. TOE 06467G000. Field Artillery Battalion, Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) Battalion (Fires Brigade). 21 July 2005. TOE 06467G100. Field Artillery Battery, Field Artillery Battalion, High Mobility Rocket System (HIMARS), Fires Brigade. 29 June 2005.
References-6
FM 3-09.60
12 August 2008
Index A adjutant (S-1), 2-9, 3-4 administrative and logistics operating center (ALOC), 25 advanced field artillery tactical data system (AFATDS), 1-3, 1-21, 4-20, 5-6, 5-7, 5-8, allsource analysis system/analysis control altitude. See survey ambulance team, 2-5, 3-4 ammunition, 1-3, 1-4 aerial transport, A-1 battalion ammunition officer, 2-5 battalion ammunition officer (BAO), 2-11, 3-4 holding area (AHA), 2-14, 512, 5-21, management, 2-5 resupply vehicle and trailer (HEMTT/HEMAT), 1-20 supply point (ASP), 2-15, transfer point (ATP), 215, amphibious assault, 5-43 antipersonnel and antimateriel (APAM) M74 grenades, 1-14 Army Tactical Missile System (ATACMS), 1-1 at my command (AMC) mission, 4-5, J-8 ATACMS, 4-1, 4-3 Block I, 1-14 Block IA, 1-15 Block II, 1-16 missiles, 1-13 Quick Reaction Unitary missile, 1-18 Unitary missile, 1-19 automation management, 3-3
B battalion commander, 2-9, 5-1 duty location, 4-12 field artillery, H-2 FSCOORD, 4-10 battalion headquarters, 2-2, 3-2 battalion maintenance officer (BMO), 2-11
12 August 2008
battalion maintenance section, 3-5 battalion maintenance technician, 2-12 battalion operations. See Section I, Chapter 5. battalion unit maintenance collection point (UMCP), 211, 5-1, battery headquarters, 2-5 battery headquarters, 2-7, 3-6, 3-7, 5-10, 5-11 battery operations. See Section II, Chapter 5. battery operations center (BOC), 2-7, 5-10, 5-12 battery operations officer duties and responsibilities, 2-13 boom controller, 1-5, 1-8 built-in test (BIT), 1-4,
C calibration PDS, 5-21 central electronics unit (CEU)., 1-17 chaplain, 2-11 chemical officer, 2-11 circular error probable (CEP), 1-6 close operations, 4-2 combined operations, 5-39 command and control (C2), 422, 4-35, 6-1, C-5, C-15 battalion automated systems, 5-6 command, control, and communications (C3), 120 fire direction system, 1-21 platoon, 5-18 radar, 4-12 command post, 5-43 command post (CP), 5-11, C-4, C-14, E-1 battalion, 5-1 command sergeant major (CSM), 2-9
FM 3-09.60
command, control, and communications (C3) system, 1-3 commander battalion, 2-9 battery, 2-12, 3-9 HHS, 2-12 common ground station (CGS), 4-32 common sensor boundary (CSB), 4-29 jungle terrain, 5-40 processor (CMP), 1-5 communications security (COMSEC), 1-4, 4-14, C-9 control system electronics unit (CSEU), 1-16 ccounter fire, 4-20 counter fire officer, 3-10 crest clearance tables, 5-32, 540, G-1 critical friendly zone (CFZ), 416, 4-17, 4-19, 4-25, 4-26
D decide-detect-deliver-assess (D3A), 4-2 unassigned area operations, 41 defensive operations, 4-17, 419 deployment, 4-14, 5-37, 5-39 checklist, L-4 desert operations, 5-42, 5-43 direct support, 4-10 dDOD identification code (DODIC), 1-3 dual-purpose improved conventional munitions (DPICM). See M77 submunition
E electronic countermeasures (ECM), 5-36 electronics unit (EU), 1-4 central, 1-17 emergency destruction (ED), 514, C-7, C-16 enemy prisoner of war (EPW), 5-13,
Index -1
Index
estimated position error (EPE), 1-22 executive officer (XO), 2-9, 5-1, extended range rocket (ER), 112, 4-3, 4-11
F figure of merit (FOM), 1-6, 1-22 fire control panel (FCP), 1-3, 14, 1-7 fire control sergeant, 2-13 fire control system (FCS), 1-2, 1-4, 1-5, 5-6, H-3 fire control unit (FCU), 1-5 fire direction center (FDC), 1-3, 2-3, 3-3, 5-11, fire direction officer (FDO), 2-10 fire support coordination line (FSCL), 4-4 fire support element (FE) attack helicopter battalion, 3-5 aviation brigade, 3-5 cavalry squadron, 3-6 fire support execution matrix (FEM), 4-7 fire support officer attack helicopter, 3-9 aviation brigade, 3-8 firing platoon leader, 2-7, 2-13, H-2 firing platoon sergeant, 2-14, firing point (FP), 5-19 computation of safety data, H-6 firing section chief, 2-14 first sergeant (1SG), 2-12 food service, 2-6, 2-8, 2-15, 36, 3-8, 5-12 formations special, 5-16, 5-43 f forward line of own troops (FLOT), 1-1, 4-2, 4-23, 4-24, 5-31, 5-34 frequency modulated (FM), 16, 2-4
G general support, 4-9 general support (GS) maintenance, 3-9, reinforcing, 2-3, 4-9, 4-10 global positioning system (GPS), 1-8, 1-22, 5-20, 5-23, 5-25, 5-29,
Index-2
graphic resection. See Appendix F. guidance and control section (GCS), 1-13, 1-15, 1-16 guided missile launch assembly (GMLA), 1-2, 1-10, A-1, A-2, L-3 Guided Unitary rocket, 1-19
H hasty survey technique, 4-17, See Appendix F. headquarters, headquarters and service battery (HHS), 2-1, 3-1 heavy expanded mobility ammunition trailer (HEMAT), 1-3, 1-20 heavy expanded mobility tactical truck (HEMTT), 1-3, 1-20 hide area (HA), 5-14 hide area (HA), 5-19, 5-20, 524, 5-42, J-3 high mobility artillery rocket system (HIMARS), 1-9, 1-19, See Appendix H. human intelligence (HUMINT), 5-13
I imagery intelligence (IMINT), 513 improved fire control system (IFCS), 1-2, 1-7, 1-8 improved launcher mechanical system (ILMS), 1-7 improved position determining system (IPDS) launcher, 1-2, 1-6, 4-4, 5-22, See Appendix H. intelligence officer (S-2), 2-3, 29, 3-3, 4-28 intelligence preparation of the battlefield (IPB), 2-3, 5-30, 534
J joint operations, 5-38 joint surveillance target attack radar system (JSTARS). See appendix J. jungle operations, 5-40
L launch pod container (LPC), 12, 1-3, 1-10, 1-19, A-1
FM 3-09.60
launcher drive system (LDS), 1-2, H-3 liaison function, 4-13 liaison officer (LNO), 2-3, 2-11, 5-4, 5-5, D-3 line replaceable unit (LRU), 14, listening post (LP), 5-12, 5-13 logistics officer (S-4), 2-10, 3-5 logistics operation center (LOC), 5-11 logistics release point (LRP), 511 logistics release points (LRPs), 2-14,
M M26 rocket, 1-12, 4-2, 4-3 crest clearance tables, G-1 M269 launcher module (LM), 12, 1-4 M270/270A1 launcher, 5-23, 539, check data, H-39, H-41 M270/M270A1 launcher, 1-2, 1-3, 1-7, 1-9, 1-10, 1-15, 4-5 M28A1/M28A2 rocket, 1-13, H1, See appendix H. M39 missile, 1-13, 1-14, 1-19, 4-6, M74 submunition, 1-14, 1-15, 4-4, M77 submunition, 1-12, 1-19, 4-3, 5-40 M993 carrier vehicle, 1-2, 1-3 maintenance support team (MST), 2-5, 2-11, 4-22, 5-18, marches, 5-15 Marine air ground task force (MAGTF), 4-14, 4-15, masks, 5-19, 5-31, 5-32, 5-40 medical services team, 3-4 medical treatment team, 2-4 meteorological data, , H-3 ministry team, 2-4, 3-4 mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops, time available, and civil considerations (METT-T), 210, 4-14, 4-23, 5-11, 5-30, 534, 5-39, MLRS family of munitions (MFOM), 1-1, 1-9, 1-11, B-1 mountainous terrain operations, 5-40 movement control center (MCC), A-9
12 August 2008
Index
N nonstandard mission, 4-11 northern operations, 5-41
O observation post (OP), 5-12, 513 offensive operations, 4-15, 416 OPAREA, 5-18, H-15, H-24 computation of safety data, H-6, H-7, H-8, H-10, H14, H-16, H-17, H-18, H19, H-22, H-23, H-24 operations officer (S-3), 2-9, 210, 2-13 supervision of BOC, 2-7
P payload interface module (PIM), 1-5 petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL), 2-14, 5-12, physician assistant, 2-4, 3-4, physician assistant (PA), 2-12 planning, 4-3 platoon headquarters, 2-7, 3-7, 5-17, 5-21, E-13 platoon operations center (POC), 2-7, 5-18, E-13 position azimuth determining system (PADS), 1-22, positioning, 4-2 precision lightweight GPS receiver (PLGR), 1-22, prescribed load list (PLL), 2-6 preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS), 5-26, program load unit (PLU), 1-4 property book officer (PBO), 212
R radar, 1-23, 3-7, 3-8, 4-25, 533, 5-34, 5-35, 5-36
12 August 2008
counterbattery, 4-8 cueing, 4-29 offensive operations, 4-17 operational control, 4-12 zones, 4-25 radio direction finding, 4-8 radio direction-finding (RDF) equipment, 5-13 raid, 4-23, 4-24 contiguous area operations, 42 reconnaissance, 5-29, 5-30, 542, L-2 OH-58D(I) Kiowa Warrior, 4-32 sergeant, 2-14, 5-18 survey officer, 3-7 reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of position (RSOP), 2-12, 4-7, 5-17, 530 rehearsal, 4-3, 4-6, 4-7, L-3 reload point (RL), 5-20, retransmission (RETRANS), 2-4, 3-3 rockets general, 1-11
S safety. See appendix H. sensor-to-shooter operations, 4-31 shoot and scoot, 5-13 short/no-voltage tester (SNVT), 1-5 signal officer (S-6), 2-10, 3-3 signals intelligence (SIGINT), 5-13 single-channel ground and airborne radio system (SINCGARS), 4-30, stability and support operations, 433, 4-34, 4-35, 4-36 stabilization reference package/position determining system
FM 3-09.60
(SRP/PDS), 1-2, 1-5, 5-21, 5-28 stay hot, shoot fast, 4-5, 4-37, J-3 supply sergeant, 2-8, 2-15, 3-6, 3-8 support platoon leader, 2-14 suppression of enemy air defense (SEAD), 4-20 survey, 2-3 chief of party, 3-3, 5-3 equipment, 1-22 graphic resection. See Appendix F. survey control point (SCP), 520, 5-21, 5-23
T tactical communications interface module (TCIM), 121, tactical operations center (TOC), 5-1, 5-2, E-3 tactical standing operating procedures (TSOP), 4-6, 51, 5-14, 5-18, See Appendix C. target acquisition (TA), 4-12, 417, 4-25 battery commander, 3-9 radar technician, 3-10 target acquisition battery (TAB), 3-6, 5-33,
U unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV), 4-15, 4-32, J-2 urban operations, 5-41
W when ready (WR), J-8
Z zones, 4-25, 4-26, 4-27
Index-3
This page intentionally left blank.
FM 3-09.60 12 August 2008
By order of the Secretary of the Army:
GEORGE W. CASEY, JR. General, United States Army Chief of Staff
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 0820401
DISTRIBUTION: Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number 114317, required for FM 3-09.60
This page intentionally left blank.
This page intentionally left blank.
This page intentionally left blank.
PIN: 085000-000
